BCA - RC Spreadsheet User Guide Version 3

U
s
e
r

G
u
i
d
e

t
o

R
C

S
p
r
e
a
d
s
h
e
e
t
s
:

v
3
C

H

G
o
o
d
c
h
i
l
d

B
S
c

C
E
n
g

M
C
I
O
B

M
I
S
t
r
u
c
t
E

R

M

W
e
b
s
t
e
r

C
E
n
g

F
I
S
t
r
u
c
t
E
C
C
I
P
-
0
0
8
CI/Sfb
UDC
624.04
User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3
This user guide provides guidance on the use of
RC Spreadsheets v3 for the design of reinforced
concrete elements.
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets and user guide
follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and its
UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to
BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
For more information on the spreadsheets visit
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets
Charles Goodchild is Principal Structural Engineer for
The Concrete Centre where he promotes efcient concrete
design and construction. He was responsible for the concept,
content and management of this publication and of the
RC Spreadsheets.
Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation & Design is
principal author of the spreadsheets. He has been writing
spreadsheets since 1984 and is expert in the design of tall
concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods.
CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,
Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey, GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com
C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE
R M Webster CEng FIStructE
User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
A cement and concrete industry publication
User guide to Excel spreadsheets for design to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 (Amd. 3)
and BS EN 1992: 2004 Part 1-1 and its UK National Annex
Cover files.indd 1 17/07/2006 11:51:53
Foreword
This publication was originally produced by the Reinforced Concrete Council (RCC) as part of its
project Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2. Since their release in 2000 the
spreadsheets have proved enormously popular and have been maintained by the RCC and its
successor The Concrete Centre.
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2)
plus its UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
The requirements within these standards have necessitated the revision of all the published
spreadsheets. This user guide gives guidance on the use of all design spreadsheets to BS 8110 and
Eurocode 2 contained on the CD ROM RC Spreadsheets: v3, published by The Concrete Centre
(order ref. CCIP-008CD).

Acknowledgements
The ideas and illustrations come from many sources. The help and guidance received from many
individuals are gratefully acknowledged.
Thanks are due to members of the original projects Advisory Group for their time and effort in
helping to make the project feasible and in bringing it to fruition. The members of the Advisory
Group are listed on the inside back cover.
Special appreciation is extended to: Richard Cheng, BSc, CEng, Eur Ing, FIStructE, author of the
retaining wall and basement wall spreadsheets, Peter Noble for conversions and checking, and to
Andy Pullen for initial studies into compatibility of spreadsheet software. Also the late Sami Khan
for help with post-tensioning spreadsheets.
Published by The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
The Concrete Centre
User Guide v1 published by the British Cement Association on behalf of the Reinforced Concrete Council.
User Guide v2 published electronically by The Concrete Centre.
CCIP publications are produced by The Concrete Society on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry
Publications Forum an industry initiative to publish technical guidance in support of concrete design
and construction.
CCIP publications are available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concretebookshop.com
Tel: +44 (0)7004 607777
All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate the signicance and limitations of
its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting
from such advice or information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers should
note that The Concrete Centre publications are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in
possession of the latest version.
Cover artwork: D J Killoran - The Concrete Society.
Printed by Cromwell Press, Trowbridge, UK.
S Alexander
S Alhayderi
Dr H Al-Quarra
I Baldwin
C Barker
M Beamish
A Beasley
T Bedford
G Belton
R Bhatt
R Bickerton
P Blackmore
D Blackwood
M Brady
C Buczkowski
A Campbell
Dr P Chana
G Charlesworth
L Cheng
Mr Chichger
R Collison
A Craddock
M Morton
J Curry
J Dale
H Dikme
C P Edmondson
J Elliott
I Feltham
G Fernando
M Fernando
I Francis
A Fung
P Gardner
J Gay
P Green
A Hall
N Harris
G Hill
D W Hobbs
R Hulse
M Hutcheson
A Idrus
N Imms
P Jennings
D Kennedy
G Kennedy
R Jothiraj
Dr S Khan
A King
G King
S King
K Kus
I Lockhart
M Lord
B Lorimer
M Lovell
Dr Luker
J Lupton
M Lytrides
Prof I Macleod
F Malekpour
A McAtear
A McFarlane
F Mohammad
A Mole
M Morton
R Moss
B Munton
C OBoyle
Dr A Okorie
T ONeill
B Osafa-Kwaako
D Patel
D Penman
M Perera
B Quick
Y Raq
A Rathbone
M Rawlinson
P Reynolds
H Riley
N Russell
U P Sarki
T Schollar
A Stalker
A Starr
M Stevenson
B Stoker
B Treadwell
A Truby
R Turner
T Viney
Dr P Walker
B Watson
J Whitworth
C Wilby
S Wilde
A Wong
E Yarimer
The Advisory Group Members
Cover files.indd 2 17/07/2006 11:52:24
Contents
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL NOTES 3
SPREADSHEETS TO BS 8110 17
Elements 19
Analysis 35
Slabs 38
Beams 72
Columns 113
Walls 125
Stairs 139
Foundations 146
Tabular versions 158
SPREADSHEETS TO EUROCODE 2 179
Elements 185
Analysis 205
Slabs 208
Beams 243
Columns 270
Stairs 284
Foundations 287
ADMIN FOLDER 298
REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING 299
User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd i 17/07/2006 17:00:56
Contents in full
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL NOTES 3
Using the spreadsheets 10
Menu.xls 16
SPREADSHEETS TO BS 8110 17
Elements RCC11 Element Design.xls 19
RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls 26
RCC13 Punching Shear.xls 28
RCC14 Crack Width.xls 33
Analysis RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls 35
Slabs RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls 38
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls 43
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls 50
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls 56
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls 64
Beams RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls 72
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls 78
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls 85
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls 107
Columns RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls 113
RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls 118
RCC53 Column Design.xls 120
RCC54 Circular column charting .xls 123
Walls RCC61 Basement Wall.xls 125
RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls 132
Stairs RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls 139
RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls 142
Foundations RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls 146
RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls 149
Tabular versions RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls 158
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls 161
RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls 166
RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls 173
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls 175
ii
User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd ii 17/07/2006 17:01:53
iii
SPREADSHEETS TO EUROCODE 2 179
General notes to Eurocode 2 versions 181
Elements TCC11 Element Design.xls 185
TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls 194
TCC13 Slab Punching.xls 196
TCC14 Crack Width.xls 201
Analysis TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls 205
Slabs TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls 208
TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls 214
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls 221
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls 228
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls 237
Beams TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls 243
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls 249
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta) 256
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls 264
Columns TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls 270
TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls 276
TCC53 Column Design.xls 278
TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls 280
TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls 282
Stairs TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls 284
Foundations TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls 287
TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls 291
ADMIN FOLDER 298
REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING 299
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd iii 17/07/2006 17:01:53
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd iv 17/07/2006 17:01:54
1
Introduction
Introduction
The RC spreadsheets were originally produced under the
Reinforced Concrete Councils project, Spreadsheets for concrete
design to BS 8110 and EC2. They were released in January 2000
and have been maintained and extended by the RCC and its
successor The Concrete Centre. They continue to be supported
by The Concrete Centre.
In recognition of the new and updated spreadsheets made
available as part of the version 2.x issue, it was decided to revise
(but not publish) the second edition of the User Guide.
The introduction of Eurocode 2
[3]
, its National Annex and
Amd of BS 8110:1997
[2]
has necessitated the revision of all the
spreadsheets and publication of version 3 of the User Guide. This
third edition of the User Guide provides guidance on the use of all
spreadsheets produced to date (July 2006).
For the experienced engineer, the spreadsheets allow the
rapid production of clear and accurate design calculations. The
spreadsheets allow younger users to understand concrete design
and help them to gain experience by studying their own what if
scenarios. The individual user should be able to answer his/ her
own questions by chasing through the cells to understand the
logic used. Cells within each spreadsheet can be interrogated and
can have their formulae checked and values traced. The original
spreadsheets reected a consensus of opinion on several design
issues. The version 3 Eurocode 2 spreadsheets reect a consensus
of opinion of a limited number of engineers. Students and young
engineers may follow the model calculations presented in the
spreadsheets to form an understanding of current reinforced
concrete design.
The spreadsheets are intended to follow normal design practice
and cater for the design of low- to medium-rise multi-storey
concrete framed buildings. They are offered as shareware.
However, users are required to register when using them in
any commercial capacity. Registration is through The Concrete
Bookshop (07004 607777 and www.concretebookshop.com).

The original project was jointly funded by the RCC and the
Department of the Environment Transport and the Regions
(DETR) under its Partners in Technology scheme. It was made
possible by the support and contributions of time given by
individual members of industry. The project was managed by the
RCC and guided by an 80-strong Advisory Group of interested
parties, including consulting engineers and software houses.
In producing the original spreadsheets several issues had to be
addressed. Firstly, which spreadsheet package should be used?
Excel

( Microsoft Corporation) appeared to hold about 70% of
the market amongst structural engineers and was thus adopted.
More specically, Excel 97
was originally adopted as being de

facto the most widely available spreadsheet in the eld. To avoid
complications, it was decided not to produce corresponding
versions using other spreadsheet packages. The spreadsheets are
compatible with later versions of Excel.
Eurocode 2 parts 1-1 and 1-2 together with their UK National
Annexes have now been published. Students and both
inexperienced and experienced engineers will all need to grasp
an understanding of design to this code. There are differences
between EC2 and BS 8110. The spreadsheets should help with
the transition.
Whilst the spreadsheets to BS 8110 provide a consensus of current
commercial reinforced concrete design practice, the spreadsheets
to Eurocode 2, provide a consensus of design proceedures to this
new design code. The introduction of Eurocode 2 will provide
commercial opportunities for those who are prepared to use it.
It is believed that both novices and experienced users of
spreadsheets will be convinced that spreadsheets have a great
potential for teaching BS 8110 and Eurocode 2, improving
concrete design and, above all, improving the concrete design
and construction process. The spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 should
help all engineers to familiarise themselves with the details of this
new design code.

Version 2.x
The version 2.x released in 2003
[3]
introduced new spreadsheets
to BS 8110, to the more nalised EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and
an overarching menu spreadsheet. Previously issued spreadsheets
to BS 8110 were updated.
The new spreadsheets introduced were:
Menu
BS 8110
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams
RCC43 Wide Beams (A&D)
RCC54 Circular Column Design
RCC82 Pilecap Design
Eurocode 2
RCCen11 Element Design
RCCen12 Bending and Axial Force
RCCen13 Punching Shear
RCCen14 Crack Width
RCCen21 Subframe analysis
RCCen31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)
RCCen31R Rigorous* One-way Solid Slabs
RCCen32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:1 17/07/2006 17:01:54
2
RCCen33 Flat Slabs (A & D)
RCCen41 Continuous beams (A & D)
RCCen41R Rigorous* Continuous Beams
RCCen43 Wide Beams (A&D)
RCCen52 Column Chart generation
RCCen53 Column Design
RCCen55 Axial Column Shortening
RCCen81 Foundation Pads
RCCen82 Pilecap Design
Version 3
The release of version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the
publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2)
[3]
and the UK
National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS
8110 Part 1: 1987
[2]
. The requirements within these documents
necessitated the revision of all previously published spreadsheets.
The opportunity has been taken to introduce new spreadsheets
as follows:
BS 8110
RCC82 Pilecap Design
Eurocode 2
TCC33X Flat Slabs (Whole oor)
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams
TCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs and Beams (A&D) ( version)
TCC43 Wide Beams (A&D)
TCC54 Circular Column Charting
TCC71 Stair Flight and Landing - single
TCC81 Foundation Pads
TCC82 Pilecap Design
Spreadsheets numbered RCCen11, RCCen12 etc released as Beta
versions have been released for use as TCC11, TCC12 etc.
Using and improving the spreadsheets
Since their release in 2000 the spreadsheets have proved to be
enormously popular. They may now be regarded as having now
been thoroughly tested by engineers in practice but this does not
mean that they are infallible! The user is referred to Managing the
spreadsheets and other General Notes that follow.
The older spreadsheets usefulness and robustness have
been enhanced by users reporting problems or suggesting
improvements. Comments or suggestions for improvement
are welcomed. Contact The Concrete Centres Helpdesk at
helpdesk@concretecentre.com or on 0700 4 500 500.
3
General notes
Managing the spreadsheets
Use
Spreadsheets can be a very powerful tool. Their use has become
increasingly common in the preparation of design calculations.
They save time, money and effort. They provide the facility to
optimise designs and they can help instill experience. However,
these benets have to be weighed against the risks associated
with any endeavour. These risks must be recognised and
managed. In other words appropriate levels of supervision and
checking, including self-checking, must, as always, be exercised
when using these spreadsheets.
Advantages
For the experienced engineer, the spreadsheets help in the
rapid production of clear and accurate design calculations for
reinforced concrete elements. The contents are intended to be
sufcient to allow the design of low to medium-rise multi-storey
concrete framed buildings.
Spreadsheets allow users to gain experience by studying their
own what if scenarios. Should they have queries, individual
users should be able to answer their own questions by chasing
through the cells to understand the logic used. Cells within each
spreadsheet can be interrogated, formulae checked and values
traced. Macleod
[7]
suggested that, in understanding structural
behaviour, doing calculations is probably not a great advantage;
being close to the results probably is.
Other benets include quicker and more accurate reinforcement
estimates, and the possibilities for electronic data interchange
(EDI) Already, bending schedules derived from spreadsheets are
the basis of some EDI and the control of bar-bending machines.
Standardised, or at least rationalised, designs make the checking
process easier and quicker.
Appropriate use
In its deliberations
{8}
the Standing Committee on Structural
Safety (SCOSS) noted the increasingly wide-spread availability
of computer programs and circumstances in which their misuse
could lead to unsafe structures.
These circumstances include:
People without adequate structural engineering knowledge or
training may carry out the structural analysis.
There may be communication gaps between the design
initiator, the computer program developer and the user.
A program may be used out of context.
The checking process may not be sufciently fundamental.
The limitations of the program may not be sufciently
apparent to the user.
For unusual structures, even experienced engineers may not
have the ability to spot weaknesses in programs for analysis
and detailing
The committees report continued: Spreadsheets are, in principle,
no different from other software With regard to these
spreadsheets and this publication, The Concrete Centre hopes to
have addressed more specic concerns by demonstrating clear
evidence of adequate verication by documenting the principles,
theory and algorithms used in the spreadsheets. The spreadsheets
have also had the benet of the Advisory Groups overview and
inputs. Many, especially the spreadsheets to BS 8110, have had
several years use and maintenance. Inevitably, some unconscious
assumptions, inconsistencies, etc.
[9]
will remain.
Liability
A fundamental condition of use Is that the user accepts
responsibility for the input and output of the computer and how
it is used.
As with all software, users must be satised with the answers
these spreadsheets give and be condent in their use. These
spreadsheets can never be fully validated but have been through
Beta testing, both formally and informally. The BS 8110 versions
have been used for several years and as a result of feedback they
have been updated to address known errors. However, users
must satisfy themselves that the uses to which the spreadsheets
are put are appropriate.
This is especially true with the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2. While
the Eurocode 2 versions have been through Beta testing, they
have not yet been used in anger. Also, Eurocode 2 is a completely
new code to most designers and so there is little experience of
design to this standard.
Control
Users and managers should be aware that spreadsheets can be
changed and must address change control and versions for use.
The exibility and ease of use of spreadsheets, which account
for their widespread popularity, also facilitate ad hoc and
unstructured approaches to their subsequent development.
Quality Assurance procedures may dictate that spreadsheets are
treated as controlled documents and subject to comparison and
checks with previous methods prior to adoption. Users Quality
Assurance schemes should address the issue of changes. The
possibilities of introducing a companys own password to the
spreadsheets and/ or extending the revision history contained
within the sheet entitled Notes! might be considered.
General notes
4
Application
The spreadsheets have been developed with the goal of producing
calculations to show compliance with codes. Whilst this is the
primary goal, there is a school of thought
[10]
that designers are
primarily paid for producing specications and drawings that work
on site and are approved by clients and/ or checking authorities.
Producing calculations happens to be a secondary exercise,
regarded by many experienced engineers as a hurdle on the way
to getting the project approved and completed. From a business
process point of view, the emphasis of the spreadsheets might,
in future, change to establishing compliance once members,
loads and details are known. Certainly this may be the preferred
method of use by experienced engineers.
The spreadsheets have been developed with the ability for users
to input and use their own preferred material properties, bar sizes
and spacings, etc. However, user preferences should recognise
moves for efciency through standardisation.
Another long-term objective is automation. To this end,
spreadsheet contents might in future be arranged so that input
and output can be copied and pasted easily by macros and/ or
linked by the end-user. There are counter arguments about users
needing to be closer to the calculations and results in order to
ensure they are properly considered see Appropriate use above.
We emphasise that it is up to the user how he/ she uses the
output. The spreadsheets have been produced to cater for both
rst-time users and the very experienced without putting the
rst-time user off. Nonetheless, their potential applications are
innumerable.
Summary
With spreadsheets, long-term advantages and savings come
from repeated use but there are risks that need to be managed.
Spreadsheets demand an initial investment in time and effort,
but the rewards are there for those who make the investment.
Good design requires sound judgement based on competence
derived from adequate training and experience, not just computer
programs.
Familiarisation
There are many different ways to present structural concrete
calculations. Calcs should demonstrate compliance with
relevant design codes of practice, but different designers want
to investigate different criteria and want to set out calculations
in different ways. Spreadsheets cannot satisfy everyone. The
spreadsheets presented here have been set out to cover the
criteria that may be deemed usual. It is incumbent on the user
to judge whether these criteria are pertinent and sufcient for
the actual case in hand. It is also incumbent on the user to ensure
that inputs are correct and that outputs are of the correct order
of magnitude.
The spreadsheets are intended to follow normal design practice
and cater for the design of low- to medium-rise multi-storey
concrete framed buildings. Each type of element may be designed
in several different ways, e.g. horizontal frame elements may be
designed using:
Element design: design of simple elements to BS 8110: Part
1
[2]
or BS EN 1992
[3]
Tabular design: design of elements based on moments and
shears derived from BS 8110: Part 1 Tables 3.12 and 3.5
Analysis and design: design of elements based on moments
and shears from analysis, e.g. sub-frame analysis, embodied
within the spreadsheets
Element design
The element design spreadsheets illustrate the basic principles
of reinforced concrete design from input material properties,
dimensions, moments, shears and axial loads, etc. They form the
basis of element design used in succeeding spreadsheets. The
moments, shears and axial loads used should be derived from
separate analysis (e.g. hand calculations, sub-frame analysis
spreadsheet or other analysis package). For further explanation
the user is referred to BS 8110, BS EN 1992-1-1 or a number of
standard reference works
[11, 12 , 13]
.
Tabular design
The tabular design spreadsheets use Tables 3.12 and 3.5 from BS
8110: Part 1 to automate the derivation of design moments and
shears. However, the use of these tables is restricted for slabs.
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.5.2.4, restricts the use of Table 3.12 to
where:
In a one-way slab, the area of a bay (one span x full width)
exceeds 30m
2
The ratio of characteristic imposed loads, Q
k
, to
characteristic dead loads, G
k
does not exceed 1.25
The characteristic imposed load, Q
k
, does not exceed 5
kN/m
2
, excluding partitions
Additionally, for at slabs, there are at least three rows of
panels of approximately equal span in the direction being
considered.
For beams, Clause 3.4.3, Table 3.5 is valid only where:
Characteristic imposed loads, Q
k
, do not exceed characteristic
dead loads, G
k
Loads are substantially uniformly distributed over three or
more spans
Variations in span length do not exceed 15% of the longest
span
If design parameters stray outside these limits, the tabular design
spreadsheets should be used with caution.
5
Analysis and design
To provide for more general application, these versions combine
sub-frame analysis with design. Spreadsheets for one-way slabs,
ribbed slabs, at slabs and beams provide powerful design tools.
Sub-frame analysis is also used in the post-tensioned concrete
design spreadsheets.
The sub-frame analysis spreadsheet RCC21.xls may of course be
used alone (and the elements designed by other means such as
RCC11.xls).
The at slab spreadsheet RCC33 is intended to be used one-
direction at a time. TCC33x designs at slabs to BS EN1992-1-1 in
two directions at one time. The post-tensioned concrete design
spreadsheet follows the 1994 BS version of Concrete Society
TR43
[14]
and involves sub-frame analysis at various limit states.
The principles used are applicable to both beams and slabs with
either bonded or unbonded tendons being designed to BS 8110. A
Beta version of the post-tensioned concrete design spreadsheet
to Eurocode 2 and the 2005 version of Concrete Society TR43 is
included. The examples of the retaining wall and basement wall
spreadsheets are based on common UK practice.
Deections
In most spreadsheets deection checks are based on span:depth
criteria in the codes. Estimates of actual deections are available
within the rigorous spreadsheets.
Rigorous spreadsheets
Deection can be the governing criterion of many designs. These
spreadsheets allow the estimation of deection to BS 8110 Parts
1 and 2 or Eurocode 2 Part 1-1. Rather than just check span-to-
effective depth ratios, the spreadsheets calculate deections at
1
/20 the spans using vigorous methods.
The Eurocode 2 spreadsheets follows methods described in TR58
[30]
.

Column design
Column design is presented in, essentially, two different ways;
either an amount of reinforcement is determined or the capacity
of a section is checked two valid design approaches.
Under RCC11 Element Design.xls (or RCC11.xls for short) or
TCC11, the amount of reinforcement is calculated by iterating to
nd the neutral axis depth in order to solve two simultaneous
equations.
Under RCC52.xls for single axis bending and RCC53.xls for two
axis bending, N-M interaction charts are derived from presumed
reinforcement arrangements. Individual load cases are checked
against the capacity of the column with the various reinforcement
arrangements. TCC52 and TCC53 similarly.
RCC51.xls is set out so that the user may undertake a traditional
column load take down, assess design moments and critical axis
before calculating the amount of reinforcement required. TCC51.xls
similarly.
RCC12.xls determines the capacity of an unsymmetrical
reinforced column (or beam). TCC12.xls similarly.

Others
Other spreadsheets provide for the design of pad foundations
catering for one or two columns, punching shear, stairs (either
as single ights and single landings or ights and landings as
in a stair core), small retaining walls and basement walls. More
detail and further references are given within the spreadsheets
themselves.
Terminology
As with all software, spreadsheets have their own jargon. The basic
terminology for layout is shown on the screen dump below:
General Notes
Excel le name
Cell reference
Cell
Drop down menu bar
Toolbars
(use View/Toolbars to
switch on and off)
Formula bar
Scroll bar
Worksheet area
Sheet tabs
Spreadsheet terminology
6
Sheet Architecture
Each spreadsheet may contain several linked sheets (i.e. layers
or pages) that deal with different aspects of design. The sheets
name on the sheet tab gives an indication of the content. For
the more involved spreadsheets, individual sheets are devoted to
a full explanation of the design (with references for educational
and validation purposes) or analysis, etc. and other sheets give
an abridged version more in keeping with the requirements
of experienced practicing engineers. Further sheets may
contain analysis calculations, data for graphs and calculation
of reinforcement weight. All spreadsheets have a Notes! sheet
where disclaimers, status and revision histories relating to each
spreadsheet are incorporated (sheet names are differentiated by
the use of an appended exclamation mark).
Those sheets with names in capitals are intended for printing
out as design calculations. Other sheets are available to view
in the spreadsheets. These may need to be printed for checking
purposes and parts of them, such as simple design routines, may
be pasted into word-processed calculations.
Sheet tabs (from RCC 41.xls)
Sheet tabs
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 from B to E RMW 11-Apr-2006 35
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg R68
LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E
SPANS
L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 7.000 600 375 150 T 1355 min max
SPAN 2 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 6.000 600 375 150 T 1215
SPAN 5 0
SPAN 6 0
SUPPORTS
ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 2.95 400 300 F 3.10 400 300 P
Support 2 3.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 3 0.00 3.10 400 300 P
Support 4 K
Support 5 4.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 6
Support 7
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)
Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 17.50 5.60 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 24 6 2.000 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 5 18 4.500 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 25 25 5.000 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 24.42 8.65 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
-
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110
The Concrete Centre
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6, from B to E RMW 11-Apr-06 36
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)
B Elastic Moments E B Redistributed Envelope E
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 95.3 743.3 868.6 427.6 34.3 ~ kNm
Redistributed M 90.5 557.5 694.9 406.2 32.6 ~ kNm
b 0.950 0.750 0.800 0.950 0.950 ~ ~
Redistribution 5.0% 25.0% 20.0% 5.0% 5.0%
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 185.0 633.1 400.1 121.4 ~ ~
Redistributed M 152.1 746.8 373.5 118.8 ~ ~
b 0.822 1.180 0.934 0.979 ~ ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)
B
Elastic Shears
E B
Redistributed Shears
E
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 191.0 312.6 435.6 432.2 356.9 282.0
Redistributed V 177.7 302.0 422.8 433.2 345.1 273.7
Based on support
moments of
min(bM, Malt/b)
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 10 20 30 40
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 10 20 30 40
-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 10 20 30 40
-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 10 20 30 40
Typical spreadsheet screens
The spreadsheets are intended to be as consistent as possible.
Generally, upper sheets consist of calculations, notes and
workings as illustrated in the examples below, which gives an
indication of the contents of a typical spreadsheet. The rst sheet
consists of input, followed by results of analysis, design, weight
of reinforcement, analysis, detailed design with references, graph
data and nally a revision history.
ACTIONS! sheet
Main graphical output of Bending Moment Diagrams, Shear Force
Diagrams. Also input for redistribution percentages.
MAIN! sheet
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw Apr-2006 59
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg - R68
SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
ACTIONS M kNm 208.9 192.7 206.6
b 1.00 0.99 0.86
DESIGN d mm 327.5 322.5 327.5
As mm 1860 1447 1799
As' mm 286 0 357
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 2 H 16 4 H 25
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm 1963 As' prov 402 As prov 1963
BTMSTEEL Layer 1 3 H 16 3 H 25 3 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm 603 As prov 1473 As' prov 603
DEFLECTION Permanent = 13.00 < 24.00 Imposed = 5.77 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 15.56 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 222.2 Link V 215.8
v N/mm 2.262 10 v 2.197
vc N/mm 0.743 Nominal vc 0.743
LINKS H10 @125 for 1875 H10 @225 H10 @150 for 1800
legs No 2 2 2
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.233 ok 0.300 ok 0.266
ACTIONS M kNm 209.9 169.7 57.3
b 0.85 0.98 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 332.0
As mm 1819 1264 421
As' mm 403 0 0
L 2 0 0 0 0
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
SPANS! sheet
This sheet shows the design of the left, centre and right hand
side of each span. Input is needed for the diameter of bars and
number of legs of links required. Extraneous spans are blanked
out.
7
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /47
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT
TOP STEEL No Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight
Support 1 2 H 12 1025 0.888 1.8
5 H 8 1025 0.395 2.0
Span 1 1 H 16 2225 1.578 3.5
Support 2 2 H 20 2250 2.466 11.1
4 H 8 2250 0.395 3.6
Span 2 4 H 12 4425 0.888 15.7
Support 3 2 H 20 3625 2.466 17.9
4 H 8 3625 0.395 5.7
Span 3 3 H 12 4675 0.888 12.5
Support 4 2 H 20 2400 2.466 11.8
4 H 8 2400 0.395 3.8
BOTTOMSTEEL Support 1 1 H 16 1150 1.578 1.8
Span 1 1 H 20 400 2.466 1.0
Support 2 1 H 16 3475 1.578 5.5
Span 2 2 H 25 4750 3.853 36.6
Support 3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 3 2 H 25 5900 3.853 45.5
Support 4 3 H 16 1725 1.578 8.2
The Concrete Centre
WEIGHT! sheet
Calculates the theoretical weight of reinforcement required.
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 ANALYSIS I
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC
ANALYSIS
Min load 1.0 x dead load
Live load 0.4 x dead load + 1.6 x imposed load (Table 2.1)
Distribution Factors
SUPT 1 SUPT 2 SUPT 3
Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R
A w 225000 225000 225000 225000 225000
A f 147000 147000 252000 252000 252000
X bar 211.08871 211.08871 181.132075 181.132075 181.13
I 1.6E+09 1.6E+09 1.1527E+10 1.1527E+10 1.6E+09 675000000 1.324E+10 1.324E+10 0 1.6E+09 1E+10
Stiffness 542372881 387096774 1646679868 1646679868 400000000 163306452 1103349057 1103349057 0 387096774 1E+09
Sum 2576149523 3.E+09 3.E+09
Factor 0.2105 0.1503 0.6392 0.4970 0.1207 0.0493 0.3330 0.4254 0.0000 0.1492 0.4254
SUPT 4 SUPT 5 SUPT 6
L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R
A w 225000 225000 225000 0 0 0
A f 252000 126000 126000 0 0 0
X bar 181.132075 219.230769 219.230769 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
I 1.324E+10 0 0 1.1075E+10 1.1075E+10 1.6E+09 675000000 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 0 0 #DIV/0!
Stiffness 1103349057 0 0 1845865385 1845865385 300000000 163306452 0 0 0 0 0
Sum 3.E+09 2.E+09 0.E+00
Factor 0.3741 0.0000 0.0000 0.6259 0.7994 0.1299 0.0707 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
SUPT 7
L Up col Lo col
A w 0 Partial UDL factors
A f 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
X bar #DIV/0! a 0 0 0.2 0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
I #DIV/0! 0 0 b 0 0 0.225 0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Stiffness 0 0 0
Sum 0.E+00
Factor 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Fixed End Moments
SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3 SPAN 4 SPAN 5 SPAN 6
Min load L R L R L R L R L R L R
Cant 788.90 2443.40 1806.84 385.50 0.00 0.00
UDL 131.48 131.48 386.40 386.40 293.04 293.04 52.50 52.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
PL 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 21.33 10.67 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
PL 2 0.00 0.00 42.53 30.38 0.00 0.00 1.41 4.22 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 28.24 8.71 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEM 131.48 131.48 428.93 416.78 321.28 301.75 75.24 67.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Live load
Cant 805.56 2617.36 1765.87 464.28 0.00 0.00
UDL 134.26 134.26 394.56 394.56 283.30 283.30 47.88 47.88 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
PL 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 17.07 8.53 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
PL 2 0.00 0.00 85.07 60.76 0.00 0.00 8.66 25.99 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 38.40 11.84 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEM 134.26 134.26 479.63 455.32 321.70 295.14 73.61 82.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Moment Distribution
HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol
Min load -131.48 131.48 -428.93 416.78 -321.28
27.68 84.04 19.76 35.91 147.83 99.05 14.66 0.00 -40.63 -40.63 -14.25 0.00
73.91 42.02 -20.31 49.53 -42.37
-15.56 -47.25 -11.11 -2.62 -10.79 -7.23 -1.07 -3.04 -3.04 -1.07
-5.39 -23.62 -1.52 -3.61 8.84
1.14 3.45 0.81 3.04 12.50 8.37 1.24 -2.22 -2.22 -0.78
6.25 1.72 -1.11 4.19 -5.01
-1.32 -3.99 -0.94 -0.07 -0.30 -0.20 -0.03 0.35 0.35 0.12
-0.15 -2.00 0.18 -0.10 1.31
0.03 0.10 0.02 0.22 0.90 0.61 0.09 -0.52 -0.52 -0.18
0.45 0.05 -0.26 0.30 -0.66
-0.10 -0.29 -0.07 0.03 0.10 0.07 0.01 0.15 0.15 0.05
0.05 -0.14 0.08 0.03 0.21
-0.01 -0.03 -0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.00 -0.11 -0.11 -0.04
Sum 11.87 -20.34 8.47 36.50 299.79 -351.20 14.90 421.11 -404.97 -16.14
REINFORCEMENT DESIGN SPAN 1 Span = 7.500 m BS8110
Top Steel Ref
LEFT SPAN RIGHT 0.25L
Total Design M kNm 92.8 319.9 328.5 58.8
b 1.000 1.077 0.800 1.000 3.4.4.3
Be mm 625 2175 Fig 3.13
Mt max kNm 176.6 614.5 3.7.4.2
MIDDLE STRIP
b mm 3425 1875 1875 1875 Fig 3.12
M kNm 1.8 144.0 82.1 20.6 Table 3.18
Bar dia mm 12 20 16 12
d mm 219.0 215.0 217.0 219.0
K' 0.156 0.156 0.132 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.0003 0.0415 0.0233 0.0057 3.4.4.4
z mm 208.1 204.3 206.2 208.1 3.4.4.4
As mm/m 6 865 489 121 3.4.4.4
As enhancement deflection control 47.52% 0.00%
As final mm/m 325 1276 489 325 3.12.5.3
S mm 325 225 400 325
Clause b ? No Yes No No 3.12.11.2.7
S max mm 657 ok 378 ok 651 ok 657 ok 3.12.11.2.7
As prov mm/m 348 1396 503 348
= % % 0.159 0.649 0.232 0.159
fs N/mm 5.7 191.7 405.1 116.2 Eqn 8
Deflection Base ratio 26 k tens 1.478 k comp 1.050 Allowed 36.335 > 34.88
COLUMN STRIP
b mm 625 2175 2175 2175 Fig 3.12
M kNm 92.8 176.0 246.4 38.2 Table 3.18
Bar dia mm 16 20 16 12
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0 219.0
K' 0.156 0.156 0.132 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.0789 0.0438 0.0601 0.0092 3.4.4.4
z mm 195.9 204.0 201.4 208.1 3.4.4.4
As mm/m 1743 912 1294 194 3.4.4.4
As enhancement deflection control 54.36% 0.00%
As final mm/m 1743 1408 1294 325 3.12.5.3
S mm 100 200 100 325
Clause b ? Yes Yes Yes No 3.12.11.2.7
S max mm 175 ok 358 ok 189 ok 657 ok 3.12.11.2.7
As prov mm/m 2011 1571 1508 348
= % % 0.927 0.731 0.695 0.159
fs N/mm 289.0 179.7 357.5 186.0 Eqn 8
Deflection Base ratio 26 k tens 1.485 k comp 1.050 Allowed 36.489 > 34.88
BAR! sheet
This sheet shows the design of the distribution concrete section in
detail and gives references to the appropriate clause numbers in
BS 8110. The designs for Spans 2,3 etc follow on.
ANALYSIS! sheet
This sheet shows calculations carried out using moment
distribution.
General notes
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 GRAPH DATA I
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005
LOADING DIAGRAM 26
BEAM 0 37
0 0
SUPPORTS 0 0 7 7 19 19 31 31 37 37 37 37
-80.7 76.8 -80.7 78.1 -80.7 0 -26 0 -80.7 104 -26 26
D UDL 0 0 7 7 7 19 19 19 31 31 31 37 37 37 37 37 37 3
0 32.2 32.2 0 32.2 32.2 0 24.4 24.4 0 17.5 17.5 0 0 0 0 0
L UDL 32.2 44.7 44.7 32.2 44.7 44.7 32.2 33.1 33.1 24.4 23.1 23.1 17.5 0 0 0 0
D PUDL 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 7 20.5 20.5 22.9 22.9 31 31 3
44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 40.6 40.6 33.1 23.1 23.1 2
L PUDL 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 37.6 37.6 33.1 23.1 23.1 2
PL 1 0 0 7 7 19 19 33 33 37 37 37 37
44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 33.1 23.1 47.1 0 0 0 0
44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 33.1 47.1 53.1 0 0 0 0
PL 2 0 0 12 12 19 19 35.5 35.5 37 37 37 37
44.7 44.7 44.7 69.7 33.1 33.1 23.1 28.1 0 0 0 0
44.7 44.7 69.7 94.7 33.1 33.1 28.1 46.1 0 0 0 0
MOMENT DIAGRAMS
SPAN 1
X 0 0 0.35 0.7 1.05 1.4 1.75 2.1 2.45 2.8 3.15 3.5 3.85 4.2 4.55 4.9 5.25 5
M(e) all 0 36 -10 -48.1 -78.2 -100 -115 -121 -119 -109 -91.5 -65.8 -32.1 9.57 59.2 117 182 25
M(e) odd 0 95.3 32.4 -22.5 -69.4 -108 -139 -162 -177 -184 -183 -175 -158 -133 -100 -59.3 -10.6 4
M(e) even 0 -39 -45.7 -48.4 -47.2 -42 -32.9 -19.9 -2.93 18 42.9 71.7 104 141 182 226 275 3
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M(r) all 0 37.8 -11.9 -53.7 -87.5 -113 -131 -141 -143 -137 -123 -101 -71 -33.1 12.9 66.7 129 19
M(r) odd 0 90.5 32.3 -17.9 -60.2 -94.5 -121 -139 -150 -152 -146 -133 -111 -81.9 -44.5 0.96 54.4 11
M(r) even 0 -40.9 -48.5 -52.1 -51.7 -47.5 -39.2 -27.1 -10.9 9.11 33.1 61.1 93 129 169 212 260 3
70% max 0 66.7 22.7 -15.7 -33 -29.4 -23.1 -13.9 -2.05 12.6 30 50.2 73.1 98.8 127 158 192 2
70% min 0 -27.3 -32 -33.9 -54.8 -75.8 -97.5 -114 -124 -129 -128 -122 -110 -93 -70.1 -41.5 -7.41 32
Lower bound 0 -40.9 -48.5 -53.7 -87.5 -113 -131 -141 -150 -152 -146 -133 -111 -93 -70.1 -41.5 -7.41
Upper bound 0 90.5 32.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 12.6 33.1 61.1 93 129 169 212 260 3
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPAN 2
Local X 0 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6 6.6 7.2 7.8 8.4 9 9
X 7 7.6 8.2 8.8 9.4 10 10.6 11.2 11.8 12.4 13 13.6 14.2 14.8 15.4 16 16
M(e) all 743 501 282 85.9 -86.4 -235 -361 -463 -541 -566 -553 -516 -456 -373 -266 -135 18
M(e) odd 354 245 149 63.5 -10 -71.9 -122 -161 -188 -194 -183 -160 -126 -80.1 -22.7 46.3 12
M(e) even 741 491 265 62.2 -117 -273 -406 -515 -600 -632 -626 -597 -543 -467 -367 -244 -9
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M(r) all 557 316 97 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
M(r) odd 442 335 240 156 83.3 22.6 -26.5 -64 -89.9 -94.3 -82 -58.2 -22.7 24.3 82.9 153 2
M(r) even 557 316 97 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
70% max 520 351 197 60.1 -7.01 -50.4 -85.6 -113 -132 -136 -128 -112 -88.1 -56.1 -15.9 32.4 88
70% min 248 172 104 43.6 -82 -191 -284 -360 -420 -443 -438 -418 -380 -327 -257 -171 -6
Lower bound 0 0 0 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
Upper bound 557 351 240 156 83.3 22.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24.3 82.9 153 2
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPAN 3
GRAF! sheet
Data for graphs used in charts.
8
NOTES! sheet
Disclaimers, status and revision history of the spreadsheet.
Disclaimer
Status of spreadsheet
Public release version.
Revision history RCC11 Element Design.xls
Date Version Action Size (kB)
15-Feb-06 RCC11 v3.1 Differentiation between flat slabs and other slabs on SLAB page. 331
20-Oct-05 RCC11 v3.0 Updated to 2005 versions of BS8110 & BS8666 317
03-Feb-04 RCC11 v2.2 Minor correction to cell N12 on "SLAB" (> changed to < ). 289
21-Jan-03 RCC11 v2.1 DETR logo replaced by DTI. 289
11-Oct-02 RCC11 v2.0 Version 2 enhancements 304
01-Oct-02 RCC11 v1.7 COLUMN: Minor mods to N37:U37; Chart at U2 reactivated. 284
22-Jun-01 RCC11 v1.6 Addition of input controls. 284
26-Jan-01 RCC11 v1.5 Addition of input controls. 283
05-Dec-00 RCC11 v1.4 SHEAR:K22 lateral link spacing corrected. 189
24-Nov-00 RCC11 v1.3
SHEAR:C19 & C20 reformatted, and lateral link spacing check added (C
Braidwood).
185
30-May-00 RCC11 v1.2 R Lawson comments incorporated (c refs etc). 183
08-May-00 RCC11 v1.1
Revisions to TEE~BEAM. Option of required compression rebar added.
Neutral axis, x allowed below flange soffite - IStructE 'Green book' method
followed where flanges outside bw have z = d-hf/2, and bw acts as beam.
182
03-Aug-99 RCC11 v1.0
First public release.
Includes version comments & chg mods to COLUMN
190
All advice or information from the British Cement Association and/or Reinforced Concrete Council is intended for those
who will evaluate the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No
liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by the BCA,
TCC or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Users should note that all TCC software and publications are
subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.
This spreadsheet should be used in compliance with the accompanying publication 'Spreadsheets for concrete design to
BS 8110 and EC2' available from The Concrete Centre, Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach,
Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB.
This spreadsheet is shareware. It may be distributed freely, but may not
be used for commercial purposes until the user has registered with the
RCC
Upper sheets
The calculations are intended to mimic hand-written calculations
as far as possible with a little more explanation by way of
references to codes and derivation of numbers than would
usually be the case in normal submissions. Sheets intended
for printing out are divided into three sections: calculations,
operating instructions and workings. The output is intended to be
sufcient to allow detailing, although the designer should always
consider and allow for rationalising reinforcement both within
and between elements. Input cells are in blue and are underlined
(so they can be recognised in black and white printouts).
The cells under Operating Instructions to the right hand side
contain help and error messages that are intended to help the
user with the correct operation of the spreadsheet. They also
contain variously checks, print boxes and combo-boxes, (see
Help in Excel). Print buttons (buttons with macros assigned to
them) automatically print out the calculation sheets providing
macros that have not been switched off. Combo-boxes allow
choices between specied options.
To the right hand side of many spreadsheets are intermediate
calculations, data for graphs, etc. These workings are not
considered vital to understanding the calculation; they may
nonetheless be viewed and investigated. Workings may also be
contained on supplementary sheets.
Other sheets
These sheets are not necessarily intended for printing out and
may not be understandable without reference to the printed
calculations. For instance, in the case of RCC52.xls Calcs!, the N-
M relationship in a particular column is calculated for increments
of neutral axis depth. Many iterations are required in order to
construct the N-M graph. Therefore there are many calculations
and these are set out in tables. The volume of calculations makes
it difcult to produce legible print-outs on a limited number of
sheets.
Notes!
The Notes! sheet shows the disclaimer, status and revision
history of each spreadsheet. The disclaimer and status should be
read and understood. The revision history provides a record of
the spreadsheet being used and may provide a basis for users
Quality Assurance procedures. The revision/ version and name of
the spreadsheet should appear on all print-outs. This example is
taken from RCC52.xls Notes!
Typical Upper sheet
Concurrent software being used
Combo-box
(Used for automated choices)
9
General notes
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc CALCULATIONS I
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO BS 8110:2005
Originated from 'RCC52.xls' v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC
CALCULATIONS
.67fcu/m = 13.40 N/mm ALL CALCULATIONS DERIVED FROM 0.00 408.42
fy/m = 434.78 N/mm FIGURE 3.3 AND CLAUSE 3.4.4.1 480.00 480.00
net fy/m = 421.38 N/mm
32 Bar diameter
d' = 54 mm d = 346 mm Asc = 4825.5 mm
N=0 quadratic a = 4824.000 b = ######## c = -9.E+07
n max = 913.2 Interval = 5.497 (24 intervals between N=0 and Nbal)
N = 0 (solve for zero N)
n Neutral axis 88.26 93.76 99.25 104.75 110.25 115.74 121.24 126.74 132.23 137.73 143.23 148.72
Fc Conc comp force 425764 452281 478797 505313 531830 558346 584862 611379 637895 664412 690928 717444
c strain Steel comp strain 0.00136 0.00148 0.00160 0.00170 0.00179 0.00187 0.00194 0.00201 0.00207 0.00213 0.00218 0.00223
t strain Steel tens strain 0.01022 0.00942 0.00870 0.00806 0.00748 0.00696 0.00649 0.00606 0.00566 0.00529 0.00496 0.00464
fsc Steel comp stress 258.32 283.43 305.76 325.74 343.73 360.02 374.82 388.34 400.74 412.15 421.38 421.38
fst Steel tens stress 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8
Fsc Steel comp force 623255 683837 737709 785928 829338 868625 904349 936975 966888 994414 1016688 1016688
Fst Steel tens force 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019
z Conc lever arm 306.28 303.81 301.34 298.86 296.39 293.92 291.44 288.97 286.49 284.02 281.55 279.07
N Fc + Fsc - Fst 0.00 87.10 167.49 242.22 312.15 377.95 440.19 499.34 555.76 609.81 658.60 685.11
M M O R 312.39 324.37 335.24 345.15 354.22 362.56 370.26 377.36 383.94 390.04 395.25 397.07
Labels for chart
N diff 87.10 80.39 74.73 69.93 65.80 62.24 59.14 56.43 54.04 48.79 26.52 26.52
M diff 11.98 10.87 9.91 9.08 8.34 7.69 7.11 6.58 6.10 5.20 1.82 1.69
25 Bar diameter
d' = 50.5 mm d = 349.5 mm Asc = 2945.2 mm
N=0 quadratic a = 4824.000 b = 370831.72 c = -5.E+07
n max = 922.5 Interval = 6.253 (24 intervals between N=0 and Nbal)
Example of an other sheet
Notes! sheet
Disclaimer
Status of spreadsheet
Public release version.
Revision history RCC11 Element Design.xls
Date Version Action Size (kB)
15-Feb-06 RCC11 v3.1 Differentiation between flat slabs and other slabs on SLAB page. 331
20-Oct-05 RCC11 v3.0 Updated to 2005 versions of BS8110 & BS8666 317
03-Feb-04 RCC11 v2.2 Minor correction to cell N12 on "SLAB" (> changed to < ). 289
21-Jan-03 RCC11 v2.1 DETR logo replaced by DTI. 289
11-Oct-02 RCC11 v2.0 Version 2 enhancements 304
01-Oct-02 RCC11 v1.7 COLUMN: Minor mods to N37:U37; Chart at U2 reactivated. 284
22-Jun-01 RCC11 v1.6 Addition of input controls. 284
26-Jan-01 RCC11 v1.5 Addition of input controls. 283
05-Dec-00 RCC11 v1.4 SHEAR:K22 lateral link spacing corrected. 189
24-Nov-00 RCC11 v1.3
SHEAR:C19 & C20 reformatted, and lateral link spacing check added (C
Braidwood).
185
30-May-00 RCC11 v1.2 R Lawson comments incorporated (c refs etc). 183
08-May-00 RCC11 v1.1
Revisions to TEE~BEAM. Option of required compression rebar added.
Neutral axis, x allowed below flange soffite - IStructE 'Green book' method
followed where flanges outside bw have z = d-hf/2, and bw acts as beam.
182
03-Aug-99 RCC11 v1.0
First public release.
Includes version comments & chg mods to COLUMN
190
All advice or information from the British Cement Association and/or Reinforced Concrete Council is intended for those
who will evaluate the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No
liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by the BCA,
TCC or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Users should note that all TCC software and publications are
subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.
This spreadsheet should be used in compliance with the accompanying publication 'Spreadsheets for concrete design to
BS 8110 and EC2' available from The Concrete Centre, Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach,
Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB.
This spreadsheet is shareware. It may be distributed freely, but may not
be used for commercial purposes until the user has registered with the
RCC
10
Frequently Asked Questions
Macros
When loading the individual spreadsheets, Excel may warn about
the presence of macros. All the macros provided in the les are
either to allow automated printing of the calculations or to
provide choices by way of combo-boxes. The printing macros
have been assigned to buttons. Turning the macros off may affect
the actual function of the spreadsheets but will certainly make
printing of the sheets as congured more difcult and make the
choice of options very much more difcult.
Fonts
Unless the appropriate fonts Tekton and Marker (supplied in the
CD-ROM) have been installed by the user, the appearance on
screen will be different from that intended. These upright fonts
have been used to emulate a designers handwriting and to allow
adequate information to be shown across the page and in each
cell.
If problems are experienced it is most likely that the fonts on your
computer screen will have defaulted to the closest approximation
of the fonts intended (e.g. the toolbar may say Tekton but a
default font such as Arial will have been used). The spreadsheets
will work but not as intended ends of words may be missing,
numbers may not t cells resulting in a series of hashes, #####.
Column width and cell overlap problems only occur when the
correct fonts are not loaded.
It is strongly recommended that the Tekton and Marker fonts are
copied into your computers font library. The Freewave fonts may
be found in the Fonts folder on the CD-ROM.
They may be copied in the following manner, either:
Start/Settings/Control Panel/Fonts/ File/ Add Fonts and when
asked copy fonts to system directory? answer yes.
or
Through Microsoft Explorer and copying (or dragging)
the font les into your font library, usually contained in
Windows/ Set-up/ Fonts
Help
A printed copy of this User Guide is available from The Concrete
Bookshop (07004 607777 or www.concretebookshop.com). The
User Guide is also available as an Adobe Acrobat le UserGuid
pdf, (on the CD-ROM). A copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader will be
required to read this le.
Help is also available at the following places:
Within Excel under Help
to the right hand side of the spreadsheets, cells under
Operating Instructions contain help and error messages.
Queries may be e-mailed to helpdesk@concretecentre.com.
Preference will be given to those who have registered.
Support
E-mailed questions, comments, developments and suggestions
are welcomed. Send them to helpdesk@concretecentre.com.
Preference will be given to those who are registered, as detailed
above.
Shareware
These spreadsheets are offered as shareware. This can be
considered a try before you buy system where you are expected
to pay the program owners a registration fee if you nd the
program useful or if the programs are used for commercial
use. In general you may pass on copies of shareware programs
to colleagues within the UK, although commercial (for a fee)
distribution requires special written permission from the
publisher.
Availability/registration
The RC Spreadsheets are made available as shareware from The
Concrete Centre see www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets.
However, the spreadsheets may not be used for commercial
purposes until the user has purchased and validated a licence.
Licences may be purchased from The Concrete Bookshop
(www.concretebookshop.com, Tel +44 (0)7004-607777) or via
The Concrete Centre website. Licences may be validated via
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets. The purchase price
includes
Permission to use the spreadsheets for commercial purposes
for at least one year
A hard copy of this publication, User Guide to RC
Spreadsheets: v3
CD-ROM containing RC Spreadsheets: v3, together with
Admin les, which themselves contain fonts, issue sheets,
user guide les etc.
Occasional e-mails to inform them of any revisions
orchanges to the spreadsheets or other relevant information
Details of how to download updates of the spreadsheets
Preferential treatment with regard to support
Further information, updates, FAQs, free trial download versions
of some spreadsheets, latest news and other information on
the RC-Spreadsheet suite is available on www.concretecentre.
com/rcspreadsheets
Using the spreadsheets
11
General notes
Overseas use
The spreadsheets have been developed and maintained for use
within the UK. The Concrete Centre reserves the right to pass
details of non-UK registrants to any future owner of the non-UK
copyright or overseas distributor of the spreadsheets.
Updates
It is intended that The Concrete Centres website will include
updated versions of the spreadsheets. Registrants will be provided
with information on how to download updates.
Using the spreadsheets for the
rst time
Base versions
Initially, always start from the base versions on the CD-ROM. If in
doubt, go back to the version on the CD-ROM. These safeguards
are to avoid using corrupted or bespoke les. Eventually, familiarity
with the spreadsheets and Quality Assurance procedures may
overtake this basic precaution.
Please note that whilst all spreadsheet cells, apart from input
cells, are covered by nominal protection, it is possible to change
the contents of cells. Original versions are available on CD-ROM
or from The Concrete Centres website www.concretecentre.com.
Also, please note conditions of use and disclaimers associated
with the use of the spreadsheets contained within the sheet
titled Notes! and elsewhere in this User guide.
Excel
The spreadsheets are normal Excel les. Excel ( Microsoft
Corporation) is a standalone package or may be included as part
of the Microsoft Ofce package on PCs or Macs. The les are
compatible with Excel 2002, part of Ofce 2002, and are likely
to be compatible with future versions of Excel. Those not familiar
with Excel are directed to the Help functions within Excel and
relevant literature available at book and computer shops.
Please note that the spreadsheets will not necessarily work with
previous versions of Excel (e.g. 95, 5.x etc.) or other spreadsheet
programs. This is due to incompatibility between software and
backward incompatibility between versions. (To check which
version of Excel you are running see sign-on screen, or Help/
About Microsoft Excel). Those running Excel 2000 are advised
to use the Save As/ .xls function to avoid inordinately large le
sizes.
Long le names
The base versions of the spreadsheets are saved with long le
names to aid familiarity with each spreadsheets purpose. Some
software and networks only recognise eight characters for a le
name. In use, users may be requested by the system to allow
abbreviated names, e.g. RCC11.xls .
As shorthand, the spreadsheets are generally referred to by their
number rather than their name in full, i.e. RCC11.xls is used as
shorthand for RCC11 Element Design.xls.
Loading a spreadsheet for the rst time
Under Windows 98, NT, 2000, 2002 or XP insert the spreadsheet
CD-ROM into the CD drive (drive D: assumed).
A spreadsheet can be loaded using one of the following
methods:
Your computer may automatically present a view of the les
available on the CD-ROM in which case double click the
mouse pointer on the spreadsheet of your choice, e.g.MENU.
xls//. If not already loaded and presuming it is available, Excel
will boot up and load up with MENU.xls ready for operation.
Excel will most probably warn about macros before loading
the spreadsheet fully. In order to proceed, enable macros (see
below).
Otherwise
From My Computer, double click(//) on My Computer, double
click on D (assumed CD drive) //double click on spreadsheet of
ones choice //.
Successively click Start/ Programs/ Microsoft Explorer/ double
click mouse on CD Drive (D)//. Double click the mouse pointer
on the spreadsheet of your choice, e.g.Menu.xls//. If not
already loaded and available, Excel will boot up and load up
with Menu.xls.
Successively click Start/ Programs/ Microsoft Excel. Once
Excel has booted up, click mouse pointer on File in top menu
bar/ click mouse on Open/ click mouse on the Look in box
and scroll through to the CD Drive
Click mouse on the CD Drive (D)//. Double click mouse on the
spreadsheet of your choice, e.g. Menu.xls//.
The design spreadsheets may, if the user wishes, be loaded direct.
In the above instructions replace MENU.xls with the name of the
spreadsheet required. The advantages of using MENU.xls are
explained later.
No installation program per se is included. Under le managers
such as Microsoft Explorer, the CD-ROM versions of the
spreadsheets can be dragged and dropped into an appropriate
folder specied by the user. Alternatively, from within Excel, the
spreadsheets can be loaded directly from the CD-ROM but
should users wish to save the modied spreadsheet, it has to be
saved to an alternative drive.
12
Default font size
Even with the correct fonts installed, the appearance of the sheets
might be different from those intended. This may be due to the
default font size on the users computer being different from the
font size 12 used in the development of the spreadsheets. For
instance if the users default font size is 10, pages will appear and
print narrower than intended (as unformatted cells will revert to
a narrower cell width than intended).
Please ensure that the default font size is set at 12. (In Excel check
Tools/ Options/ General/ Standard font and size). If standard font
or size is changed it will become effective only after rebooting
Excel. While the spreadsheets were developed using Tekton 12,
many True Type font size 12 (e.g. Arial or preferably Times New
Roman 12) may give adequate presentation. If a series of hashes
(#####) still appears, it may be necessary to resize the column
width.

Screen view
The spreadsheets have been developed assuming that part, if not
the whole, of the Operating Instructions column is in view. This
column contains comments, instructions, checks, explanations,
etc. and is important for the correct operation of the spreadsheets.
Generally, a screen zoom of 75% has been used as a default size
on the sheets. Occasionally, other zoom sizes have been used in
order to aid comprehension.
Screen resolution
The spreadsheets have been developed in 1024 x 768 resolution,
so that their appearance will be acceptable between SVGA (800
x 600) and 1280 x 1024.
They will obviously work in VGA (600 x 480), but higher
resolutions are recommended.
Input
In the spreadsheets, input data is blue and underlined. New data
may be input by overwriting default values or by entering values
in greyed-out cells. Entering data in far-left greyed-out cells
may also remove the grey conditional background to other cells,
which will then require data entry. Some input cells refer back to
data on previous sheets within a workbook. These are coloured
magenta, but change back to blue if other data is entered.
Do not copy and paste input from one cell to another as this
may cause formatting and other errors. Do not use Space,
Enter (the space equals text). If similar input is required in other
cells then use = cell reference with caution, e.g. = B16 in the
appropriate input cell.
All non-input cells should have nominal protection and the
contents of these cells can only be overwritten if the user has
taken positive steps to overwrite original contents. In the page
headers the Made by and Checked boxes should be completed
or cleared by using a blank or hyphen; clearing the cell completely
would produce 0 on subsequent sheets.
Values in red or red backgrounds
During operation, values in red or cells with red backgrounds
ag either incorrect data to be changed or excess data to be
cleared (manually). Even a space as an entry might generate red
backgrounds.
If you make a mess of it, start again from the base version of the
spreadsheet on the CD-ROM.
#DIV/0! (Divide by zero) errors
In some spreadsheets, #DIV/0! results may arise and be displayed.
In sheets intended for printing out, #DIV/0! indicates an error in
or invalid input. In sheets of workings, they have no relevance to
the validity of the sheet or the spreadsheet as a whole.
Please note that in many cases, but not all, a very small value
has been used rather than zero in order to avoid #DIV/0! (divide
by zero) problems in Excel, e.g. [RCC53.xls] Cases!B3:B8 where
=IF(ERROR(G3),0.000001,G3) has been used.
Printing

The sheets may be printed out in several ways:
Through the automated print buttons in the spreadsheets
(using these print macros will over-write print areas dened
elsewhere)
Using the Print icon on Excels standard toolbar
Using File/ Print within Excel
Copying and pasting (special) parts of the spreadsheets to
a word processor or other package. Pasting (special) into a
word processor le as a bitmap produces a wysiwyg image.
Pasting as other formats will probably require some
pre-copying formatting of the spreadsheet and/ or post-
formatting of receiving cells.
Print areas may be dened by:
Highlighting area then clicking File/ Print Area/ Set Print Area
Clicking View/Page Break Preview and adjusting boundaries
to suit
Print previewing can be achieved using the Print Preview icon on
the standard toolbar.
Print formatting
Different hardware and software are congured in many different
ways. This situation leads to many variations on the actual print
from individual printers. Best results are likely to be obtained
from Windows printers but even these may not produce printing
that is identical to that intended. Some manipulation for printing
with your conguration may be inevitable.
13
General notes
AutoComplete
Excels facility for AutoCompleting cells (e.g. entering T might
autoComplete to Type) can be a mixed blessing. In most
spreadsheets it should be turned off via Tools/ Options / Edit and
clearing the Enable AutoComplete for cell values box.
Continued use
Conditions of use: disclaimers
A fundamental condition of use that the user accepts responsibility
for the input and output of the computer and how it is used.
Whilst the spreadsheets have been checked with all reasonable
care and diligence, they cannot be guaranteed for every
eventuality.
Users must satisfy themselves that the uses to which the
spreadsheets are put are appropriate. Users must have read,
understood and accepted the disclaimer contained on the inside
front cover of this publication (and repeated in the sheet named
Notes! in each spreadsheet).
Nominal protection

Users and managers should be aware that the spreadsheets can
be changed. Beyond nominal cell and sheet protection, the les
are open and can be changed.
There are several reasons for this:
The les can be customised by users to their own preferred
methods of presentation and design (e.g. deections might be
calculated to part 2 of BS 8110; individual rms or project
logos might replace the The Concrete Centre logo).
The protection should stop inadvertent changes and
corruption of cells.
Developments and improvements can be made and fed back
to The Concrete Centre. Such feedback is encouraged and
allows a wider consensus to be gained.
Protection can always be overcome by determined users.
Fully protected les can hide cell contents .
Spreadsheet emulators are at present unsuitable for this
application.
Different designers want different facilities available to them
and should not be restricted.
The spreadsheets are all protected but with no password, in other
words users have to do something positive if they are to change
any formulae, and must therefore take responsibility for any
deliberate or accidental changes. The projects Advisory Group
held this to be a sensible position.
Users and managers must address change control and versions
for use. The Concrete Centre can only control the base versions
issued on CD-ROM (and web page). The published examples can
be used as record copies to help identify changes. Users Quality
Assurance procedures may dictate the use of more sophisticated
protection measures.

Development
The nominal protection within the spreadsheets may be over-
ridden to allow customisation and individual development.
Any development of the spreadsheets should be undertaken
by experienced staff who have a good understanding of the
problems and pitfalls of both design and spreadsheets. It may
take an experienced engineer four or ve times longer to prepare
a spreadsheet than it would to produce the equivalent manual
calculation. Robust, commercially acceptable spreadsheets may
take 50 times as long. They can take even longer to test, check
and correct. Only repetition of use makes the investment of time
worthwhile.
With relatively open les, designers are at liberty to alter the
spreadsheets as they wish. However, they must satisfy themselves
that any alterations are correct and do not interfere with any
other aspect of the spreadsheet in question and conform to any
Quality Assurance procedures.
Notwithstanding the above, copyright of the spreadsheet
contents remains with The Concrete Centre. Altered or amended
versions of the spreadsheets may not be sold or hired without
the written permission of the Centre. Please inform The Concrete
Centre of any major discrepancies found or improvements
made.
Saving les/ le management
Many users save spreadsheets to a directory and/ or folder of their
choice. This is particularly true where spreadsheets pertaining to a
particular project are saved to a folder given the projects name.
Linking spreadsheets
To avoid complications, links between different design
spreadsheets have not been used. Nonetheless, for the
experienced user, linking provides a powerful tool. The results
of one spreadsheet can be linked through to become the input
for another, or project data can be auto-loaded. This minimises
the amount of input required and at the same time reduces the
scope for error in data transfers. For example, the results of a
beam analysis can be carried through to beam design. Any links
created by the user are at his or her discretion.
Assumptions made
During the course of development of these spreadsheets, a
number of structural and computing assumptions have been
made. These are discussed below.
14
Spreadsheet
option
number
Design
support
moment
Design span moments
Support moment from
which span moment is calculated
Comments
0
b
M
b
M Design span moments will probably be less than elastic moment
(minimum of 70% of elastic moment).
This option may lead to a kinked bending moment diagram as the
70% kicks-in in the spans.
In the case of thin sections such as slabs, consideration of span
deection and service stress often leads to reinstatement of any
reinforcement theoretically saved.
1
b
M Minimum of
b
M and M
alt
/
b
Design span moments might be less than elastic moment but less
likely than with option 0.
Increasing the minimum support moment for the calculation of
span moment from M
alt
to M
alt
/
b
is seen as a sensible compromise
between options 0 and 2.
2
b
M Minimum of
b
M and M
alt
Design span moments cannot be less than elastic moment.
Most often used but, if, typically, 20% redistribution is specied at
supports, design span moments will increase by about 10% over
elastic span moments.
Again, in thin sections, consideration of deection and service
stress can limit additional amounts of reinforcement due to
increased span moment.
Where
b
= (moment after redistribution)/(moment before redistribution)
= 100% - % redistribution requested
M = elastic moment at support, all spans loaded
M
alt
= maximum elastic Moment at support, alternate spans loaded
Table 1
Redistribution options in spreadsheets with analysis
A
s
enhancement
Several of the BS8110 spreadsheets contain automatic routines
that increase A
s
in order to reduce service stress f
s
and therefore
increase modication factors in order to satisfy deection checks.
The A
s
enhancement values are the percentages by which A
s

required for bending are increased in order to satisfy deection
criteria.

Redistribution
Those spreadsheets with analysis allow redistribution in
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.2.2.1 or Eurocode 2
Clause 5.5. The user may choose between three options. These
options do not affect redistribution at supports but do determine
how span moments are calculated, as shown in Table 1.
Reinforcement densities
Some spreadsheets give an indication of weight of reinforcement
in the margin under Operating Instructions. These densities
should be used with great caution. Many factors can affect actual
reinforcement quantities on specic projects. These include
different methods of analysis, non-rectangular layouts, large
holes, actual covers used, detailing preferences (curtailment, laps
and wastage), and the unforeseen complications that inevitably
occur. As may be examined in the sheets entitled Weight,
the densities given relate to simple rectangular layouts and
the authors interpretation of BS 8110. They make no specic
allowance for wastage.
The densities assume that the areas or volumes of slabs are
measured gross, e.g. slabs are measured through beams. Beam
reinforcement densities relate to web width multiplied by overall
depth.
15
General notes
Rationalisation of reinforcement
Although it may appear that many of the spreadsheets give
least weight solutions (hence more bars, more work), the
amounts of reinforcement derived are actually accurate (and
not necessarily rationalised). It is intended, therefore, that the
amounts of reinforcement derived from the spreadsheet should
be considered as minimal.
The user should specify more rationalised reinforcement layouts
to the detailer. Rationalisation should be done manually there
would seem to be too many variables and personal preferences
to enable automatic rationalisation. A detailer can always close
up spacing and/ or reduce bar diameters if desired.
Most often the spreadsheets require bar size as input, rather than
bar spacing. This can lead to unusual, but correct, spacings. Where
bar diameter input is available, it may be worth investigating
larger bars (at larger centres). For instance, in the design of a at
slab it would probably be preferable to use 4828 larger bars at
greater centres rather than 6840 smaller bars at small centres
(weight is marginally different, 82.5 kg/m
3
c.f. 80.8 kg/m
3
).
This results in 30% fewer bars compared with 2% extra steel.
Rationalised arrangements with least number of bars (without
breaking the spacing rules) and least number of bar marks are
always preferable. Eventually, it may be possible to automate this
process, but for the time being it is between the program user
(i.e. the designer) and the detailer to decide how to rationalise
bar arrangements. Any estimates of reinforcement must take this
process into account.
Other spreadsheets tend to size bars in such a way that minimum
centres (or clear spacings) are not exceeded.
It is assumed that issues of detail will be considered by the
engineer and detailer. Issues such as radius of bottom bars and
beam bearings, space between bars in narrow beams, spliced
bars at supports of beams, connection details, etc. need to be
considered.
Denitions of imposed and live loads
For the BS8110 spreadsheets, imposed load is taken to be the
characteristic imposed load input by the user. For oors this
might be the minimum imposed oor loads described in BS
6399
[19]
Part 1 Table 1.
Live load is taken to be that part of the ultimate load that is not
characteristic dead load (i.e. in BS8110 spreadsheets, live load
= n - gk ).
(For the Eurocode 2 spreadsheets no such distinction is needed.
Variable actions should be as described in BS EN 1991-1
[35]
. For
permanent actions,
G
is intended to be constant across all spans
and therefore not live.)
Analysis: cantilever deections and
support rotation
Support rotations are ignored. Support rotation cannot be
determined except as part of a rigorous deection analysis.
Rotations cannot be easily derived from moment distribution,
and in any case, gross section slopes are of little or no value. It
is assumed that BS 8110s or Eurocode 2s deemed-to-satisfy l/d
checks are adequate.
If support rotations are expected to be critical additional checks
should be undertaken.

16
This spreadsheet acts as both menu program, allowing the user to
load the spreadsheet they want to use, and as a version checker.
It is intended to help the user designing a number of elements at
one session and to help ensure that the most up to date versions
of the spreadsheets are in use. To work properly it must reside in
the same folder as the design spreadsheets themselves.
Depending upon the level of security you have set up on your
version of Excel, you may be asked whether you wish macros to
run; please answer Enable macros. Once Menu.xls is loaded,
you may also be asked whether you want to update links. If you
wish the current version numbers in your folder to be displayed
answer Update.
Welcome!
Welcome gives a quick introduction to the spreadsheets by
covering in outline:
Limitations & Assumptions System requirements
Disclaimer
Licence conditions
Instructions for Use
Basic Instructions
Macros
BS8110!
This sheet shows the spreadsheets available for the design of
elements to BS 8110. Adjacent to the title of each spreadsheet is a
button which may be clicked in order to load that spreadsheet.
Eurocode 2!
Similarly, this sheet highlights the spreadsheets available for the
design of elements to Eurocode 2.
Adjacent to the title of each spreadsheet is a button that may be
clicked in order to load that spreadsheet.
In due course further spreadsheets will be released and made
available.
Versions!
This sheet shows the version number of each spreadsheet in your
folder.
Menu.xls
Welcome!
BS8110!
Eurocode 2!
Versions!
17
Spreadsheets to BS 8110
18
19
RCC11 Element Design.xls
RCC11.xls includes sheets for designing:
Solid slabs,
Rectangular beams
T beams (and ribbed slabs) for bending
Beam shear an
Columns with axial load and bending about one axis
RCC11.xls designs elements to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 including
Amd 3
[2]
. It is assumed that loads, moments, shears, etc. are
available for input from hand calculations or analysis from
elsewhere. A governing criterion can be deection; span-to-
depth ratios are used as per BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.4.6.

SLAB!
This sheet allows for the design of a section of solid slab in a
single simply-supported span, in a continuous span, at supports
or in a cantilever. These choices have a bearing on deection
limitations and the user should choose the appropriate location
from the combo-box to the right hand side. The user may
also choose to allow for no or nominal compression steel; this
again affects deection factors. To an extent the spreadsheet
will automatically increase reinforcement in order to lower
service stresses and enhance allowable span to depth ratios. The
spreadsheet allows a certain amount of theoretical over-stress as
dened by the user in cell M7. Engineering judgement is required
to ensure that any over-stress is acceptable and that specied
reinforcement is sensibly rationalised.
Slight variances in reinforcement requirements may be found.
These are due to the spreadsheet allowing marginal over-stress
and allowing centres in increments of 25 mm.

RECT~BEAM!
This sheet designs rectangular beams. The location of the beam
may be either in a single simply-supported span, in a continuous
span, at supports or in a cantilever. These choices have a
bearing on deection limitations and the user should choose
the appropriate location from the combo-box to the right hand
side.
When considering span reinforcement, the spreadsheet will,
where necessary, automatically increase reinforcement in order
to lower service stresses and enhance allowable span-to-depth
ratios. In checking deection, the sheet entitled RECT~BEAM!
includes two bars of the specied reinforcement diameter to
derive a modication factor for compression reinforcement.
The facility to specify additional compression reinforcement to
enhance span-to-depth ratios is contained within TEE~BEAM!

TEE~BEAM!
TEE~BEAM! designs T beams and L beams in single simply-
supported span, end span, internal span or cantilever locations.
Again, these choices have a bearing on deection limitations
and the user should choose the appropriate location from the
combo-box to the right hand side. With respect to the effective
width of the ange, the user may also choose that the section is
considered as a tee- or inverted L beam.
A default value for the width of the ange bf is calculated and
displayed as input. This cell may be overwritten if, for instance,
say the user wishes to allow for openings, etc. The default is
calculated as being:
web width + 0.14 span for T beams, internal span
web width + 0.16 span for T beams, end span
web width + 0.07 span for L beams, internal span
web width + 0.08 span for L beams, end span
In the determination of compression steel, where the neutral
axis lies below ange, the concrete in web, bw, below ange has
been ignored. This is seen as a valid alternative to the approach
in Clause 3.4.4.5.
In order to calculate the appropriate deection factor for
compression reinforcement, there is a facility to specify
compression reinforcement. When considering deection, the
spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically increase span
reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and enhance
allowable span-to-depth ratios.

SHEAR!
This sheet checks beams or slabs for shear and calculates any
shear reinforcement required. It is hoped that the input is self-
explanatory. Providing the applied load is fundamentally a UDL,
or where the principal load is located further than 2d from the
face of the support, BS 8110: Clause 3.4.5.10 allows shear to be
checked at d from the face of support.
Checks for maximum shear (either 5.0 N/mm2 or 0.8fc u 0.5 )
are carried out automatically. In beams, the designed links will
be necessary for a distance from the support before reverting to
nominal link arrangements. A maximum link spacing of 600 mm
is used; this is seen as a sensible maximum.
Apart from punching shear, shear in slabs is rarely critical (see
RCC13.xls).
20
COLUMN!
This sheet designs symmetrical rectangular columns where both
axial load, N, and maximum design moment, M
x
are known
(see BS 8110: Part 1, Clauses 3.8.2, 3 and 4). It iterates x/h to
determine where the neutral axis lies. The sheet includes stress
and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the nal design.
For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
and bottom of the section, it is assumed that a (rotationally)
symmetrical arrangement will be required for the side faces.
This appears to be common practice, for small to medium sized
columns. For more detailed consideration see RCC52.xls. In
particular, see RCC53.xls regarding the issue of side bars.
COLUMN! assumes that the moment entered has already been
adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
For many side and all corner columns, there is no other choice
than to design for bi-axial bending, and the method given in
Clause 3.8.4.5 must be adhered to, i.e., RCC53.xls or sheets 2 and
3 of RCC51.xls should be used.
In theory, negative amounts of reinforcement required can be
obtained but these are superseded by requirements for minimum
amounts of reinforcement in columns. No adjustment is made
in the area of concrete occupied by reinforcement. Theoretical
overstressing by up to 2% is considered to be acceptable.
Maximum link centres are given. The routine in the area L61:U81
investigates shear when, in accordance with Clause 3.8.4.6, M/N
> 0.6h. In such cases either a maximum allowable shear is shown
where shear is critical, or input of shear and number of legs in
links allows the links to be designed for the applied shear. Even in
unbraced structures shear is rarely likely to be critical.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history
21
ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005
SOLID SLABS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 2006 TCC
INPUT Location D&D: interior span solid slab
Design moment, M 216.0 kNm/m fcu 40 N/mm c = 1.50
b 1.00 fy 500 N/mm s = 1.15
span 6500 mm steel class A
Height, h 1000 mm Section location
Bar mm Compression steel
cover 50 mm to these bars (deflection control only)
ONE or TWO WAY SLAB
OUTPUT D&D: interior span solid slab Compression steel = NONE
d = 1000 - 50 - 20/2 = 940.0 mm .
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.156 > K = 0.006 ok .
(3.4.4.4) z = 940.0 [0.5 + (0.25 - 0.006 /0.893)]^ = 933.6 > 0.95d = 893.0 mm
(3.4.4.1) As = 216.00E6 /500 /893.0 x 1.15 = 556 < min As = 1300 mm/m
PROVIDE H20 @ 225 = 1396 mm/m .
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 556 /1396 /1.00 = 132.8 N/mm
(Eqn 7) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 132.8) /120 /(0.9 + 0.244) = 2.000
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 26.0 x 2.000 = 52.000
. Actual L/d = 6500 /940.0 = 6.915 ok .
. .
CONTINUOUS SPAN
NONE
20
RCC11 Element/ SLABS!
22
RECTANGULAR BEAMS
INPUT Location D&D: Main beam 1st Floor @internal support
Design moment, M 282.0 kNm fcu 35 N/mm Jc 1.50
b 0.70 fy 500 N/mm Js 1.15
Span 8000 mm steel class A
Height, h 500 mm Comp cover 40 mm to main reinforcement
Breadth, b 300 mm Tens cover 48 mm to main reinforcement
Tens mm Side cover 35 mm to main reinforcement
Comp mm Section location
OUTPUT D&D: Main beam 1st Floor @internal support .
d = 500 - 48 - 25/2 = 439.5 mm
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.104 < K = 0.139 compression steel required
(3.4.4.4) z = 439.5(0.5 + (0.25 - 0.104/0.893)^ ) = 380.7 < 417.5 mm
(3.4.4.4) x = (439.5 - 380.2) /0.45 = 131.9 mm
d' = 40 + 12/2 = 46.0 mm .
(Fig 3.3) Gross fsc = 434.8 N/mm from strain diagram .
(Fig 3.3) net fsc = 434.8 - 0.67 x 35 /1.5 = 419.1 > 0 N/mm
Excess M = M - Mu = 282.0(0.139 - 0.104) /0.139 = 70.4 kNm
As' = 70.4E6 /419.1 /(439.5 - 46.0) = 427 mm
PROVIDE 4H12 compression steel = 452 mm .
(Fig 3.3) fst = 434.8 N/mm .
As = (70.4E6 /393.5 + 211.6E6 /380.2) /434.8 = 1692 mm .
PROVIDE 4H25 tension steel = 1963 mm
As enhanced by 14% for deflection
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 1,692 /1,963 /0.70 = 410.3 N/mm
(Table 3.11) Comp mod factor = 1 + 0.343 /(3 + 0.343) = 1.103 < 1.5
(Table 3.10) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 410.3) /120 /(0.9 + 4.866) = 0.646 < 2
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 26.0 x 1.103 x 0.646 = 18.533
(3.4.6.1) Actual L/d = 8000 /439.5 = 18.203 ok .
CONTINUOUS SPAN
25
12
RCC11 Element Design/ RECT~BEAMS!
23
SIMPLE TEE & L BEAMS
INPUT Location D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span
M 280.0 kNm fcu 40 N/mm Jc 1.50
b 1.00 fy 500 N/mm Js 1.15
span 8000 mm steel class A
h 500 mm Comp cover 48 mm to main reinforcement
bw 300 mm Tens cover 40 mm to main reinforcement
bf 400 mm Side cover 35 mm to main reinforcement
hf 100 mm Section location
Tens mm Section shape
Top steel 2 no & .
OUTPUT D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span .
d = 500 - 40 - 32/2 = 444.0 mm
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.156 > K = 0.089
(3.4.4.4) x = 444 /0.45(0.5 - (0.25 - 0.089 /0.893)^) = 110.4 mm (within flange)
(3.4.4.4) z = 444 - 0.45 x 110.4 = 394.3 < 421.8 mm
As' = 0 < 226 mm
(3.4.4.4) As = 280.0E6 / 394.3 /500 x 1.15 = 1633 mm .
PROVIDE 3H32 bottom = 2413 mm
.
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 1,633 /2,413 = 225.6 N/mm
(Table 3.11) Comp mod factor = 1 + 0.170 /(3 + 0.170) = 1.054 < 1.5
(Table 3.10) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 225.6) /120 /(0.9 + 3.551) = 1.021 < 2
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 24.1 x 1.054 x 1.021 = 25.961
(3.4.6.1) Actual L/d = 8000 /444.0 = 18.018 ok
INTERIOR SPAN
T BEAM 32
12
RCC11 Element Design/ TEE~BEAMS!
24
BEAM SHEAR
INPUT Location D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span, RH end
fcu = 35 N/mm Jc 1.50 d b
fyl = 500 N/mm Js 1.15 540 400
steel class A
Main Steel Link Legs Side cover Shear V UDL
4 2 35 264.0 97.9
No mm mm No mm kN kN/m
OUTPUT D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span, RH end
As = 1963 N/mm = 0.909%
(Eqn 3) v = 264.0 x 10 /400 /540 = 1.222 N/mm
(Table 3.8) vc = 0.685 N/mm, from table 3.8
(v - vc)bv = 214.9 N/mm
PROVIDE 2 legs H10 @ 300 = 227.7 N/mm
Provide for distance of 300 mm
then nominal links = 2 legs H10 @ 400
25 10
RCC11 Element Design/ SHEAR!
25
COLUMN DESIGN
INPUT Location D&D: external column
Axial load, N 1654 kN fcu 40 N/mm
Moment, M 125.0 kNm fy 500 N/mm
height, h 300 mm fyv 500 N/mm
breadth, b 300 mm
m
1.15 steel
Max bar mm
m
1.50 concrete
cover (to link) 30 mm steel class A
CALCULATIONS D&D: external column Link mm
from M As = {M - 0.67fcu.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)}/[(h/2-d').(fsc+fst).gm] (3.4.4.1)
from N As = (N - 0.67fcu.b.dc/gm) / (fsc - fst) (Figs 2.1, 2.2 & 3.3)
where As = Ast = Asc: dc=min(h,0.9x)
.67fcu/gm = 17.9 N/mm d' = 54.0 mm
fy/gm = 434.8 N/mm d = 246.0 mm
from iteration, n.a. depth, x, = 225.9 mm dc = 203.3 mm
0.67.fcu.b.dc/gm = 1089.7 kN
Steel comp strain = 0.00266
Steel tens strain = 0.00031
Steel stress in comp. face, fsc = 435 N/mm (Comp. stress in reinf.)
Steel stress in tensile face, fst = 62 N/mm (Tensile stress in reinf.)
from M, As = 1515 mm from N, As = 1516 mm
OUTPUT D&D: external column
OK
As req'd = 1515mm T&B:- PROVIDE 4H32
Links : - PROVIDE H8 @ 300
.
17.9 N/mm
Notes
Stresses in N/mm
2
Compression +ve
- - - Neutral axis
SYMMETRICAL RECT-ANGULAR
COLUMN DESIGN
(ie 2H32T&B - 1609mm T&B - 3.6% o/a - @ 192cc.)
Stress diagram
-62
435
0
0
Strain diagram
0.00266
-0.00031
0.00350
-0.00115
32
8
RCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!
26
This spreadsheet gives an interaction chart for moment
against axial load for rectangular sections with asymmetrical
reinforcement arrangements. Initially intended for beams with
axial load it is also applicable to asymmetrically or symetrically
reinforced columns.

MAIN!
Moments are considered to be about the x-x axis. All applied
loads and moments should be ultimate and positive, as positive
moments induce tension in the bottom reinforcement.
With asymmetrical arrangements of reinforcement the diagram
indicates that negative moments are theoretically possible. After
much consideration, the diagram is considered to be correct but
strictly is valid only for load cases where the member is operating
above 0.1fcu and with at least minimum eccentricity.
These limits are shown on the graph. A reciprocal diagram
is generated automatically when top and bottom steels are
reversed in the input.

Calcs!
Calcs! Shows the derivation of the chart where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal , then in intervals from n.a. depth
for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz. This sheet shows workings
and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
27
RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
Project
The Concrete Centre
Location Beam C1-2, Level 3 RMW 11-Apr-06 25
BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC12.xls v 3.0 on CD 2006 TCC
chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm s 1.15
fy 500 N/mm c 1.50
SECTION COVERS (to main steel)
h 450 mm TOP 30 mm
b 300 mm BOTTOM 30 mm
SIDES 30 mm
REINFORCEMENT
Bar No Area % Space
TOP 25 2 982 0.727 190.0 .
BOTTOM 32 3 2413 1.787 72.0 .
LOADCASES (ULS) CASE N M
xx CASE N M
xx
1 2400 100 2 1000 300
M:N interaction chart for 450 x 300 section, C35 concrete.
2400
1000
0.1Acfcu
M min
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
-200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT, Mxx kNm
A
X
I
A
L

C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
I
O
N
,

N

k
N
RCC12 Bending and Axial Force/ MAIN!
27
28
This spreadsheet designs punching shear links. Essentially it is
intended to be used with simple rectangular at slabs to BS 8110
i.e. with RCC33.xls. Equally it can be used in conjunction with
RCC81.xls or to check wide beams in, say, troughed slabs.
The spreadsheet is presented as four pairs of sheets dealing with
internal, edge, (external) corner and re-entrant corners.
It should be remembered that in slabs these traditional links are
time-consuming to x on site proprietary systems are generally
much quicker to x on site and this can far outweigh material
costs.

INTERNAL! (Similarly EDGE!,
CORNER! and REENTRANT!)
These sheets constitute the input and main output. Input is
fairly self-evident but, as ever, care must be exercised in ensuring
correct values are used. The top diagram acts as a legend and the
chart at the bottom of the sheet shows the column, any holes
and link perimeters, and should act both as a check for input and
help explain output. The x-x axis is across the page.
To the right is a combo-box that allows either:

Input of both V
t
(design shear transferred to column) and
V
eff
(design effective shear including allowance for moment
transfer) is required. These gures should be available from
sub-frame analysis e.g. output from RCC33.xls/ACTIONS!
B55:J62 under Reactions. A value of Veff, computed from
Vt and the factor according to location of the column (see
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.7.6) is suggested under Operating
Instructions: in general this gure may be regarded as a
maximum: calculating effective shear from moment transfer
generally results in lower gures.
or
Input of V
t
alone. V
eff
defaults to the values given in BS 8110:
Part 1, Clause 3.7.6
The areas of steel in the two directions should be averages in each
direction, i.e., ensure that it reects the actual reinforcement
in the sides of the perimeter, an average of column strips and
middle strips as appropriate.
Except when checking column face shear, holes under half the
slab depth or 1/4 column side are ignored as in the second
paragraph of BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.7.7.7. Multiple holes should
be aggregated pro-rata as if they were one hole at one position.

The shear at 1.5 d from the face of the column and at the rst
perimeter requiring no reinforcement is shown under Results.
Reinforcement can be increased both ways to increase vc to
overcome problems with rules regarding v > 2v
c
(see Clause
3.7.7.5). In the case of edge columns, a factor of 1.25 can be used
if bending is about an axis parallel to edge and 1.4 if perpendicular
(Clause 3.7.6.3). A worse case should be taken.

Int Dets! (Edge Dets!, Corner Dets!
and Re-ent Dets! similar)
These sheets show design calculations, determination of critical
perimeters, enclosed areas and link requirements complete with
references to BS 8110. They are not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes. The area load is
deducted from V
t
, before V
t
is enhanced.
These sheets use the relationship V
eff
/V
t
to calculate shear at
successive perimeters. Deductions for holes in the calculation of
shear perimeters are calculated by nding the angle dened by
the extremities of the hole.
The projection of this angle is deducted from the appropriate
perimeter.

Notes!
RCC13 Punching Shear.xls
29
Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre
Location ECBP Typical Floor Column B3 rmw 11-Apr-2006 31
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC13.xls
v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68
MATERIALS fcu N/mm
2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link mm 10
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 300 E mm 150
B mm 500 F mm -50
G mm 125 H mm 100
LOADING Vt kN 2954 0 0 3397.1
ult UDL kN/m
2
16.10
SLAB h mm 525 dx mm 484 Asx mm
2
/m 5362
dy mm 455.5 Asy mm
2
/m 3908
ave d mm 469.75 ave As % 0.983
RESULTS Veff = 3397.1 kN vc = 0.7349 N/mm
2
(Table 3.8)
At col. face, v max = 4.899 N/mm
2
At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.0886 N/mm
2
At 3d perimeter, v = 0.5896 N/mm
2
PROVIDE LINKS (single leg) .
Perimeter 1 234 from col face
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0 Plan
0 0 0
15 H10 @ 240
21 H10 @ 295
29 H10 @ 300
0
0
0
0
0
INTERNAL
RCC13 Punching Shear/ INTERNAL!
29
30
Project
Location Column B2 rmw 11-Apr-2006 32
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68
MATERIALS fcu
N/mm
2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv
N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link mm 8
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 200 E mm -62.5
B mm 200 F mm -275
D mm 50 G mm 150
H mm 125
LOADING Vt kN 223 0 0 1399
ult UDL
kN/m
2
14.40
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 207 Asx
mm
2
/m
2010
dy mm 187 Asy
mm
2
/m
1005
ave d mm 197 ave As % 0.754
RESULTS Veff = 312.2 kN vc = 0.8032
N/mm
2
(Table 3.8)
At col. face, v max = 1.976
N/mm
2
At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.0364
N/mm
2
At 2.25d perimeter, v = 0.7813
N/mm
2
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0 Plan
0 0
6 H8 @ 220
EDGE
7 H8 @ 265
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RCC13 Punching Shear/ EDGE!
30
31
Project
Location Columns A1, D1, A5 & D5 rmw 11-Apr-2006 33
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68
MATERIALS fcu N/mm
2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link mm 8
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm -50
B mm 250 F mm -250
C mm 0 G mm 100
D mm 0 H mm 100
LOADING Vt kN 272.0 0 0 350
ult UDL kN/m
2
16.10
2
/m 2010
dy mm 195 Asy mm
2
/m 2010
2
(Table 3.8)
At hole face, vmax = 2.745 N/mm
2
2
2
Perimeter 5 717.5 from col face
0 0
0 0
0 0 Plan
0 0
6 H8 @ 140
CORNER
8 H8 @ 125
5 H8 @ 275
6 H8 @ 265
7 H8 @ 265
0
0
0
0
RCC13 Punching Shear/ CORNER!
31
32
Project
Location An example rmw 11-Apr-2006 34
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC CORNER chg - R68
MATERIALS fcu N/mm
2
40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm
2
500 VALID DESIGN
link mm 10
steel class A
B mm 350 F mm -425
C mm 0 G mm 250
D mm 0 H mm 250
LOADING Vt kN 447.0 0 0 591.6
ult UDL kN/m
2
14.40
2
/m 2580
dy mm 180 Asy mm
2
/m 2580
2
(Table 3.8)
At col. face, v max = 2.534 N/mm
2
2
2
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0 Plan
0 0
6 H10 @ 220
RE-ENTRANT
8 H10 @ 255
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RCC13 Punching Shear/ REENTRANT!
32
33
RCC14 Crack Widths.xls
RCC14 Crack Width.xls
Crack Width!
In the design of reinforced concrete structures, it is assumed
that the tensile capacity of concrete does not contribute to the
strength of the structure, and steel reinforcement is provided
to resist the internal tensile forces that develop. Because steel
reinforcement can develop the resisting tensile force only by
extension (i.e. steel needs to extend to develop stress), and
hence causes cracks to form in the surrounding concrete, cracks
in reinforced concrete structures cannot be avoided. In day-to-
day practical design, crack widths are controlled by limiting the
maximum spacings of the tension reinforcement. However there
are times when the engineer will need to carry out more rigorous
analysis and calculations, e.g. in the design of water-retaining
structures, and design for severe exposure where estimation/
prediction of crack width is important.
This spreadsheet calculates crack widths in accordance with BS
8110 and BS 8007.
Crack width limits are set as:
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.12.11.2.1 0.3 mm In normal
reinforced concrete structures
BS 8007 0.2 mm In water-retaining structures under severe
or very severe exposure
BS 8007 0.1 mm In water-retaining structures with critical
aesthetic appearance
In calculation of crack width, elastic theory with cracked section
is adopted. Both BS 8110: Part 2 and BS 8007 appendix B gives
the crack width formula.
w = 3a
cr
m
/{1+2(a
cr
-c)/(h-x)}
In calculating crack width, w, the average strain,
m
, at the level
where cracking is being considered allows a stiffening effect,
2
,
of concrete between cracks
where
1
is the theoretical strain at the level considered, calculated
on the assumption of a cracked section using half the concrete
modulus Ec to allow for creep effects.
2 = b(h-x)
2
/3E
s
A
s
(d-x)
BS 8007 allows an additional enhancement factor of 1.5 in
calculating e
2
for structures designed with a crack width limit
of 0.1 mm. The spreadsheet provides an option to adopt this
enhanced factor if design crack width is limit to 0.1 mm. To
choose this option, select the blue check box on the right hand
margin.
a
cr
is the distance from the point considered to the surface of
the nearest longitudinal bar. The input value is defaulted to the
distance at the point on the tension face midway between two
bars. However other values can be entered to suit other locations,
e.g. corner bars. The default value can be reset by pressing the
blue button on the right hand margin.
Notes!
34
Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc
Client
Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location
Grid line 1 RC 11-Apr-2006 33
Crack Width Calculations to BS8110: 2005/ BS8007:1987 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC14.xls v 3.0on CD 2006 TCC
chg R68
CRACK WIDTH CALCULATIONS - FLEXURE -
INPUT
fcu= 35 N/mm
2
fy= 500 N/mm
2
Area of reinforcement " As " = 2093 mm
2
b = 1000 mm
h = 250 mm
d = 200 mm
Minimum cover to tension reinforcement " CO " = 40 mm
Maxmum bar spacing " S " = 150 mm
Bar dia " DIA " = 20 mm
" a
cr
" =(((S/2)^2+(CO+DIA/2)^2)^(1/2)-DIA/2) as default or enter other value = 80.14 mm
"acr " is distance from the point considered to the surface of the nearest longitudinal bar
Applied service moment " Ms "= 69.0 KNm
CALCULATIONS
moduli of elasticity of concrete " Ec" = (1/2)*(20+0.2*fcu) = 13.5 KN/mm
2
moduli of elasticity of steel " Es " = 200.0 KN/mm
2
Modular ratio " " = (Es/Ec) = 14.81
" " = As/bd = 0.010
depth to neutral axis, "x" = (-. +((.)
2
+ 2..)
0.5
.d = 85 mm
" Z " = d-(x/3) = 172
Reinforcement stress " fs " = Ms/(As*Z) = 192 N/mm
2
Concrete stress " fc " = (fs*As)/(0.5*b*x) = 9.50 N/mm
2
Strain at soffit of concrete beam/slab " 1 " = (fs/Es)*(h-x)/(d-x) = 0.001375
Strain due to stiffening effect of concrete between cracks " 2 " =
2
= b.(h-x)
2
/(3.Es.As.(d-x)) for crack widths of 0.2 mm Used
2
= 1.5.b.(h-x)
2
/(3.Es.As.(d-x)) for crack widths of 0.1 mm n/a
2
= 0.000189
Average strain for calculation of crack width "
m
"=
1
-
2
= 0.001186
Calculated crack width, " w " = 3.a
cr
.m/(1+2.(a
cr
-c)/(h-x))
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH, 'w' = 0.19 mm
The Concrete Centre
-
RCC14 Crack Widths/ CRACK WIDTHS!
34
35
RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls
RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls analyses sub-frames in accordance
with BS 8110 using moment distribution. Inputs are required on
two sheets.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which should
be self-explanatory. As in other spreadsheets, avoid pasting input
from one cell to another as this may cause formatting and other
errors.
The dimension of the ange width, bf, is automated to be either
bw + 0.07 x span for L beams or bw + 0.14 x span for T beams.
Unwanted data cells are greyed-out. Supports may be specied
by giving dimentions and end conditions in cells C21:J27. The use
of C, K, or E in column C can alter the characteristics of a support
from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. Where supports are
dimentions the remote ends of supports may be F for xed in
columns F and J; otherwise they default to pinned. Extraneous
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks, mainly for missing entries, are
carried out and any problems are highlighted. At the bottom
of the sheet a simplistic but to-scale arrangement and loading
diagram is shown. This is given to aid data checking.
It may prove prudent to write down expected values for
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!
Also, under Operating instructions, the user should input the
type of redistribution required as explained more fully under
Redistribution.
0 means full redistribution.
1 limits alternate span upward redistribution to the
percentage specied.
2 means no span moment redistribution.
UDLs are input as line loads e.g. 4kN/m2 for a 5.0 m wide bay
would be input as 20 kN/m. Point loads should be at least
0.001m from supports.
Ultimate and characteristic support reactions are given at the
bottom of the sheet

ACTIONS!
This sheet includes charts showing the elastic bending moment
diagram, redistributed moment envelope, elastic shear forces
and envelope of redistributed shear forces. These diagrams are
based on data from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! at 1/20
span points. Maximum span and support moments are given.
The user is required to input desired amounts of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
distribution according to the users preference for calculating span
moments (see Redistribution). Redistribution input is included
close to the bending moment diagrams in order to give the user
control rather than relying on blanket redistribution.
The sheet also tabulates elastic and redistributed ultimate shears
and column moments according to the various load cases.

Analysis!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes

Notes!
36
The Concrete Centre
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 from B to E RMW 11-Apr-2006 35
chg R68
LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E
SPANS
L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 7.000 600 375 150 T 1355 min max
SPAN 2 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 6.000 600 375 150 T 1215
SPAN 5 0
SPAN 6 0
SUPPORTS
ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 2.95 400 300 F 3.10 400 300 P
Support 2 3.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 3 0.00 3.10 400 300 P
Support 4 K
Support 5 4.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 6
Support 7
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 17.50 5.60 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 24 6 2.000 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 5 18 4.500 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 25 25 5.000 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 24.42 8.65 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL 7.5 4.5 1.500 2.400 Part UDL
LOADING DIAGRAM
B E
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 153.5 724.8 778.3 478.4 75.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 177.7 465.9 568.4 415.9 -8.2
EVEN SPANS LOADED 27.2 621.0 636.4 271.0 116.7
Characteristic Dead 72.8 354.6 386.7 237.2 30.5
Characteristic Imposed 47.4 142.7 148.1 91.4 46.2
-
RCC21 Subframe Analysis/ MAIN!
36
37
The Concrete Centre
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6, from B to E RMW 11-Apr-06 36
B Elastic Moments E B Redistributed Envelope E
Elastic M 95.3 743.3 868.6 427.6 34.3 ~ kNm
Redistributed M 90.5 557.5 694.9 406.2 32.6 ~ kNm
b 0.950 0.750 0.800 0.950 0.950 ~ ~
Redistribution 5.0% 25.0% 20.0% 5.0% 5.0%
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 185.0 633.1 400.1 121.4 ~ ~
Redistributed M 152.1 746.8 373.5 118.8 ~ ~
b 0.822 1.180 0.934 0.979 ~ ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)
B
Elastic Shears
E B
E
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 191.0 312.6 435.6 432.2 356.9 282.0
Redistributed V 177.7 302.0 422.8 433.2 345.1 273.7
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 203.4 118.4 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 204.7 116.7 ~ ~ ~ ~
COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS Above 21.0 80.7 -4.1
LOADED Below 15.0 32.9 -40.2 -2.2
ODD SPANS Above 55.6 0.7 17.5
LOADED Below 39.7 0.3 51.6 9.5
EVEN SPANS Above -22.7 116.5 -22.2
LOADED Below -16.2 47.6 -108.0 -12.1
Based on support
moments of
min(bM, Malt/b)
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 10 20 30 40
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 10 20 30 40
-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 10 20 30 40
-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 10 20 30 40
RCC21 Subframe Analysis/ ACTIONS!
37
38
RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet analyses and designs (A & D: Analysis and
design) up to six spans of one-way solid slabs to BS 8110 using
continuous beam analysis. There is user input on each of the
rst four sheets and choice of reinforcement for each span is
implicit.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which
should be self-explanatory.
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data in
cells C16:C21 under L (m). Unwanted data cells are greyed-
out. The use of C, K or E can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. Extraneous
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems are
highlighted.
For the purposes of dening load, the section is assumed to be
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case
in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of
ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of distribution according to
the users preferences. Requesting redistribution at a cantilever
produces a warning message in the remarks column.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are greyed-out.
Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specied for a
support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
diameter specied for the right hand support of a span carries
over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due
to differences in moment either side of the support, differences
in depth or to comply with minimum 50% span steel; practicality
should dictate that the maximum number of bars at each support
should be used.
With regard to deection, the area of steel required, As mm2 /
m, shown under heading Design, may have been automatically
increased in order to reduce service stress, fs, and increase
modication factors to satisfy deection criteria. The percentage
increase, if any, is shown under Deection. With respect to
cantilevers, neither compression steel enhancement nor
consideration of rotation at supports is included.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the
Bending Moment Diagram and Graf! should help to determine
whether any curtailment of this reinforcement is warranted.
To avoid undue sensitivity, especially with regard to deection,
reinforcement may be over-stressed by up to 2.5%.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per bay and per cubic metre.
Bay and support widths are required as input.
Simplied curtailment rules, as dened in BS 8110 Clause 3.12, are
used to determine lengths of bars. The gures should be treated as
approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects
of designers and detailers preferences, rationalisation, etc, etc.
They do allow for distribution steel but not for reinforcement in
supporting beams or for mesh.
Analysis!
checking purposes.
Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instance service stress, fs,
has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
division by zero.

Graf!
out other than for checking purposes.
Notes!
39
Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 38
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job No
chg - R68
LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G
MATERIALS COVERS
fcu 35 N/mm h agg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fy 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fyv 500 N/mm c 1.50 concrete
steel class A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS
SPAN 1 8.000 350 Support No Type
SPAN 2 7.200 250 1 K
SPAN 3 7.200 250 LOADING PATTERN 5 K
SPAN 4 4.500 250 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.6
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING
Dead Imposed Position Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Load Load from left Span 4 Load Load from left
UDL 9.70 5.00 ~~~~ UDL 6.00 1.50 ~~~~
PL 1 35.00 1.000 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 6.00 1.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 8.50 5.00 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
LOADING DIAGRAM
A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Max Imposed 19.00 27.17 22.79 25.77 3.28
Min Imposed -0.72 6.45 5.46 3.07 -3.75
MAX ULTIMATE 120.17 141.99 108.37 110.70 16.35
The Concrete Centre
RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!
39
40
Project
The Concrete Centre
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 39
Checked Revision Job No
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)
A Elastic Moments G A Redistributed Envelope G
Elastic M 85.0 60.4 71.2 ~ ~
Redistributed M 72.2 60.4 64.1 ~ ~
b 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.900 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 10.0%
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 168.7 19.6 69.3 13.5 ~ ~
Redistributed M 166.4 15.6 72.1 12.4 ~ ~
b 0.986 0.798 1.040 0.917 ~ ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)
A G A Redistributed Shears G
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 120.9 103.1 42.3 35.5 70.1 74.4
Redistributed V 120.2 101.5 43.6 37.2 71.1 73.6
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 40.1 17.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Elastic Shears
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
40
41
Project
The Concrete Centre
Av mm 1000 7000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 166.4 72.2
b 1.00 0.99 0.85
V kN/m 120.17 101.47
DESIGN d mm 319.0 315.0 317.0
As mm/m 455 1287 552
As' mm/m 0 As' 0 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @ 225 @ 0 H 16 @ 350
As prov mm/m 503 0 As prov 574
BTM STEEL H 12 @ 200 H 20 @ 175 H 16 @ 350
As' prov mm/m 565 As prov 1795 As' prov 574
SHEAR v N/mm2 0.377 0.320
vc N/mm2 0.420 0.424
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 25.397 Allowed 26.178 ok (As increased by 32.8%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Av 0 7200
ACTIONS M 72.2 15.6 60.4
b 0.85 0.80 1.00
V 43.56 37.24
DESIGN d 217.0 219.0 219.0
As 807 325 668
As' 0 As top 412 0
TOP STEEL H 16 @ 225 H 10 @ 175 H 12 @ 150
As prov 894 As' prov 449 As prov 754
BTM STEEL H 16 @ 600 H 12 @ 300 H 12 @ 300
As' prov 335 As prov 377 As' prov 377
SHEAR v 0.201 0.170
vc 0.613 0.576
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 32.877 Allowed 55.325 ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!
41
42
Project
The Concrete Centre
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw Apr-2006 41
Av 0 7200
ACTIONS M 60.4 72.1 64.1
b 1.00 1.04 0.90
V 71.13 73.63
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 668 797 709
As' 0 As' 0 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @ 150 10 @ 0 H 12 @ 150
As prov 754 0 As prov 754
BTM STEEL H 12 @ 200 H 12 @ 100 H 10 @ 200
SHEAR v 0.325 0.336
vc 0.576 0.576
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Av 0 4500
ACTIONS M 64.1 12.4 0.0
b 0.90 0.92 1.00
V 38.55 16.35
DESIGN d 219.0 220.0 219.0
As 709 325 325
As' 0 As top 406 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @ 150 H 12 @ 275 H 12 @ 300
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 225 H 10 @ 225 H 12 @ 300
SHEAR v 0.176 0.075
vc 0.576 0.457
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!
42
43
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deections in one-way
solid slabs according to BS 8110 Part 2. The spreadsheet is based
on RCC31 but has an initial sheet JOBDATA! to allow input of all
the variables and performance criteria required. The calculation
of deection is not carried out automatically. The user is required
to press the Calculate deections button in column N of
SPANS! (or elsewhere) when every other aspect of the design has
been completed. Deections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS! They are shown as a range due to potential
pattern loading. In SPANS! the worst case is compared with the
specied serviceability criteria.
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction
process mean that deection calculations carried out in
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over
conservative) compared with actual measured deections. For
instance, a slabs deection is very dependent upon whether the
slab has cracked in bending during construction or not.
The calculated deections might be regarded as being akin to a
95% condence limit that they will not be exceeded in service.
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way
solid slabs to BS 8110 using continuous slab analysis. There is user
input on each of the rst four sheets and choice of reinforcement
for each span is implicit. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN! User
input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS!
JOBDATA!
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual.
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs of span and loads,
most of which should be self-explanatory. The number of spans
is altered by entering or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted
data cells are greyed-out. The use of C, K or E can alter the
characteristics of the end supports from cantilever to knife-edge
to encastre. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or by messages
in red. Under Operating Instructions a number of checks are
carried out and problems are highlighted.
ACTIONS!

ACTIONS!
in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of distribution according to
the users preferences (see Table 1). Requesting redistribution at a
cantilever produces a warning message in the remarks column.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
viewed as being unduly conservative.

SPANS!
calculations in Bar!
Unwanted cells are greyed-out.
Deection calculations involve many iterative calculations,
which may take some time on even the fastest of computers.
Calculation of deections is therefore controlled by clicking
the Calculate Deections button in column N and should be
undertaken once all the design is complete. Deection results will
only appear on this sheet after the Calculate Deections button
has been used and the macro has been allowed to complete its
iterations. They will disappear if relevant data (e.g. span, load) is
changed. Should the span fail deection criteria, the user has the
option to increase bottom steel at cell M24 etc, and reuse the
Calculate Deection button.
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due
to differences in moment at the edge of support,differences in
depth or to comply with minimum 50% span steel; practicality
should dictate that the greater number should be used.
44
WEIGHT!
Bay and support widths and distribution steel diameters are
required as input.
Simplied curtailment rules, as dened in BS 8110 Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The gures should be
treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with
the effects of designers and detailers preferences, rationalisation,
etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in supporting beams or
for mesh.

Uls!
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
than for checking purposes. In many instances, service stress, fs,
division by zero.
Def!
This sheet calculates deections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and condition it
considers moment - As, As, d, d, inertia - I, cracked neutral axis
depth - x, cracked inertia I, uncracked moment capacity Mcr,
z, nal x, concrete stresses fc, moment of resistance MOR,
curvature -1/r, load, slope and curvature to calculate deection.
The sheet is rather large and is not necessarily intended for
Graf!

Notes!
45
Project
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G
MATERIALS COVERS
fy 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fyv 500 N/mm c 1.50 concrete Concrete density 24 kN/m
steel class A
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent = L / 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)
Maximum imposed = L / 500
Max affecting partitions/walls = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design crack width, W
k
= 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)
RH 50 % relative humidity f
cm
= 32 N/mm Table 3.1
Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) E
cm
= 30.16 kN/mm & Annex A
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES C
LOADING SEQUENCE - Span 1
Loading At age E
t
E
t
E
t
kN/m Days kN/mm kN/mm kN/mm
Self weight 5.40 7 3.44 6.80 3.44 6.80 1.84 10.64
Partitions/walls 1.00 90 2.11 9.68 2.11 9.68 0 30.16
Other dead loads 1.50 100 2.07 9.82 2.07 9.82 1.55 11.83
Permanent imposed 0.63 90 2.11 9.68 2.11 9.68
Variable load 1.88 0 30.16
Composite 10.40 2.94 7.65 2.41 8.84
(t,t
0
)
0
The Concrete Centre
At 90 days At 70 years At 70 years
from 100 days on
20
Permanent Total load
from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 100 days
20 20
0
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ JOBDATA!
45
46
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC
chg - R68
SPAN 1 6.000 225 Support No Type
SPAN 2 6.000 225 1 K
SPAN 4 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.6
UDL 6.90 3.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 6.90 3.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 6.90 3.50 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
LOADING DIAGRAM
A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 16.56 45.54 45.54 16.56
Max Imposed 9.45 23.10 23.10 9.45
Min Imposed -1.05 11.55 11.55 -1.05
MAX ULTIMATE 38.14 99.34 99.34 38.14
The Concrete Centre
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ MAIN!
46
47
Project
The Concrete Centre
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m) Elastic
A G A G
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 54.9 54.9 0.0 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.0 46.7 46.7 0.0 ~ ~ ~
b 1.000 0.850 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 50.2 28.8 50.2 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 47.7 22.8 47.7 ~ ~ ~
b 0.950 0.792 0.950 ~ ~ ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m) Elastic
A G A G
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 39.1 54.9 45.8 45.8 54.9 39.1
Redistributed V 38.1 53.6 45.8 45.8 53.6 38.1
SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included .
SPAN No 1 2 3
Before partitions 8.8 0.1 8.8 mm
Permanent 22.4 2.8 22.4 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Redistributed
Redistributed
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!
47
48
Project
The Concrete Centre
Av mm 0 6000
b 1.00 0.95 0.85
V kN/m 38.14 53.56
DESIGN d mm 195.0 194.0 195.0
As mm/m 293 595 580
As' mm/m 0 As top 293 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 125
As prov mm/m 314 As' prov 314 As prov 628
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 12 @ 175 H 10 @ 250
SHEAR v N/mm2 0.196 0.275
vc N/mm2 0.437 0.551
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 17.43 < 24.00 Imposed = 10.32 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 5
mm
Affecting partitions = 13.67 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
d'/x ok ok ok
Av 0 6000
ACTIONS M 46.7 22.8 46.7
b 0.85 0.79 0.85
V 45.78 45.78
DESIGN d 195.0 194.0 195.0
As 580 293 580
As' 0 As top 293 0
TOP STEEL H 10 @ 125 H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 125
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 12 @ 350 H 10 @ 250
SHEAR v 0.235 0.235
vc 0.551 0.551
Links not required
mm
d'/x ok ok ok
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!
48
49
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!
Project
The Concrete Centre
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw Apr-2006 41
Av 0 6000
ACTIONS M 46.7 47.7 0.0
b 0.85 0.95 1.00
V 53.56 38.14
DESIGN d 192.0 194.0 195.0
As 589 595 293
TOP STEEL H 16 @ 300 H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 250
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 12 @ 175 H 10 @ 250
SHEAR v 0.279 0.196
vc 0.568 0.437
Links not required
mm
d'/x ok ok ok
Av 0 0
ACTIONS M 0.0 0.0 0.0
b 1.00 0.00 0.00
V #VALUE! #VALUE!
DESIGN d -30.0 -31.0 -30.0
As 0 427 413
As' 0 As top 413 As' -196
TOP STEEL H 10 #DIV/0! H 10 @ 175 H 10 @ 175
As prov #DIV/0! As' prov 449 As prov 449
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 450 H 12 @ 250 H 10 @ 450
SHEAR v #VALUE! #VALUE!
vc #NUM! #VALUE! #NUM!
#VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = #DIV/0! Imposed = #DIV/0! Precamber (mm) = 5
mm
Affecting partitions = #DIV/0! #DIV/0! Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As #DIV/0! > 4% > 4%
d'/x ok ok FAILS
Crack width #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
49
50
Using continuous beam analysis, this spreadsheet analyses and
designs up to six spans of ribbed slab to BS 8110. There is user
input on each of the rst three sheets and choice of reinforcement
for each span is implicit.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering or
deleting data under L(m). Unwanted data cells are greyed-out.
The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to xed. Extraneous data
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and any problems
are highlighted.
For the purposes of dening load the section under consideration
is assumed to be 1.00m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc., are based on
moments and shear per rib. Great care should be taken to ensure
this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It may
prove prudent to write expected values of bending moments at
each support down before progressing to ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given the bottom of the sheet

ACTIONS!
input desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments in
line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the users preferences. See Redistribution (page XX).

SPANS!
The reinforcement diameter specied for a support carries
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specied
for the right hand support of a span carries over to the left
hand support of the next span. It should be noted that hogging
moment is checked both at the centre of support (solid section)
and the solid/ rib intersection (ribbed section). As the moments
at the solid/ rib intersection each side of the support may differ,
it may be possible to obtain a design giving different numbers of
bars each side of the support.
Practicality should dictate that the greater number of bars are
used for detailing. Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions
within a span are checked and are used in the determination of
top steel in spans.

WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! Gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
Simplied curtailment rules, as dened in BS 8110: Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used in the determination of lengths of bars. The gures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers and detailers preferences,
rationalisation, etc, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in

Analysis!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out.
It is not necessarily intended for printing out, other than for
checking purposes.
Bar!
than for checking purposes. In spans, service stress, fs, may be
reduced to satisfy deection criteria. In many instances, minima
of 1.0 or 0.0001 have been used to avoid problems with division
by zero.

Graf!

Notes!
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls
51
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 43
LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 5a
MATERIALS COVERS (to links, or if no links, to reinf)
fy 500 N/mm m 1.15 steel Btm cover 20 mm
fyv 500 N/mm m 1.50 concrete Side cover 20 mm
steel class A RIBS
Density 23.6 kN/m (Normal weight concrete) slab depth, hf 100 mm
SPANS Solid (mm) Rib width 150 mm
L (m) H (mm) Left Right Centres 900 mm
SPAN 1 2.000 275 450 1100 1 in 10 taper
SPAN 2 7.000 275 1100 1100 SUPPORTS
SPAN 3 7.500 275 1100 450 Support No Type
SPAN 4 1 C
SPAN 5 4 K
SPAN 6 K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
Self Add Dead Imposed Position Self Add Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Weight Load Load from left Span 4 Weight Load Load from left
UDL 5.73 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ Span 5 ~ ~ ~ ~
UDL 4.19 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ Span 6 ~ ~ ~ ~
UDL 3.82 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~
LOADING PATTERN min max
DEAD 1 1.4
IMPOSED 0 1.6
LOADING DIAGRAM
1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 43.0 58.0 18.2 ~ ~ ~
Max Imposed 20.4 34.9 13.3 ~ ~ ~
Min Imposed 7.3 17.3 -1.6 ~ ~ ~
MAX ULTIMATE 94.9 133.0 46.6 ~ ~ ~
51
52
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 44
1 Elastic Moments 5a 1 Redistributed Envelope 5a
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 35.9 97.9 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 0.0 35.9 83.2 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
b 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 0.00 66.48 75.34 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.00 62.29 71.04 ~ ~ ~
b 1.000 0.937 0.943 #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
1 Elastic Shears 5a 1 Redistributed Shears 5a
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 0.0 35.9 58.2 66.8 70.3 47.9
Redistributed V 0.0 35.9 59.1 67.1 68.3 46.6
SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
The Concrete Centre
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 5 10 15 20
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 5 10 15 20
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 5 10 15 20
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 5 10 15 20
52
53
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 45
b 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 243.0 239.0
As mm 16 0 327
As' mm 0 As T 188 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2 H 12 /rib 1 H 16 /rib 2 H 20 /rib
+ 5 H8 between + 4 H8 between
As prov mm 478 As T prov 201 As prov 829
BTM STEEL 1 H 16 /rib 1 H 20 /rib 1 H 16 /rib
SHEAR V kN/m 0.00 V 35.85
v N/mm 0.000 v 0.423
vc N/mm 0.658 Link 6 vc 0.935
LINKS . 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
Bar & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Dist to link ok ok ok
b 1.00 0.94 0.85
DESIGN d mm 239.0 239.0
As mm 327 574 (710 mm for defln) 759
As' mm 0 As T 356 As' 12
SHEAR V kN/m 59.09 V 67.12
v N/mm 0.945 v 1.126
vc N/mm 0.935 Link 6 vc 0.935
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 175 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 525
239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9)
236.5 (x=26.3<hf/0.9)
53
54
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!
Project
ACTIONS M kNm/m 83.2 @col face 71.0 0.0
b 0.85 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 239.0 239.0
As mm 759 654 (955 mm for defln) 0
As' mm 0 As T 265 As' 0
SHEAR V kN/m 68.30 V 46.55
v N/mm 1.152 v 0.890
vc N/mm 0.935 Link 6 vc 0.935
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 700 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
236.5 (x=26.3<hf/0.9)
54
55
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ WEIGHT!
Project
Support 1 2 H 12 1025 0.888 1.8
5 H 8 1025 0.395 2.0
Span 1 1 H 16 2225 1.578 3.5
Support 2 2 H 20 2250 2.466 11.1
4 H 8 2250 0.395 3.6
Span 2 4 H 12 4425 0.888 15.7
Support 3 2 H 20 3625 2.466 17.9
4 H 8 3625 0.395 5.7
Span 3 3 H 12 4675 0.888 12.5
Support 4 2 H 20 2400 2.466 11.8
4 H 8 2400 0.395 3.8
BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 1 H 16 1150 1.578 1.8
Span 1 1 H 20 400 2.466 1.0
Support 2 1 H 16 3475 1.578 5.5
Span 2 2 H 25 4750 3.853 36.6
Support 3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 3 2 H 25 5900 3.853 45.5
Support 4 3 H 16 1725 1.578 8.2
LINKS Span 1 1 H 6 800 0.222 0.2
Span 2 9 H 6 800 0.222 1.6
Span 3 9 H 6 800 0.222 1.6
SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide.
Reinforcement density (kg/m) 12.92 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh (kg) 202.3
The Concrete Centre
55
56
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet analyses, designs and estimates deections in
up to six spans of continuous ribbed slab. Design is to BS 8110
Parts 1 and 2 and is analysed using continuous beam analysis,.
There is user input on each of the rst four sheets and choice of
reinforcement for each span is implicit.
The spreadsheet is based on RCC32 and similarly to RCC31R has
an initial sheet JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and
performance criteria required. The calculation of deection is
not carried out automatically. The user is required to press the
Calculate deections button in column N of SPANS! when every
other aspect of the design is complete. Deections are given as a
range in a chart at the bottom of ACTIONS! They are shown as a
range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS! the worst case
is compared with the specied serviceability criteria.
conservative) compared to actual measured deections. For
instance, a slabs deection is very dependent upon whether the
slab has cracked in bending during construction or not.
The calculated deections might be regarded as being akin to
95% condence limits.

JOBDATA!

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering
or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted data cells are greyed-
out. The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end
are highlighted. The data under Solid dene the distances from
support centrelines to the start of the ribbed cross-section.
is assumed to be 1.00 m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc., are based
on moments and shear per rib. Great care should be taken to
ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It
may prove prudent to write down expected values of bending
moments at each support before progressing to ACTIONS!
Combo-boxes to the right under Operating Instructions dene
minimum bar sizes to be used (e.g. at supports between ribs) and
whether the user wants to use links or not. If links are required
these may be either designed or nominal links; the centres of
nominal links can be changed.
Towards the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is
given to aid data checking. At the bottom of the sheet, support
reactions are given.

ACTIONS!
input desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments in
line 21. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the users preferences. See Redistribution under Assumptions
made in Table 1.

Deection calculations involve many iterative calculations, which
take some time on even the fastest of computers. Calculation of
deections is therefore controlled by clicking the Calculate
Deections button in column L and elsewhere and should be
undertaken once all the design is complete. The worst case
deection is taken in subsequent checks and this might be viewed
as being unduly conservative.

SPANS!
calculations in Bar! Unwanted cells are greyed-out.
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specied for
the right hand support of a span carries over to the left hand
support of the next span.
It should be noted that hogging moment is checked both at the
centre of support (solid section) and the solid/ rib intersection
(ribbed section). As the moments at the solid/ rib intersection
each side of the support may differ, it may be possible to obtain a
design giving different numbers of bars each side of the support.
Practicality should dictate that the greater number of bars is used
for detailing. Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a
57
span are checked and are used in the determination of top steel
in spans. For top steel at supports, reinforcement requirements
are checked at both the support centreline (solid) and at the start
of the ribbed cross-section. Deection calculations involve many
iterative calculations, and these are controlled by clicking the
Calculate Deections button in column N. Deection results will
only appear on the spreadsheet after the Calculate Deections
button has been used and the macro been allowed to complete
its iterations. They will disappear again if relevant data (e.g. span,
load) is changed. Should the span fail deection criteria, the user
has the option to increase bottom steel at cell M24 etc, and reuse
the Calculate Deection button.

WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! Gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
Simplied curtailment rules, as dened in BS 8110 Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used in the determination of lengths of bars. The gures
rationalisation, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in

Uls!

Sls!
Bar!
than for checking purposes. In spans, service stress, fs, may be
reduced to satisfy deection criteria. In many instances, minima
of 1.0 or 0.0001 have been used to avoid problems with division
by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deections at 1/20th points for each
span and for each load condition. The sheet is large and is not
necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

Graf!
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history as in the Notes!
sheet in other spreadsheets.
58
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ JOBDATA!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 43
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
COVERS (to all steel)
MATERIALS Top cover 20 mm
fcu 35 N/mm h agg 20 mm Btm cover 20 mm
fy 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Side cover 20 mm
fyv 500 N/mm c 1.50 concrete Concrete density 23.6 kN/m
steel class A
Max affecting partitions = L / 350 or 20 mm
Design Crack width, W
k
= 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
cm
= 36 N/mm Table 3.1
cm
LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m)
Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 5 Span 6 At age
kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m Days
Self weight 3.93 4.19 4.11 4.27 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 28
Other dead loads 3.81 3.71 2.50 2.50 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanent imposed 0.79 0.79 0.75 0.75 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 28
Variable load 2.37 2.36 2.25 2.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Total 11.89 12.04 10.61 10.77 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
COMPOSITE E and VALUES - Span 1
E
t
E
t
E
t
kN/mm kN/mm kN/mm
Self weight 3.60 6.82 3.60 6.82 1.27 13.83
Partitions 2.74 8.40 2.74 8.40 0 31.37
Other dead loads 2.32 9.43 2.32 9.43 1.01 15.60
Permanent imposed 2.74 8.40 2.74 8.40
Variable load 0 31.37
Composite 2.93 7.98 2.35 9.37
The Concrete Centre
from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on
15 17 20
At 70 years At 28 days At 70 years
0
(t,t
0
)
Permanent Total load
0
At partition
loading
58
59
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ MAIN!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 44
chg - R68
RIBS
slab depth, hf 100 mm Centres 900 mm
Rib width 150 mm Side taper of 1 in 10
SPANS Solid (mm) SUPPORTS
L (m) H (mm) Left Right Support No Type
SPAN 1 6.500 275 450 1100 1 K
SPAN 2 7.000 275 1100 1100 5 K
SPAN 3 7.500 275 1100 1100 K(nife), or C(antilever)
SPAN 4 6.500 275 1100 1100 LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 5 min max
SPAN 6 DEAD 1 1.4
IMPOSED 0 1.6
UDL 3.93 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL 4.27 2.50 4.00 ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 0.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 4.19 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 4.11 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~
LOADING DIAGRAM
1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 23.4 57.9 48.6 52.5 16.8 ~ ~
Max Imposed 12.7 31.1 28.4 31.6 11.8 ~ ~
Min Imposed -1.7 14.0 13.6 14.3 -1.9 ~ ~
MAX ULTIMATE 53.6 128.5 116.2 120.7 42.5 ~ ~
The Concrete Centre
59
60
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ ACTIONS!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 45
1 5a 1 5a
Elastic M 0.0 80.2 68.1 79.6 0.0 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 0.0 72.2 68.1 67.7 0.0 ~ kNm/m
b 1.000 0.900 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 10.0% 0.0% 15.0%
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 60.47 51.71 53.85 60.16 ~ ~
Redistributed M 58.31 48.59 51.09 56.94 ~ ~
b 0.964 0.940 0.949 0.947 #VALUE! #VALUE!
1 5a 1 5a
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 54.4 63.3 68.1 56.2 57.2 60.3
Redistributed V 53.6 62.1 69.0 57.4 58.8 61.0
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 63.8 43.7 ~ ~ ~ ~
DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included .
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Before partitions 11.2 6.4 9.8 10.7 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Permanent 24.6 20.8 24.0 24.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 10.0 9.6 11.9 9.7 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
The Concrete Centre
Elastic Redistributed
Elastic Redistributed
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
60
61
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ SPANS!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 46
b 1.00 0.96 0.90
DESIGN d mm 243.0 241.0
As mm 0 532 653
As' mm 0 As T 239 As' 0
SHEAR V kN/m 53.61 V 62.10
v N/mm 0.733 v 1.005
vc N/mm 0.798 Link 6 vc 0.801
LINKS . 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 700
b 0.90 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 241.0 241.0
As mm 653 443 616
As' mm 0 As T 175 As' 0
SHEAR V kN/m 68.97 V 57.37
v N/mm 1.158 v 0.899
vc N/mm 0.801 Link 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 1050 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 350
239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9)
239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9)
The Concrete Centre
61
62
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ SPANS!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /47
b 1.00 0.95 0.85
DESIGN d mm 241.0 241.0
As mm 616 466 612
As' mm 0 As T 197 As' 0
SHEAR V kN/m 58.78 V 60.99
v N/mm 0.931 v 0.980
vc N/mm 0.801 Link 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 350 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 525
b 0.85 0.95 1.00
DESIGN d mm 241.0 241.0
As mm 612 519 0
As' mm 0 As T 227 As' 0
SHEAR V kN/m 62.00 V 42.52
v N/mm 1.003 v 0.568
vc N/mm 0.801 Link 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 525 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9)
The Concrete Centre
239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9)
62
63
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ WEIGHT!
Project
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /48
Support 1 2 H 12 2150 0.888 3.8
5 H 8 2150 0.395 4.2
Span 1 2 H 16 4475 1.578 14.1
Support 2 2 H 16 3375 1.578 10.7
5 H 8 3375 0.395 6.7
Span 2 2 H 12 4425 0.888 7.9
Support 3 2 H 16 3625 1.578 11.4
4 H 10 3625 0.617 8.9
Span 3 2 H 12 4675 0.888 8.3
Support 4 2 H 16 3500 1.578 11.0
5 H 8 3500 0.395 6.9
Span 4 3 H 12 4175 0.888 11.1
Support 5 2 H 16 2800 1.578 8.8
4 H 8 2800 0.395 4.4
BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 2 H 16 1150 1.578 3.6
Span 1 2 H 20 4900 2.466 24.2
Support 2 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 2 2 H 20 4750 2.466 23.4
Support 3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 3 2 H 20 5250 2.466 25.9
Support 4 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 4 2 H 20 4250 2.466 21.0
Support 5 2 H 16 2375 1.578 7.5
LINKS Span 1 8 H 6 800 0.222 1.4
Span 2 12 H 6 800 0.222 2.1
Span 3 10 H 6 800 0.222 1.8
Span 4 7 H 6 800 0.222 1.2
SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide.
The Concrete Centre
63
64
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls
RCC33.xls analyses and designs bays of simple rectangular at
slabs to BS 8110: Part 1. The spreadsheet uses sub-frame analysis
with pattern loading to calculate a bending moment envelope.
This envelope may be subjected to redistribution.
For a complete rectangular at slab the user is expected to use
the spreadsheet at least four times (internal bay(s) x - x, internal
bay(s) y - y, edge bay(s) x - x and edge bay(s) y - y). Punching
shear should be checked using RCC13.xls.
The spreadsheet does not currently allow for holes or drops. If
holes are considered critical then the user is directed towards
using RCC21.xls (sub-frame analysis) and allowing for holes in
the breadths used. See also Clause 3.7.5. The single load case of
all spans loaded (Clause 3.5.2.3) is not used. Beyond panel aspect
ratios of 1.5 consideration might be given to the appropriateness
of using other forms of analysis (e.g. grillage or nite element).

MAIN!
This sheet provides the main inputs to the spreadsheet (although
other inputs occur in other sheets). Most inputs are (we hope)
self-explanatory.
LEGEND! should help with denition of dimensions, e.g. edge
distance C is actually from centreline of column to edge of slab.
Cover is dened as being to the layer being designed. The layering
is set at T1 - B1 (& T2 - B2) although T1 - B2 might be deemed
more appropriate (e.g. with prefabricated mats).
The number of spans is altered by entering data in the appropriate
cells. Unwanted data cells are greyed-out. The use of C, K, F or P
can alter the characteristics of a support from Cantilever to Knife-
edge to Fixed to Pinned. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or
by messages in red. Under Operating Instructions a number of
checks are carried out and problems found are highlighted. At
the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is given to
aid data checking. Great care should be taken to ensure that this
sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It may prove
prudent to estimate values for bay width bending moments at
each support by hand before progressing to ACTIONS!
Cantilevers less than 1.00m should be described as end distances
(rather than cantilevers; otherwise certain logic regarding breadth
of effective moment transfer strip, be (see BS 8110: Part 1, Figure
3.13), goes wrong).
End distances equivalent to the half width of the column should
be used to dene slabs whose edge is ush with the outside of
the column. On edge columns, be restricts M
t max
which in itself
restricts the amount of moment transferred into columns above
and below.
Load input should dene the loads on the slab only. A combo-
box is used to switch between the internal and edge bays. If
EDGE is chosen, cells H14:I14 and E16:G16 become operative
and information about the perimeter load along the edge and
the distance of the edge from the centreline is required as input.
Perimeter loading is assumed to be dead load.
The spreadsheet also allows lines loads to be input. This facility
might be used with caution to deal with small point loads
being distributed over suitable widths in the two orthogonal
directions.
Cell L51 gives an estimate of reinforcement requirements for
the element considered in the direction considered (not both
directions).
It will be noted that the example assumes the reinforcement is
in the second layer; therefore warnings concerning cover greater
than 40 mm should not be of too much concern.
The spreadsheet takes automatic measures to ensure deection
criteria are met. It may be argued that in this instance, with equal
spans in the two directions, these measures are unwarranted in
that deection criteria will have been met in the orthogonal T1/
B1 layer.
To the right under Operating instructions a number of checks are
carried out. Box markers indicate where checks have been carried
out and proved satisfactory.

ACTIONS!
in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the users preference.
The sheet also provides output reactions and column moments.
Using the value of Veff for punching shear obviates the need to
use the 1.15, 1.25 and 1.4 factors in Clause 3.7.6.2 to determine
Veff from Vt .

SPANS!
SPANS! details the amounts of reinforcement required derived
from detailed calculations in Bar!.

LEGEND!
LEGEND! gives an explanation of the dimensions used in MAIN!
and for the analysis and design.
65
WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab for the internal or end
bays considered. Simplied curtailment rules, as dened in
Clause 3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The gures
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. They do not allow
for punching shear links or link carrier bars.

Analysis!
checking purposes. It is derived from RCC21.xls.

Bar!
than for checking purposes.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a span are
checked and are used in the determination of top steel in spans.

Graf!
particularly in ACTIONS!

Notes!
66
Project
Location ECBP Typical Floor from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 49
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
chg - R68
MATERIALS fcu 40 N/mm h agg 20 mm COVERS mm TO LAYER
fyl 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Top cover 25 1
fyv 500 N/mm c 1.50 concrete Btm cover 25 1
steel class A
SPANS L (m) GEOMETRY
SPAN 1 7.500 Bay type EDGE 8.85 kN/m outside supports 1 & 4
SPAN 2 7.500 Slab depth, h 250 mm 2.47 10.00 kN/m along bay edge
SPAN 3 7.500 Edge Panel width, b 3750 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 Edge distance 300 mm to C/L min max
SPAN 5 End distance 125 from supt 1 DEAD 1.0 1.4
SPAN 6 End distance 125 from supt 4 IMPOSED 1.6
.
SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 250 400 F 3.75 250 400 F
Support 2 3.750 400 400 F 3.75 400 400 F
Support 3 3.750 400 400 F 3.75 400 400 F
Support 4 3.750 250 400 F 3.75 250 400 F
Support 5
Support 6
Support 7
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
LOADING DIAGRAM
A D
PERIMETER LOADS characteristic
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!
66
67
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 50
Elastic Moments Redistributed Envelope
1 2 3 4
Elastic M 123.7 465.4 465.4 123.7 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 123.7 372.3 372.3 123.7 ~ ~ ~
b 1.000 0.800 0.800 1.000 ~ ~ ~
End support reinf. mm 16 16
* *
1 2 3
Elastic M 297.1 205.5 297.1 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 319.9 184.6 319.9 ~ ~ ~
b 1.077 0.898 1.077 ~ ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)
Elastic Shears Redistributed Shears
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 258.2 343.6 297.0 297.0 343.6 258.2
Redistributed V 263.9 331.1 297.0 297.0 331.1 263.9
SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS LOADED 323.0 628.2 628.2 323.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 323.9 481.6 481.6 323.9
EVEN SPANS LOADED 153.4 487.3 487.3 153.4
Veff for punching 404.9 878.0 878.0 404.9
Characteristic Dead 168.7 326.4 326.4 168.7
Characteristic Imposed 49.3 114.8 114.8 49.3
COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS Above 54.7 -35.9 35.9 -54.7
LOADED Below 54.7 -35.9 35.9 -54.7
ODD SPANS Above 59.4 -86.2 86.2 -59.4
LOADED Below 59.4 -86.2 86.2 -59.4
EVEN SPANS Above 23.0 32.1 -32.1 -23.0
LOADED Below 23.0 32.1 -32.1 -23.0
SUPPORT No
SPAN No
The Concrete Centre
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0 5 10 15 20 25
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 5 10 15 20 25
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
0 5 10 15 20 25
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
0 5 10 15 20 25
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
67
68
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw Apr-2006 51
ACTIONS b 1.000 1.077 0.800
Be 625 2175
Total M kNm 92.8 319.9 328.5
Mt max kNm 176.6 614.5
MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3425 1875 1875
M kNm 1.8 144.0 82.1
d mm 219.0 215.0 217.0
As mm/m 6 865 489
As deflection mm/m 1276 489
Provide H12 @ 325 T1 Provide H20 @ 225 B1 Provide H16 @ 400 T1
As prov mm/m 348 1396 503
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.478 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.335 OK
(As increased by 47.5 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 625 2175 2175
M kNm 92.8 176.0 246.4
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm/m 1743 912 1294
Provide H16 @ 100 T1 Provide H20 @ 200 B1 Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1
As prov mm/m 2011 1571 1508
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
ACTIONS b 0.800 0.898 0.800
Be 2175 2175
Total M kNm 328.5 184.6 328.5
Mt max kNm 614.5 614.5
M kNm 82.1 83.1 82.1
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm/m 489 499 489
As prov mm/m 503 698 503
M kNm 246.4 101.5 246.4
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm/m 1294 526 1294
Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1 Provide H20 @ 400 B1 Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1
As prov mm/m 1508 785 1508
max S ok ok ok
The Concrete Centre
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!
68
69
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw Apr-2006 52
ACTIONS b 0.800 1.077 1.000
Be 2175 625
Total M kNm 328.5 319.9 92.8
Mt max kNm 614.5 176.6
M kNm 82.1 144.0 1.8
d mm 217.0 215.0 219.0
As mm/m 489 865 6
As prov mm/m 503 1396 348
M kNm 246.4 176.0 92.8
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm/m 1294 912 1743
Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1 Provide H20 @ 200 B1 Provide H16 @ 100 T1
As prov mm/m 1508 1571 2011
max S ok ok ok
The Concrete Centre
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!
69
70
Project
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD 2006 TCC chg
Legend for Input Data
The Concrete Centre
11-Apr-06
-
53
R68
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ LEGEND!
70
71
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 54
WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT Mid Strip Col Strip Type Dia Length Unit wt Weight
TOP STEEL Support 1 11 H 12 2350 0.888 22.9
8 H 16 2550 1.578 32.2
Span 1 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support 2 5 H 16 3750 1.578 29.6
17 H 16 3750 1.578 100.6
Span 2 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support 3 5 H 16 3750 1.578 29.6
17 H 16 3750 1.578 100.6
Span 3 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support 4 11 H 12 2350 0.888 22.9
8 H 16 2550 1.578 32.2
BTM STEEL Span 1 9 H 20 6875 2.466 152.6
11 H 20 7750 2.466 210.2
Span 2 5 H 20 6825 2.466 84.2
6 H 20 7650 2.466 113.2
Span 3 9 H 20 6875 2.466 152.6
11 H 20 7750 2.466 210.2
SUMMARY Rebar for single direction only. All figures approximate - see User Guide.
TOTAL REINFORCEMENT IN BAY (kg) 1465 REINFORCEMENT DENSITY (kg/m
3
) 63.6
No
The Concrete Centre
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ WEIGHT!
71
72
RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls
The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or anged
beams using sub-frame analysis to derive moments and shears.
The intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six
spans of continuous beams with columns above and below. Spans
may incorporate cantilevers, xed ends or knife-edge supports.
There are three main sheets: MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!

MAIN!
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry
and load data. Input data is blue and underlined. New data may
be input by overwriting default values or by entering values in
greyed-out cells. Guidance on input for the type of section and
type of end condition of the support is given under Operating
Instructions.
The sheet has been set up with as many carry throughs as
possible, i.e. input cells are made equal to preceding input cells
to make the inputting of regular beams easier. Inputting C18
as = C17 will insert 8.00 in the remaining spans: it will also
remove the grey conditional background to the remaining spans,
supports and loads and allow data entry. Deleting C18, indeed
C19, will blank out remaining spans, etc. Generally, values in red
or red backgrounds indicate either incorrect or excess data. For
instance, if knife-edge supports are required, entering K in cell
C25 will elicit red data to the right, which needs to be cleared
manually. Point loads should be at least 0.001m from a support.
Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
(copy and Paste Special values is OK).
Rebar layering refers to whether there are beams and therefore
reinforcement in the other direction. Answering yes drops by one
bar diameter the steel at the supports.
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
moments at the face of support; design for deection considers
the cantilever from the centre line of support. N.B. root rotation
is not considered. In beam-to-beam situations the width of
support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! Includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution are always considered as there are no default
values.
SPANS!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports and for shear in the spans.
User input is required for the diameters of bending and shear
reinforcement and for the number of legs of links in each span.
Some intuition may be required to obtain sensible and rational
arrangements of reinforcement. In order to discourage the use of
second layers of reinforcement, the input cells for diameters of
reinforcement in second layers are nominally protected.
Support moments (including cantilever moments) are considered
at the face of the support. This may lead to unequal amounts of
reinforcement being designed for each side of the support. See
Bar! Usually, the detailer would be expected to detail the larger
amounts of reinforcement; however where different sections
occur either side of a support, the detailer should be briefed as to
the designers detailed requirements.
Non-existent spans are blanked out.
Besides the limit of maximum modication factor for deection
= 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel
to comply with deection criteria, A
sdef
, = 2 x A
sreqd
has been
imposed.
WEIGHT!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as dened
in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print or the
print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers and detailers interpretations of these
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.
Analysis!
This sheet shows the moment distributions used in the analysis
of the beam: it is not intended for formal printing. It will be seen
that the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then
as (gk - 1.0) + qk qk over alternate spans.
Bar!
Intended mainly for rst time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required is
provided in the span.
73
Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.

Notes!
74
RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Sheet No
Location from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 55
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
chg - R68
LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 3
MATERIALS COVERS (to all steel)
fyl 500 N/mm s 1.15 Btm cover 40 mm
fyv 500 N/mm c 1.50 Side cover 35 mm
steel class A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 1.50 500 300 175 R 300 min max
SPAN 2 8.00 500 300 175 R 300 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 1.50 500 300 175 R 300 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? Y
Support 1 C
Support 2 3.50 300 300 F 5.00 300 300 P
Support 3 3.50 300 300 F 4.00 300 300 P
Support 4 K
Support 5
Support 6
Support 7
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 1.50 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
LOADING DIAGRAM
1 3
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS LOADED 0.0 362.6 543.9 -122.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 0.0 198.7 252.9 -5.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN SPANS LOADED 0.0 295.8 515.5 -163.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
Characteristic Dead 0.0 134.1 211.1 -36.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 103.9 163.6 16.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 32.1 11.0 -64.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
The Concrete Centre
Max characteristic Imposed
Min characteristic Imposed
D&D: Main beam Grids C to H 74
75
RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 56
1 Elastic Moments 3 1 Redistributed Envelope 3
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 215.7 390.5 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
b 1.000 1.000 0.800 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0%
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 0.00 259.55 0.00 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.00 295.71 0.00 ~ ~ ~
b 1.000 1.139 0.700 ~ ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)
1
Elastic Shears
3 1
3
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 0.0 102.2 251.8 297.6 264.2 -172.8
Redistributed V 0.0 102.2 260.4 287.8 259.4 -163.9

Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS Above 91.2 -36.9
LOADED Below 47.9 -24.2
ODD SPANS Above 20.5 -11.8
EVEN SPANS Above 105.3 -39.1
COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm)
The Concrete Centre
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
75
76
RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 0.0 62.1
b 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 450.0 444.0 447.0
As mm 0 336
As' mm
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 Y 10 3 Y 12 3 Y 12
Layer 2
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 Y 10 2 Y 12 2 Y 20
Layer 2
DEFLECTION L/d 3.356 Allowed 9.388
SHEAR V kN 30.7 Link 61.5
v N/mm 0.227 10 0.459
vc N/mm 0.413 Nominal 0.468
LINKS H10 @ 325 for 650 H10 @ 325 H10 @ 325 for 975
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 177.5 295.7 270.5
b 1.00 1.14 0.80
DESIGN d mm 427.5 434.0 417.0
As mm 1061 1903 1807
As' mm
Layer 2
Layer 2
v N/mm 1.724 10 1.992
LINKS H10 @ 200 for 1800 H10 @ 325 H10 @ 200 for 1800
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ok
ok
ok
ok ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
ok
76
77
RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw Apr-2006 58
ACTIONS M kNm 278.6 0.0 0.0
b 0.96 0.70 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 444.0 450.0
As mm 1876 0 0
As' mm
Layer 2
Layer 2
DEFLECTION 3.378 Allowed 66.003
v N/mm 1.765 10 v 1.441
LINKS H10 @ 200 for 1400 H10 @ 325 H10 @ 200 for 400
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
ok
ok
77
78
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls
beams and estimates deection to BS 8110 Parts 2. It uses sub-
frame analysis to derive moments and shears. For each span
and load case it calculates deections at 1/20th spans. The
intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six spans
of continuous beams with columns above and below. Spans may
incorporate cantilevers, xed ends or knife-edge supports. There
are four main sheets: JOBDATA!, MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!
where the user is required to input data.
The spreadsheet is based on RCC41 but has an initial sheet
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance
criteria required. The calculation of deection is not carried
out automatically. The user is required to press the Calculate
deections button in column N of SPANS! (or elsewhere) when
every other aspect of the design has been completed. Deections
are given as a range in a chart at the bottom of ACTIONS! They
are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS!
the worst case is compared with the specied serviceability
criteria.
conservative) compared with actual measured deections. The
calculated deections might be regarded as being akin to 95%
condence limits.

JOBDATA!

MAIN!
This sheet contains user input of frame geometry and load data.
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by
overwriting default values or by entering values in greyed-out
cells. Guidance on input for the type of section and type of end
condition of the support is given under Operating Instructions.
Generally, values in red or red backgrounds indicate either
incorrect or excess data. For instance, if knife-edge supports are
required, entering K in cell C18 will elicit red data to the right,
which needs to be cleared manually.
The sheet has not been set up with many carry throughs (making
the value of one cell equal another).
Users may choose to equate cells in their saved version to speed
input.
(copy and paste values only is OK).
Rebar layering refers to whether there are beams in the other
direction. Answering yes drops by one bar diameter the steel at
the supports.
the cantilever from the centre line of support. N.B. root rotation
is not considered.
In beam-to-beam situations the width of support can be input as
being very small to avoid under-design in bending.

ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! Includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
redistribution in row 22 are always considered - there are no
default or automated values. Cell L14 determines how the
redistribution is carried out (see Table 1 of this document).

SPANS!
supports, and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
reinforcement sizes some intuition may be required to obtain
sensible arrangements of reinforcement. The amounts of bending
and shear reinforcement required and checks are derived from
detailed calculations in Bar! Support moments (including
cantilever moments) are considered at the face of the support.
This may lead to unequal amounts of reinforcement being
designed for each side of the support, see Bar! Non-existent
spans are blanked out.
Deection calculations are controlled by clicking the Calculate
Deections button in column N and should be undertaken once
all the other design is complete. Deection results will only appear
on this sheet after the Calculate Deections button has been
used and the macro been allowed to complete its iterations.
They will disappear if relevant data (e.g. span, load) is changed.
Should the span fail deection criteria, the user has the option to
79
increase bottom steel at cell M21 etc, and reuse the Calculate
Deection button Hogging moments at are checked 1/4 span
positions within a span and are used to determine the top steel
in spans.

WEIGHT!

Uls!
printing out other than for checking purposes. It will be seen that
the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then as
(
gk
- 1.0)g
k
+
gk
q
k
on alternately odd and even spans.

Sls!

Bar!

Def!
and for each load condition. For each point and condition it
considers moment, As, As, d, d, uncracked neutral axis depth -
x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia I, uncracked moment capacity M
cr
, z, nal x, concrete
stresses f
c
, moment of resistance MoR, curvature -1/r, load,
slope and curvature, etc. to calculate deection. The sheet is
rather large and is not necessarily intended for printing out other
Graf!
Notes!
80
Project
Location from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 55
LOCATION Supports from grid C to grid H
MATERIALS COVERS (to links)
steel class A Concrete density 24 kN/m
Max affecting partitions/walls = L / 350 or 20 mm
k
= 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
cm
= 36 N/mm Table 3.1
cm
Self weight 16.80 16.80 16.80 16.80 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions/walls 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 28
Total 48.00 49.20 56.70 48.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 123.00
E
t
E
t
E
t
kN/mm kN/mm kN/mm
Self weight 3.52 7.28 3.52 7.28 1.37 13.91
Partitions/walls 2.68 8.96 2.68 8.96 0 32.94
Other dead loads 2.31 9.96 2.31 9.96 1.05 16.04
Composite 2.95 8.34 2.26 10.11
D&D: Main Beam
(t,t
0
)
18 18
At 70 years At 28 days
16
The Concrete Centre
Permanent load Total load
At partition
At 70 years
loading
0
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ JOBDATA!
80
81
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw 11-Jul-06 56
chg - R68
Bay width 5000 mm
SPAN 1 6.000 375 300 125 T 1140 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 375 300 125 T 960 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 6.000 375 300 125 T 1020 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 6.000 375 300 125 T 1080 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.75 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 3 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 4 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7
LOADING DIAGRAM
C H
UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 30.0 15.0 2.50 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 186.7 448.2 472.4 481.3 182.4
ODD SPANS LOADED 188.4 338.1 348.8 381.9 64.5
Characteristic Imposed 45.0 95.5 97.1 99.1 42.8
The Concrete Centre
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!
81
82
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 57
C Elastic Moments H C Redistributed Envelope H
Elastic M 81.8 252.7 240.2 278.1 79.8 ~ kNm/m
b 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 179.26 135.23 194.44 173.40 ~ ~
Redistributed M 176.94 127.14 192.72 169.71 ~ ~
b 0.987 0.940 0.991 0.979 ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)
C
Elastic Shears
H C
H
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 191.4 240.8 219.0 214.1 249.6 249.0
Redistributed V 188.4 234.5 221.7 217.6 254.8 248.4
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 245.7 188.5 ~ ~ ~ ~
COLUMN MOMENTS 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS Above 35.6 -8.3 6.8 1.3 -33.6 kNm
LOADED Below 35.6 -8.3 6.8 1.3 -33.6 kNm
ODD SPANS Above 40.9 -23.5 24.5 -17.7 -9.6 kNm
LOADED Below 40.9 -23.5 24.5 -17.7 -9.6 kNm
EVEN SPANS Above 11.5 11.5 -14.7 19.6 -39.9 kNm
LOADED Below 11.5 11.5 -14.7 19.6 -39.9 kNm
The Concrete Centre
-400
-200
0
200
400
-400
-200
0
200
400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
82
83
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 58
ACTIONS M kNm 58.8 176.9 186.2
b 1.00 0.99 0.85
DESIGN d mm 332.0 322.5 327.5
As mm 433 1328 1623
As' mm 0 0 201
Layer 2 0 0 0
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 16 4 H 25 3 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
v N/mm 1.570 10 2.064
LINKS H10 @ 200 for 1400 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 150 for 1650
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
ACTIONS M kNm 188.6 127.1 200.0
b 0.91 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 327.5
As mm 1694 947 1787
As' mm 113 0 210
Layer 2 0 0 0
Layer 2 0 0 0
mm Affecting partitions = 22.15 > 17.14 FAILS Increase btm As by 0%
v N/mm 1.926 10 1.884
LINKS H10 @ 175 for 1400 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 175 for 1400
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.235 ok -0.134 ok 0.218
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
83
84
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw Apr-2006 59
ACTIONS M kNm 208.9 192.7 206.6
b 1.00 0.99 0.86
DESIGN d mm 327.5 322.5 327.5
As mm 1860 1447 1799
As' mm 286 0 357
Layer 2 0 0 0
Layer 2 0 0 0
v N/mm 2.262 10 v 2.197
LINKS H10 @ 125 for 1875 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 150 for 1800
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
ACTIONS M kNm 209.9 169.7 57.3
b 0.85 0.98 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 332.0
As mm 1819 1264 421
As' mm 403 0 0
Layer 2 0 0 0 0
Layer 2 0 0 99 H 0
v N/mm 2.107 10 1.530
LINKS H10 @ 150 for 1800 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 200 for 1400
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
MORE THAN 2 LAYERS
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
84
85
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet designs post-tensioned slab and beam
elements in accordance with BS 8110: Part 1, 1997. In essence the
spreadsheet checks a number of parameters: stresses at transfer,
stresses in service, moments of resistance at ULS, shear, vibration,
deection, neutral axis depth, and reinforcement service stress.
These checks are shown in SUMMARY!
The spreadsheet is set out in several sheets.
MAT DATA! Denes load cases, various options and material
properties.
SUMMARY! Summarises the design, analysis, checks and
outputs from the rest of the spreadsheet.
DETAILS! Shows the workings for the moment distribution
for the various load cases, proles, prestress losses and checks
in some detail.
DEFLECT! Shows workings for deection at 1/20 points
along each span.
Graf! Provides the data for the graphs, and values generated
are used for checking.
Users are referred to CS TR43 Post-tensioned concrete oors
Design Handbook
(14)
, and Post-tensioned concrete oors
(16)
for
further details of methods and values used.
A maximum of three spans may be considered. Cantilevers are
not available. Shortening is calculated in the losses section, but is
not used to modify column moments. The effects of restraint to
both columns and prestress in the member must be considered.
The spreadsheet considers one direction at a time only.
The nub of this spreadsheet is page two of SUMMARY! The source
of any failures or missing information (e.g. no tendons or no
tendon height specied) will become apparent in SUMMARY ii.
It is suggested that users may wish to create a second window of
this part of the spreadsheet (Window/ New Window/ Arrange).

MATDATA!
The rst sheet includes all the general and material input data
used in the subsequent sheets. Load combinations and load
factors are dened. The input under Options should be self-
explanatory. The choices have implications on the design as
shown below.
Stressing ends determines where prestressing losses occur
Prestressing system Specifying unbonded or bonded changes
prestress loss calculations. Prestress losses tend to be higher
with bonded tendons as wobble factors and coefcients of
friction are higher but using several strands in a single duct
can lead to overall economy, especially in more heavily loaded
beams. Bonded systems tend to require less conventional
reinforcement.
Commonly 70% to 75% is taken for initial estimates for
jacking force/ nal force. This quantity is calculated at Details
N68:N69 and has to be re-specied in Details! line 68 to be
within 5% of that calculated.
With respect to allowable exural tensile stresses in prestressed
beams (and slabs), BS 8110: Part 1, denes three classes (see
Clause 4.3.4.3). These classes determine the limits of tensile
stress. For example see BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 4.1.3, which also
allows 5.0 N/mm
2
tensile strength for C40 concrete. For Class
3, which is generally used for internal environments, cracking
is allowed either up to 0.1 mm or, more usually, to 0.2 mm.
Slab or Beam varies shear requirements and determines
whether nominal top bonded reinforcement is included in
the spans or not. Nominal top steel is included in mid-span
of beams. If slabs are specied, the user may choose to use
nominal top steel to overcome hogging moments in the
spans. Invoking the nominal bonded reinforcement in mid-
span should overcome most problems with hogging in, say,
dissimilar spans of slabs. Slabs requires a second input; type of
slab alters parameters used in checking vibration.
Normal curtailment rules for conventional reinforcement
are not necessarily satisfactory for post-tensioned slabs and
beams. Nonetheless the spreadsheet assumes that curtailment
occurs at 0.3 x span.
With regard to concrete, the usual minimum strength used in
prestressing is 40 N/mm
2
. The minimum allowable strength at
transfer (i.e. when the tendons are initially stressed), f
ci
, is 25 N/
mm
2
.. Ambient temperatures during curing may be taken as 15
o
C
for a UK summer, but otherwise may be dependent upon curing/
insulation regimes. Typically, long-term Relative Humidity may
be taken as 45% indoors, or 85% outdoors for the UK. Other
data used in the determination of various concrete factors, e.g.
determination of creep factors, is shown on the right hand side of
the sheet. These factors are case specic and have been derived
from the best available data for the various parameters shown.
The formulae for calculating creep factors and free shrinkage
strain are from C&CA paper TDH 2391
(17 )
, and use the following
factors.
K
b
is a factor depending on the composition of the concrete,
K
c
is an environmental factor,
K
d
is a maturity factor,
K
e
is an effective member thickness factor, and
K
t
covers the development of the deferred deformation with
time.
Factors used in the derivation of material data are given to the
right hand side of the sheet.
86
Details of strand used in the UK are given at the bottom of the
sheet. Users should ensure that their chosen strand is readily
available. Post-tensioned concrete oors
(16)
gives typical values
for (coefcient of friction), K (wobble factors), Rel% (relaxation)
and draw-in (mm) in Tables 2.6 and 7.1.
It is usually assumed that working loads are applied at a concrete
age of 60 days (user input). The quasi-permanent imposed load
should be assessed from the 2 factor in EC2, which is usually
20% of imposed load for dwellings, 30% for ofces and stores,
and 60% for parking. (One never takes 100%, as y2 adjusts for
the very different f (creep) values. Hence 30% is appropriate for
a more or less permanently loaded structures: the high value for
parking is to compensate for long-term dynamic effects.)
Assume Final prestress + dead +
BS 8110 Table 4.2
30 3.8 0 4.9736
40 5 0 0
50 5.8 5.8 0
1.271 1.267 1.258 1.249 1.245 1.235 1.225 1.210 1.195 1.185 1.170 1.160 1.145 1.110
Maturity Curve 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 0.8 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13
0.8 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
30 0 2.6 4.5 7.9 10.3 12.2 13.7 16.2 18 19.5 20.6 21.7 22.6 23.2 25.2
40 0 5.2 7.8 12.2 15.5 18.1 20.1 23.2 25.5 27.3 29 30.4 31.3 32.2 34.5
50 0 11.4 12.7 18.1 22.2 25.1 27.3 31.1 33.7 35.8 37.8 39.2 40.3 41.3 43.9
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
Longterm fcu inf Et inf
67.2 34.30
EARLY STRENGTH LATE STRENGTH
1 4 0.8 5.8 40 60 0 100
60 37.3 40.4 3.1 39.78 60 64.8 67.2 2.4 64.80
Kc = Relative Humidity factor
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
3.2 3.13 3.05 2.95 2.85 2.77 2.65 2.5 2.3 2.13 1.9 1.7 1.5 1.25 1
50 55 2.85 2.77 0.08 0 2.850
Kd = Ambient factor
30 90 210 420 840 2700 5400 10800
60 120 210 420 1860 2700 5400
1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.75 0.65 0.5
120 120 1.6 1.4 0.2 30 1.550
1500 1860 1 0.75 0.25 660 0.911 1.000
Kb = Cement Content & W/C Ratio factor
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
200 0.5 0.8 1.02 1.28
300 0.7 0.9 1.17 1.48 1.82
400 0.83 1.17 1.63 2.1 2.55
500 0.97 1.45 2 2.55 3.1 0.5
300 0.7 0.9 1.17 1.48 1.82 0.981
400 0.83 1.17 1.63 2.1 2.55 1.308
0.739 0.981 1.308 1.666 2.039 0.327 1.145
Ke = Effective Thickness factor 406.5 406.5 #DIV/0!
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 1.2 1 0.94 0.85 0.795 0.75 0.733 0.72 0.709 0.7
Span 1 400 450 0.72 0.709 0.011 6.5 0.719
Span 2 400 450 0.72 0.709 0.011 6.5 0.719
Span 3 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
c = Free Shrinkage Strain
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
420 405 380 360 330 305 275 243 205 162 115 58.5 0
50 55 380 360 20 0 380
Ke factor for Shrinkage
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 1.3 1.05 0.907 0.8 0.71 0.65 0.587 0.55 0.513 0.5
Span 1 400 450 0.55 0.513 0.037 6.5 0.548
Span 2 400 450 0.55 0.513 0.037 6.5 0.548
Span 3 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Ultimate Shrinkage Strain - Bending Kt
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.93143
% 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
Kp 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418
cs 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 microstrain
m 20.3909 Ec 28 32 2.3462 Ec 9.56309 Ks = 23.75
Ultimate Shrinkage Strain - Prestress
Span 1 Span 2 Span 3
% 0.3 0.3 0.3
Kp 0.9335 0.9335 0.9335
cs 207.1 207.1 #DIV/0!
Factors used in the derivation of material data
87
SUMMARY!
The rst page (top part of the sheet entitled SUMMARY!) shows
input for the sub-frame analysis, i.e. dimensions and loads.
Input should be fairly self explanatory. It should be noted that H
is in the plane of the screen and b, bw etc. at right angles to the
plane of the screen. Several warnings are given under Operating
Instructions and with conditional formatting should data be
incorrect.
Supports can be made to be knife-edge by inputting K in column
D: remote ends of columns can be either F for xed, or P for
pinned. The line can be left blank. A support width (h below) can
be used in conjunction with a K support so that design moments
are used at the support face.
Data under Normal Direction is used for the vibration checks.
The number of bays affects possible modes of vibration, which is
checked in accordance with CS TR43
(14)
. The vibration response
factors calculated are accordance with Steel Construction
Institute
(18)
and Concrete Society guidelines. Vibration should
not be a problem in post-tensioned slabs and beams. Normally,
vibration response factors of 12 are used for very busy ofces, 8 for
normal ofces, or 4 for high specication ofces or laboratories
where vibration is critical.
Designers should be aware that the 2005 version of CS TR43-
Appendix G gives revised recommendations on vibration.
Loads are characteristic and are for the whole bay width (not
expressed as kN/m2 unless a 1 m bay width is being analysed).
The self-weight is a user input. The construction load is intended
to be that required to be applied during transfer (usually 1.5
kN/m
2
). However, designers should consider the load history of
the slab to ensure worst cases are checked, e.g. temporary loads
while casting oors above. Bay widths in the normal direction
do not affect the loading unless, of course, the user chooses to
introduce a suitable relationship (in the loads input).
The current conguration being designed is shown in a chart.
This gives a scale representation of the spans, supports, loads
and an idealised cross section of each member. Charts also show
representations of the tendon proles and equivalent loads used
in the analysis. For the tendons, a reversed parabolic prole is
used but minimum lengths of straight tendon are used at the
supports as recommended by Khan
(16)
. Service equivalent loads
are shown: those at transfer may be viewed at DETAILS!B361:
N372.
The next page (SUMMARY! B67:M79) is the nub of the
spreadsheet: it has a number of key inputs and out-puts. These
include inputs of PI / Pj (initial force/ jacking force), Pf / Pj (nal
force/ jacking force), number and height of tendons, and amounts
of conventional reinforcement (some of the inputs are necessary
to avoid circular arguments).
With regard to Tendons the spreadsheet automatically calculates
the number of tendons for each span using an algorithm. The
algorithm uses either the maximum of the median stress levels,
SUMMARY ii: Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS Pj = 130 kN Pf/Pi = 90.0% Pf/Pj = 80.0% kN
No of STRANDS Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Recommended 24 24 24 26 26 26 0 0 0
Use 24 24 24 24 24 24 0 0 0
Recommend'd height 295 40 40 0
Height mm 300 40 480 480 40 300 300 0
Length Straight mm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5311 7006 0
Pi kN 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 278.4 371.8 354.7 261.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 253.4 338.5 322.9 238.1 0.0 0.0
CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY'
Tendons (a) OK
Stresses at transfer (b) OK
Stresses in service (c) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK
Shear (e) OK
Vibration (f) OK
Deflection (g) OK
Neutral axis depth OK
Rebar stress OK
GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN
485 295
28%
8%
36%
94%
81%
53%
59%
47%
52%
0% 42% 83% 125%
g
f
e
d
c(T)
c(C)
b(T)
b(C)
a
Extract from SUMMARY!
88
or the maximum permitted. The spreadsheet calculates the
minimum number of strands required so that permissible concrete
tensions are not exceeded at either the initial or nal stage. Thus
the numbers of tendons are then shown as recommended values,
and the user can override them if required. Once the number of
tendons for each span has been xed, the program attempts to
nd an optimum single level of initial prestress for all strands (this
often appears to be the maximum permissible). If the minimum
force required generates excessive compressive stresses, the
section is deemed to have failed.
Tendons are assumed to be level through supports and follow a
parabolic prole between. The points of inection are taken to be
at 1/10 of the clear span points.
Besides number of tendons, the main user control is to adjust the
value of Pf / Pj. This adjusts the number of tendons. One would
rarely need to adjust tendon heights.
The checks carried out are listed below.
Tendons (a)
Stresses at transfer (b)
Stresses in service (c)
ULS MOR (d)
Shear (e)
Vibration (f)
Deection (g)
Neutral axis depth
Rebar stress
In the spreadsheet, those that are unsatisfactory are highlighted
and directions are given for further information.
There are also two charts. The efciency chart gives the user
an idea of how hard the section is working or how far it is out.
The second chart, ultimate limit state moment envelope and
moments of resistance (capacity), should be used in conjunction
with choosing amounts of bonded reinforcement.
The third page (SUMMARY! B125:M171) shows stresses at transfer
and in service in both tabular and chart form. It should be noted
that, in keeping with current practice, moments are considered
at the face of columns. Thus peak moments are not necessarily
at column centrelines and moments might be different each side
of an internal column.
The convention used in the stress charts is:
Red squares tension, blue circles compression
Solid markers bottom, hollow markers top
Dotted lines permissible stresses
The fourth page (SUMMARY iv) gives details of shear envelopes,
vibration and deection together with support reactions and
column moments.
DETAILS!
Over nine pages, DETAILS! shows detailed calculations regarding
section properties, distribution factors, moment distribution
used for the sub-frame analysis, proling constants, pre-stressing
losses, balanced loads, ULS moment and shear checks, and nally
vibration.

DEFLECT!
The deection sheet gives details of calculations dealing with
defections.

TYPICALC!
This sheet is intended to illustrate typical calculations for a
particular point in a span in order to show how all the criteria
are satised. The sheet illustrates the transfer and service stress
checks and the calculation of Moment of Resistance carried out
in tabular form in Graf! The point chosen is at 1/4 span and is
highlighted in Graf!

Graf!
Graf! provides the data for the charts of the conguration and
loads, tendon prole, equivalent loads, ULS moments and
capacities, shear envelopes, deections, stresses at transfer
and stresses in service within SUMMARY! Each chart is plotted
at 1/20 points along each span. Many values within Graf! are
used and checked for being minima or maxima for the various
criteria. For instance it may be here that problems with hogging
moments are found.

Notes!
89
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ MATDATA!
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 70
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 - GENERAL DATA
LOAD COMBINATIONS NOTES
Initial prestress + OW + construction load on all spans INPUT IS UNDERLINED.
INITIAL Initial prestress + OW + construction load on odd spans
Initial prestress + OW + construction load on even spans
Final prestress + dead + imposed load on all spans
FINAL Final prestress + dead + imposed load on odd spans
Final prestress + dead + imposed load on even spans
Final prestress + factored dead and imposed load on all spans
ULTIMATE Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on odd spans
Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on even spans
DEFLECTION Final prestress + dead + 30% imposed load on odd spans
LOAD FACTORS min max VIBRATION
DEAD 1 1.4 Limiting reponse factor = 8
IMPOSED 0 1.6
OPTIONS Stressing Ends B (L, R, B) Prestress system U (U, B) Assume 20% max redistribution
Jacking F/strength 0.7 BS 8110 Class 3 (Clause 4.1.3) .
Slab or beam B (B or S) Limiting crack width 0.2 mm .
In slabs, nominal top bonded reinforcement in span? Y (Y or N; use Y for dissimilar spans)
Slab type S (S)olid, (R)ibbed or (W)affle, supported by beam Damping, (2% to 8%) 5%
MATERIALS CONCRETE fcu = 60 Ec28 = 32 c = 19.80 t = 5.80 unmodified
At days 4.80 fci = 39.78 Eci = 25.53 ic = 15.91 it = 4.97 unmodified
Cement content 330 W/C ratio 0.55 OPC or RHPC ? OPC .
Ave ambient during curing = 15C Longterm R/H % 50
m =
1.50
STRAND fpu = 1860 Ap, mm = 100 = 0.140 K = 0.0010
Ep = 195 Rel % = 2 Draw in= 6 Depth to strand centre = 40
REBAR fy = 500 COVERS Top Bottom Sides
m = 1.15 to links 25 25 25
LOADING SEQUENCE Permanent loads for assessment 30% of Imposed is permanent
Load @ Age fcut Et Ec
kN/m days N/mm kN/mm Creep kN/mm
13.81 4.80 39.78 25.53 3.64 5.51
42.00 60 64.80 33.54 2.14 10.69
9.60 - = -
65.41 - - 30.80 2.45 8.92
NOTES on MATERIALS
BRITISH LOW RELAXATION STRAND
Type Dia Area Breaking Weight RELAXATION at 0.7fpu
Standard 15.2 139 1670 1.090 20 40 60 80 100
12.5 93 1770 0.730 1.8 3.5 5.1 7.5 10.7
Super 15.7 150 1770 1.180
12.9 100 1860 0.785
Compact 15.2 165 1820 1.295
12.7 112 1860 0.890
SLS 1
SLS 2
SLS 3
SLS 4
COMBINED
Own weight
Applied dead
SLS 5
SLS 6
ULS 1
Quasi-Permanent Imposed
ULS 2
ULS 3
SLS 7
The Concrete Centre
FRAMES ARE ASSUMED TO
BE BRACED
Ambient C
Relaxation
89
90
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! i
SUMMARY I : Dimensions and Loads
SPANS L m H mm bw mm hf mm Section bf mm No Bays
SPAN 1 12.000 525 1800 200 T 3000 5
SPAN 2 12.500 525 1800 200 T 3000 5
SPAN 3
SUPPORTS ABOVE m H mm B mm End Cond BELOWm H mm B mm End Cond
SUPPORT 1 4.000 300 600 F
SUPPORT 2 4.000 300 600 F
SUPPORT 3 K
SUPPORT 4
CONFIGURATION
LOADING UDLs~kN/m (char), PLs~kN (char), Position~m
Applied Imposed Position Loaded Applied Imposed Position Loaded
SPAN 1 OW Dead Load from left Length SPAN 3 OW Dead Load from left Length
UDL 13.81 42.00 32.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction ~~~~~ ~~~~~ 18.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ C'strction ~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
SPAN 2
UDL 13.81 42.00 32.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ GLOBAL STATUS
Part UDL
Construction ~~~~~ ~~~~~ 18.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
TENDON PROFILE (heights to strand centre: see heights specified under TENDONS below)
EQUIVALENT LOADS in service
BAY WIDTH m
6.000
6.000
VALID DESIGN
NORMAL DIRECTION
BEAM supporting Solid Slab to BS8110 Class 3 (0.2 mm crack width), fcu = 60, Stressed from Both Ends
The Concrete Centre
300
43 40
300
480
190 kN/m
0 kN/m
294 kN/m
322 kN/m
241 kN/m
0 kN/m
-62 kN/m -56 kN/m
0 kN/m
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
90
91
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! ii
SUMMARY ii: Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS Pj = 130 kN Pf/Pi = 90.0% Pf/Pj = 80.0% kN
No of STRANDS Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Recommended 24 24 24 26 26 26 0 0 0
Use 24 24 24 24 24 24 0 0 0
Height mm 300 40 480 480 40 300 300 0
Pi kN 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 278.4 371.8 354.7 261.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 253.4 338.5 322.9 238.1 0.0 0.0
CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY'
Tendons (a) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK
Shear (e) OK
Vibration (f) OK
Deflection (g) OK
Rebar stress OK
GLOBAL STATUS
REINFORCEMENT Input bonded rebar arrangement (Support bars cutailed at 0.3L)
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Main bar 16 20 12 20 16
No 20 20 20 20 20
% 0.426% 0.665% 0.239% 0.000% 0.000%
Link = 10
No of legs 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
(d) ULS MOMENTS With bonded reinforcement
Mu 42.2 1523.2 1529.6 1500.1 1766.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1477.2 2611.6 2440.3 2440.3 1883.9 1843.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
VALID DESIGN
0.665%
485
20
20
20
20
The Concrete Centre
0.665%
295
ULS MOMENT ENVELOPE/MOR
-3000
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
3000
28%
8%
36%
94%
81%
53%
59%
47%
52%
0% 42% 83% 125%
g
f
e
d
c(T)
c(C)
b(T)
b(C)
a
91
92
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! iii
Project
SUMMARY iii STRESSES
(b) STRESSES at TRANSFER
Tendon height 286.8 41.8 462.3 462.4 41.9 285.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pi 2768.6 2762.8 2760.3 2760.3 2762.9 2768.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max Compression 3.14 7.50 6.28 6.09 7.52 2.92 0.00 0.00 0.00
Max Tension 0.00 -1.69 -2.76 -2.51 -1.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
(c) STRESSES in SERVICE
Tendon height 286.8 40.5 462.3 462.4 40.7 285.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pf 2520.6 2515.5 2512.8 2512.8 2515.7 2520.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max Compression 3.55 5.54 10.44 10.56 6.79 4.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
Max Tension 0.00 -2.28 -4.35 -4.44 -3.88 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00
The Concrete Centre
STRESSES AT TRANSFER
0
5
10
15
20
25
Com-Top Com-Btm Ten-Btm x 4 Ten-Top x 4 Com Limit Ten Limit x 4 Col centres
STRESSES IN SERVICE
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Com-Top Com-Btm Ten-Btm x 4 Ten-Top x 4 Com Limit Ten Limit x 4 Col centres
92
93
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! iv
SUMMARY iv
(e) SHEAR Link = 10
Left Right Left Right Left Right
V 636.2 881.9 919.1 678.1 0.0 0.0
cracked? N Y Y N N N
Vc 1629.0 733.0 753.3 1629.0 0.0 0.0
No of legs 8 8 8 8 8 8
Link spacing 375 375 375 375 0 0
(f) VIBRATION Span 1 Span 2 Span 3
Response factor 0.60 0.61 0.00
OK OK OK
(g) DEFLECTION
Span 1 = 8.6mm < 48 OK Span 2 = 14mm < 50 OK
- -
SUPPORT REACTIONS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4
ULS 4 650.6 1839.8 678.1 0.0 kN
ULS 5 655.6 1361.7 232.2 0.0 kN
ULS 6 199.2 1409.0 678.1 0.0 kN
DEAD 274.6 803.5 289.2 0.0 kN
IMPOSED 147.0 484.4 152.6 0.0 kN
COLUMN MOMENTS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4
ULS 4 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 5 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 6 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
The Concrete Centre
ULS SHEAR ENVELOPE
650.6
-901.3
0.0 0.0
938.5
-678.1
-1500
-1000
-500
0
500
1000
1500
MAX DEFLECTIONS
0.00
7.97
6.88
0.0
-13.7
-8.4
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
15
Transfer Final Col centres Zero axis
93
94
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ TYPICALC!
TYPICAL CALCULATION BS 8110
for Span 1 at 3.60 m from C/L of LH support Reference
Class 3 Tee section, h = 525 mm, bw = 1800 mm hf = 200 mm, bf =3000 mm.
Ac = 1185000mm2, Z top = 120.0E6 mm, and Z bottom = 93.3E6 mm
Tendons are unbonded, Ap = 100mm2, fpu = 1,860 N/mm2 and 75.9 mm from soffite
There are 24 tendons, jacked to 1,302 N/mm or 70.0% fpu
Prestress losses at this section are -2,504.4 kN at transfer and -2,256.6 kN longterm
(b) Stresses at transfer 4.3.5
M = 395.0 kNm hogging, and prestressing force = 2,764.8 kN
< 15.91 N/mm allowed
< 4.66 N/mm allowed
(c) Stresses in service 4.3.4
M = 397.1 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,517.0 kN
< 20.00 N/mm allowed
< 5.49 N/mm allowed
(d) MOR at ultimate limit state 4.3.7
M = 1,383.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,517.0 kN
fpb (unbonded)
Eq 52
MOR = (3,075.2 ( 525 - 75.9 - 71.69 / 2) + 2,731.8 x (480 - 71.69 / 2)) / 1000 Eq 51
Total tensile force = 3,075.2 + 2,731.8 = 5,807.0 kN
Compression block depth, dn = 1000 / 5,807.0 / 0.45 / 60 / 3000 = 71.69 mm
= 2,484.3 kNm > 1,383.7 ok
Lte = 12,250 mm
= 1,048.8 + 7000 x (525 - 75.86) / 12,250 (1 - 1.7 x 0.055) = 1,281.3 N/mm
Tendon force = 1,281.3 x 24 x 100 / 1000 = 3,075.2 kN
Rebar force = 500 / 1.15 x 6,283 / 1000 = 2,731.8 kN
fpe = 1000 x 2,517.0 / 24 / 100 = 1,048.8 N/mm
Reinforcement d = 480 mm
Rp = 1860 x 100 x 24 / 60 / 3000 / (525 - 75.86) = 0.055
fpe/fpu = 1,048.8 / 1860 x 1.15 = 0.648
The Concrete Centre
Max compression (top) = 397.12E6 / 120.0E6 + 2,517.0E3 / 1185E3 = 5.43 N/mm
Max tension (bottom) = 397.12 / 93.3 - 2,517.0 / 1185 = 2.13 N/mm
Max compression (bottom) = M/Z + P/A = 395.0E3 / 93.3 + 2,764.8 / 1185 = 6.57 N/mm
Max tension (bottom) = M/Z - P/A = -159.0E3 / 93.3 - 2,764.8 / 1185 = 0.96 N/mm
94
95
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg -
DETAILED CALCULATIONS
SECTION PROPERTIES
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 0 0
Flange area, Af 240000 240000 0
Web area, Aw 945000 945000 0
Total area, Ac 1E+06 1E+06 0
Flange Yf 100 100 0
Web Yw 262.5 262.5 0
= Ac.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 0
Yt 229.59 229.59 0.00
Yb 295.41 295.41 0.00
If 5E+09 5E+09 0
Iw 2E+10 2E+10 0
= Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 0
Zt 1E+08 1E+08 0
Zb 9E+07 9E+07 0
em 4.59 255.41 184.59 184.59 255.41 4.59 300.00 0.00 #VALUE!
St 1.045 -1.521 2.822 2.822 -1.521 1.045 0.000 0.000 0.000
Sb 0.942 4.244 -1.345 -1.345 4.244 0.942 0.000 0.000 0.000
DISTRIBUTION FACTORS
SUPT 1 SUPT 2 SUPT 3 SUPT 4
Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col
I 0 1.4E+09 2.8E+10 2.8E+10 0 1.4E+09 2.8E+10 2.8E+10 0 0 0 0 0 0
Stiffness 0 3.4E+08 2.3E+09 2.3E+09 0 3.4E+08 2.2E+09 2.2E+09 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sum 2.6E+09 4.8E+09 2.2E+09 0
Factor 0.0000 0.1281 0.8719 0.4746 0.0000 0.0697 0.4556 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Partial UDL factors
1 2 3
a 0 0 0
b 0 0 0
FIXED END MOMENTS
SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3 APPLIED DEAD SPAN 1 SPAN 2
L R L R L R L R L R L R
Cant 994.0 1078.6 0.0 Cant 3024.0 3281.3 0.0
UDL 165.7 165.7 179.8 179.8 0.0 0.0 UDL 504.0 504.0 546.9 546.9 0.0 0.0
PL 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! PL 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
PL 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! PL 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 part UDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FEM 165.7 165.7 179.8 179.8 0.0 0.0 FEM 504.0 504.0 546.9 546.9 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED CONSTRUCTION
Cant 2304.0 2500.0 0.0 Cant 1296.0 1406.3 0.0
UDL 384.0 384.0 416.7 416.7 0.0 0.0 UDL 216.0 216.0 234.4 234.4 0.0 0.0
PL 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! FEM 216.0 216.0 234.4 234.4 0.0 0.0
PL 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FEM 384.0 384.0 416.7 416.7 0.0 0.0
MOMENT DISTRIBUTION
HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol SUPT 4 LoCol
-165.7 165.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 144.4 21.2 0.0 -78.6 -75.5 -11.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-39.3 72.2 0.0 -37.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 34.3 5.0 0.0 -34.3 -32.9 -5.0 0.0 37.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-17.1 17.1 18.9 -16.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 14.9 2.2 0.0 -17.1 -16.4 -2.5 0.0 16.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-8.5 7.5 8.2 -8.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 7.5 1.1 0.0 -7.5 -7.2 -1.1 0.0 8.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-3.7 3.7 4.1 -3.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 3.2 0.5 0.0 -3.7 -3.6 -0.5 0.0 3.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.9 1.6 1.8 -1.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.6 0.2 0.0 -1.6 -1.6 -0.2 0.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.8 0.8 0.9 -0.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.7 0.1 0.0 -0.8 -0.8 -0.1 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -30.4 30.4 0.0 125.1 -104.0 -21.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
OWN
WEIGHT
OWN
WEIGHT
ODD
SPANS
SPAN 3
The Concrete Centre
76
R68
95
96
DETAILED CALCULATIONS ii
-179.8 179.8
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 85.3 81.9 12.5 0.0 -179.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
42.7 0.0 -89.9 41.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -37.2 -5.5 0.0 42.7 41.0 6.3 0.0 -41.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
21.3 -18.6 -20.5 20.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -18.6 -2.7 0.0 18.5 17.8 2.7 0.0 -20.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
9.3 -9.3 -10.2 8.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -8.1 -1.2 0.0 9.3 8.9 1.4 0.0 -8.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4.6 -4.0 -4.5 4.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -4.0 -0.6 0.0 4.0 3.9 0.6 0.0 -4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.0 -2.0 -2.2 1.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.8 -0.3 0.0 2.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 -1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.0 -0.9 -1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.9 -0.1 0.0 0.9 0.8 0.1 0.0 -1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 10.4 -10.4 0.0 127.9 -151.8 23.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED -384.0 384.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 334.8 49.2 0.0 -182.3 -175.0 -26.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-91.1 167.4 0.0 -87.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 79.5 11.7 0.0 -79.5 -76.3 -11.7 0.0 87.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-39.7 39.7 43.7 -38.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 34.6 5.1 0.0 -39.6 -38.0 -5.8 0.0 38.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-19.8 17.3 19.1 -19.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 17.3 2.5 0.0 -17.3 -16.6 -2.5 0.0 19.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-8.6 8.6 9.5 -8.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 7.5 1.1 0.0 -8.6 -8.3 -1.3 0.0 8.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-4.3 3.8 4.1 -4.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 3.8 0.6 0.0 -3.8 -3.6 -0.6 0.0 4.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.9 1.9 2.1 -1.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.6 0.2 0.0 -1.9 -1.8 -0.3 0.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -70.4 70.4 0.0 289.9 -241.0 -48.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED -416.7 416.7 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 197.8 189.8 29.1 0.0 -416.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
98.9 0.0 -208.3 94.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -86.2 -12.7 0.0 98.9 94.9 14.5 0.0 -94.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
49.4 -43.1 -47.5 47.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -43.1 -6.3 0.0 43.0 41.3 6.3 0.0 -47.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
21.5 -21.6 -23.7 20.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 -18.7 -2.8 0.0 21.5 20.6 3.2 0.0 -20.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
10.7 -9.4 -10.3 10.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -9.4 -1.4 0.0 9.3 9.0 1.4 0.0 -10.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4.7 -4.7 -5.2 4.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -4.1 -0.6 0.0 4.7 4.5 0.7 0.0 -4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.3 -2.0 -2.2 2.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.0 -0.3 0.0 2.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 -2.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 24.0 -24.0 0.0 296.4 -351.8 55.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-504.0 504.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 439.4 64.6 0.0 -239.2 -229.6 -35.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-119.6 219.7 0.0 -114.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 104.3 15.3 0.0 -104.3 -100.1 -15.3 0.0 114.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-52.1 52.1 57.4 -50.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 45.5 6.7 0.0 -52.0 -49.9 -7.6 0.0 50.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-26.0 22.7 25.0 -25.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 22.7 3.3 0.0 -22.7 -21.8 -3.3 0.0 25.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-11.3 11.3 12.5 -10.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.9 1.5 0.0 -11.3 -10.8 -1.7 0.0 10.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-5.7 4.9 5.4 -5.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 4.9 0.7 0.0 -4.9 -4.7 -0.7 0.0 5.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.5 2.5 2.7 -2.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.1 0.3 0.0 -2.5 -2.4 -0.4 0.0 2.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -92.4 92.4 0.0 380.5 -316.3 -64.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD
SPANS
EVEN
SPANS
ODD
SPANS
EVEN
SPANS
APPLID
DEAD
OWN
WEIGHT
The Concrete Centre
77
R68
96
97
DETAILED CALCULATIONS iii
-546.9 546.9 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 259.6 249.2 38.1 0.0 -546.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
129.8 0.0 -273.4 124.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 -113.2 -16.6 0.0 129.8 124.6 19.1 0.0 -124.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
64.9 -56.6 -62.3 62.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -56.6 -8.3 0.0 56.4 54.2 8.3 0.0 -62.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
28.2 -28.3 -31.1 27.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -24.6 -3.6 0.0 28.2 27.1 4.1 0.0 -27.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
14.1 -12.3 -13.5 13.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -12.3 -1.8 0.0 12.3 11.8 1.8 0.0 -13.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6.1 -6.1 -6.8 5.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -5.3 -0.8 0.0 6.1 5.9 0.9 0.0 -5.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
3.1 -2.7 -2.9 2.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.7 -0.4 0.0 2.7 2.6 0.4 0.0 -2.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 31.5 -31.5 0.0 389.0 -461.8 72.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-216.0 216.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 188.3 27.7 0.0 -102.5 -98.4 -15.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-51.3 94.2 0.0 -49.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 44.7 6.6 0.0 -44.7 -42.9 -6.6 0.0 49.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-22.3 22.3 24.6 -21.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 19.5 2.9 0.0 -22.3 -21.4 -3.3 0.0 21.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-11.1 9.7 10.7 -10.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.7 1.4 0.0 -9.7 -9.3 -1.4 0.0 10.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-4.9 4.9 5.3 -4.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 4.2 0.6 0.0 -4.8 -4.6 -0.7 0.0 4.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.4 2.1 2.3 -2.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.1 0.3 0.0 -2.1 -2.0 -0.3 0.0 2.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.1 1.1 1.2 -1.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.9 0.1 0.0 -1.1 -1.0 -0.2 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -39.6 39.6 0.0 163.1 -135.6 -27.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-234.4 234.4
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 111.2 106.8 16.3 0.0 -234.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
55.6 0.0 -117.2 53.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 -48.5 -7.1 0.0 55.6 53.4 8.2 0.0 -53.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
27.8 -24.2 -26.7 26.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 -24.2 -3.6 0.0 24.2 23.2 3.6 0.0 -26.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
12.1 -12.1 -13.3 11.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 -10.5 -1.5 0.0 12.1 11.6 1.8 0.0 -11.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6.0 -5.3 -5.8 5.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 -5.3 -0.8 0.0 5.3 5.0 0.8 0.0 -5.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.6 -2.6 -2.9 2.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.3 -0.3 0.0 2.6 2.5 0.4 0.0 -2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.3 -1.1 -1.3 1.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.1 -0.2 0.0 1.1 1.1 0.2 0.0 -1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 13.5 -13.5 0.0 166.7 -197.9 31.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC SUPPORT MOMENTS BEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING (3.2.1.2.2)
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
SLS 1 46.1 582.8 589.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 59.6 416.0 391.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 6.5 419.7 453.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 127.2 1608.8 1626.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 151.3 1312.4 1274.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 56.8 1318.9 1385.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 102.0 1109.4 1139.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 102 1109
ULS 1 187.4 2369.6 2395.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 Min load 1.0 x dead
ULS 2 242.6 1688.5 1587.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 Max load 0.4 x dead + 1.6 x imposed (Table 2.1)
ULS 3 25.7 1703.5 1842.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
REDISTRIBUTION 20% (3.2.2.1)
b - 80% b + 110%
Max M 194.1 1916.7 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 194.1 1916.7 1916.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 194.1 1857.4 1746.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 28.2 1873.9 1916.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
:

E
V
E
N

S
P
A
N
S
APPLID
DEAD
EVEN
SPANS
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N

O
D
D

S
P
A
N
S
78
R68
The Concrete Centre
97
98
DETAILED CALCULATIONS iv
TOTAL LOADS
Span 1 Span 2
UDL PL1 PL2 part UD UDL PL1 PL2 part UD UDL PL1 PL2 part UD
SLS 1 381.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 397.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 381.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 172.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 165.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 397.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 1053.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1097.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 1053.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 697.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 669.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1097.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 784.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 817.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 1551.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 1616.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 1551.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 697.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 669.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1616.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SUPPORT SHEARS BEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING
SLS 1 146.1 235.6 245.9 151.6 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 161.1 220.5 117.6 55.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 48.4 117.3 235.1 162.5 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 403.4 650.3 678.9 418.7 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 430.1 623.6 450.8 246.8 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 229.7 440.0 659.6 437.9 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 308.5 476.4 499.9 317.6 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 632.4 919.5 961.6 655.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 637.4 914.6 488.5 209.1 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 181.0 488.6 961.6 655.0 0.0 0.0
SLS SPAN MOMENTBEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING
SPAN 1 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right Loadings 0 0
Elastic V SLS 3 48.4 0 48.4 0 48.4 100 117.3 13.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS 5 430.1 0 430.1 0 430.1 100 623.6 87.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.506 12
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.898 MAX
Span M SLS 3 6.5 -6.5 -6.5 -6.5 -6.5 78.4 419.7 78.4
SLS 5 151.3 -151.3 -151.3 -151.3 -151.3 902.0 1312.4 902.0 at 4.898
SPAN 2 0 0
Elastic V SLS 2 117.6 0 117.6 0 117.6 100 55.0 13.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS 6 659.6 0 659.6 0 659.6 100 437.9 87.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS 2 0.000 0 0.000 0 8.518 12.5
SLS 6 0.000 0 0.000 0 7.512 MAX
Span M SLS 2 391.3 -391.3 -391.3 -391.3 -391.3 109.5 0.0 109.5
SLS 6 1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 1092.1 0.0 1092.1 at 7.512
SPAN 3 0 0
Elastic V SLS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS 5 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS 3 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0
SLS 5 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 MAX
Span M SLS 3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 at 0.000
TENDONS (a) Breaking load = 186.0 Assume 104.2 kN max per strand
Pfmin 0 1181.3 1980.2 2217.7 1750.2 -6164.2 0.0 0.0 0 2217.7 min 0
Pfmax 16289.9 4209.4 7334.2 7244.9 4293.3 16234.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 4209.4 max
MIN 1980.2 2217.7 0.0
MAX 4209.4 OK 4293.3 OK 0.0 OK 104.2 Pf per strand
24 26 1 0.225
24 24 0 Max(MIN):Min(MAX) = 0.517
Recomm'ed heights 40 40 0 Margin OK
Actual Number
Recomm'ed Number
0
The Concrete Centre
79
R68
98
99
DETAILED CALCULATIONS v
PROFILING Span 1 Span 2 0
a 1050 1100 0
X -0.692 0.4091 0
Y -1.758 -1.846 0
Z 0.9103 0.8988 0
b 5161 6856 0
c 1050 1250 0
net L 11700 12350 0
y1 260 440 0
y3 440 260 0
A1 -5E-05 -6E-05 0
A2 1E-05 1E-05 0
A3 -6E-05 -4E-05 0
y a 207.1 369.4 0.0
y c 369.4 200.8 0.0
PRESTRESS LOSSES Pj = 130 kN Ap = 100 Lt max = 24650 SPAN No Length AVGE
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 0 0 24 24650
FRICTION & WOBBLE 0 24650
Angle 0.101 0.135 0.128 0.095 0.000 0.000 0 12300
x left 0 5161 11700 11700 18556 24050 24050 24050 24050 24 24650
0 6856 12350 12350 12350 12350 0 12650
0 0 0 0 12650
x right 24050 18889 12350 12350 5494 0 0 0 0 0 24650
24050 18889 12350 12350 5494 0 0 12650
11700 6539 0 0 0
Cum left 0 0.202 0.471 0.471 0.727 0.917 0.917 0.917 0.917
0.000 0.257 0.446 0.446 0.446 0.446
0.000 0.000 0.000
m right 0.917 0.715 0.446 0.446 0.189 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
0.917 0.715 0.446 0.446 0.189 0
0.471 0.269 0
from left 0.0 102.6 233.3 233.3 354.4 441.7 441.7 441.7 441.7
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sum 0.0 102.6 233.3 233.3 354.4 441.7 441.7 441.7 441.7
from right 441.7 350.6 225.2 225.2 98.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sum 441.7 350.6 225.2 225.2 98.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Deanna Troi's Table
Loss 220.8 226.6 229.2 229.2 226.4 220.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 for Bonded Tendons
DRAW-IN Z Pi
x left 300 5461 12000 12300 19156 24650 24650 24650 24650 0.0008 12227 111.1 1 Left
300 7156 12650 12650 12650 12650 0.0000 0 0.0 2 Left
0 0 0 0.0000 0 0.0 3 Left
x right 24350 19189 12650 12350 5494 0 0 0 0 0.0000 0 0.0 1 Right
24350 19189 12650 12350 5494 0 0.0007 12522 111.5 2 Right
12000 6839 300 0.0000 0 0.0 3 Right
Px left (B) 2671.1 2768.0 2890.9 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5
Px right (B) 2676.3 2676.3 2676.3 2897.5 2774.7 2676.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Loss 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC LOSS
Loss 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
losses 356.2 361.9 364.5 364.5 361.7 356.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Initial Force 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
RELAXATION
Loss 55.4 55.3 55.2 55.2 55.3 55.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SHRINKAGE
Loss 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
CREEP
Loss 95.7 95.5 95.4 95.4 95.5 95.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
losses 248.0 247.7 247.5 247.5 247.7 248.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Final Force 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
24650
0
The Concrete Centre
80
R68
1
2
3
24650
STRESSING LENGTHS
Stressed from BOTH ends
99
100
Project
DETAILED CALCULATIONS vi
BALANCE LOADS
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
y1 260 260 440 440 440 440 260 260 0 0 0 0
a 1050 1050 1050 1050 1100 1100 1250 1250 0 0 0 0
b 5161 5161 6539 6539 6856 6856 5494 5494 0 0 0 0
INITIAL PRESTRESS
V1 = -We 278.41 371.80 354.66 261.52 0.00 0.00
UDL 265.1 -67.7 -67.7 354.1 322.4 -61.6 61.6 209.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FINAL PRESTRESS
V1 = -We 253.45 338.47 322.87 238.07 0.00 0.00
UDL 241.4 -61.7 -61.7 322.4 293.5 -56.1 56.1 190.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
BALANCE LOAD FEM Span 1 Span 2 0
a/L 0.343 0.460 0.000
b/L 0.271 0.330 0.100
factor 0.132 0.055 0.130 0.073 0.081 0.009
FEM i -442.5 -185.2 -577.7 -324.5 0.0 0.0
FEM f -402.9 -168.6 -525.9 -295.5 0.0 0.0
a/L 0.457 0.340 0.800
b/L 0.671 0.730 0.500
factor 0.073 0.130 0.055 0.132 0.098 0.098
FEM i -324.7 -582.0 -179.7 -432.8 0.0 0.0
FEM f -295.6 -529.8 -163.6 -394.0 0.0 0.0
a/L 0.088 0.088 #DIV/0!
b/L 0.056 0.056 #DIV/0!
factor 0.049 0.004 0.049 0.003 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEM i 163.5 11.7 216.0 15.5 0.0 0.0
FEM f 148.8 10.7 196.6 14.1 0.0 0.0
a/L 0.088 0.100 #DIV/0!
b/L 0.944 0.950 #DIV/0!
factor 0.004 0.049 0.003 0.044 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEM i 15.7 218.3 10.1 142.5 0.0 0.0
FEM f 14.3 198.7 9.2 129.7 0.0 0.0
TOTALS FEM i -588.1 -537.2 -531.3 -599.4 0.0 0.0
FEM f -535.4 -489.0 -483.7 -545.7 0.0 0.0
BALANCE LOAD MOMENT DISTRIBUTION
INITIAL 588.1 -537.2 531.3 -599.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 -512.7 -75.3 0.0 2.8 2.7 0.4 0.0 599.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.4 -256.4 299.7 1.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.2 -0.2 0.0 -20.6 -19.7 -3.0 0.0 -1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-10.3 -0.6 -0.7 -9.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.0 1.3 0.0 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.0 9.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 4.5 4.9 0.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 -4.5 -4.3 -0.7 0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.2 -0.1 -0.1 -2.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 1.0 1.1 0.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -1.0 -0.9 -0.1 0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.5 0.0 0.0 -0.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 73.9 -73.9 0.0 -811.3 814.6 -3.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2nd'y M 0.0 61.2 -61.2 0.0 -301.3 304.6 0.0 0.0 12.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 #VALUE! 0.0
FINAL 535.4 -489.0 483.7 -545.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 -466.8 -68.6 0.0 2.5 2.4 0.4 0.0 545.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.3 -233.4 272.8 1.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.1 -0.2 0.0 -18.7 -18.0 -2.8 0.0 -1.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-9.4 -0.6 -0.6 -9.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 8.2 1.2 0.0 0.6 0.5 0.1 0.0 9.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 4.1 4.5 0.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.2 0.0 0.0 -4.1 -3.9 -0.6 0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.0 -0.1 -0.1 -2.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.8 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 0.9 1.0 0.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -0.9 -0.8 -0.1 0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.4 0.0 0.0 -0.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 67.3 -67.3 0.0 -738.6 741.6 -3.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2nd'ry M 0.0 55.7 -55.7 0.0 -274.3 277.3 0.0 0.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
RIGHT
END
CENTRE
LEFT
CENTRE
RIGHT
LEFT
END
81
R68
The Concrete Centre
100
101
DETAILED CALCULATIONS vii
SUPPORT MOMENTSWITH EQUIVALENT LOADING
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
SLS 1 -27.8 -228.6 -225.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 -14.3 -395.3 -423.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 -67.4 -391.6 -360.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 60.0 870.2 885.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 84.0 573.8 533.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 -10.4 580.3 644.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 34.7 370.9 397.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 126.8 1178.1 1175.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 126.8 1118.8 1004.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 -39.1 1135.3 1175.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 25.1 748.2 756.6 11.5 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED 46.4 586.3 592.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SUPPORT SHEARS WITH EQUIVALENT LOADING
Span 1 Span 2 0.0
SLS 1 166.1 -20.0 215.6 220.5 25.4 177.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 181.1 -20.0 200.5 92.2 25.4 80.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 68.4 -20.0 97.3 209.7 25.4 187.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 421.6 -18.2 632.1 655.8 23.1 441.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 448.3 -18.2 605.4 427.7 23.1 269.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 247.9 -18.2 421.8 636.5 23.1 461.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 326.7 -18.2 458.2 476.8 23.1 340.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 650.6 -18.2 901.3 938.5 23.1 678.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 655.6 -18.2 896.4 465.4 23.1 232.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 199.2 -18.2 470.4 938.5 23.1 678.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 274.6 395.1 408.4 289.2 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED 147.0 237.0 247.4 152.6 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC
ULS 1 612.3 -18.2 939.6 976.9 23.1 639.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 673.7 -18.2 878.2 452.7 23.1 244.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 213.2 -18.2 456.4 932.6 23.1 684.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ADJUSTED SPAN MOMENTS Loadings 0 0
Span 1 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right UDL PL1 PL2 pUDL 12
V SLS 1 166.1 0 166.1 0 166.1 100 215.6 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 181.1 0 181.1 0 181.1 100 200.5 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 68.4 0 68.4 0 68.4 100 97.3 13.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 421.6 0 421.6 0 421.6 100 632.1 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 448.3 0 448.3 0 448.3 100 605.4 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 247.9 0 247.9 0 247.9 100 421.8 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 65.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 650.6 0 650.6 0 650.6 100 901.3 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 655.6 0 655.6 0 655.6 100 896.4 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 199.2 0 199.2 0 199.2 100 470.4 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.223
SLS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.695
SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.955
SLS 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.801
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.105
SLS 6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.442
ULS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.031
ULS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.069
ULS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.570
M SLS 1 -15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 449.0 281.4 M X bar T height
SLS 2 -1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 517.4 114.7 517.4 max @ 5.695 41.8
SLS 3 -54.7 54.7 54.7 54.7 54.7 224.2 118.4 224.2 min @ 4.955 41.5
SLS 4 71.5 -71.5 -71.5 -71.5 -71.5 940.6 1334.5
SLS 5 95.5 -95.5 -95.5 -95.5 -95.5 1048.8 1038.1 1048.8 max @ 5.105 40.5
SLS 6 1.1 -1.1 -1.1 -1.1 -1.1 549.4 1044.6 549.4 min @ 4.442 49.3
ULS 1 138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 1498.3 1642.4
ULS 2 138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 1523.2 1583.1 1523.2 max @ 5.069 40.7
ULS 3 -27.52 27.52 27.52 27.52 27.52 383.21 1599.55 383.2 min @ 3.570 77.1
The Concrete Centre
82
R68
101
102
DETAILED CALCULATIONS viii Loadings 0 0
Span 2 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right UDL PL1 PL2 pUDL 12.5
V SLS 1 220.5 0 220.5 0 220.5 100 177.0 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 92.2 0 92.2 0 92.2 100 80.4 13.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 209.7 0 209.7 0 209.7 100 187.9 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 655.8 0 655.8 0 655.8 100 441.8 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 427.7 0 427.7 0 427.7 100 269.9 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 636.5 0 636.5 0 636.5 100 461.0 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 65.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 938.5 0 938.5 0 938.5 100 678.1 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 465.4 0 465.4 0 465.4 100 232.2 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 938.5 0 938.5 0 938.5 100 678.1 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.934
SLS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.679
SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.593
SLS 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.469
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.663
SLS 6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.249
ULS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.257
ULS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8.339
ULS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.257
M SLS 1 285 -285 -285 -285 -285 480 13 M X bar T height
SLS 2 87 -87 -87 -87 -87 221 13 542.2 max @ 6.593 41.9
SLS 3 149 -149 -149 -149 -149 542 13 221.2 min @ 6.679 41.2
SLS 4 1349 -1349 -1349 -1349 -1349 1100 12
SLS 5 998 -998 -998 -998 -998 641 12 1198.8 max @ 7.249 40.7
SLS 6 1108 -1108 -1108 -1108 -1108 1199 12 641.2 min @ 7.663 44.8
ULS 1 1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 1766 12
ULS 2 1469 -1469 -1469 -1469 -1469 471 12 1766.0 max @ 7.257 40.7
ULS 3 1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 1766 12 471.5 min @ 8.339 59.8
Loadings 0 0
0 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right UDL PL1 PL2 pUDL 0
V SLS 1 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
M SLS 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! M X bar T height
SLS 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SLS 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
ULS 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ULS 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
ULS 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
The Concrete Centre
83
R68
102
103
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN TO BS 8110 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg Date
DETAILED CALCULATIONS ix
(d) ULS MOMENT C Supt 1 0
Right Left Right Left Right Left
42.2 1529.6 1500.1 11.5 0.0 0.0
300.0 480.0 480.0 300.0 0.0 0.0
1050 1047 1047 1050 0 0
300.0 480.0 480.0 300.0 0.0 0.0
482.0 480.0 480.0 480.0 0.0 0.0
0.138 0.086 0.086 0.138 0.000 0.000
0.649 0.647 0.647 0.649 0.000 0.000
TABLE 4.4 1a 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00
1b 1 1 1 1 0 0
2a 0.99 1 1 0.99 0 0
2b 0.99 1 1 0.99 0 0
1605 1617 1617 1605 0 0
1182 1281 1281 1182 0 0
2836 3075 3075 2836 0 0
4021 0
1748.4 2731.8 2731.8 2731.8 2731.8 0.0
4584 5807 5807 5568 2732 0
94.3 119.5 119.5 114.6 0.0 0.0
435 435 435 435 0 0
252.8 420.3 420.3 242.7 0.0 0.0
434.8 420.3 420.3 422.7 0.0 0.0
1477.2 2440.3 2440.3 1843.1 0.0 0.0
(e) SHEAR ft = 1.859
V 636.2 881.9 919.1 678.1 0.0 0.0
Mu 42.2 1529.6 1500.1 11.5 0.0 0.0
M0 213.5 574.7 574.7 213.5 0.0 0.0
Cracked ? N Y Y N N N
UNCRACKED fcp 2.127 2.120 2.120 2.127 0.000 0.000
Vco 1629.0 1627.8 1627.8 1629.0 0.0 0.0
CRACKED Aps 2400 2400 2600 2600 0 0
As 6421 8683 8883 8883 0 0
d 414.0 480.0 480.0 210.0 0.0 0.0
As% 0.862 1.005 1.028 2.350 0.000 0.000
fpe/fpu 0.448 0.380 0.392 0.394 0.000 0.000
vc 0.558 0.588 0.592 0.916 0.000 0.000
Vcr 3531.2 733.0 753.3 12815.2 0.0 0.0
Vc 1629.0 733.0 753.3 1629.0 0.0 0.0 Links required
Asv/Sv 1.656 1.656 1.656 1.656 0.000 0.000
Sv 375 375 375 375 0 0
f) VIBRATION nx = 2
ny : ly 5 6.000 5 6.000 0 0.000 Khan/Williams Ref
Ix : Iy 3E+10 2E+09 3E+10 2E+09 0 0 (Concrete Society Method)
x : y 1.934 5.170 2.015 4.963 0.000 0.000 (9.8)
kx : ky 1.267 1.037 1.246 1.041 0.000 0.000 (9.9, 9.10)
65.41 54.51 65.41 54.51 0.00 0.00
x : y 8.56 13.69 13.99 13.69 0.00 0.00
f'x : f'y 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.11)
fbx : fby 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.12, 9.13)
fx : fy 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.14)
Nx : Ny 1.388 2.036 1.404 1.995 1.000 1.000 (9.17, 9.18)
Cx : Cy 246.7 243.4 248.3 275.3 0.0 0.0 (9.19)
Rx : Ry 0.36 0.25 0.35 0.26 0.00 0.00 (9.20)
R (9.21)
Steel stress
Span 1 Span 2 0
435 435
2611.6
0
MOR
Zt
Zr
448.2
443.9
dr 480.0 484.0 0.0
fpe
The Concrete Centre
84
R68
DESIGN MOMENT
40.7 40.7 0.0
Span 1
1523.2 0.0
TENDON HEIGHT
Span 2 0
Supt 2 Supt 3
1766.0
Hinges 2 0
0.00 24.50
1048 1048 0
2
Lte
dt 484.3
Lt 24.50
12250
484.3
Rp 0.051
fpe/fpu
fpb bonded
0.648 0.648
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.051
0.0
12250 0
0
0.000
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.00
1301
TENDON FORCE
dn 72.3 50.7
TOTAL TENSION 5854
6283 2262 6283
0.0
0.0
0.000
1.00
0 6283
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
4105 0
1883.9
0
459.0
458.7
0
0.60 0.61 0.00
Span 1 Span 2
1617 1617
REBAR FORCE 2731.8
As
3122 3122
983.5
1301 fpb unbonded
103
104
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DEFLECTS!

P
r
o
j
e
c
t
S
p
r
e
a
d
s
h
e
e
t
s

t
o

B
S

8
1
1
0

C
l
i
e
n
t
A
d
v
i
s
o
r
y

G
r
o
u
p
M
a
d
e

b
y
D
a
t
e
P
a
g
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
L
e
v
e
l

2

-

B
e
a
m

o
n

G
r
i
d

7
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N

C
A
L
C
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
S
R
M
W
1
1
-
A
p
r
-
2
0
0
6
P
O
S
T
-
T
E
N
S
I
O
N
E
D

A
N
A
L
Y
S
I
S

&

D
E
S
I
G
N

t
o

B
S

8
1
1
0
:
2
0
0
5
C
h
e
c
k
e
d
R
e
v
is
io
n
J
o
b

N
o
O
r
ig
in
a
t
e
d
f
r
o
m
R
C
C
4
2
.x
ls
v
3
.0
o
n
C
D

2
0
0
6
T
C
C
c
h
g
-
S
P
A
N

1
A
s
(
b
)

=
6
2
8
3
d

=
4
8
0
h

=
5
2
5
b
w

=
1
8
0
0
b
f

=
3
0
0
0
h
f

=
2
0
0
b
d
3
/
1
2

=
2
E
+
1
0
D
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
0
5
2
5
1
0
5
0
1
6
5
0
2
2
5
0
2
8
5
0
3
4
5
0
4
0
5
0
4
6
5
0
5
2
5
0
5
8
5
0
6
4
5
0
7
0
5
0
7
6
5
0
8
2
5
0
8
8
5
0
9
4
5
0
1
0
0
5
0
1
0
6
5
0
1
1
1
7
5
1
1
7
0
0
E
l
e
m
e
n
t

b
2
6
3
5
2
5
5
6
3
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
6
0
0
5
6
3
5
2
5
2
6
3
d
'
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
A
s
(
t
)
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
4
0
2
1
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

a
t
T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
E

=
2
5
.
5
3
m

=
7
.
8
3
m

-

1

=
6
.
8
3
A
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6

A
.
Y
t
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
Y
t
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
4
.
1
2
3
1
.
8
2
3
1
.
8
2
3
1
.
8
2
3
1
.
8
2
3
1
.
8
2
3
1
.
8
Y
b
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
0
.
9
2
9
3
.
2
2
9
3
.
2
2
9
3
.
2
2
9
3
.
2
2
9
3
.
2
2
9
3
.
2
I
x
x
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

-
L
O
N
G
T
E
R
M
E

=
8
.
9
2
m

=
2
2
.
4
3
m

-

1

=
2
1
.
4
3
A
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6

A
.
Y
t
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
Y
t
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
4
2
.
1
2
3
5
.
7
2
3
5
.
7
2
3
5
.
7
2
3
5
.
7
2
3
5
.
7
2
3
5
.
7
Y
b
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
2
.
9
2
8
9
.
3
2
8
9
.
3
2
8
9
.
3
2
8
9
.
3
2
8
9
.
3
2
8
9
.
3
I
x
x
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

-
I
M
P
O
S
E
D
E

=
3
3
.
5
4
m

=
5
.
9
6
m

-

1

=
4
.
9
6
A
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6

A
.
Y
t
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
Y
t
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
2
.
9
2
3
1
.
2
2
3
1
.
2
2
3
1
.
2
2
3
1
.
2
2
3
1
.
2
2
3
1
.
2
Y
b
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
2
.
1
2
9
3
.
8
2
9
3
.
8
2
9
3
.
8
2
9
3
.
8
2
9
3
.
8
2
9
3
.
8
I
x
x
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

a
t

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
M

(
S
L
S

3
)
7
7
.
5
7
3
.
9
-
6
.
6
-
1
3
2
.
8
-
2
3
9
.
6
-
3
2
7
.
0
-
3
9
5
.
0
-
4
4
3
.
6
-
4
7
2
.
8
-
4
8
2
.
5
-
4
7
2
.
9
-
4
4
3
.
8
-
3
9
5
.
3
-
3
2
7
.
4
-
2
4
0
.
1
-
1
3
3
.
4
-
7
.
3
1
3
8
.
3
3
0
3
.
2
4
0
5
.
3
4
0
6
.
1
1
/
R
1
E
-
0
7
9
E
-
0
8
-
8
E
-
0
9
-
2
E
-
0
7
-
3
E
-
0
7
-
4
E
-
0
7
-
5
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
5
E
-
0
7
-
4
E
-
0
7
-
3
E
-
0
7
-
2
E
-
0
7
-
9
E
-
0
9
2
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
L
o
a
d
3
E
-
0
5
5
E
-
0
5
-
5
E
-
0
6
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
5
E
-
0
6
1
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
0
.
0
0
3
0
.
0
2
6
-
0
.
0
0
5
-
0
.
1
6
5
-
0
.
4
0
6
-
0
.
7
0
2
-
1
.
0
2
7
-
1
.
3
5
4
-
1
.
6
5
7
-
1
.
9
0
9
-
2
.
0
8
5
-
2
.
1
5
7
-
2
.
1
0
1
-
1
.
8
8
8
-
1
.
4
9
3
-
0
.
8
7
5
-
0
.
0
5
1
1
.
0
3
2
.
2
4
4
2
.
9
3
8
1
.
4
8
9
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
-
0
.
0
0
2
-
9
E
-
0
4
S
p
a
n
0
-
0
.
9
3
-
1
.
8
9
-
2
.
9
9
-
4
.
0
2
-
4
.
9
5
-
5
.
7
3
-
6
.
3
3
-
6
.
7
3
-
6
.
9
1
-
6
.
8
8
-
6
.
6
3
-
6
.
1
9
-
5
.
5
6
-
4
.
7
9
-
3
.
9
1
-
2
.
9
6
-
2
.
0
2
-
1
.
1
4
-
0
.
4
7
0
C
a
n
t
0
-
1
0
.
6
2
-
1
1
.
1
3
-
1
1
.
7
0
-
1
2
.
2
2
-
1
2
.
6
2
-
1
2
.
8
8
-
1
2
.
9
6
-
1
2
.
8
4
-
1
2
.
5
1
-
1
1
.
9
5
-
1
1
.
1
9
-
1
0
.
2
2
-
9
.
0
7
-
7
.
7
8
-
6
.
3
8
-
4
.
9
2
-
3
.
4
5
-
2
.
0
5
-
0
.
9
3
0
0
-
0
.9
3
-
1
.8
9
-
2
.9
9
-
4
.0
2
-
4
.9
5
-
5
.7
3
-
6
.3
3
-
6
.7
3
-
6
.9
1
-
6
.8
8
-
6
.6
3
-
6
.1
9
-
5
.5
6
-
4
.7
9
-
3
.9
1
-
2
.9
6
-
2
.0
2
-
1
.1
4
-
0
.4
7
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

-

L
O
N
G
T
E
R
M
M

(
S
L
S

7
)
1
3
.
6
1
3
7
.
6
1
7
7
.
2
1
7
3
.
4
1
6
8
.
2
1
6
1
.
7
1
5
3
.
8
1
4
4
.
6
1
3
4
.
0
1
2
2
.
1
1
0
8
.
8
9
4
.
2
7
8
.
3
6
1
.
0
4
2
.
3
2
2
.
3
0
.
9
-
2
1
.
8
-
4
5
.
8
-
1
2
0
.
9
-
3
0
2
.
9
1
/
R
4
E
-
0
8
4
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
1
E
-
0
7
6
E
-
0
8
3
E
-
0
9
-
6
E
-
0
8
-
1
E
-
0
7
-
3
E
-
0
7
-
8
E
-
0
7
L
o
a
d
1
E
-
0
5
2
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
7
E
-
0
5
4
E
-
0
5
2
E
-
0
6
-
4
E
-
0
5
-
7
E
-
0
5
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
0
.
0
0
1
0
.
1
1
0
.
3
0
3
0
.
4
9
6
0
.
6
5
7
0
.
7
9
9
0
.
9
2
1
1
.
0
1
6
1
.
0
8
1
1
.
1
1
2
1
.
1
0
5
1
.
0
5
5
0
.
9
5
7
0
.
8
0
9
0
.
6
0
6
0
.
3
2
7
0
.
0
1
5
-
0
.
3
6
3
-
0
.
7
6
-
1
.
9
6
3
-
2
.
4
8
7
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
0
.
0
0
2
5
E
-
0
4
S
p
a
n
0
1
.
0
7
2
.
0
3
2
.
9
6
3
.
7
0
4
.
2
7
4
.
6
8
4
.
9
2
5
.
0
1
4
.
9
6
4
.
7
8
4
.
5
0
4
.
1
1
3
.
6
4
3
.
1
1
2
.
5
3
1
.
9
3
1
.
3
3
0
.
7
6
0
.
2
9
0
C
a
n
t
0
6
.
6
1
7
.
3
1
7
.
9
4
8
.
3
9
8
.
6
6
8
.
7
6
8
.
7
1
8
.
5
0
8
.
1
6
7
.
6
8
7
.
1
0
6
.
4
1
5
.
6
5
4
.
8
2
3
.
9
4
3
.
0
5
2
.
1
5
1
.
2
8
0
.
5
5
0
0
1
.0
7
2
.0
3
2
.9
6
3
.7
0
4
.2
7
4
.6
8
4
.9
2
5
.0
1
4
.9
6
4
.7
8
4
.5
0
4
.1
1
3
.6
4
3
.1
1
2
.5
3
1
.9
3
1
.3
3
0
.7
6
0
.2
9
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

-

I
M
P
O
S
E
D
M
(
S
L
S

5
-
7
)
-
3
1
.
2
9
2
7
.
6
9
8
0
.
5
1
1
3
3
.
3
0
1
7
8
.
0
4
2
1
4
.
7
1
2
4
3
.
3
1
2
6
3
.
8
5
2
7
6
.
3
3
2
8
0
.
7
5
2
7
7
.
1
0
2
6
5
.
3
8
2
4
5
.
6
0
2
1
7
.
7
6
1
8
1
.
8
6
1
3
7
.
8
9
8
5
.
8
5
2
5
.
7
5
-
4
2
.
4
1
-
1
0
8
.
6
7
-
1
8
1
.
1
0
1
/
R
-
3
E
-
0
8
3
E
-
0
8
8
E
-
0
8
1
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
1
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
8
3
E
-
0
8
-
4
E
-
0
8
-
1
E
-
0
7
-
2
E
-
0
7
L
o
a
d
-
8
E
-
0
6
1
E
-
0
5
4
E
-
0
5
8
E
-
0
5
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
8
E
-
0
5
5
E
-
0
5
2
E
-
0
5
-
2
E
-
0
5
-
6
E
-
0
5
-
5
E
-
0
5
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
-
0
.
0
0
1
0
.
0
0
8
0
.
0
4
7
0
.
1
3
0
.
2
3
7
0
.
3
6
3
0
.
4
9
7
0
.
6
3
3
0
.
7
6
1
0
.
8
7
3
0
.
9
6
1
.
0
1
4
1
.
0
2
6
0
.
9
8
7
0
.
8
8
9
0
.
7
1
4
0
.
4
7
5
0
.
1
5
1
-
0
.
2
4
8
-
0
.
6
2
2
-
0
.
5
2
4
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
0
.
0
0
1
7
E
-
0
4
S
p
a
n
0
0
.
5
3
1
.
0
5
1
.
6
2
2
.
1
5
2
.
6
1
2
.
9
9
3
.
2
9
3
.
4
9
3
.
6
0
3
.
6
0
3
.
5
1
3
.
3
2
3
.
0
5
2
.
6
9
2
.
2
8
1
.
8
1
1
.
3
2
0
.
8
1
0
.
3
8
0
C
a
n
t
0
8
.
5
3
8
.
6
7
8
.
8
1
8
.
9
1
8
.
9
4
8
.
8
9
8
.
7
6
8
.
5
3
8
.
2
1
7
.
7
9
7
.
2
6
6
.
6
5
5
.
9
4
5
.
1
6
4
.
3
2
3
.
4
2
2
.
5
0
1
.
5
6
0
.
7
6
0
0
0
.5
3
1
.0
5
1
.6
2
2
.1
5
2
.6
1
2
.9
9
3
.2
9
3
.4
9
3
.6
0
3
.6
0
3
.5
1
3
.3
2
3
.0
5
2
.6
9
2
.2
8
1
.8
1
1
.3
2
0
.8
1
0
.3
8
0
T
h
e

C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e

C
e
n
t
r
e
8
5
R
6
8
1
0
4
105

P
r
o
j
e
c
t
S
p
r
e
a
d
s
h
e
e
t
s

t
o

B
S

8
1
1
0

C
l
i
e
n
t
A
d
v
i
s
o
r
y

G
r
o
u
p
M
a
d
e

b
y
D
a
t
e
P
a
g
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
L
e
v
e
l

2

-

B
e
a
m

o
n

G
r
i
d

7
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N

C
A
L
C
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
S

(
i
i
)
R
M
W
1
1
-
A
p
r
-
2
0
0
6
P
O
S
T
-
T
E
N
S
I
O
N
E
D

A
N
A
L
Y
S
I
S

&

D
E
S
I
G
N

t
o

B
S

8
1
1
0
:
2
0
0
5
C
h
e
c
k
e
d
R
e
v
is
io
n
J
o
b

N
o
O
r
ig
in
a
t
e
d
f
r
o
m
R
C
C
4
2
.x
ls
v
3
.0
o
n
C
D

2
0
0
6
T
C
C
c
h
g
-
S
P
A
N

2
A
s
(
b
)

=
2
2
6
2
d

=
4
8
4
h

=
5
2
5
b
w

=
1
8
0
0
b
f

=
3
0
0
0
h
f

=
2
0
0
b
d
3
/
1
2

=
2
E
+
1
0
D
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
0
5
5
0
1
1
0
0
1
7
2
5
2
3
5
0
2
9
7
5
3
6
0
0
4
2
2
5
4
8
5
0
5
4
7
5
6
1
0
0
6
7
2
5
7
3
5
0
7
9
7
5
8
6
0
0
9
2
2
5
9
8
5
0
1
0
4
7
5
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
7
2
5
1
2
3
5
0
E
l
e
m
e
n
t

b
2
7
5
5
5
0
5
8
8
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
6
2
5
3
1
3
d
'
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
A
s
(
t
)
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

a
t
T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
E

=
2
5
.
5
3
m

=
7
.
8
3
m

-

1

=
6
.
8
3
A
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6

A
.
Y
t
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
Y
t
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
2
2
6
.
4
Y
b
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
2
9
8
.
6
I
x
x
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

-
L
O
N
G
T
E
R
M
E

=
8
.
9
2
m

=
2
2
.
4
3
m

-

1

=
2
1
.
4
3
A
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6

A
.
Y
t
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
Y
t
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
2
2
0
.
4
Y
b
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
3
0
4
.
6
I
x
x
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
4
E
+
1
0
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

-
I
M
P
O
S
E
D
E

=
3
3
.
5
4
m

=
5
.
9
6
m

-

1

=
4
.
9
6
A
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6

A
.
Y
t
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
3
E
+
0
8
Y
t
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
2
2
7
.
2
Y
b
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
2
9
7
.
8
I
x
x
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
3
E
+
1
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

a
t

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
M

(
S
L
S

2
)
4
3
7
.
0
4
3
5
.
7
3
3
2
.
7
1
6
7
.
2
2
0
.
4
-
1
0
7
.
7
-
2
1
7
.
1
-
3
0
7
.
9
-
3
8
0
.
0
-
4
3
3
.
4
-
4
6
8
.
2
-
4
8
4
.
3
-
4
8
1
.
6
-
4
6
0
.
4
-
4
2
0
.
4
-
3
6
1
.
8
-
2
8
4
.
4
-
1
8
8
.
4
-
7
3
.
8
6
.
7
0
.
0
1
/
R
6
E
-
0
7
6
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
8
-
1
E
-
0
7
-
3
E
-
0
7
-
4
E
-
0
7
-
5
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
6
E
-
0
7
-
5
E
-
0
7
-
5
E
-
0
7
-
4
E
-
0
7
-
2
E
-
0
7
-
1
E
-
0
7
9
E
-
0
9
6
E
-
2
1
L
o
a
d
2
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
5
-
9
E
-
0
5
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
6
E
-
0
5
5
E
-
0
6
2
E
-
1
8
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
0
.
0
2
2
0
.
1
7
2
0
.
2
8
1
0
.
2
3
5
0
.
0
3
9
-
0
.
2
6
1
-
0
.
6
3
8
-
1
.
0
6
1
-
1
.
5
0
4
-
1
.
9
3
6
-
2
.
3
3
-
2
.
6
5
7
-
2
.
8
8
8
-
2
.
9
9
5
-
2
.
9
4
9
-
2
.
7
2
2
-
2
.
2
8
6
-
1
.
6
1
-
0
.
6
6
8
0
.
0
6
4
2
E
-
1
4
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
-
8
E
-
0
4
-
0
.
0
0
2
S
p
a
n
0
-
0
.
5
3
-
1
.
2
5
-
2
.
2
3
-
3
.
3
0
-
4
.
3
8
-
5
.
4
0
-
6
.
3
1
-
7
.
0
7
-
7
.
6
3
-
7
.
9
7
-
8
.
0
7
-
7
.
9
2
-
7
.
5
3
-
6
.
9
1
-
6
.
0
6
-
5
.
0
4
-
3
.
8
7
-
2
.
6
0
-
1
.
3
0
0
C
a
n
t
0
-
2
5
.
0
8
-
2
4
.
6
6
-
2
4
.
3
4
-
2
4
.
1
0
-
2
3
.
8
8
-
2
3
.
6
0
-
2
3
.
2
1
-
2
2
.
6
7
-
2
1
.
9
3
-
2
0
.
9
7
-
1
9
.
7
7
-
1
8
.
3
2
-
1
6
.
6
3
-
1
4
.
7
1
-
1
2
.
5
7
-
1
0
.
2
4
-
7
.
7
7
-
5
.
2
0
-
2
.
6
0
0
0
-
0
.5
3
-
1
.2
5
-
2
.2
3
-
3
.3
0
-
4
.3
8
-
5
.4
0
-
6
.3
1
-
7
.0
7
-
7
.6
3
-
7
.9
7
-
8
.0
7
-
7
.9
2
-
7
.5
3
-
6
.9
1
-
6
.0
6
-
5
.0
4
-
3
.8
7
-
2
.6
0
-
1
.3
0
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

-

L
O
N
G
T
E
R
M
M

(
S
L
S

7
)
-
3
2
7
.
0
-
1
2
4
.
4
-
3
0
.
4
1
2
.
9
5
2
.
5
8
8
.
6
1
2
1
.
0
1
4
9
.
7
1
7
4
.
9
1
9
6
.
3
2
1
4
.
2
2
2
8
.
4
2
3
9
.
0
2
4
5
.
9
2
4
9
.
2
2
4
8
.
9
2
4
4
.
9
2
3
7
.
3
2
2
6
.
0
1
6
3
.
0
0
.
0
1
/
R
-
1
E
-
0
6
-
4
E
-
0
7
-
1
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
8
2
E
-
0
7
3
E
-
0
7
4
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
6
E
-
0
7
6
E
-
0
7
7
E
-
0
7
7
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
7
8
E
-
0
7
7
E
-
0
7
5
E
-
0
7
1
E
-
2
0
L
o
a
d
-
3
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
6
E
-
0
5
3
E
-
0
5
1
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
2
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
5
E
-
0
4
3
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
1
8
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
-
0
.
0
3
9
-
0
.
1
2
-
0
.
0
6
3
0
.
0
4
4
0
.
2
4
6
0
.
5
2
5
0
.
8
6
8
1
.
2
6
1
1
.
6
9
2
.
1
4
3
2
.
6
0
4
3
.
0
6
1
3
.
5
0
1
3
.
9
0
9
4
.
2
7
2
4
.
5
7
6
4
.
8
0
8
4
.
9
5
4
5
.
0
0
1
3
.
8
0
9
5
E
-
1
4
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
0
.
0
0
2
0
.
0
0
4
S
p
a
n
0
1
.
1
0
2
.
3
7
3
.
8
4
5
.
2
9
6
.
6
8
7
.
9
6
9
.
0
9
1
0
.
0
4
1
0
.
7
6
1
1
.
2
4
1
1
.
4
5
1
1
.
3
8
1
1
.
0
1
1
0
.
3
4
9
.
3
5
8
.
0
6
6
.
4
6
4
.
5
6
2
.
3
8
0
C
a
n
t
0
4
6
.
0
6
4
5
.
2
3
4
4
.
3
2
4
3
.
3
9
4
2
.
4
0
4
1
.
3
0
4
0
.
0
5
3
8
.
6
1
3
6
.
9
5
3
5
.
0
5
3
2
.
8
8
3
0
.
4
3
2
7
.
6
8
2
4
.
6
2
2
1
.
2
6
1
7
.
5
8
1
3
.
6
0
9
.
3
2
4
.
7
6
0
0
.0
1
.1
2
.4
3
.8
5
.3
6
.7
8
.0
9
.1
1
0
.0
1
0
.8
1
1
.2
1
1
.5
1
1
.4
1
1
.0
1
0
.3
9
.4
8
.1
6
.5
4
.6
2
.4
0
.0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

-

I
M
P
O
S
E
D
M
(
S
L
S

4
-
7
)
-
4
6
0
.
7
-
3
6
7
.
5
-
2
8
1
.
0
-
1
9
1
.
1
-
1
0
9
.
8
-
3
7
.
3
2
6
.
4
8
1
.
4
1
2
7
.
6
1
6
5
.
1
1
9
3
.
9
2
1
3
.
9
2
2
5
.
1
2
2
7
.
6
2
2
1
.
3
2
0
6
.
3
1
8
2
.
5
1
5
0
.
0
1
0
8
.
8
5
8
.
8
0
.
0
1
/
R
-
5
E
-
0
7
-
4
E
-
0
7
-
3
E
-
0
7
-
2
E
-
0
7
-
1
E
-
0
7
-
4
E
-
0
8
3
E
-
0
8
8
E
-
0
8
1
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
2
E
-
0
7
1
E
-
0
7
6
E
-
0
8
0
L
o
a
d
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
2
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
7
E
-
0
5
-
2
E
-
0
5
2
E
-
0
5
5
E
-
0
5
8
E
-
0
5
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
7
E
-
0
5
4
E
-
0
5
0
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
-
0
.
0
1
8
-
0
.
1
1
3
-
0
.
1
8
5
-
0
.
2
0
9
-
0
.
1
6
4
-
0
.
0
7
1
0
.
0
6
0
.
2
1
8
0
.
3
9
3
0
.
5
7
4
0
.
7
5
1
0
.
9
1
3
1
.
0
5
1
1
.
1
5
3
1
.
2
0
9
1
.
2
0
9
1
.
1
4
2
0
.
9
9
8
0
.
7
6
7
0
.
4
3
8
0
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
-
1
E
-
0
4
8
E
-
0
4
S
p
a
n
0
-
0
.
0
3
0
.
0
8
0
.
3
0
0
.
6
0
0
.
9
4
1
.
3
0
1
.
6
4
1
.
9
6
2
.
2
2
2
.
4
2
2
.
5
4
2
.
5
7
2
.
5
2
2
.
3
8
2
.
1
5
1
.
8
3
1
.
4
5
1
.
0
0
0
.
5
1
0
C
a
n
t
0
9
.
6
4
9
.
2
9
9
.
0
0
8
.
7
9
8
.
6
2
8
.
4
6
8
.
3
0
8
.
1
0
7
.
8
5
7
.
5
4
7
.
1
5
6
.
6
7
6
.
1
1
5
.
4
5
4
.
7
1
3
.
8
8
2
.
9
8
2
.
0
2
1
.
0
2
0
0
-
0
.0
3
0
.0
8
0
.3
0
0
.6
0
0
.9
4
1
.3
0
1
.6
4
1
.9
6
2
.2
2
2
.4
2
2
.5
4
2
.5
7
2
.5
2
2
.3
8
2
.1
5
1
.8
3
1
.4
5
1
.0
0
0
.5
1
0
8
6
R
6
8
T
h
e

C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e

C
e
n
t
r
e
1
0
5
106

P
r
o
j
e
c
t
S
p
r
e
a
d
s
h
e
e
t
s

t
o

B
S

8
1
1
0

C
l
i
e
n
t
A
d
v
i
s
o
r
y

G
r
o
u
p
M
a
d
e

b
y
D
a
t
e
P
a
g
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
L
e
v
e
l

2

-

B
e
a
m

o
n

G
r
i
d

7
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N

C
A
L
C
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
S

(
i
i
i
)
R
M
W
1
1
-
A
p
r
-
2
0
0
6
P
O
S
T
-
T
E
N
S
I
O
N
E
D

A
N
A
L
Y
S
I
S

&

D
E
S
I
G
N

t
o

B
S

8
1
1
0
:
2
0
0
5
C
h
e
c
k
e
d
R
e
v
is
io
n
J
o
b

N
o
O
r
ig
in
a
t
e
d
f
r
o
m
R
C
C
4
2
.x
ls
v
3
.0
o
n
C
D

2
0
0
6
T
C
C
c
h
g
-
S
P
A
N

3
A
s
(
b
)

=
0
d

=
-
4
5
h

=
0
b
w

=
0
b
f

=
0
h
f

=
0
b
d
3
/
1
2

=
0
D
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
0
0
E
l
e
m
e
n
t

b
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
d
'
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
A
s
(
t
)
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
6
2
8
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

a
t
T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
E

=
2
5
.
5
3
m

=
7
.
8
3
m

-

1

=
6
.
8
3
A
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
4
2
9
4
0
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4

A
.
Y
t
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
2
E
+
0
6
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
Y
t
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
Y
b
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
x
x
0
.
5
5
4
0
.
5
5
4
0
.
5
5
4
0
.
5
5
4
0
.
5
5
4
0
.
5
5
4
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
5
2
9
0
.
2
6
5
0
.
2
6
5
0
.
2
6
5
0
.
2
6
5
0
.
2
6
5
0
.
2
6
5
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

-
L
O
N
G
T
E
R
M
E

=
8
.
9
2
m

=
2
2
.
4
3
m

-

1

=
2
1
.
4
3
A
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
1
E
+
0
5
4
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4
4
E
-
0
4

A
.
Y
t
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
6
E
+
0
6
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
-
4
E
-
0
4
Y
t
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
Y
b
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
x
x
1
.
7
3
6
1
.
7
3
6
1
.
7
3
6
1
.
7
3
6
1
.
7
3
6
1
.
7
3
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
1
.
6
6
0
.
8
3
0
.
8
3
0
.
8
3
0
.
8
3
0
.
8
3
0
.
8
3
T
R
A
N
F
O
R
M
E
D

S
E
C
T
I
O
N

P
R
O
P
E
R
T
I
E
S

-
I
M
P
O
S
E
D
E

=
3
3
.
5
4
m

=
5
.
9
6
m

-

1

=
4
.
9
6
A
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
3
1
1
8
8
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4
1
E
-
0
4

A
.
Y
t
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
1
E
+
0
6
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
-
1
E
-
0
4
Y
t
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
Y
b
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
5
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
-
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
x
x
0
.
4
0
2
0
.
4
0
2
0
.
4
0
2
0
.
4
0
2
0
.
4
0
2
0
.
4
0
2
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
3
8
4
0
.
1
9
2
0
.
1
9
2
0
.
1
9
2
0
.
1
9
2
0
.
1
9
2
0
.
1
9
2
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

a
t

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R
M

(
S
L
S

3
)
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
1
/
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
o
a
d
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
0
0
S
p
a
n
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
C
a
n
t
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

-

L
O
N
G
T
E
R
M
M

(
S
L
S

7
)
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
1
/
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
o
a
d
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
0
0
S
p
a
n
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
C
a
n
t
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
S

-

I
M
P
O
S
E
D
M
(
S
L
S

5
-
7
)
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
1
/
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
o
a
d
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
o
a
d

x

d
i
s
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
n
d

s
l
o
p
e
0
0
S
p
a
n
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
C
a
n
t
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
.0
0
0
T
h
e

C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e

C
e
n
t
r
e
8
6
R
6
8
1
0
6
107
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or anged
beams using sub-frame analysis to derive moments and shears.
The intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six
spans of continuous wide beams with columns above and below.
Spans may incorporate cantilevers, xed ends or knife-edge
supports. There are three main sheets: MAIN!, ACTIONS! and
SPANS!
This spreadsheet is very similar to RCC41.xls except that it caters
for wide beams (beams wider than they are deep) by allowing
two sizes of bar in one layer and by allowing top steel in the span
to be augmented to help satisfy span:depth criteria.
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is
automated.
The number of bars determined by either:
Area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (e.g.
32mm diameter)
Spacing rules
Number of legs of links required in shear.
Where the latter two may govern, two diameters of bending
steel are allowed in the same layer to avoid excessive over-
specication of reinforcement. Input to the right of SPANS!
allows top steel to be increased to satisfy span:depth criteria. The
designer and detailer are expected to rationalise this output (but
always remembering that bar spacings should not be increased).
The size of link to be used remains as manual input.

MAIN!
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and
load data, as explained earlier.
the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support
bars in the other direction has to be avoided - and allowed for in
the design.
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam
situations (where the beam softs are the same depth), the width
of support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
redistribution in row 26 are always considered - there are no
default or automated values. Cell L14 determines how the
redistribution is carried out (see also Table 1 of this document).
SPANS!
supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
link sizes (e.g. at cell I22) and the amount by which span top
steel should be increased (e.g. at cell N21) in order to help meet
deection criteria. Non-existent spans are blanked out. Support
moments (including cantilever moments) are considered at
the face of the support. This may lead to unequal amounts of
reinforcement being designed for each side of the support. See
Bar!
= 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel has
been imposed to comply with deection criteria, A
sdef
, = 2 x A
sreqd
,
i.e. an allowable increase of 100% bottom span steel.
WEIGHT!
Analysis!
This sheet shows the moment distributions used in the analysis
of the beam: it is not intended for formal printing. It will be seen
that the loads are considered initially as 1.0
gk
over all spans then
as (g
fg
- 1.0)g
k
+ g
fq
q
k
over alternate spans.
Bar!
108
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required at
either of these points is provided throughout the span.
Graf!

Notes!
109
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!
Location from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 55
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC
chg - R68
LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 3
MATERIALS COVERS (to all steel)
steel class A
SPAN 1 5.50 375 1200 125 T 1900 min max
SPAN 2 8.00 375 1200 125 T 2100 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 8.50 375 1200 125 T 2200 IMPOSED 0 1.6
Support 1 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 2 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 3 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 4 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 5 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 6
Support 7
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 25.0 4.00 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
LOADING DIAGRAM
1 3
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 271.5 1037.5 1178.6 965.4 134.2
ODD SPANS LOADED 323.2 637.7 889.8 830.3 -19
Characteristic Dead 126.1 464.7 551.6 438.4 61.4 0.0 0.0
Max Service Imposed 71.1 236.7 273.4 210.0 63.0 0.0 0.0
Min Service Imposed -16.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 -32.9 0.0 0.0
The Concrete Centre
D&D: Main beam Grids C to H 109
110
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg - R68
1 Elastic Moments 3 1 Redistributed Envelope 3
Elastic M 95.0 661.2 888.9 661.3 33.6 ~ kNm/m
b 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 1.000 ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 291.64 561.87 542.57 136.11 ~ ~
Redistributed M 291.64 533.32 528.36 136.11 ~ ~
b 1.000 0.949 0.974 1.000 ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)
1
Elastic Shears
3 1
3
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 323.2 471.5 570.4 605.1 604.6 570.3
Redistributed V 323.2 471.5 566.0 592.4 589.0 563.0
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 406.1 214.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS Above 29.7 25.9 4.7 -42.8 0.2
LOADED Below 29.7 25.9 4.7 -42.8 0.2
ODD SPANS Above 47.5 -20.6 57.2 -61.9 17.1
LOADED Below 47.5 -20.6 57.2 -61.9 17.1
EVEN SPANS Above -3.8 57.5 -49.2 -0.8 -16.8
LOADED Below -3.8 57.5 -49.2 -0.8 -16.8
COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm)
The Concrete Centre
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
110
111
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 48.0 291.6 540.1
b 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 332.0 315.0 324.0
As mm 350 2241 4449
As' mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 3H10 4H20 + 5H16 4H12 + 3H10
. . .
v N/mm 0.648 10 1.048
LINKS R10 @ 225 for 675 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 225 for 675
legs No 7 7 7
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 577.9 533.3 668.6
b 1.00 0.95 0.86
DESIGN d mm 324.0 309.0 324.0
As mm 4825 4179 5787
As' mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
BTM STEEL Layer 1
. . .
DEFLECTION L/d 25.890 Allowed 26.212 As auto-increased by 28.2 %
v N/mm 1.291 10 1.359
LINKS R10 @ 150 for 1050 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 200 for 800
legs No 7 7 7
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
1H32 + 8H25
2H32 + 7H25 1H20 + 6H16 3H32 + 7H25
2H16 + 7H12 2H20 + 5H16
ok
ok ok
ok
1H20 + 6H16 3H32 + 6H25
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
ok
ok
ok
ok
1H20 + 6H16
111
112
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw Apr-2006 58
ACTIONS M kNm 669.3 528.4 578.4
b 0.85 0.97 1.00
DESIGN d mm 324.0 309.0 324.0
As mm 5794 4140 4831
As' mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
BTM STEEL Layer 1
. . .
DEFLECTION 27.508 Allowed 28.312 As auto-increased by 38.3 %
v N/mm 1.350 10 v 1.283
LINKS R10 @ 150 for 1050 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 225 for 900
legs No 7 7 7
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 498.1 136.1 3.0
b 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 317.0 332.0
As mm 3986 1039 22
As' mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
BTM STEEL Layer 1
. . .
DEFLECTION 12.618 Allowed 37.733
v N/mm 0.869 10 0.374
LINKS R10 @ 225 for 450 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 225 for 450
legs No 7 7 7
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
7H8 1H16 + 8H12
2H32 + 7H25
1H20 + 6H16 5H32 + 4H25 1H20 + 6H16
3H32 + 7H25 4H16 + 4H12
7H25 + 2H20 1H25 + 6H20
ok
ok
2H16 + 7H12
7H8
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
ok
ok
112
113
RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls
Conventional column load take downs by hand can be time-
consuming. This spreadsheet emulates conventional column
design to BS 8110
(2)
by providing on separate sheets: load take
down from inputs of location, dimensions, levels and loads to give
design axial loads and moments per oor. RCC51.xls is intended
as a stand-alone column design spreadsheet for use when a sub-
frame analysis is not available or is unwarranted. As in COLUMN!
within RCC11.xls, this spreadsheet determines the area of steel
required (A
s
).
The spreadsheet is set up in such a way that one column size
(input in CDES!) is used throughout the height of the column
location and that the critical section for design occurs where axial
load is at its maximum.
The example is based on Designed and detailed
(15)
but differs in
several respects:

Seven storeys used in the example rather than three (in order
to demonstrate automatic input adequately)
No special account taken of roof loadings (in order to
demonstrate automatic input adequately)
All columns are taken as 4.00 m long (again, in order to
demonstrate automatic input adequately)
Load distribution according to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8.2.3,
i.e. reaction factors of 0.5 are used for loads from adjacent
spans rather than results of analysis or using shear force
factors from BS 8110: Part 1 Tables 3.5 and/or 3.12.
No double counting of oor slabs due to allowances for oor
slabs in design of, therefore reactions from, edge beams
spanning parallel to oor slab span.
As a default the level with maximum axial load with concurrent
maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen for
consideration in DESMMNTS! (derivation of design moments)
and CDES! (design). The user may investigate other levels by
choosing the appropriate level in the combo-box on the right
hand side of CDES!.
Unbraced columns may be designed, but the spreadsheet
demands some input of applied moment in LOADTD! in the
appropriate axis. If the column is unbraced then it must be part of
a stability frame if only nominally with moments that should
be input as applied moments in LOADTD!

LOADTD!
Input is self explanatory but, in order to facilitate use of this
spreadsheet, some degree of automation has been introduced.
It is vital that input data is hand checked to ensure the loads
are described properly. It is also advised that a clean version of
the spreadsheet should be used for each column analysed and
designed (i.e. reload the base spreadsheet each time).
Please note when inputting a location for numbered gridlines
to start with an apostrophe, i.e. use 2 - 3 (otherwise 2 - 3 will
give the result of -1!). Cantilevers may be dealt with by inputting
no beam on the appropriate axis but inputting additional loads
and moments (under At column position, other applied loads
(e.g. loads from cantilevers)). Note that, so far as the column
is concerned, cantilever moments will relieve (or even exceed
xed end) beam moments and should be specied as negative
moments.
As explained under Operator Instructions deleting a level will
grey-out subsequent columns and set spans to 0.0 m. Enter
data (and delete any subsequent hatches, #####) or equate
cells to previous cells (avoid copying cells across) to get up to
10 levels of load take down. Deleting or setting a value of 0 in
columns G to P will grey-out values to the right, which will be
set at 0.0. Generally, input values are carried through to the right.
Red gures or red backgrounds mean inconsistent or incorrect
data entries. Overwrite if incorrect.
Slab spans may be parallel to x or y, or two-way spanning.
Troughed slabs may be modelled by using the topping thickness
for the slab and adding widths of ribs within a bay to the width
of the beam.
Some input (highlighted in magenta) defaults to values from
other sheets. For instance column dimensions are input in CDES!
The user may immediately see whether the design is viable or not
and change dimensions accordingly. These cells are not protected
so can be overwritten: beware. For troughed slabs use topping
thickness and aggregate width of ribs with width of beam.
Reduction factors for live load to according to BS 6399: Part 1
(19)

Clause 5.2 are automatically applied to axial load unless specied
otherwise.

DESMMNTS!
The basic design procedure is covered in BS 8110: Part 1 Clause
3.8. In order to determine design moments several inputs are
required:
Values of for braced and unbraced columns are required
at G15:H15, see Clause 3.8.1.6 and Tables 3.19 and 3.20 as
shown overleaf.
Whether the column is braced or un-braced see BS 8110:
Part 1, Clause 3.8.1.5.
In order to evaluate N
uz
and thus K accurately, an initial
assessment of the area of reinforcement, As, is required
at cell N22. An indication of the probable percentage of
reinforcement is given at Q23 (automation of this gure
would cause a circular reference error in the spreadsheet). If
As is set at 0% then effectively K = 1, which is conservative
(see BS 8110: Part 1, equation 33 and denitions under
Clause 3.8.1.1).
114
Table 2
Values of for braced and
unbraced columns
Values of for braced columns Values of for unbraced columns
End condition at top End condition at bottom End condition at bottom
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 0.75 0.80 0.90 1.20 1.30 1.50
2 0.80 0.85 0.95 1.30 1.50 1.80
3 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.60 1.80 -
4 - - - 2.20 - -
Condition 1 - column monolithically connected to beam at least as deep as the column in the plane
considered (or foundation specically designed for moment)
Condition 2 - column monolithically connected to beams or slabs shallower than the column in the plane
considered
Condition 3- column connected to members which will provide some nominal restraint
Condition 4- column unrestrained
NOTE: Taken from BS 8110 Tables 3.19 and 3.20
CDES!
As in COLUMN! within RCC11.xls, this sheet designs symmetrical
rectangular columns where both axial load, N, and design
moment, M
x
or M
y
(see BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8.2, 3 and 4)
have been calculated from previous sheets. CDES! iterates x/h to
determine where the neutral axis lies. The sheet includes stress
and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the nal design
(please refer to notes regarding COLUMN! in
RCC11.xls).
The spreadsheet is set up in such a way that one column size
(input in CDES!) is used throughout the height of the column
location and that the critical section for design occurs where axial
load is at its maximum.
Other levels can be investigated by choosing the appropriate
level from the combo-box located under Operating Instructions.
Always ensure that the size of column designed is correct for the
level under consideration.
For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the
top and bottom of the section, a (rotationally) symmetrical
arrangement of reinforcement is proffered, i.e. top and bottom
reinforcement with additional side bars. The argument goes that
using the critical axis method of BS 8110 to determine areas
of steel in bi-axially bent columns implies that the bars are in
the corners of the element. Therefore additional side bars help
ensure this is so. Counter-arguments suggest these additional
bars are unnecessary. Bresalers load contour check [(M
x
/ Mu
x
)
a

+ (M
y
/ M
uy
)
a
< 1.0, where a = 2/3 + 5N/3N
uz
], used in CP 110(20)
is not adopted in this spreadsheet but may be investigated using
RCC53.xls.
Some input (highlighted in magenta) defaults to values from
other sheets. These cells are not protected so can be overwritten:
beware.
Ltdcalcs!
This sheet shows workings for the load take-down and is not
purposes. Load distribution works according to BS 8110: Part 1,
Clause 3.8.2.3 axial force in a column may be calculated on
the assumption that beams and slabs transmitting force into it
are simply supported.
Stiffs!
This sheet shows workings for beam and column stiffnesses
checking purposes.
In the determination of section properties, beams are considered
full height beam widths are deducted from slab widths. Moment
distribution works according to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.2.1.2.5
beams possess half their actual stiffness.
Notes!
115
RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ LOADTD!
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) rmw 11-Apr-06
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 2006 TCC chg -
INPUT 1-2
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) y concrete density, kN/m
3
24.0
fgk
1.40
Orientation A-B x x B-C H
fqk
1.60
y
n/a
Level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dimensions
Spans Cl to Cl A-B m 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
B-C m 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
1-2 m 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50
n/a m 0.00
Slab thickness (solid) mm 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
span direction,(II to) x, y or b x x x x x x x
Beams width A-B mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
depth o/a A-B mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
width B-C mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
depth o/a B-C mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
width 1-2 mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
depth o/a 1-2 mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
width n/a mm 0
depth o/a n/a mm 0
Column below (col above)
H (ll to yy) mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
B (ll to xx) mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
Height (fl. to floor.) m 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
Level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0
Loads (characteristic uno)
Slab (inc swt.) gk kN/m2 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
qk kN/m2 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
Beams (swt.) gk kN/m included included included included included included included included included included
line loads (-extra over slab loads and beam self weight)
A-B gk kN/m 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
qk kN/m 0.0
B-C gk kN/m 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
qk kN/m 0.0
1-2 gk kN/m 0.0
qk kN/m 0.0
n/a gk kN/m 0.0
qk kN/m 0.0
At column position, other applied loads (eg loads from cantilevers)
Gk kN (char) 0.0
Qk kN (char) 0.0
Mxx kNm (ult) 0.0
Myy kNm (ult) 0.0
Loads per floor
Floor Gk kN 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8
Floor Qk kN 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0
Column below Gk kN 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6
OUTPUT Column level 7 to 6 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Below 1
Cumulative loads in column.
Gk kN 142.5 284.9 427.4 569.9 712.3 854.8 997.3
Qk kN 75.0 150.0 225.0 300.0 375.0 450.0 525.0
Qk redn factor 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.6
Y Qk red* kN 75.0 135.0 180.0 210.0 225.0 270.0 315.0
N kN 319 615 886 1134 1357 1629 1900
Moments in column
about x-x Mxx top kNm 112.6 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7
about y-y Myy top kNm 1.6 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
Mxx bottom kNm 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7
Myy bottom kNm 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
The Concrete Centre
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005
Redn
factors
OK*?
R68
85 115
116
RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ DESMMNTS!
INPUT Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D)
Level considered: Bottom (Max N) Orientation 1-2
y
Dimensions about x-x about y-y
h (ll to yy) mm 300 - A-B x x B-C H
b (ll to xx) mm - 300
lo, clear height mm 3500 3650 y
value 0.90 0.90 n/a
Height (fl. to floor.) 4.00 m
Column properties
Braced or Unbraced? B or U B B fcu 35
fy 500
Loads cover to link mm 30
Axial N kN 1900 - Max sized main bar mm 32
Moments top kNm 91.7 1.3 Probable percentage As % 2.00%
bottom kNm 0.0 0.0 link diameter mm 8
OUTPUT
Design criteria
N kNm 1900
M kN 92.1
about X-X
PROOF
Slenderness Design moments (cont) about x-x about y-y
le mm 3150 3285 Design moments for unbraced columns
Slenderness 10.50 10.95 M2+100% Madd kNm n/a n/a
Limit for short column 15.0 15.0 eminN kNm n/a n/a
Design column as Short Maximum kNm n/a n/a
Column is Short Short
about x-x about y-y Design moments
kNm 91.7 1.3
Design moments about x-x about y-y
Min eccentricity, 0.05 h kNm 28.5 Short
Braced Braced
Madd n/a - short column
d mm 246 246
Nuz kN 2200.1 2200.1
Nbal kN 645.8 645.8 Biaxial bending
K 0.193 0.193 Mx/h' 0.373
b' or, if slender, h? - b' mm 246 246 My/b 0.005
a 0.082 0.089 Critical direction X-X
au mm 4.7 5.2
Madd kNm 0.0 0.0 N/bhfcu 0.60
Eqns 32-35 ok to use? 0.30
Braced columns M1 kNm 0.0 0.0
Mi kNm 55.0 0.8 Maximum design moment
Mi, (Mi=0 if Le/h>20) kNm 55.0 0.8 = 91.7+0.30*246/246*1.3
Mi, (Mi=0 if b/h>3) 55.0 0.8
= kNm 92.1 -
Design moments for braced columns
M2 kNm 91.7 1.3
Mi+Madd kNm 55.0 0.8
M1+Madd/2 kNm 0.0 0.0
eminN kNm 28.5 n/a
Maximum kNm 91.7 1.3
The Concrete Centre
86
R68
ok
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS
8110:2005
116
117
RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ CDES!
Project
INPUT Level designed: Bottom (Max N)
Axial load, N 1900 kN fcu 35 N/mm
Moment, M 92.1 kNm fy 500 N/mm
about X-X axis fyv 500 N/mm
Height, h (ll to yy, L'r to xx) 300 mm
m
1.15 steel
Breadth, b (ll to xx) 300 mm
m
1.5 concrete
Max bar diameter 32 mm Link 8 mm
cover (to link) 30 mm steel class A
CALCULATIONS
from M As = {M - 0.67fcu.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)}/[(h/2-d').(fsc+fst).m]
from N As = (N - 0.67fcu.b.dc/m) / (fsc - fst) As = Ast = Asc: dc=min(h,0.9x)
d' = 54 mm .67fcu/m = 15.6 N/mm
d = 246 mm fy/m = 434.8 N/mm
critical about X-X axis:... h= 300 mm
b= 300 mm
from iteration, neutral axis depth, x, = 266.3 mm
dc 239.7 mm
0.67.fcu.b.dc/m 1124.0 kN
Steel comp strain 0.00279
Steel tens strain -0.00027
Steel stress in comp. face, fsc 435 N/mm2 (Comp. stress in reinf.)
Steel stress in tensile face, fst -53 N/mm2 (Tensile stress in reinf.)
from M, As = 1590 mm2
from N, As = 1590 mm2 OK
As req'd = 1590mm T&B:- PROVIDE 4H32
(ie 2H32 T&B - 1609mmT&B) - 3.57% o/a - @192 cc.)
Links : - PROVIDE H8 @ 300
.
OK
15.6 N/mm
about X-X axis
Notes
Stresses in N/mm
2
Compression +ve
The Concrete Centre
87
R68
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS
BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005
Stress diagram
435
53
Strain diagram
0.00279
0.00027
0.00350
-0.00044
117
118
RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
This spreadsheet generates axial load:design moment interaction
charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns. It
checks the capacity of the columns with various arrangements of
reinforcement against input load cases of axial load and uniaxial
bending.

Within RCC11.xls, COLUMN! allows the user to determine the
area of steel required from inputs of axial load and moment about
the x - x axis. Another approach, adopted in BS 5400
(21)
and CP
110
(20)
and more suited to the grouping of columns on particular
projects and adopted here by RCC52.xls, is to give an interaction
chart. This shows axial load against moment for symmetrical
sections of specied size, strength and reinforcement. It works on
the premise of calculating the moment and axial load capacities
of a section with assumed amounts of reinforcement and
assumed neutral axis depth. Iterations of neutral axis depth give
data for the Axial load:Moment interaction chart for the specied
section. The spreadsheet also checks the reinforcement required
for input load cases. The user may try different arrangements of
reinforcement.
RCC52.xls assumes that the moments input in the load cases
have already been adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending. For
many side and all corner columns, there is no choice but to design
for bi-axial bending, and the method given in Clause 3.8.4.5 must
be adhered to, i.e. RCC53.xls should be used.

MAIN!
Main! contains all input and output data, Bending is assumed to
be about the x - x, i.e. horizontal axis, and the input moment
is assumed to be the maximum design moment as dened in BS
8110 i.e. including M
add
etc and in the correct orientation.
Where more than two bars are required per face, the user may
choose to specify a similar arrangement of bars on the side
faces in order to avoid confusion in detailing and xing. In this
respect, there is also a question regarding design. To an extent
all columns are bi-axially bent and BS 8110 directs that bi-axially
bent columns are effectively designed about one axis only (by
adding moment in the critical direction to account for moment
in the non-critical direction). By implication the second axis is
not designed specically.
One reason for adding side bars (when three, four or more bars
are required T & B) in square(ish) sections, is to ensure that the
second axis is catered for. Ideally with BS 8110, the resultant
axis should be found and calculations done accordingly. But this
presumes that the arrangement of bars is known to start with.
With BS 5400 and CP 110 checks are carried out on a chosen
section about both axes. Bi-axially bent columns are dealt with
in RCC53.xls
The chart shows lines for 0.1f
cu
A
c
and M
min
. The user should be
aware that all load cases should be within the boundaries of
these lines.

Calcs!
Calcs! Shows the derivation of the charts where moment capacity
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = N
bal
, then at intervals from n.a. depth
for N = N
bal
to n.a. depth for N = N
uz
.
Cases!
Cases! identies the smallest bar diameter that satises each of
the load cases.

Notes!
119
RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
RCC52 Column Chart generation/ MAIN!
Project
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 11-Apr-06 94
Originated from 'RCC52.xls ' v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 30 N/mm m 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm m 1.5 concrete h agg 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION
h 400 mm
b 400 mm X X SINGLE AXIS
with 3 bars per face BENDING
All bars in 400 wide faces
BAR ARRANGEMENTS
Type Bar Asc % Link Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 32 3.02 8 146.0 1113.7 4177.4
H 25 1.84 8 149.5 1104.4 3385.1
H 20 1.18 6 154.0 1106.9 2938.3
H 16 0.75 6 156.0 1105.8 2652.3
H 12 0.42 6 158.0 1106.2 2429.9
H 10 0.00 6 159.0 0.0 0.0
KEY
6H32
6H25
6H20
6H16
6H12
LOADCASES Load case N (kN) Mx' (kNm) Load case N (kN) Mx' (kNm)
A1 top 500 200 6 H20 4 1500 150 6 H16
A1 bot 1850 100 6 H16 5 1000 150 6 H12
A2 bot 3000 50 6 H25 6 1000 50 6 H12
The Concrete Centre
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS
BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO BS 8110:2005
N:M INTERACTION CHART for 400 x 400 column, grade C30, 30 mm cover and 3 bars on
400 mm faces
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
< 0.4% - ignored
500
1850
3000
1500
1000 1000
M min
0.1fcuAc
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT Mx
kNm
A
X
I
A
L

C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
I
O
N
,

N
,

k
N
119
120
RCC53 Column Design.xls
RCC53.xls generates column design charts for symmetrically
reinforced rectangular columns bent about two axes and checks
input load cases. For circular columns RCC54.xls may be used.
RCC53.xls also gives interaction charts, showing axial load against
moment for the critical axis for symmetrical rectangular sections
of specied size, strength and reinforcement arrangement. The
user may try different arrangements of reinforcement. It also
provides designs for input load cases, which are plotted on the
relevant x- or y- axis chart.
RCC53.xls takes account of any side-bars.
Philosophy of design for bi-axially
bent columns
When preparing this spreadsheet, there was some discussion
about the interpretation of BS 8110 with respect to bi-axially
bent columns and the provision of side bars.
and bottom of the section, it appears to be common practice,
in small- to medium-sized columns at least, to provide a
(rotationally) symmetrical arrangement of reinforcement, i.e. to
provide additional side bars. The argument goes that using the
critical axis method of BS 8110 to determine areas of steel in
bi-axially bent columns implies that the bars are in the corners
of the element. Therefore additional side bars help ensure that
this is so.
There is a counter argument to suggest that the design procedure
for bi-axially bent columns in BS 8110 makes the precaution of
adding additional side bars unnecessary.
Raq
(22)
argues that the Bresalers load contour check, as used in
CP 110
( 20)
should be adopted to ensure a safe design for bi-axially
bent columns otherwise designed to BS 8110, as shown below.
(M
x
/M
ux
)
a
+ (M
y
/M
uy
)
a
< 1.0, where a = 2/3 + 5N/3N
uz
MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load
cases.
Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users
should be familiar with BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8 which deals
with column design. The input moments under LOADCASES are
the initial end moments due to ultimate design loads is dened
in BS 8110 about the appropriate axes for slender columns. The
spreadsheet calculates the additional design ultimate moment
induced by deection of column (M
add
), the critical direction for
bi-axial bending and the design moment.
K in C40:C49 refers to the reduction factor as per equation 33
in BS8110.
CHARTS!

CHARTS! shows two charts, one chart for when M
xx
is critical and
one for when M
yy
is critical. These Axial load:Moment interaction
charts for the specied section also show relevant input load
cases. The charts show lines for 0.1 f
cu
A
c
and M
min
(i.e. e
min
N). The
user should be aware that all load cases should be within the
boundaries of these lines. Due to a quirk in Excel, load cases can
only be identied by axial load, N, on the charts.
Xcal! and Ycal!
These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N =
Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth for N = N
bal
to n.a. depth
for N = N
uz
. .).
Cases!
Cases! identies the smallest bar diameter that satises each
of the load cases. Clause 3.8.3.2 is included for both directions
(columns K & L) and the spreadsheet decides which axis is
dominant.
Notes!
121
RCC53 Column Design.xls
RCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!
Project
Location Ground floor columns at B1, B2 etc RMW 11-Apr-06 96
chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm m, steel 1.15 Cover to link 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm m, conc 1.5 h agg 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION
h 400 mm
b 300 mm
with 3 #N/A X X
and 3 #N/A
#N/A
RESTRAINTS Top Btm
Lo (mm) Condition Condition Braced ? Le (mm) Slenderness Status
X-AXIS 3600 2 2 Y 0.85 3060 Lex/h = 7.65 Column is
Y-AXIS 3600 2 2 Y 0.85 3060 Ley/b = 10.20 SHORT
LOADCASES AXIAL TOP MOMENTS (kNm) BTM MOMENTS (kNm)
N (kN) M ix M iy M ix M iy
B1 3500 90.0 25.0 90.0 25.0
B2 3000 80.0 60.0 80.0 60.0
Loadcase 3 1000 100.0 35.0 100.0 35.0
Loadcase 4 1200 50.0 150.0 50.0 150.0
Loadcase 5 500 220.0 90.0 220.0 90.0
Loadcase 6 2500 35.0 25.0 35.0 25.0
BAR ARRANGEMENTS BAR CENTRES (mm)
Bar Asc % Link 300 Face 400 Face Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 8.38 10 90 140 0 Asc > 6 % (3.12.6.2)
H 32 5.36 8 96 146 4573 ok
H 25 3.27 8 100 150 3522 ok
H 20 2.09 6 104 154 2929 ok
H 16 1.34 6 106 156 2550 ok
H 12 0.75 6 108 158 2255 ok
DESIGN MOMENTS (kNm) X AXIS Y AXIS COMBINED
K M add Mx M add My Axis M ' REBAR
max V *
B1 0.000 0.0 90.0 0.0 25.0 X 100.5 8 H32 99.6
B2 0.000 0.0 80.0 0.0 60.0 Y 77.1 8 H32 102.3
Loadcase 3 0.000 0.0 100.0 0.0 35.0 X 135.1 8 H12 52.0
Loadcase 4 0.000 0.0 50.0 0.0 150.0 Y 173.8 8 H25 86.5
Loadcase 5 0.000 0.0 220.0 0.0 90.0 X 329.0 No Fit 97.3
Loadcase 6 0.000 0.0 35.0 0.0 37.5 Y 45.1 8 H25 88.1
SEE CHARTS ON NEXT SHEET
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT TWO
AXES TO BS 8110:2005
121
122
RCC53 Column Design/ CHARTS!
Location Ground floor columns at B1, B2 etc RMW 11-Apr-06 97
N:M interaction chart: Mx' critical
400 x 300 column (h x b), grade C35, 30 mm cover
KEY
8H32
8H25
8H20
8H16
8H12
N:M interaction chart: My' critical
400 x 300 column (h x b), moment about yy axis), Grade C35, 30 Cover
KEY
8H32
8H25
8H20
8H16
8H12
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT
TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005
The Concrete Centre
3500
0
1000
0
500
0
Mx min
0.1fcuAc
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
0 100 200 300 400 500
Mx' kNm
A
X
I
A
L

L
O
A
D
,

k
N

0
3000
0
1200
0
2500
My min
0.1fcuAc
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
My' kNm
A
X
I
A
L

L
O
A
D

k
N
122
123
RCC54 Circular column charting .xls
This spreadsheet generates design charts for circular reinforced
concrete columns. It shows the interaction between axial load
and applied moment. Designs for input design load cases are
given.
MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data. It charts the relevant interaction
diagram and gives designs for the input load cases.
Some guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but
users should be familiar with BS 8110 Part 1, Clause 3.8 Columns.
The input moments should be the maximum design moments as
dened in BS 8110.
Calcs!
For each bar diameter size Calcs! works out the co-ordinates for
the N-M interaction diagram. Calcs! rst works out the geometry
for columns with up to 16 bars, specically the neutral axis depth
associated with no axial load, i.e. for N=0. Then for increments
of neutral axis depth, moment and axial load capacities are
calculated. The size of the increment is increased when neutral
axis depth exceeds 2/3d, i.e. as axial load predominates and less
accuracy is necessary.

Circle!
Circle! provides geometrical data for truncated circular sections
as look-up data for other sheets, notably for Calcs!
Cases!
For each load case, Cases! determines the smallest bar diameter
that satises the axial load and moment requirements. The input
load is used to look up the appropriate capacities from Calcs!.
These capacities are then used to determine the maximum
moment allowable with the specied axial load.

Notes!
RCC54 Circular column charting .xls
124
RCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!
Project
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 12-Apr-06 94
Originated from 'RCC54.xls ' v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm m 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm m 1.5 concrete h agg 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION h 475 mm with 8 bars
BAR ARRANGEMENTS
Type Bar Asc % Link Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.67 10 139.4 719 6984
H 32 3.63 8 144.1 948 5467
H 25 2.22 8 146.9 1028 4416
H 20 1.42 6 150.4 1142 3824
H 16 0.91 6 152.0 1152 3445
H 12 0.51 6 153.5 1293 3150
KEY
8H40
8H32
8H25
8H20
8H16
8H12
LOADCASES Load case N (kN) M(kNm) Load case N (kN) M(kNm)
1 650 210 8 H20 4 1500 160 8 H12
2 4100 320 8 H40 5 2500 210 8 H25
3 3000 60 8 H16 6 3600 175 8 H32
N:M INTERACTION CHART for 475 diameter column,
grade C35, 30 mm cover and 8 bars
COLUMN CHART FOR CIRCULAR COLUMNS TO BS 8110:2005
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
650
4100
3000
1500
2500
3600
M min
0.1fcuAc
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
MOMENT M, kNm
A
X
I
A
L

C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
I
O
N
,

N
,

k
N
124
125
RCC61 Basement Wall.xls
This spreadsheet designs simple retaining basement walls and is
intended for walls up to 3.5 m high. It is based on complying with
BS 8002: 1994
(4)
and BS 8004: 1986
(23)
. It may also be used to
design walls to comply with CECP 2
(6)
and BS 8007
(5)
.
The spreadsheet has been developed with both the BS 8002
and the conventional (CECP 2) methods in mind. On balance,
the spreadsheet provides reasonable exibility and in doing so,
encourages the designer to employ his/ her own engineering
judgement and interpretation of the codes.
The spreadsheet is intended to cover only short walls and to
help general engineers who, from time to time, design retaining
walls as part of a wider interest in structures, rather than the
specialists. The 3.5 m wall height is an arbitrary limit set for a
short wall which is intended to cover over 90% of the cases
encountered in general structural designs. Although many of the
design principles still apply to higher walls, criteria such as wall
movements and the validity of the assumptions made (e.g. no
wall friction) require further consideration and investigation.
The effects of compaction pressures can be generated using
idealised imposed/ surcharged loads. Residual lateral pressure
calculations were considered to be too complicated to be covered
in the spreadsheet.
Many cells are referred to in formulae by names; for example,
DATA!C24 is given the name H which is used in formulae at M50:
N50, Diagrams!D146:D150, etc. A list of names and where they
are dened can be seen by referring to Insert\ Name\ Dene in
Excel, having unprotected the current sheet. Input is required on
three sheets.
The spreadsheet is laid out in a very similar manner to RCC62.
xls. Correct display of the diagrams requires that the Tekton and
Marker fonts have been installed. See FAQ.
DATA!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs. Most inputs, which
are in blue and underlined, should be self-explanatory. The top
diagram denes most input parameters. Please note that unless
the Marker and Tekton fonts are loaded into the Windows font
folder the diagram will not display correctly. A simplistic chart
shows the geometry of a section of the wall and base.
The spreadsheet is based on a number of assumptions, which
should be assessed as being true or erring on the safe side in each
case.
These assumptions are:
Wall friction is zero
Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
Granular backll is used
The spreadsheet is not intended for walls over 3.5 m high
STABILITY! details other assumptions, i.e:
The wall idealised as a propped cantilever (i.e. pinned at top
and xed at base)
The wall is braced
Maximum slenderness of wall is limited to 15, i.e. [ 0.9 x (H
e

- T
b
/2)/T
w
< 15 ]
Maximum ultimate axial load on wall is limited to 0.1fcu
times the wall cross-sectional area
Design span = Effective wall height = H
e
- (T
b
/2)
-ve moment is hogging (i.e. tension at external face of wall)
+ve moment is sagging (i.e. tension at internal face of wall)
Wall MT is maximum +ve moment on the wall
Estimated lateral deections are used for checking the P
effects.
Factors for
f
can be set at 1.4 or 1.6 in accordance with BS 8110
or may be set to 1. The designer has, and should have, the nal
decision and responsibility to select the load factors he or she
feels are suitable to the design conditions. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems
highlighted.
An estimate of reinforcement per metre length of wall and base
is given. Further details about DATA! can be seen under the
description for RCC62.xls.

STABILITY!
STABILITY! calculates the overturning and restoring moments,
sliding and resisting forces on a section together with ground
bearing pressures and factors of safety. Failures are highlighted.
Factors of safety against overturning and sliding are required as
input. As noted in the sheet, wall and/ or surcharge loads may
have stabilising effects.
By using the buttons at L37:L40, the user should toggle between
maximum and minimum values to ascertain worst case(s)
(perhaps this will be automated some time).
In the case of sliding, where sliding resistance of the base alone is
insufcient, the user may choose, outside of the spreadsheet, to
rely on a propping force through the basement slab.
DESIGN!

The rst page of this sheet tabulates moments and shears.
Input of eccentricity of vertical load, reinforcement diameters
and centres is required for main bending steel on both internal
and external faces and for transverse reinforcement. The
spreadsheet works on the principle of checking a proposed
126
section and reinforcement arrangement rather than proposing
an arrangement of reinforcement.
The second page details the design of both outer and inner parts
of the base. Again, the spreadsheet works on the principle of
checking a proposed section, and input of both reinforcement
diameter and centres is required for both main bending and
transverse reinforcement.

WEIGHT!
This sheet shows the build up to the estimate of reinforcement
weight given. The gures should be treated as approximate
estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of designers
and detailers preferences, rationalisation, etc.
Diagrams!
Diagrams! shows data for the charts used in other sheets but is
not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.
Crack width!
This sheet shows calculations to determine crack widths in the
wall. It is not necessarily intended for printing out, other than for
checking purposes.
Notes!
127
RCC61 Basement Wall/ DATA!
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc
Location Grid line 2 rc 12-Apr-2006 95
Originated from ' RCC61 Basement Wall.xls ' v3.0 2006 TCC chg R68
IDEALISED STRUCTURE and FORCE DIAGRAMS DESIGN STATUS : VALID
DIMENSIONS(mm)
H = 3000 B = 3500 Tw = 225
Hw = 0 BI = 150 Tb = 350
He = 2500
MATERIAL PROPERTIES steel class A
fcu = 35 N/mm
2
m = 1.50 concrete
fy = 500 N/mm
2
m = 1.15 steel
Cover to tension reinforcement (co) = 40 mm
Max. allowable design surface crack width (W) = 0.3 mm
Concrete density = 24.0 kN/m3
SOIL PROPERTIES
Design angle of int'l friction of retained mat'l () = 30 degree
Design cohesion of retained mat'l (C ) = 0 kN/m2 (Only granular backfill considered, ie "C" = 0)
Density of retained mat'l (q ) = 20 kN/m3
Submerged Density of retained mat'l (qs ) = 13.33 kN/m3 (default=2/3 of q), only apply when Hw >0
Design angle of int'l friction of base mat'l (b) = 20 degree = 20.00
Design cohesion of base mat'l (Cb ) = 0 kN/m2 ASSUMPTIONS
Density of base mat'l (qb ) = 10 kN/m3 a) Wall friction is zero
Allowable gross ground bearing pressure (GBP) = 150 kN/m2 b) Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
LOADINGS (unfactored) c) Granular backfill
Surcharge load -- live (SQK) = 10 kN/m2 h) Design not intended for walls over 3.5 m high
Surcharge load -- dead (SGK) = 10 kN/m2
Line load -- live (LQK) = 15 kN/m
Line load -- dead (LGK) = 20 kN/m
Distance of line load from wall (X) = 250 mm
Wall load -- live (WQK) = 50 kN/m
Wall load -- Dead (WGK) = 50 kN/m
LATERAL FORCES Ko = 0.50 default Ko = (1-SIN ) = 0.50
Kac = 1.41 = 2Ko
0.5
Force (kN) Lever arm (m)
f
Ultimate Force (kN)
PE = 31.25 LE = 0.833 1.40 43.75
PS(GK) = 12.50 LS = 1.25 1.40 17.50
PS(QK) = 12.50 LS = 1.25 1.60 20.00
PL(GK) = 10.00 LL = 2.29 1.40 14.00
PL(QK) = 7.50 LL = 2.29 1.60 12.00
PW = 0.00 LW = 0.00 1.40 0.00
Total 73.75 107.25
The Concrete Centre
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005
-
i)Does not include check for temp or shrinkage eff
(0.2 or 0.3 mm
only)
Wall Geometry
127
128
RCC61 Basement Wall/ STABILITY!
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 2006 TCC chg - R68
EXTERNAL STABILITY STABILITY CHECK : OK
ANALYSIS - Assumptions & Notes
1) Wall idealised as a propped cantilever ( i.e. pinned at top and fixed at base )
2) Wall is braced.
3) Maximum slenderness of wall is limited to 15, i.e [ 0.9*(He-Tb/2)/Tw < 15 ]
4) Maximum Ultimate axial load on wall is limited to 0.1fcu times the wall cross-sectional area
5) Design Span (Effective wall height) = He - (Tb/2)
6) -ve moment is hogging ( i.e. tension at external face of wall )
+ve moment is sagging ( i.e. tension at internal face of wall )
7) " Wall MT. " is maximum +ve moment on the wall.
8) Estimated lateral deflections are used for checking the P effect .
UNFACTORED LOADS AND FORCES
Force Lever arm Base MT. Wall MT. Reaction at Reaction at Estimated Elastic
Lateral Force (kN) to base (m) (kNm) (kNm) Base (kN) Top (kN) Deflection (mm)
PE = 26.98 0.78 -10.11 4.14 23.15 3.82 0.2
PS(GK) = 11.62 1.16 -4.68 2.54 8.50 3.13 0.2
PS(QK) = 11.62 1.16 -4.68 2.54 8.50 3.13 0.1
PL(GK) = 10.00 2.12 -3.32 4.48 3.69 6.31 0.1
PL(QK) = 7.50 2.12 -2.49 3.36 2.77 4.73 0.0
PW = 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0
Total 67.73 -25.28 17.06 46.61 21.12 0.6
GROUND BEARING FAILURE
LOAD CASE: Wall Load MAX 1
Taking moments about centre of base (anticlockwise "+") Surcharge MIN 0
Vertical FORCES (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm)
Wall load = 100 1.49 148.75
Wall (sw) = 14.31 1.49 21.29
Base = 29.40 0.00 0.00
Earth = 6.45 1.68 10.80
Water = 0.00 1.68 0.00
Surcharge = 1.50 1.68 2.51
Line load = 20.00 0.00 0.00
V = 171.66 Mv = 183.35
MOMENT due to LATERAL FORCES, Mo = -18.11 kNm
RESULTANT MOMENT, M = Mv + Mo = 165.24 kNm
ECCENTRICITY FROM BASE CENTRE, M / V = 0.96 m
MAXIMUM GROSS BEARING PRESSURE = 145.34 kN/m
2
< 150 OK
SLIDING AT BASE (using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety fa F.O.S = 1.50
SUM of LATERAL FORCES, P = 46.61 kN
BASE FRICTION, F
b
= - ( V TANb + B.Cb ) = -62.48 kN
Factor of Safety, F
b
/ P = 1.34 < 1.50 FAIL .. but
therefore, LATERAL RESISTANCE to be provided by BASEMENT SLAB = 7.43 kN
The Concrete Centre
BEARING PRESSURE
(kN/m)
0
50
100
150
200
0.00 3.50
128
129
STRUCTURAL DESIGNS (ultimate) DESIGN CHECKS : OK
BS8110
WALL ( per metre length ) reference
AXIAL LOAD CAPACITY ( Limited to 0.1fcu ) = 787.50 kN > 150 OK 3.4.4.1
Force
f
Ultimate Ult. Moment Ult. Shear Ult. Shear
Lateral Force (kN) Force (kN)at base (kNmat base (kN) at top (kN)
PE = 26.98 1.40 37.77 -14.15 32.41 5.35
PS(GK) = 11.62 1.40 16.27 -6.55 11.90 4.38
PS(QK) = 11.62 1.60 18.60 -7.49 13.60 5.00
PL(GK) = 10.00 1.40 14.00 -4.65 5.17 8.83
PL(QK) = 7.50 1.60 12.00 -3.99 4.43 7.57
PW = 0.00 1.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Total 67.73 98.64 -36.83 67.50 31.14
Design Bending Moments
On INTERNAL face due to lateral forces, M
int
= 21.83 kNm
On EXTERNAL face due to lateral forces, M
ext
= -36.83 kNm
Eccentricity of Axial Loads = 125 mm
LATERAL DEFLECTION " " = 0.6 mm
Due to eccentricity of axial loads, M
ecc
= 18.8 kNm
Due to P effect, M
p
= 0.08 kNm
Total Mmt on INTERNAL face (M
int
+0.5M
ecc
+M
p
) = 31.3 kNm
Total Mmt on EXTERNAL face (M
ext
+0.5M
ecc
) = -46.2 kNm
EXTERNAL FACE INTERNAL FACE
WALL REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 293 293 mm
2
Table 3.25
= 16 12 mm
centres = 200 < 399 200 < 549 mm OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
As = 1005 > 293 565 > 293 mm
2
OK
MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d = 177 179 mm
z = 163 170 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 0 mm
2
3.4.4.4
M
res
= 71.3 > 46.21 41.8 > 31.29 kNm OK
BASE of WALL TOP of WALL
SHEAR RESISTANCE: As = 1005 = 10 @200 mm 393 mm
2
/m
100As/bd = 0.57% = 0.22%
vc = 0.72 0.52 N/mm
2
Table 3.8
V
res
= 127.1 > 67.50 93.3 > 31.14 kN OK 3.5.5.2
RACK WIDTH to BS8100/8007 X = 59.61 mm m = 0.00055 BS8007
Acr = 102.92 mm W = 0.10 < 0.30 mm OK App. B.2
REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for WALL
Type centres As Min. As
mm mm mm
2
mm
2
INTERNAL FACE H 12 200 565 293 OK
EXTERNAL FACE H 16 200 1005 293 OK
TRANSVERSE H 10 225 349 293 OK
The Concrete Centre
Temp & shrinkage effects not
included
-50 0 50
0.00
0.57
1.13
1.70
2.26
2.83
<

b
a
s
e

W
A
L
L

(
m
)

t
o
p

>
EXT MOMENT (kNm) INT
RCC61 Basement Wall/ DESIGN!
129
130
Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc
OUTER BASE ( per metre length ) BS8110
f
= 1.50 (ASSUMED) reference
Ult. Shear = 10.35 kN (AT d from FACE of WALL)
Ult. MT. = 1.67 kNm TENSION - BOTTOM FACE
BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 455 mm
2
Table 3.25
= 12 mm
centres = 225 mm < 762 OK
As = 503 mm
2
> 455 OK
MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d = 304 mm
Z = 289 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm
2
Mres = 63.12 kNm > 1.67 OK
SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100As/bd = 0.28%
vc = 0.42 N/mm
2
Table 3.8
Vres = 126.35 kN > 10.35 OK 3.5.5.2
CHECK CRACK WIDTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS8100/8007 : Temp & shrinkage effects not included
X = 60.69 mm m = -0.0017 BS8007
Acr = 115.54 mm W = -0.38 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
NO CRACKING
INNER BASE ( per metre length )
Ult. Shear = -67.05 kN (AT d from FACE of WALL)
Ult. MT. = 39.60 kNm TENSION - BOTTOM FACE
2
Table 3.25
= 12 mm
centres = 225 mm < 762 OK
As = 503 mm
2
> 455 OK
Z = 289 mm
As' = 0 mm
2
Mres = 63.12 kNm > 39.60 OK 3.4.4.4
SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100As/bd = 0.17%
vc = 0.42 N/mm
2
Table 3.8
Vres = 126.35 kN > 67.05 OK 3.5.5.2
CHECK CRACK WIDTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS8100/8007 : Temp & shrinkage effects not included
X = 60.69 mm m = -0.0006 BS8007
Acr = 115.54 mm W = -0.14 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
NO CRACKING
REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for BASE
Type centres As Min. As
mm mm mm
2
mm
2
TOP H 12 225 503 455 OK
BOTTOM T 12 225 503 455 OK
TRANSVERSE T 12 225 503 455 OK
The Concrete Centre
RCC61 Basement Wall/ DESIGN!
130
131
RCC61 Basement Wall/ WEIGHT!
Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF REINFORCEMENT per metre length of wall
No. Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight
WALL VERTICAL - Internal face 6 H 12 2746 0.888 14.63
VERTICAL - External face 6 H 16 2778 1.578 26.31
TRANSVERSE (Ext.+ Int.) 24 H 10 1000 0.617 14.80
BASE TOP (MAIN) 5 H 12 3596 0.888 15.96
BOTTOM (MAIN) 5 H 12 3596 0.888 15.96
TRANSVERSE ( T & B ) 32 H 12 1000 0.888 28.41
WALL STARTERS (Int.) 6 H 12 1001 0.888 5.33
WALL STARTERS (Ext.) 6 H 16 1193 1.578 11.30
SUMMARY Total reinforcement per metre length of wall (kg) 133
The Concrete Centre
131
132
RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls
RCC62.xls designs simple retaining walls with stems up to 3.0 m
high. The spreadsheet has been developed with both the BS 8002
and the conventional (CECP 2) methods in mind. On balance,
the spreadsheet provides reasonable exibility and, in doing
so, encourages the designer to employ their own engineering
judgement and interpretation of the codes. It is based on
complying with BS 8002: 1994
(4)
and BS 8004: 1986
(23)
. It may
also be used to design retaining walls to comply with CECP 2
(6)

and BS 8007
(5)
.
The spreadsheet is intended to cover only short walls and to
help general engineers who, from time to time, design retaining
walls as part of a wider interests in structures rather than the
specialists. The 3.0 m wall height is an arbitrary limit set for
short wall which is intended to cover over 90% of the cases
encountered in general structural designs. Although many of the
design principles still apply to higher walls, criteria such as wall
movements and the validity of the assumptions made (e.g. no
wall friction) require further consideration and investigation. For
instance, with reference to pressures, the engineer is expected
to judge between using the default of k
a
(active coefcient) or
inputting a larger gure relating to ko (at rest coefcient).
The effects of compaction pressures can be generated using
idealised imposed/ surcharged loads. Residual lateral pressure
calculations were considered to be too complicated to be covered
in the spreadsheet.
Stability analysis is done about the toe of the base. (Stability
analysis taken about toe of nib is ignored; the nib is a section
sticking down from general level of the base, and stability analysis
about its toe gives strange answers). Global slope stability checks
are not undertaken in the spreadsheet and should be addressed
using other means. Input is required on three sheets.
Many cells are referred to in formulae by names; for instance
DATA!C23 is given the name H which is used in formulae at C56:
D60, Diagrams!D88:D137, etc. A list of names and where they
are dened can be seen by referring to Insert\Name\Dene in
Excel having unprotected the current sheet. The spreadsheet is
laid out in a very similar manner to RCC61.xls. Correct display
of the diagrams requires that the Tekton and Marker fonts have
been installed. See FAQ.
DATA!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs. Most inputs, which
are in blue and underlined, should be self-explanatory. The top
diagram denes most input parameters. Please note that unless
the Marker and Tekton fonts are loaded into the Windows font
folder the diagram will not display correctly.
The designer should determine the Design Soil Parameters
based on the combinations in BS 8002 which will give the worst
credible loads i.e. the design values should be the lower of (a) the
peak strength reduced by a mobilisation factor or (b) the critical
state strength.
As default values, the earth pressure coefcients are calculated
using the simplied Rankines formula for smooth vertical walls
based on values of the design soil parameters. Alternatively,
the engineer can enter his or her own coefcients to suit the
conditions of the design by overwriting the default values.
Maximum earth pressure occurs during service and not at
ultimate limit state, as at ultimate limit state the actual earth
pressure will be less. BS 8002(4) also uses a mobilisation factor
on soil parameters, increasing load on the active side of the wall
and reducing soil resistance on the passive side. In so doing,
the code recommends that no further partial load factors are
necessary in design of the structure. The above are not entirely
compatible with BS 8110: Part 1, Table 2.1, nor to our knowledge
have they been fully accepted by the general practising engineer.
Many designers do seem to use the BS 8002 mobilisation factor
as well as the traditional safety factors. Therefore the built-in
partial load factors may be changed. Factors can be set at 1.4 or
1.6 in accordance with BS 8110 or may be set to 1.0. The designer
has, and should have the nal decision and responsibility to
select the load factors he or she feels are suitable to the design
conditions.
BS 8002 suggests that no additional factors of safety are required
in checking of external stability (i.e. over-turning and sliding)
provided that the structure is in equilibrium and the worst
credible loads are used in the design.
For the calculation of bearing pressures, all partial load factors are
switched to unity and the design checks are based on allowable
ground bearing pressure, i.e. the permissible stress approach.
The bearing pressure is then factored up with the partial load
factors adopted from above for the design of concrete base.
Bearing pressure is calculated using the concept of no tension
equilibrium, i.e. triangular stress blocks are used when eccentricity
is outside the middle third.
BS 8002 has minimum surcharge and minimum unplanned
excavation depth requirements. However in the spreadsheet, the
surcharge loads are set as input data. The minimum 10 kN/m2
limit in BS 8002 has not been used with the understanding that
the BS 8002 committee is considering reducing the 10 kN/m
2
to
6 kN/m
2
for 3 m high walls.
The spreadsheet is based on a number of assumptions which
should be assessed as being true or erring on the safe side in each
case. These are:
Wall friction is zero
Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH. A minimum active
pressure of 0.25H (made to be a function of soil property rather
than an arbitrary value equivalent to approx. 5 kN/m3 per m
133
height to cover conditions regarding tension cracks. However,
this does not comply with BS 8002, which recommends that
full hydrostatic pressure is used. As the majority of small
retaining walls have granular backlls, the cohesion value of
retaining soil has been locked to zero.
Granular backll is used. Even a small value of effective
cohesion, c, can signicantly reduce active pressures.
However, to acknowledge the fact that many retaining
walls are built with granular backll for drainage and to
err on the side of caution, the spreadsheet assumes only
cohesionless materials.
The spreadsheet does not include checks on rotational slide/
slope failure.
The spreadsheet does not include checks on the effects of
seepage of ground water beneath the wall.
The spreadsheet does not include checks on deection of the
wall due to lateral earth pressures.
The spreadsheet is not intended for walls over 3.0 m high.
The spreadsheet includes for concrete self-weight.
Many engineers have reservations about including the effect of
passive pressure in front of the wall and a warning message has
been used to help ensure that passive pressure is considered only
if it can be guaranteed that there will be no future excavation in
front of the wall.
Under Operating Instructions a number of checks are carried out
and problems are highlighted.
K
p
is calculated using base material properties. Lever arm of
passive reaction is measured from bottom base level downward.
In the calculation of passive force, cohesion of the base material
is also taken into consideration.
134
Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc
Client
Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location
Grid line 1 rc 12-Apr-2006 101
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from ' RCC62.xls ' v3.0 2006 TCC
chg R68
IDEALISED STRUCTURE and FORCE DIAGRAMS DESIGN STATUS: VALID
WARNING :
Passive pressure should
only be considered if it
can be guaranteed that
there will be no future
excavation in front of
the wall.
DIMENSIONS (mm)
H = 3250 B = 4000 Tw = 300
Hw = 1500 BI = 1200 Tb = 300
Hp = 300 BN = 0 TN = 0
Hn = 0
MATERIAL PROPERTIES steel class A
fcu = 35 N/mm m = 1.5 concrete
fy = 500 N/mm m = 1.15 steel
cover to tension steel = 50 mm
Max allowable design surface crack width (W) = 0.3 mm
Concrete density = 24 kN/m
SOIL PROPERTIES Wall Geometry
Design angle of int'l friction of retained mat'l () = 30 degree
Design cohesion of retained mat'l (C ) = 0 kN/m (Only granular backfil considered, "C" = zero)
Density of retained mat'l (q ) = 20 kN/m
Submerged Density of retained mat'l (qs ) = 5.00 kN/m [default=2/3*q (only apply when Hw13.33
Design angle of int'l friction of base mat'l (b) = 20 degree ASSUMPTIONS
Design cohesion of base material (Cb ) = 10 kN/m a) Wall friction is zero
Density of base material (qb ) = 10 kN/m b) Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
Allowable gross ground bearing pressure (GBP) = 200 kN/m c) Granular backfill
LOADINGS Surcharge load -- live (SQK) = 10 kN/m e)Does not include effect of seepage of ground
Surcharge load -- dead (SGK) = 10 water beneath the wall.
Line load -- live (LQK) = 10.3 kN/m f)Does not include deflection check of wall due to
Line load -- dead (LGK) = 43 kN/m lateral earth pressures
Distance of line load from wall (X) = 0 mm h) Design not intended for walls over 3.0 m high
LATERAL FORCES (unfactored) Ka = 0.33 [ default ka = (1-SIN )/(1+SIN ) ] 0.33
Kp = 2.04 [ default kp = (1+SIN b)/(1-SIN b 2.04
Kpc = 2.86 [ default kpc = 2kp
0.5
] = 2.86
Kac = 1.15 [ 2ka
0.5
]
Force Lever arm Moment about TOE
f
F
ult M
ult
(kN) (m) (kNm) (kN) (kNm)
PE = 29.58 LE = 1.194 35.33 1.40 41.42 49.46
PS(GK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 1.40 15.17 24.65
PS(QK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 1.60 17.33 28.17
PL(GK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00 1.40 0.00 0.00
PL(QK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00 1.60 0.00 0.00
PW = 11.25 LW = 0.50 5.63 1.40 15.75 7.88
Total 62.50 76.16 89.67 110.15
PP = -9.49 (LP-HN) = 0.15 -1.38 1.00 -9.49 -1.38
i) Does not include check for temp. or shrinkage eff
-
The Concrete Centre
d)Does not include check of rotational slide/slope f
(0.2 or 0.3
mm only)
RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DATA!
134
135
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc
Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 2006 TCC chg - R68
EXTERNAL STABILITY STABILITY CHECKS : OK
OVERTURNING about TOE F.O.S = 1.50
(using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety factor) LOADING OPTION
Overturning Lateral FORCE (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm) (select critical load combination)
Moments PE = 29.58 LE = 1.08 32.05 EARTH
PS(GK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 Warning:
PS(QK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60
PL(GK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00
PL(QK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00
PW = 11.25 LW = 0.50 5.63
P = 62.50
Pp = -9.49 (LP-HN) = 0.15 -1.38
Mo = 71.50
Restoring Vertical FORCE (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm)
Moments Wall = 17.64 1.35 23.81
Base = 16.80 2.00 33.60 Warning:
Nib = 0.00 0.00 0.00
Earth = 102.50 2.75 281.88
Water = 30.00 2.75 82.50
Surcharge = 50.00 2.75 137.50
Line load = 53.30 1.50 79.95
V = 270.24 Mr = 639.24
Factor of Safety, Mr / Mo = 8.94 > 1.50 OK
SLIDING (using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety factor) F.O.S = 1.50
Sum of LATERAL FORCES, P = 62.50 kN
PASSIVE FORCE, Pp x Reduction factor (1) = -9.49 kN Red'n factor for passive force = 1.00
BASE FRICTION ( V TANb + B Cb ) = -138.36 kN
Sum of FORCES RESISTING SLIDING, Pr = -147.85 kN
Factor of Safety, Pr / P = 2.37 > 1.50 OK
GROUND BEARING FAIL Taking moments about centre of base (anticlockwise "+") :
Vertical FORCES (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm)
Wall = 21.24 0.65 13.81
Base = 28.80 0.00 0.00
Nib = 0.00 2.00 0.00
Earth = 102.50 -0.75 -76.88
Water = 30.00 -0.75 -22.50
Surcharge= 50.00 -0.75 -37.50
Line load = 53.30 0.50 26.65
V = 285.84 Mv = -96.42
Moment due to LATERAL FORCES, Mo = 71.50 kNm
Resultant Moment, M = Mv + Mo = -24.91 kNm
Eccentricity from base centre, M / V = -0.09 m
Therefore, MAXIMUM Gross Bearing Pressure ( GRP) = 77 kN/m < 200 OK
The Concrete Centre
BEARING PRESSURE (KN/m)
0
50
100
4.00 0.00
PS(QK)
PL(GK)
PL(QK)
PS(GK)
PW
9
ALLOW BUOYANCY OF BASE
RCC62 Retaining Wall/ STABILITY!
135
136
STRUCTURAL DESIGNS (ultimate) DESIGN CHECKS : OK
WALL ( per metre length )
Force Lever arm Moment
f
V ult M ult
(kN) (m) (kNm) (kN) (kNm)
EARTH 25.41 1.07 27.08 1.4 35.57 37.92
SURCHARGE(GK) 9.83 1.48 14.50 1.4 13.77 20.31
SURCHARGE(QK) 9.83 1.48 14.50 1.6 15.73 23.21
LINE LOAD(GK) 0.00 2.95 0.00 1.4 0.00 0.00
LINE LOAD(QK) 0.00 2.95 0.00 1.6 0.00 0.00
WATER 7.20 0.40 2.88 1.4 10.08 4.03
Total 52.27 58.97 75.15 85.46
BS8110
reference
MAIN REINFORCEMENT :
Min. As = 390 mm
2
Table 3.25
= 20 mm
centres = 150 mm < 364 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
Asprov = 2094 mm
2
> 390 OK
MOMENT of RESISTANCE :
d = 240 mm
z = 210.88 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm
2
Mres = 192.03 kNm > 85.46 OK
SHEAR RESISTANCE:
100 As/bd = 0.87%
vc = 0.77 N/mm
2
Table 3.8
Vres = 184.24 kN > 75.15 OK 3.5.5.2
Ultimate Bending Moment Diagram
CHECK CRACK WIDTH TO BS8110/BS8007 : X = 95.47 mm
Temperature and shrinkage effects not included) Acr = 86.05 mm
m = 0.0006 BS8007
W = 0.12 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for WALL
Type Centres As Min. As
mm mm
mm
2
mm
2
VERTICAL EXT. FACE H 12 150 754 390 OK
VERTICAL INT. FACE H 20 150 2094 390 OK
The Concrete Centre
0 50 100
0.00
0.59
1.18
1.77
2.36
2.95
<

b
a
s
e

W
A
L
L

(
m
)

t
o
p

>
MOMENT (KNm)
RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DESIGN!
136
137
BASE - unloaded side ( per metre length ) BS8110
f
= 1.45 (default = ult mt / non-factored mt 1.45 reference
V ult = 85.74 kN
M ult = 67.33 kNm ( '+' TENSION AT BOTTOM FACE)
2
Table 3.25
= 16 mm
centres = 150 mm < 558 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
Asprov = 1340 mm
2
> 390 OK
z = 223.36 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm
2
Mres = 130.17 kNm > 67.33 OK
SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100 As/bd = 0.55%
vc = 0.66 N/mm
2
Table 3.8
Vres = 159.32 kN > 85.74 OK 3.5.5.2
CHECK CRACK WIDTH TO BS8110/BS8007 : (Temperature and shrinkage effects not included)
X = 80.69 mm m = 0.00054 BS8007
Acr = 86.81 mm W = 0.11 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
BASE - loaded side ( per metre length )
V ult = 81.52 kN
M ult = 18.13 kNm (TENSION - TOP FACE)
TOP REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 390 mm
2
Table 3.25
= 16 mm
centres = 150 mm < 558 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
Asprov = 1340 mm
2
> 390 OK
MOMENT RESISTANCE : d = 242 mm
z = 223.36 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm
2
Mres = 130.17 kNm > 18.13 OK
SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100 As/bd = 0.55%
vc = 0.66 N/mm
2
Table 3.8
Vres = 159.32 kN > 81.52 OK 3.5.5.2
CHECK CRACK WIDTH to BS8100/ BS8007 : (Temperature and shrinkage effects not included)
X = 80.69 mm m = -0.0003 BS8007
Acr = 86.81 mm W = -0.05 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for BASE
Type Centers As Min. As
mm mm mm
2
mm
2
TOP (DESIGN) H 16 150 1340 390 OK
BOTTOM (DESIGN) H 16 150 1340 390 OK
The Concrete Centre
RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DESIGN!
137
138
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF REINFORCEMENT
No. Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight
WALL VERTICAL - External face 7 H 12 3046 0.888 18.93
VERTICAL - Internal face 7 H 20 3110 2.466 53.69
TRANSVERSE (Ext.& Int.) 40 H 12 1000 0.888 35.51
BASE TOP (MAIN) 7 H 16 4128 1.578 45.61
BOTTOM (MAIN) 7 H 16 4128 1.578 45.61
TRANSVERSE ( T & B ) 42 H 12 1000 0.888 37.29
WALL STARTERS (Ext.) 7 H 12 1155 0.888 7.18
WALL STARTERS (Int.) 7 H 20 1475 2.466 25.46
NIB (assume same reinforcement as wall)
INTERNAL FACE (MAIN) 7 H 12 96 0.888 0.60
EXTERNAL FACE (MAIN) 7 H 20 160 2.466 2.76
TRANSVERSE (EXT.+ INT.) 2 H 12 1000 0.888 1.78
SUMMARY Approx total reinforcement per metre length of wall (kg) 274.4
The Concrete Centre
RCC62 Retaining Wall/ WEIGHT!
138
139
RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls
RCC71.xls designs simply supported ights and landings to BS
8110. Input is required on two sheets.

FLIGHT!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.
Only simply supported spans are catered for. If ights are
continuous with oors, the user should specify continuity steel
over supports as appropriate. Calculations are done per metre
width of ight. Input loads are assumed to be characteristic and
acting vertically. They should account for any undercuts. Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The area of steel required, A
sreq
, may be automatically increased
to increase modication factors and satisfy deection criteria.
Where the stair ight occupies more than 60% of the span an
increase in allowable span to depth ratios of 15% is included in
accordance with Clause 3.10.2.2. Nominal top reinforcement
may be specied in order to help overcome deection problems.
Dimensions are not checked for compliance with Building
Regulations.
Ultimate, characteristic dead and characteristic imposed
reactions are given below the indicative diagram.

LANDING!
Again, this single sheet consists of the input and main output.
Input defaults in magenta have been derived from FLIGHT! but
may be overwritten. Calculations are done per metre width of
landing.
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.
As defaults, which can be overwritten, the material data and
characteristic ight reactions carry over from FLIGHT! Self-
The maximum width of landing over which ight loads can be
dispersed has been restricted to 1.8 m in the spirit of Clause
3.10.1.3. Reactions are ultimate, both total and per metre run.
The area of steel required, As, can be automatically increased to
satisfy deection criteria.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deection modication factors used in FLIGHT!
and LANDING!

Notes!
140
RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single/ FLIGHT!
Location South Staircase FLIGHT rmw 12-Apr-06 106
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC71.xls ' v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC
- R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm m 1.5 concrete Min bar = 10
fy 500 N/mm m 1.15 steel Max bar = 16
h agg 20 mm steel class A
Cover 25 mm Density 23.6 kN/m Nominal top steel ? Y
(Normal weight concrete)
DIMENSIONS Sectional Elevation
a = 600 mm landing A h = 175
b = 2500 mm flight waist = 200
c = 1200 mm landing B h = 200
d = -600 mm
e = -100 mm
Going = 250 mm L = 4300
Rise = 1900 mm total 10 treads
Rise = 173 mm each step Rake = 34.64
LOADING
Imposed 4.00 kN/m 47.08 kN/m ult 37.81 kN/m ult
Flight finishes 1.60 kN/m (20.87 + 11.16) (16.91 + 8.84)
Landing finishes 1.30 kN/m
DESIGN
LANDING A, gk = 4.13 + 1.30 = 5.43 kN/m n = 1.4 x 5.43 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.00 kN/m
FLIGHT, gk = 7.78 + 1.60 = 9.38 kN/m n = 1.4 x 9.38 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 19.53 kN/m
LANDING C, gk = 4.72 + 1.30 = 6.02 kN/m n = 1.4 x 6.02 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.83 kN/m
Zero shear is at 0.6 + (47.08 - 16.80) /19.53 = 2.151 m from left
M = 47.08 x 2.151 - 16.80 x 2.151 - 19.53 x 1.551/2 = 41.64 kNm/m
d = 200 - 25 - 8 = 167 mm K = 0.0427 As = 604 mm/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 280 B = 718 mm/m
Enhanced by 17.9 % for deflection H10 @ 300 T in span
L/d = 4,300 /167 = 25.749 < 20.0 x 1.235 x 1.050 = 25.930 allowed OK
chg
The Concrete Centre
140
141
RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single/ LANDING!
Location South Staircase LANDING rmw 12-Apr-06 107
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC71.xls' v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm m 1.5 concrete Min bar = 10
fy 500 N/mm m 1.15 steel Max bar = 16
h agg 20 mm Density 23.6 kN/m
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y
DIMENSIONS
a = 1200 mm depth, h = 175 mm
b = 1200 mm width, w = 1200 mm
c = 250 mm
d = 175 mm L = 3000 mm
LOADING
LANDING Imposed 4.00 kN/m 79.3 kN ult 74.0 kN ult
Finishes 1.50 kN/m 66.1 kN/m ult 61.6 kN/m ult
Slab 4.13 kN/m n = 1.4 x 5.63 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.28 kN/m
gk qk
Flight a reaction 20.87 11.16 kN/m n1 = (1.4 x 20.87 + 1.6 x 11.16)/1.20 = 39.23 kN/m
Flight b reaction 16.91 8.84 kN/m n2 = (1.4 x 16.91 + 1.6 x 8.84)/1.20 = 31.51 kN/m
DESIGN
Zero shear is at (66.11 - 2.50) /(14.28 + 39.23) + 0.175 = 1.364 m from left
M = 66.11 x 1.364 - 14.28 x 1.364/2 - 39.23 x 1.189/2 = 49.15 kNm/m
d = 175 - 25 - 8 = 142 mm K = 0.0696 As = 870 mm/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 200 B = 1005 mm/m
Enhanced by 12.7 % for deflection H10 @ 325 T in span
L/d = 3,000 /142 = 21.127 < 20.0 x 1.021 = 21.516 allowed OK
The Concrete Centre
141
142
This spreadsheet designs the ights and landings of a staircase in
a stair core to BS 8110. It is assumed that ights are supported
on the landings and that the landings are simply supported on
bearings at each end.

STAIRCORE!
Dimensions are not checked for compliance with Building
Regulations. Simple supports are assumed. Calculations are done
per metre width of ight and landing. Input loads are assumed
to be characteristic and acting vertically. They should account
for any undercuts. All stairs are assumed to start from ight 1.
Superuous ights and landings are blanked out. Self-weight,
moments and reactions are calculated automatically. Where the
stair ight occupies more than 60% of the span an increase in
allowable span to depth ratios of 15% is included in accordance
with Clause 3.10.2.2 and, as with other spreadsheets, the area
of steel required may be automatically increased to satisfy
deection criteria. Ultimate reactions per metre are given.

Dias!
percentages for deection modication factors used in
STAIRCORE!

Notes!
RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls
143
Location North Staircase RMW 12-Apr-06 109
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
chg - R68
MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm m 1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm m 1.15 steel
h agg 20 mm steel class A
Cover 20 mm Density 23.6 kN/m
(Normal weight concrete)
DIMENSIONS No of Flights = 6
A = 1200 mm B = 150 mm bearing
C = 250 mm Going = 250 mm
L1 = 1200 mm F1 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L2 = 1200 mm F2 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L3 = 1200 mm F3 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L4 = 1200 mm F4 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L5 = 1200 mm F5 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L6 = 750 mm F6 = 2500 mm 10 treads
STOREY HEIGHT RISERS RISE RAKE
Lower 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5
Typical 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5
Upper 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5
LOADING Imposed 4.00 kN/m
Flight finishes 0.50 kN/m
FLIGHT 1
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.350 m
b = 0.600 m
Waist 4.20 L = 2.950 m
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m
n1 = 1.4x6.57+1.6x4.00 14.60 kN/m 22.06 kN/m
= 15.60 kN/m
M = 22.06 x 1.414 / 2 = 15.60 kNm/m d = 125 mm K = 0.0285
As = 363 mm PROVIDE 5 H10 @ 270 B = 393 mm L/d = 23.600 < 25.863 allowed OK
FLIGHT 2
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m n2 = 15.60 kN/m 19.50 kN/m 19.50 kN/m
M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection
Plans
The Concrete Centre
RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!
143
144
LANDING 1 +1.750 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m
Self wt 3.54 n1 = 14.60/1.20 = 12.17 kN/m
Finishes 1.30 n2 = 19.50/1.20 = 16.25 kN/m
4.84 kN/m na = 1.4x4.84+1.6x4.0 = 13.18 kN/m 34.23 kN/m 36.77 kN/m
M = 36.77 x 1.310 - 11.31 - 12.39 = 24.48 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0455
FLIGHT 3
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m n3 = 15.60 kN/m 19.50 19.50
M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444
LANDING 2 +3.500 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m
Self wt 3.54 n3 = 16.25 kN/m
Finishes 1.30 n2 = 16.25 kN/m
4.84 kN/m nb = 13.18 kN/m 37.95 37.95
M = 37.95 x 1.400 - 12.91 - 14.14 = 26.08 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0485
FLIGHT 4
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m n4 = 15.60 kN/m 19.50 19.50
M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444
LANDING 3 +5.250 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m
Self wt 3.54 n3 = 16.25 kN/m
4.84 kN/m nc = 13.18 kN/m 37.95 37.95
M = 37.95 x 1.400 - 12.91 - 14.14 = 26.08 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0485
The Concrete Centre
144
145
FLIGHT 5
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m n5 = 15.60 kN/m 19.50 19.50
M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444
LANDING 4 +7.000 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m
Self wt 3.54 n5 = 16.25 kN/m
4.84 kN/m nd = 13.18 kN/m 37.95 37.95
M = 37.95 x 1.400 - 12.91 - 14.14 = 26.08 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0485
FLIGHT 6
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.375 m
L = 3.475 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m n6 = 15.60 kN/m 18.24 20.77
M = 18.24 x ( 1.769 - 0.585 ) = 21.61 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0401
LANDING 5 +8.750 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m
Self wt 3.54 n5 = 16.25 kN/m
4.84 kN/m ne = 13.18 kN/m 37.65 36.99
M = 37.65 x 1.377 - 12.49 - 13.69 = 25.65 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0477
LANDING 6 +10.500 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m
Self wt 3.54 n6 = 27.69 kN/m
Finishes 1.30
4.84 kN/m nf = 13.18 kN/m 26.46 43.66
M = 43.66 x 1.119 - 8.25 - 15.10 = 25.52 kNm/m d = 125 mm K = 0.0467
The Concrete Centre
145
146
RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls
This spreadsheet designs simple pad foundations from input of
material properties, dimensions and characteristic loads and
moments. Single column bases and combined, double bases are
catered for on separate sheets.
A diagram is provided to illustrate the dimensions: a chart
showing scale plan views is provided to help ensure gross errors
are avoided. The efciency diagrams are provided so that the user
may gauge how hard the base is working in respect to allowable
increase in ground bearing pressure, bending and shear in the two
axes together with a measure on punching shear capacity. If the
design is invalid, this chart should help identify the problem.
The spreadsheet does not allow for punching shear links
bending reinforcement is increased to ensure allowable shear, v
c
,
is adequate. The user should note that punching shear perimeters
can jump from being rectangular to being two- or three-sided,
leading to unexpectedly large increases in reinforcement for
increases in base thickness. Information from BS 8110: Part 1,
Clause 3.7.7.8 and Figure 3.19 has yet to be fully incorporated in
this spreadsheet.
Warnings are given if columns encroach within 100 mm of an
edge.

SINGLE!
Suggestions are made, under the Operating Instructions column
at L12, for the optimum plan size of the base.
Where two centres are given, e.g. 14 T16 @ 200 & 325 B2, the
reinforcement is subject to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.11.3.2 and
different centres are required, bars need to be grouped closer in
the central part of the base.

Det1!
This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
Allowable bearing pressure is taken as an allowable increase in
bearing pressure and density of concrete density of excavated
material (i.e. soil) is used in the calculations. The program
assumes that pads are embedded to depth H in the soil. A 25%
over-stress is allowed where load cases include wind loads.
Design moments are generally those at the face of the column.
Both sides of the column are checked for moment in each
direction to ensure maxima are identied. Shear enhancement is
allowed for both beam and punching shear.
Neither crack widths, factors of safety against sliding, nor water
tables are catered for. Where resultant eccentricities are outside
the base a warning message is given; the general status message
is updated as well.
Factors of safety against overturning are checked (minimum 1.5).
Warnings are also given at the onset of an uplift situation.

DOUBLE!
In addition to graphs showing plan layout and efciency, this
sheet gives moment diagrams for the two principal axes. Design
moments are taken at the edge of both column sections.

Suggestions are made, under the Operating Instructions column
at L31:L35, for the optimum plan size of the base and eccentricities
given the column offsets from one another.
The users attention is drawn to the fact that the analysis is done
in two orthogonal directions. When column eccentricities are
large in both directions the analysis may not account adequately
for local effects (e.g. bottom cantilever moments on two sides of
each column loads in opposite corners gives bottom moments of
0 kNm). In such cases, it may be better to change the orientation
of the base in such a way that eccentricity in one direction is
minimal. Warnings about double eccentricities are given when
the distances between column centrelines exceed 15% of the
relevant base dimension in each orthogonal direction.
Comparison with FE analysis suggests this is reasonable so long
as the base is thick and rigid.
Det2!
The notes for Det! above also apply.
Legends!
This sheet shows dimensions, axes, corners and notation used.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs for both SINGLE! and
DOUBLE!
Notes!
147
RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls
Project
Location Level -1 Base B1 RMW 12-Apr-06 113
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm h agg 20 mm
c
1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm cover 50 mm
s
1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 24 kN/m Soil 21 kN/m steel class A
Bearing pressure 185 kN/m (net allowable increase)
DIMENSIONS mm
COLUMN
L = 3000 h = 500
B = 3000 b = 500
depth H = 500
ex = 0 ey = 0
COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic Plot (to scale) Key
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 1480.0 128.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) -20.0
My (kNm)
Hx (kN)
Hy (kN)
Overturning FOS = Large
Uplift FOS = infinite
BEARING PRESSURES kN/m characteristic
CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 184.6 175.7 184.6 175.7
with wind 184.6 175.7 184.6 175.7 Efficiency
REINFORCEMENT Detail to 3.11.3.2 Detail to 3.11.3.2
Mxx = 603.4 kNm Myy = 592.9 kNm
b = 3000 mm b = 3000 mm
d = 437.5 mm d = 412.5 mm
As = 3339 mm As = 3480 mm
PROVIDE 13 H25 @ 200 & 250 B1 PROVIDE 13 H25 @ 200 & 275 B2
As prov = 6381 mm As prov = 6381 mm
Asx increased 80% for shear Asy increased 70% for shear
BEAM SHEAR
Vxx = 625.8 kN at d from col face Vyy = 629.9 kN at d from col face
v = 0.477 N/mm v = 0.509 N/mm
or Vxx = 286.9 kN at 2d from col face or Vyy = 311.2 kN at 2d from col face
v = 0.219 N/mm v = 0.251 N/mm
vc = 0.544 N/mm vc = 0.563 N/mm
PUNCHING SHEAR
d ave = 425 mm u crit = 7100 mm
As prov = 0.501 % v max = 2.782 N/mm at col face
v = 0.541 N/mm vc = 0.553 N/mm
BASE
The Concrete Centre
. .
. .
Single column base
98%
45%
44%
52%
55%
100%
0% 25% 50% 75% 100% 125%
punching
v yy
Shear v xx
(As/Asprov) fsy
Bending fsx
Grnd Brg Pressure
RCC81 Foundation Pads/ SINGLE!
147
148
RCC81 Foundation Pads/ DOUBLE!
Project
Location Base B3/B4 RMW 12-Apr-06 114
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Combined base Checked Revision Job No
c
1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm cover 50 mm
s
1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 24 kN/m Soil 21 kN/m
Bearing pressure 185 kN/m (net allowable)
COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
Column 1 (rhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND Column 2 (lhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial 1369.5 1369.5 Axial 1369.5 1369.5
Mx Mx
My My
Hx Hx
Hy Hy
DIMENSIONS mm
L = 6000 h1 = 450 h2 = 450
B = 5000 b1 = 450 b2 = 450
depth H = 800
ex = 3000 ex1 = 1500 ex2 = 1500
ey = 0 ey1 = 0 ey2 = 0
Overturning FOS = Large Uplift FOS = infinite
CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 185.0 185.0 185.0 185.0
with wind 185.0 185.0 185.0 185.0
REINFORCEMENT
Btm Mxx - 1113.1 kNm Myy - 4252.8
b = 5000 mm b = 6000
d = 740 mm d = 717.5
As = 3642 mm As = 14350
PROVIDE 17 H20 @ 275 & 325 B1 & 30 H25 @ 225 B2
As prov = 5341 mm As prov = 14726
Detail to clause 3.11.3.2
Top Mxx + 0.0 kNm Myy + 0.0
d = 740 mm d = 720
As = 0 mm As = 0
PROVIDE 17 H20 @ 275 & 325 T1 & 20 H20 @ 325 T2
. .
BEAM SHEAR
.
Vxx = 732.7 kN at d Vyy = 2559.6
v = 0.198 N/mm v = 0.595
or Vxx = 0.0 kN at 2d or Vyy = 1380.5
v = 0.000 N/mm v = 0.321
vc = 0.318 N/mm vc = 0.427
PUNCHING SHEAR
.
.
PLOT (to scale)
Mx Diagram (1.4Gk + 1.6Qk)
Efficiency'
.
The Concrete Centre
COLUMN 1 (rhs) COLUMN 2 (lhs) BASE
STATUS VALID DESIGN
-1200
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5
Moment Columns Zero axis
-5000
-4000
-3000
-2000
-1000
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
91%
75%
31%
83%
98%
100%
0% 50% 100% 150%
punching
v yy
Shear v xx
(As/Asprov) fsy
Bending fsx
Grnd Brg Pressure
148
149
RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls
This spreadsheet designs pilecaps with between two and six piles,
and then prepares a sketch drawing of each type of cap together
with a bar schedule. Bending theory is employed throughout to
design the caps. Depending upon the pilecaps dimensions, the
alternative truss method of design may be possible, but is not
covered by this spreadsheet.
There are seven main sheets: DOUBLE!, 3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP!,
6CAP!, SCHEDULE! and DRAWING! Each of the rst ve sheets
contains two pages that may be printed out. The rst (or upper)
page contains input data and a summary of results, while the
second (or lower) page shows more detailed calculations.
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
Area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (40mm
diameter)
Spacing rules or
Number of legs of links required in shear.
The size of link to be used has also been automated.
The designer and detailer may wish to rationalise the output
given on the DRAWING! sheet. But doing so will obviously affect
the bar data on SCHEDULE!

DOUBLE!
The DOUBLE! sheet is where all material properties are entered,
together with covers, pile diameter and pile tolerance. All
subsequent sheets use these same properties. Pile tolerance is the
amount by which a pile may deviate from its intended position.
This value is used in calculation to increase bending moments to
allow for this possible deviation. Pile reactions are not similarly
increased.
Dimensional data for a double pile cap and the supported column
are then entered, followed by characteristic column axial loads,
moments and horizontal shears for dead load, imposed load
and wind load. The results of calculations for all BS 8110 loading
combinations are then displayed below (on page X), together
with the required arrangement of reinforcement. More detailed
calculations may be found by scrolling down to page X.

3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP! and 6CAP!
These sheets are identical in function to DOUBLE!, but deal with
caps having 3, 4, 5 and 6 piles respectively.
However, material properties, pile diameter and tolerance are
picked up from DOUBLE!
Page numbers for printing do not follow on from previous sheets,
so must be entered by the user. This allows for intermediate
calculation pages (perhaps for loading) to be inserted.

SCHEDULE!
This sheet is a bar schedule complying with BS 8666, for the
pilecap drawing on the DRAWING! sheet.
Beneath the operating instructions, the number of each type
of cap must be entered. These numbers are then used on the
schedule and the drawing.

DRAWING!
This sheet draws approximately to scale plans and elevations
with reinforcement and bar marks for each of the cap types. It
is intended for printout to an A3 sheet. If the user wishes to add
additional notes, these may be added in cell U27.

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in all sheets. It is not
intended for formal printing.

Notes!
150
Project
Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 Rod 12-Apr-06 101
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD 2006 TCC - - P2000
c
1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm T&S cover 50 mm
s
1.15 steel
Pile capacity 200 kN Btm cover 75 mm steel class A
DIMENSIONS mm Conc density 23.6 kN/m
= 350 A = 400
= 350 B = 1500
C = 400
Pile = 375 E = 750
Tolerance = 150 depth H = 400
COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 218 104.2 27.5 PLOT (to scale)
M (kNm) 23.2 10.4 2.7
H (kN) 0 0 0
REINFORCEMENT PILE REACTIONS kN
BOTTOM M = 196.9 kNm PILE 1 PILE 2
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,611 mm Gk + Qk 147.4 192.2
9 H16 B = 1,810 mm Gk + Qk +Wk 159.3 207.7
TOP M = 0.0 kNm
d = 337.0 mm, As min = 416 mm
6 H10 T = 471 mm 6 H10 02 T
LINKS
V = 279.7 kN, v = 1.131 N/mm
vc = 0.68 N/mm
(v - vc)b = 361.4 N/mm Links 10 H8 03.225 + 2x10 H8 04.225
4 Legs H8 @ 225 LINKS = 388.5 N/mm
The Concrete Centre
Double Pilecap
KEY
PILECAP
STATUS
ELEVATION
9 H16 01 B
COLUMN
VALID DESIGN
RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!
150
151
Project
Location Pilecap G14 - Detailed Calculations Rod 12-Apr-06 102
Cap load (kN) = 17.4 Piles @ (m) 1.500 PILE REACTIONS kN
or (kN/m) = 7.55 PILE 1 PILE 2
Gk + Qk 147.4 192.2 .
OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic Gk + Qk +Wk 159.3 207.7 .
DEAD IMPOSED WIND 1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 215.4 280.9
23.2 10.4 2.7 Gk + 1.4Wk 118.9 154.9 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 191.2 249.3
BENDING MOMENTS - kNm
M of col arm (m) 0.725
(including tolerance)
BOTTOM STEEL TOP STEEL
Bottom M = 196.9 16 Top M = 0.0 10 K' = 0.1558
d = 309.0 d = 337.0 min As = 0.13%
K = 0.0737 K = 0.0000
z = 281.2 z = 320.2
As = 1611 As = 0
Provide 1611 Provide 416
No = 9 No = 6
As prov = 1810 As prov = 471
fs = 297 fs = 0
Max clear S = 158.4 Max clear S = 252.8
Min clear S = 25.0 Min clear S = 25.0
Clear S = 67.5 9 H16 B Clear S = 124.8 6 H10 T
SHEAR Crit section is 112.5 from pile centres 0.732 %
PILE 1
V
Av = 637.5 v = 0.8664 vc = 0.6797
PILE 2
V
Av = 637.5 v = 1.1314 vc = 0.6797
Max (v - vc)b = 361.4 8 links
No of legs = 4 Link spacing = 225 4 Legs H8 @ 225 LINKS
279.7 154.1 248.3
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
214.2 118.1
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
149.5
196.9
81.5 132.9
107.5 175.0
The Concrete Centre
Double Pilecap
190.2
RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DESIGN!
151
152
Project
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 12-Apr-06 14
DIMENSIONS mm
= 300 A = 350
= 300 B = 1300
C = 1126
Pile = 375 E = 375.33
Min spacing = 1300 depth H = 400
Tolerance = 150
COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale)
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 355.5 118.2 10.0 STATUS
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONS kN characteristic
Hx (kN) PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3
Hy (kN) Gk + Qk 140.4 168.9 191.9
Gk + Qk +Wk 139.3 172.9 199.0
REINFORCEMENT
EW (2-3) M = 222.6 kNm, b = 1,050 mm
d = 307.0 mm, As = 1,808 mm 4 H12 06 T1
6 H20 B = 1,885 mm
V = 278.3 kN, bv = 1,050 mm 6 H20 05 B1
v = 0.863 N/mm, (v-vc)b = 420 N/mm Links 8 H8 07 200 + 2x8 H8 08 200
4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS = 437 N/mm
NS (1-2/3) M = 196.2 kNm, b = 1,798 mm
d = 284.5 mm, As = 1,669 mm 4 H12 10 T2
4 H25 B = 1,963 mm
V = 202.7 kN, bv = 1,234 mm 4 H25 09 B2
v = 0.577 N/mm, (v-vc)b = 494 N/mm Links 7 H8 11 175 + 2x7 H8 12 175
4 Legs H8 @ 175 LINKS = 500 N/mm
COLUMN
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
The Concrete Centre
Triple Pilecap
PILECAP
KEY
VALID DESIGN
RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!
152
153
Project
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 12-Apr-06 15
Cap load = 27.6 kN Group centre @ 751 m from pile 1
PILE REACTIONS kN
PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic
Gk + Qk 140.4 168.9 191.9 . DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Gk + Qk +Wk 139.3 172.9 199.0 . Mx 10.0 5.0 2.0
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 202.7 244.4 278.3 My 20.0 10.0 5.0
Gk + 1.4Wk 108.4 134.5 154.2 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 167.2 207.5 238.8
My v of col
My ^ of col (including tolerance)
Mx
E-W STEEL N-S STEEL
M = 222.6 20 M = 196.2 25 K' = 0.1558
b = 1050 b = 1798 min As = 0.13%
d = 307.0 d = 284.5
K = 0.0643 K = 0.0385
z = 283.2 z = 270.3
As = 1808 As = 1669
No = 6 No = 4
fs = 320 fs = 283
Clear S = 92.8 6 H20 B Clear S = 161.3 4 H25 B
SHEAR Crit section is 112.5 from pile centres
PILES 2 & 3 8 links
V = 278.3 b = 1050 As% = 0.585 .
av = 537.5 v = 0.8632 vc = 0.7216
(v - vc)b = 420.0 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 200 4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS
PILE 1 8 links
V = 202.7 b = 1234 As% = 0.559 .
av = 638.2 v = 0.5775 vc = 0.6224
(v - vc)b = 493.6 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 175 4 Legs H8 @ 175 LINKS
PUNCHING Column Face At Fig 3.23 critical section
V = 686.8 = 4163 d ave = 295.75
v = 1.935 v = 0.558 av = 494.0
v max = 4.733 ok vc 2d/av = 0.717 ok
The Concrete Centre
Triple Pilecap
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
222.6 123.4 191.1
196.2 108.4 167.5
152.2 81.4 125.5
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk
153
154
Project
Location Pilecap E12 Rod 12-Apr-06 28
DIMENSIONS mm
A = 350
= 300 B = 1300
= 400 C = 1300
D = 650
Pile = 375 E = 650
Tolerance = 150 depth H = 450
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 475.0 157.0 13.6 STATUS
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONS kN
Hx (kN) 1.0 0.5 0.2 PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 PILE 4
Hy (kN) 2.0 1.0 0.5 Gk + Qk 150.5 162.6 174.6 186.7
Gk + Qk +Wk 151.1 164.8 179.3 192.9
REINFORCEMENT
EW(1/3-2/4) M = 328.6 kNm, b = 2,000 mm
d = 367.0 mm, As = 2,168 mm 11 H10 14 T1
11 H16 B1 = 2,212 mm
V = 505.5 kN, bv = 2,000 mm 11 H16 13 B1
v = 0.689 N/mm, (v-vc)b = 800 N/mm 11 Link Legs
11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS = 801 N/mm
NS(1/2-3/4) M = 313.9 kNm, b = 2,000 mm
d = 351.0 mm, As = 2,165 mm 11 H10 16 T2
11 H16 B2 = 2,212 mm
V = 523.2 kN, bv = 2,000 mm 11 H16 15 B2
v = 0.745 N/mm, (v-vc)b = 800 N/mm Links 11x7 H8 17 300
11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS = 801 N/mm
KEY
VALID DESIGN
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
COLUMN
The Concrete Centre
4 Pile Cap
PILECAP
Note: 5CAP! AND 6CAP! similar
154
155
Project
Location Pilecap E12 Rod 12-Apr-06 29
Cap load = 42.5 kN OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
PILE REACTIONS kN Mx 10.5 5.2 2.1
PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 PILE 4 My 20.9 10.5 5.2
Gk + Qk 150.5 162.6 174.6 186.7 .
Gk + Qk +Wk 151.1 164.8 179.3 192.9 .
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 217.4 235.1 252.8 270.4
Gk + 1.4Wk 118.1 128.4 139.8 150.1 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 181.3 197.7 215.1 231.5
My v of col
My < of col
My > of col
E-W STEEL BOTTOM TOP N-S STEEL BOTTOM TOP
16 10 16 10
M = 328.6 0.0 M = 313.9 0.0 K' = 0.1558
b = 2000 2000 b = 2000 2000 min As = 0.13%
d = 367.0 395.0 d = 351.0 385.0
K = 0.0349 0.0000 K = 0.0364 0.0000
z = 348.7 375.3 z = 333.5 365.8
As = 2168 0 As = 2165 0
Provide 2168 0 Provide 2165 0
No = 11 11 No = 11 11
As prov = 2212 864 As prov = 2212 864
fs = 327 11 H10 T1 fs = 326 11 H10 T2
Clear S = 170.8 Clear S = 170.8
11 H16 B1 11 H16 B2
BEAM SHEAR Critical section is 112.5 mm from pile centres
EW (NS plane) 8 links
V = 505.5 v = 0.6887 As% = 0.301 .
av = 537.5 vc 2d/av = 0.6614 (v - vc)b = 800.0
No of legs = 11 Spacing = 300 11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS
NS (EW plane)
V = 523.2 v = 0.7453 As% = 0.315 .
av = 537.5 vc 2d/av = 0.6420 (v - vc)b = 800.0
No of legs = 11 Spacing = 300 11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS
PUNCHING Column Face At Fig 3.23 critical section
V = 916.2 = 4300 d ave = 359
v = 1.823 v = 0.594 av = 537.5
v max = 4.733 ok vc 2d/av = 0.655 ok
305.6 167.7 257.7
313.9 174.0 268.0
The Concrete Centre
4 Pile Cap
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
328.6 181.1 279.0
271.5 147.9 227.5
Note: 5CAP! AND 6CAP! similar
155
156
Bar schedule ref : 202 01 Rev: -
Site ref : Date prepared :
Job no : P2000 Prepared by : Rod Checked by : -
A * B * C * D * E/R *
mm mm mm mm mm
01 H 16 4 9 36 2675 21 270 2175
02 H 10 4 6 24 2175 00
03 H 8 4 10 40 2075 51 270 695 115
04 H 8 4 20 80 500 31 115 50 270 115
3-Pile Caps 05 H 20 3 6 18 2300 21 255 1890
06 H 12 3 4 12 1875 00
07 H 8 3 8 24 1975 51 270 650 115
08 H 8 3 16 48 500 31 115 50 270 115
09 H 25 3 4 12 2125 21 270 1715
10 H 12 3 4 12 1700 00
11 H 8 3 7 21 1800 51 235 600 115
12 H 8 3 14 42 475 31 115 50 235 115
4-Pile Caps 13 H 16 5 11 55 2100 21 130 1890
14 H 10 5 11 55 1875 00
15 H 16 5 11 55 2100 21 130 1890
16 H 10 5 11 55 1875 00
17 H 8 5 77 385 525 31 115 50 290 115
5-Pile Caps 18 H 16 2 12 24 2625 21 130 2410
19 H 12 2 12 24 2400 00
21 H 16 2 12 24 2650 21 150 2410
22 H 10 2 12 24 2400 00
20 H 8 2 120 240 675 31 115 50 440 115
6-Pile Caps 23 H 16 1 14 14 2100 21 130 1890
24 H 12 1 14 14 1875 00
26 H 16 1 12 12 3425 21 145 3175
27 H 10 1 12 12 3175 00
28 H 10 1 84 84 750 31 120 60 490 120
This schedule complies with BS 8666. PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005
* Specified in multiples of 5mm. 2003-2005 Reinforced Concrete Council
Double
Pilecaps
Member Bar mark
Specified in multiples of 25mm.
No. of
bars
in
each
Total No.
Length of
each bar
mm
Shape
code
1,641 kg on this schedule
Type and
size
No.
of mbrs
The Concrete Centre
12-Apr-06
RCC82 Pilecap Design/ SCHEDULE!
157
N
O
T
E
S
C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e

g
r
a
d
e

C
3
5
.
C
o
v
e
r

7
5

m
m

b
o
t
t
o
m
.
C
o
v
e
r

5
0

m
m

t
o
p

&

s
i
d
e
s
.
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

F
1
3
)
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

C
1
0
)
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
1
2

H
1
0

2
2

T
1
1
2

H
1
6

2
1

B
1
1
4

H
1
6

2
3

B
2
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
R
e
f
e
r

t
o

G
A

d
r
a
w
i
n
g
s

f
o
r

o
r
i
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

d
i
m
e
n
s
i
o
n
s
.

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
4 P i l e C a p - 5 N o
T
h
i
s

d
r
a
w
i
n
g

i
s

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
a
t
i
c
.

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g

s
l
a
b
s

&

b
e
a
m
s

n
o
t

s
h
o
w
n
.
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
L
i
n
k
s

8

H
8

0
7

2
0
0

+

2
x
8

H
8

0
8

2
0
0
L
i
n
k
s

7

H
8

1
1

1
7
5

+

2
x
7

H
8

1
2

1
7
5
4

H
1
2

0
6

T
1

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

G
1
4
)
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

E
1
2
)
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

D
1
1
)
5 P i l e C a p - 2 N o 2 P i l e C a p - 4 N o
3 P i l e C a p - 3 N o6 P i l e C a p - 1 N o
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
L
i
n
k
s

1
0

H
8

0
3
.
2
2
5

+

2
x
1
0

H
8

0
4
.
2
2
5
9

H
1
6

0
1

B
L
i
n
k
s

1
1
x
7

H
8

1
7

3
0
0
4

H
1
2

1
0

T
2
4

H
2
5

0
9

B
2
1
1

H
1
0

1
4

T
1
1
1

H
1
6

1
3

B
1
1
1

L
i
n
k

L
e
g
s
1
1

H
1
6

1
5

B
2
6

H
2
0

0
5

B
1
6

H
1
0

0
2

T
C h e c k e d
D a t e
R e v i s i o n
P 2 0 0 0
1
4

L
i
n
k

L
e
g
s
J o b N o
T h e C o n c r e t e C e n t r e
M a d e b y
1
1

H
1
0

1
6

T
2
2 0 2
1 2 - A p r - 0 6R o d
--
D w g N o
B i g B u c k s P L C
S p r e a d s h e e t s t o B S 8 1 1 0
P r o j e c t
C l i e n t
L
i
n
k
s

1
4
x
6

H
1
0

2
5

3
5
0
1
2

L
i
n
k

L
e
g
s
1
2

H
1
6

1
8

B
2
1
2

H
1
6

2
6

B
1
1
4

H
1
2

2
4

T
2
L
i
n
k
s

1
2
x
1
0

H
8

2
0

2
5
0
1
2

H
1
2

1
9

T
2
1
2

H
1
0

2
7

T
1

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DRAWING!
158
RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls
Design is often undertaken using the moment and shear factors
taken from BS 8110: Part 1, Tables 3.5 and/ or 3.12. This series of
spreadsheets uses factors for moment and shear based on these
tables.

RCC91.xls designs simple one-way solid slabs to BS 8110. For
three or more spans they use moment and shear factors from
Table 3.12. The use of these factors is governed by Clause 3.7.2.7
(single load case and the conditions of Clause 3.5.2.3 are met
{bays > 30 m
2
, q
k
>/ 1.25 g
k
, q
k
>/ 5.0 kN/m
2
} and at least three
bays of approximately equal span (the corresponding factors for
beams also restrict use of the factors to where spans differ by
no more than 15% of the maximum span)). Where the relevant
conditions are not met, users are directed towards RCC31.
xls where continuous beam analysis overcomes many of these
caveats.
The design of single- and two-span slabs is also possible. The
factors used for two-span slabs should be considered subject to
the same conditions as for using the factors from Table 3.12 of
BS 8110.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself
it should prove adequate for the design of the simplest one-way
solid slab designs. A nominal 1 m wide strip of slab is considered.
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory. End
support condition determines the factors applied for bending.
Simple charts show the spans, loads and indicative bending
moments. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load
case that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending
moment envelope is inappropriate and the diagram is therefore
indicative only. The factors used are given in the table below.
The factors used are based on continuous end supports. The
two-span factors were derived by modelling the appropriate
number of spans with a single loadcase of 4 kN/m dead and 5
kN/m imposed and allowing any one span to be 15% less than
the input length (strictly according to BS 8110 this is applicable
to beams only).
The area of steel required, As, may be automatically increased
to reduce service stress, fs, and to increase modication factors
to satisfy deection criteria. The option in line 42 to have top
steel in spans inuences modication factors used in deection
calculations.
As most contractors prefer prefabricated reinforcement mats
might be considered.
To the right of the sheet are calculations. An approximate
reinforcement density is given.

Weight!
required in a slab. Simplied curtailment rules, as dened in
Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The gures
Table 3
Bending moment and shear
force coefcients
Coefcient End
supports
End
spans
First int
supports
Interior
spans
Interior
supports
Bending
Simple
support
1 Span
2 Span
3 Span etc
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.125
0.086
0.075
~
0.100
0.086
~
~
0.063
~
~
(0.063)
1 Span
2 Span
3 Span etc
0.040
0.040
0.040
0.105
0.066
0.075
~
0.100
0.086
~
~
0.063
~
~
(0.063)
Shear
1 Span
2 Span
3 Span etc
0.50
0.46
0.46
~
0.60
0.60
~
~
0.50
159
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. It excludes supporting
beams, trimming to holes etc. To the right of the sheet are
calculations of length, etc.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used in MAIN! It is not
purposes.

Notes!
RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls
160
RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 & EC2
Location 8rd Floor slab rmw 12-Apr-2006 116
1-WAY SOLID CONCRETE SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.12 Checked Revision Job No
chg - R68
LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid F STATUS
End support condition is C (C)ontinuous or (S)imple VALID DESIGN
DIMENSIONS MATERIALS
N of spans N 3 fy N/mm 500 s = 1.15 steel class A
Max Span m 7.200 fcu N/mm 35 c = 1.50
Thickness, h mm 200 Density kN/m 23.6
cover mm 20 (Normal weight concrete)
LOADING
Self Weight kN/m 4.72
Additional Dead kN/m 1.00
Total Dead, gk kN/m 5.72
Imposed Load, qk kN/m 2.50 A F A F
Design load, n = kN/m 12.01 Geometry and Loading Indicative Bending Moment Diagram
MAIN STEEL END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110
SUPPORTS (A & F) SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
Reference
Factor 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 0.000 Table 3.12
M kNm/m 24.9 46.7 53.5 39.2 0.0
d mm 175 172 174 172
K 0.023 0.045 0.051 0.038 M/bdfcu
z 166.3 162.9 163.6 163.4 Clause 3.4.4.4
As mm/m 344 659 753 552
Rebar H H H H
mm 10 16 12 16 12
@ mm c/c 225 150 150 200
As prov mm/m 349 1340 754 1005
= % 0.199 0.779 0.433 0.584
Max S 535 532 534 532 Clause
subclause (a) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7
DEFLECTION
fs N/mm 329 164 333 183 Eqn 8
Top steel provided % bd 0 0
Comp Mod factor 1.000 1.000 Table 3.11
Tens Mod factor 1.603 1.651 Eqn 7
Perm L/d 41.7 As auto-increased 43 As auto-increased Table 3.9
Actual L/d 41.8 by 100 % 41.8 by 70 %
DISTRIBUTION STEEL As = 0.13% = 260 mm/m Table 3.25
Provide H 10 at 300 = 262 mm/m
SHEAR END SUPPORT FIRST INT SUPT INTERNAL SUPTS
V kN/m 39.8 51.9 Table 3.12
As prov % 0.390 0.433
v N/mm 0.231 0.298 equation 3
vc N/mm 0.638 0.659 Table 3.8
OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS DISTRIBUTION
PROVIDE H10 @ 225 T1 H16 @ 150 B1 H12 @ 150 T1 H16 @ 200 B1 H10 @ 300
CHECKS BAR SINGLY BAR NO SHEAR GLOBAL
< COVER REINFORCED SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
OK OK OK OK OK VALID DESIGN
The Concrete Centre
-100
-50
0
50
100
160
161
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls
This spreadsheet designs simple single-, two-span and multiple-
span ribbed slabs to BS 8110: Part 1 using the moment and shear
factors in, or in the case of single and two spans, consistent with
Table 3.12 of BS 8110.
The use of factors from Table 3.12 is governed by Clause 3.7.2.7
as follows
A single load case is assumed
Conditions of 3.5.2.3 are met
bays > 30 m
2
,
k >/ 1.25gk,
k >/ 5.0 kN/m
2
and at least three bays are of
approximately equal span
The corresponding factors for beams also restrict use of the
factors to where spans differ by no more than 15% of the
maximum span.
The factors used for two-span slabs should be considered subject
to these same conditions. They were derived by modelling the
appropriate number of spans with a single load case of 4 kN/
m
2
dead and 5 kN/m2 imposed, and allowing any one span to
be 15% less than the input length (strictly according to BS 8110
this is applicable to beams only). The factors used are based on
continuous end supports.
Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed
towards RCC32.xls where continuous beam type analysis
overcomes many of these caveats.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself
it should prove adequate for the simplest ribbed slab designs.
The option to have top steel in spans or not has bearings on
whether shear links can be accommodated and on deection
calculations. The option to have links, minimal (or nominal) links
or no links is a matter of choice for the designer. Most contractors
prefer to prefabricate reinforcement for ribbed slabs on the
ground or off-site: this means at least nominal links and nominal
top steel are usually required.
Designed links are taken to be those provided where (v
c
+ 0.4)
< v < 0.8 f
cu 0.5;

Minimal links are taken to be those that are required to
provide shear resistance for v
c
< v < (v
c
+ 0.4)
Nominal links are those used if required for temporary
support only in areas where v < v
c
Under Bending, the Width of solid from CL in line 28 refers to
the distance between centre line of support and the rib/ solid
intersection. It determines where shear and, at internal supports,
hogging moment in ribs are checked. The user inputs preferred
diameters of reinforcement in the rib. At supports, these bars
usually need to be supplemented by intermediate bars to comply
with either spacing rules or with hogging moments in the solid
section of slab.
In spans, the area of steel required, As, may be automatically
increased to reduce service stress, f
s
, and to increase modication
factors to satisfy deection criteria.
An approximate reinforcement density is given. It excludes mesh,
supporting beams, trimming to holes etc.
Please note that the bending moment diagrams are indicative
only. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load case
that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending moment
envelope is inappropriate. The factors used are given in the table
below.
The factors used are based on continuous end supports. The two-
span factors were derived by modelling the appropriate number
of spans with a single load case of 4 kN/m dead and 5 kN/m
imposed and allowing any one span to be 15% less than the input
length (strictly according to BS 8110 this is applicable to beams
only).
Table 4
Bending moment and shear
force coefcients used in
RCC 92
Coefcient End
supports
End
spans
First int
supports
Interior
spans
Interior
supports
Bending 1 Span
2 Span
3 Span etc
0.040
0.040
0.040
0.105
0.066
0.075
~
0.100
0.086
~
~
0.063
~
~
(0.063)
Shear 1 Span
2 Span
3 Span etc
0.50
0.46
0.46
~
0.60
0.60
~
~
0.50
162
DETAILS!
DETAILS! gives two pages of detailed calculations and references
to BS 8110 justifying the output in MAIN! This sheet is intended
as an explanation for the less experienced engineers and may
prove useful for checking purposes.
Maximum spacing, s
max
, at supports is based on rib centres: usually
two large bars are required in the top of the rib for moment at
the rib/ solid intersection and one, two or even three smaller bars
(minimum T10) are required between to overcome spacing rules.
Concentrating reinforcement with larger bars in the top of the rib
raises the percentage steel in the rib at the rib/ solid interface,
thereby maximising vc and reducing shear requirements.
In terms of curtailment, 50% of reinforcement for maximum
sagging is taken as being A
s reqd
for bending, i.e. excluding any extra
for deection, etc. (Figure 3.25 refers to reinforcement for max.
moment.) Ribbed slabs are taken as being slabs so the 40%
rule is applied and 40% of A
s reqd
is assumed at end supports.
It is usually assumed that ribs become beams when they are
at centres > 1.5 m Tapered links are assumed. Where required for
shear resistance, links should be at maximum 0.75d centres.
WEIGHT!
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. To the right of the
sheet are calculations of length etc.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used in MAIN!

Notes!
163
Location 2nd Floor slab rmw 12-Apr-2006 119
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using table 3.12 coefficients Checked Revision Job No
prelim R68
LOCATION Support rts from grid A to grid F STATUS
VALID DESIGN
DIMENSIONS MATERIALS steel class A
N of spans N 5 rib width mm 150 fcu N/mm 35 c = 1.50
Max Span m 7.200 rib centres mm 750 fy N/mm 500 s = 1.15
depth o/a, h mm 300 Side slope 1 in 10 fyv N/mm 500 Density kN/m 24.0
topping depth, hf mm 100 h agg mm 20 (Normal weight concrete)
Top steel in spans ? Y Top cover (to links) mm 35
Min No of bars per rib 2 B/S cover (to links) mm 25
Use Links? Y (Y)es, (N)o or (M)inimal
LOADING
Self Wt kN/m 4.00
+ Dead kN/m 1.50
Imposed qk kN/m 5.00 A F A F
Design load, n = kN/m 15.70 Geometry and Loading Indicative Bending Moment Diagram
BENDING END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS8110
SUPPORTS (A & F) SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
Width solid from CL 150 --- 500 --- 500
M kNm/m 32.6 61.1 70.0 51.3 51.3 Table 3.12
d mm 254 259 249 259 249
As mm 233 428 511 360 374 Fig 3.3
As' mm 0 0 0 0 0 Fig 3.3
DEFLECTION
L/d Max 37.869 44.162 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 27.799 OK 27.799 OK 3.4.5.1
As auto increased by 28.1% As auto increased by 23.4%
TENSION REINFORCEMENT
mm 10 20 20 20 20
No 3 Top+3H10 2 Btm 2 Top+2H10 2 Btm 2 Top+2H10
As prov mm 471 628 785 628 785
= % 0.247 1.427 0.421 1.427 0.421
COMPRESSION ZONE REINFORCEMENT
20 8 12 8 10 mm
No 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm
As' prov mm 628 101 226 101 157
= % 1.455 0.228 0.534 0.228 0.371
RIB SHEAR OUTER SUPT FIRST INT SUPT INT SUPT
V kN/rib 37.2 45.0 36.5 Table 3.12
v N/mm 0.863 1.063 0.863 Eqn 3
vc N/mm 0.897 0.908 0.908 NOMINAL Table 3.8
Link 6 6 6 6
@ mm 175 175 175 175
REACTIONS
Dead kN/m 18.23 43.59 39.63 solid weight included
Imposed kN/m 16.56 39.60 36.00
Ultimate kN/m 52.01 124.38 113.08 Table 3.12
OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL
PROVIDE SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
MAIN STEEL 3H10 /rib 2H8 T 2H20 /rib 2H8 T 2H20 /rib
+ 3H10 T + 2H10 T + 2H10 T
Nominal B 2H20 B Nominal B 2H20 B Nominal B
LINKS 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175
from edge of solid for 875 for 175
CHECKS BAR SINGLE BAR SHEAR GLOBAL
& COVER LAYERS SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
chg
The Concrete Centre
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!
163
164
Project
Location 2nd Floor slab from grids A to F rmw 12-Apr-2006 120
Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg prelim R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS
ave bw mm 170.0 self wt kN/m 3.49
rib area m 0.1090 E/O solid kN/m 0.52
Total SW kN/m 4.00
Gk = 39.63 Qk = 36.00 F = 113.08 N = 15.705 kN/m width
MAIN STEEL END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
Factor 0.04 0.075 0.086 0.063 0.063 Table 3.12
M/m kNm/m 32.6 61.1 70.0 51.3 51.3 - = -
M/rib kNm 24.42 45.80 52.51 38.47 38.47 - = -
d mm 254 259 249 259 249
bf mm 750 750 750 750 750
K' 0.1320 0.1558 0.1320 0.1558 0.1320 3.4.4.4
Web MOR kNm 50.7 62.2 48.7 62.2 48.7 Fig 3.3
Flange MOR kNm 223.5 245.1 214.8 245.1 214.8 - = -
K 0.0144 0.0260 0.0323 0.0218 0.0236 3.4.4.4
z mm 241.3 246.1 236.6 246.1 236.6 - = -
x mm 28.2 28.8 27.7 28.8 27.7 - = -
d' mm 41.0 45.0 37.0 45.0 36.0
net fsc N/mm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm 0 0 0 0 0
max fst N/mm 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 Fig 3.3
fst deflection N/mm --- 308.8 --- 341.5 ---
As req mm 233 428 511 360 374
bw/b --- 0.2267 --- 0.2267 ---
Min % 0.13% 0.18% 0.13% 0.18% 0.13% Table 3.25
Min As mm 293 92 293 92 293
At EDGE of SOLID
M/m kNm/m 24.9 residual steel 38.1 residual steel 25.0 Table 3.13
M/rib kNm 18.7 0.26% 28.5 0.26% min % 0.26% 18.7 - = -
bf mm 150 57 150 0 As resid 0 150
K 0.0552 10 0.0877 10 extra 10 0.0576
z mm 237.3 3 221.8 2 No 2 231.9
x mm 37.1 236 60.5 157 As prov 157 38.0
net fsc N/mm 0.0 256.5 36.9 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm 0 0 0
fst N/mm 434.8 434.8 434.8
As req mm 181 296 186
TENSION STEEL
Required mm 181 428 296 360 186
in rib ok 10 ok 20 ok 20 ok 20 ok 20
No 3 2 2 2 2
As prov mm 236 628 628 628 628
Clear dist mm 54.4 54.2 97.8 54.2 97.8 between bars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
Max S ok 183.3 ok 207.0 ok 299.3 ok 246.4 ok 300.0 3.12.11.2.4
COMPRESSION STEEL
Required 171 0 128 0 108 Table 3.25
ok 20 ok 8 ok 12 ok 8 ok 10
No 2 2 2 2 2
As' prov mm 628 101 226 101 157
= % ok 1.455 ok 0.228 ok 0.534 ok 0.228 ok 0.371
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
The Concrete Centre
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ DETAILS!
164
165
Project
Location 2nd Floor slab from grids A to F rmw 12-Apr-2006 121
Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD 2006 TCC chg prelim R68
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110
DEFLECTION SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
Reference
fs N/mm 256.5 227.1 157.1 190.8 98.6 Eqn 8
Base ratio 20.80 20.80 3.4.6.3/4
Tens Mod 1.700 1.983 Table 3.10
Comp Mod 1.071 1.071 Table 3.11
Perm L/d 37.869 44.162 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 27.799 ok 27.799 ok 3.4.5.1
As req increased by 28.1% 23.4%
RIB SHEAR
END FIRST INT INTERNAL
SUPPORTS SUPPORTS SUPPORTS
Factor 0.46 0.6 0.5 Table 3.12
V max kN/m 52.01 67.85 56.54 - = -
V rib kN/m 37.24 44.99 36.51
v N/mm 0.8625 1.0630 0.8626 Eqn 3
vc N/mm 0.8975 0.9080 0.9080 NOMINAL Table 3.8
(v-vc)bv N/mm 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 Table 3.7
Link ok 6 ok 6 ok 6 ok 6 3.12.7.1
@ mm 191 187 187 194 Spacing
adjust to mm 175 175 175 175 Spacing
for mm 0 795 75 --- from solid
adjust to mm 0 875 175 --- from solid
As Dist ok 64.4 ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 OK 3.4.5.5
As' Dist ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 OK 3.12.7.2
The Concrete Centre
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ DETAILS!
165
166
RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls
This spreadsheet designs simple rectangular at slabs to BS 8110:
Part 1 using moment and shear factors from Table 3.12. The use of
these factors is also governed by Clause 3.7.2.7 as shown below.
A single load case is assumed
The conditions of 3.5.2.3 are met
bays > 30m
2
,
q
k
>/ 1.25gk,
q
k
>/ 5.0 kN/m
2
and at least three bays of approximately
equal span
The corresponding factors for beams also restrict use of the
factors to where spans differ by no more than 15% of the
maximum span.
towards RCC33.xls where sub-frame analysis overcomes many
of the caveats made in the code restricting the use of bending
moment and shear factors from Table 3.12.
The spreadsheet does not currently allow for holes or drops. If
holes are considered critical then the user is directed towards
using RCC21.xls (sub-frame analysis) and allowing for holes
in breadths used. Note should also be made of Clause 3.7.5.,
Openings in panels. Punching shear can be checked using RCC13.
xls.
It does not cater for single or two-span cases.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself it
should prove adequate for the simplest at slab designs.
Most inputs should be self-explanatory. A location plan helps
with denition of dimensions. The number of spans is altered by
changing the number of grid line inputs: deleting the end grid
line name will decrease the number of spans. A combo-box is
used to switch between the continuous and simply supported
end support/ slab connection factors. Note the effect on column
transfer moments. Edge distance, C, is actually from centreline of
column to edge of slab.
Double penult means penultimate in both directions, i.e. internal
column of corner bay.
Please note that the bending moment diagrams are indicative
only. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load case
that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending moment
envelope is therefore inappropriate.

DETAILS!
DETAILS! gives detailed calculations and references to BS
8110 justifying the output in MAIN! This sheet is intended as
explanation for the less experienced engineers and may prove
useful for checking purposes.
Column transfer moments are limited to M
t max
see Clause 3.7.4.2
and equation 24 A basic deection ratio of 26 x 0.9 (see Clauses
3.4.6.1 and 3.7.8) is used in line 189 etc. Some engineers like to
use a lower basic deection ratio (rather than 26 in the code) to
offset any potential problems with deection of partitions and
especially of cladding.
Traditional shear links can be very time consuming on site, so in
order to minimise the number of links the centres are maximised
at 0.75d (see line 226 et seq). Additional bars may be necessary
to act as carriers to these links if top and bottom bars cannot be
arranged at the preferred spacings. Consideration should also be
given to using proprietary systems.

WEIGHT!
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. Additional link carrier
bars are not included.

Xdia! And Ydia!
In these sheets each bending moment is designed using a
different size bar (with different effective depths, d). The largest
bar (i.e. minimum number of bars) consistent with maximum
specied diameter and maximum spacing rules is identied and
used in DETAILS! Thus a least bars solution is given. The Xdia! and
Ydia! pages nd the maximum diameter that can be used while
complying with spacing rules. The sheet nds which of Clause
3.12.11.2.7 (a) or (b) applies. This has quite a dramatic effect
on rationality of the bars and spacings. A detailer can always
reduce bar diameters and/ or close-up spacing if he or she wishes
provided that overall areas of steel are at least maintained.

Notes!
167
RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!
Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 123
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No
- R68
STATUS
LOCATION NS Grids on lines 1 2 3 4 5
EW Grids on lines A B C D
COLUMNS Internal Edge Corner
DIMENSIONS X Y H mm 400 400 400
N of spans N 4 3 slab depth, h mm 250 B mm 400 250 250
Span, L m 7.500 7.500 Top cover mm 25
Edge dist, C mm 125 125 Btm cover mm 25 1 5
Edge supports are CONTINUOUS
MATERIALS D
fcu N/mm 37 h agg 20 mm
fy N/mm 500 m 1.15 steel
max bar mm 20 m 1.5 concrete
fyv N/mm 500 Density 23.6 kN/m
steel class A (Normal weight concrete)
LOADING
Self Wt kN/m 5.90 Perim Load 8.85 kN/m
+ Dead kN/m 1.50
Total Dead, gk kN/m 7.40 DEFLECTION CONTROL
Imposed qk kN/m 2.50 Min % top steel in col strips 0.13 % A
Design load, n kN/m 14.36 Same in top of middle strips? N
Indicative Bending Moments - X Direction(kNm per bay) Indicative Bending Moments - Y Direction (kNm per bay)
1 5 A D
MAIN STEEL INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS MIDDLE STRIPS PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS
X DIRECTION b REBAR b REBAR b REBAR
END SUPPORTS 0.575 7H20 @ 75 T1 6.925 12H16 @ 575 T1 0.413 4H20 @ 100 T1
END SPANS 3.750 13H20 @ 275 B1 3.750 11H20 @ 325 B1 2.000 14H20 @ 125 B1
PENULTIMATE SUPPORTS 3.750 13H20 @ 200 : 400 T1 3.750 7H16 @ 525 T1 2.000 10H20 @ 150 : 300 T1
INTERIOR SPANS 3.750 10H20 @ 375 B1 3.750 8H20 @ 450 B1 2.000 10H20 @ 200 B1
INTERIOR SUPPORTS 3.750 9H20 @ 300 : 600 T1 3.750 7H16 @ 525 T1 2.000 7H20 @ 200 : 400 T1
Y DIRECTION
END SUPPORTS 0.575 6H20 @ 75 T2 6.925 12H16 @ 575 T2 0.450 4H20 @ 100 T2
END SPANS 3.750 21H20 @ 175 B2 3.750 17H20 @ 200 B2 2.000 15H20 @ 125 B2
PENULTIMATE SUPPORTS 3.750 15H20 @ 175 : 350 T2 3.750 8H16 @ 450 T2 2.000 10H20 @ 200 : 400 T2
INTERIOR SPANS 3.750 15H20 @ 250 B2 3.750 12H20 @ 300 B2 2.000 11H20 @ 175 B2
SHEAR (ultimate) Grid Vt LINKS Link Zone
Ref kN Arrangement Width H x Breadth B
INTERNAL None CHECKS
PENULTIMATE None
PENULTIMATE 3B etc 888.5 H8 @ 150 EW 1788 1788 BAR > COVER OK
DOUBLE PENULTIMATE B2 etc 969.3 H10 @ 150 EW 1826 1826 SINGLY REINFORCED OK
SIDE INTERNAL A3 etc 478.0 H8 @ 150 EW 1670 885 BAR SPACING OK
SIDE INTERNAL None DEFLECTION OK
PENULTIMATE SIDE A2 etc 525.7 H10 @ 150 EW 1782 941 SHEAR LINKS OK
PENULTIMATE SIDE B1 etc 525.7 H8 @ 150 EW 1704 902
CORNER A1 etc 341.1 H8 @ 150 EW 997 922
GLOBAL STATUS
from C/L column
VALID DESIGN
The Concrete Centre
chg
VALID DESIGN
<-- X direction -->
<
-
-

Y

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

-
-
>
Legend
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
Lx C
C
Lx
L
y
L
y
L
y
Lx
3 or more
approximately equal spans
H
B
H
B H
B
167
168
RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!
Project
DETAILED CALCULATIONS BS 8110
Reference
GENERAL internal hc 0.451 m edge hc 0.357 m corner hc 0.357 m 3.7.1.4
Lx 7.500 m Ly 7.500 m Min As 325 mm/m 3.7.1.1
MAIN STEEL - X DIRECTION
END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
F 807.8 807.8 807.8
0.15Fhc 43.23 54.69 54.69
Total Mu kNm 147.5 454.4 466.3 381.7 327.0 3.7.2.7
INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS
b m 0.575 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 147.5 249.9 349.7 209.9 245.2 3.7.2.10
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.150 0.039 0.055 0.033 0.038 3.4.4.4
z mm 169.6 204.3 201.1 204.3 204.3 3.4.4.4
As mm 2001 2814 4001 2364 2761 3.4.4.4
As shear mm 365 1767 0
Def enhancement 1.405 1.282
As min mm 2001 3954 4001 3031 2761 table 3.25
mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 7 13 13 10 9
@ mm 75 275 200 375 300
& @ mm ~ ~ 400 ~ 600 3.7.3.1
As prov mm 2199 4084 4084 3142 2827
= mm/m 3825 1089 1089 838 754
= % 1.779 0.507 0.507 0.390 0.351
fs N/mm 303.3 229.7 408.1 250.8 406.9 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 401 226 645 327 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (b) (b) (b) (a) (b) 3.12.11.2.7
MIDDLE STRIPS
b m 6.925 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 36.9 204.5 116.6 171.7 81.7 3.7.2.10
d mm 217 215 217 215 217
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.003 0.032 0.018 0.027 0.013 3.4.4.4
z mm 206.2 204.3 206.2 204.3 206.2 3.4.4.4
As mm 411 2302 1301 1934 912 3.4.4.4
As min mm 2251 3235 1301 2480 1219 table 3.25
mm 16 20 16 20 16
No bars No 12 11 7 8 7
@ mm 575 325 525 450 525
As prov mm 2413 3456 1407 2513 1407
= mm/m 348 922 375 670 375
= % 0.161 0.429 0.173 0.312 0.173
fs N/mm 56.8 222.1 385.1 256.5 270.0 Eqn 8
Max S mm 651 645 651 645 651 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7
The Concrete Centre
168
169
Project
MAIN STEEL - X DIRECTION, continued
END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR BS 8110
PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS
F 510.3 510.3 510.3
0.15Fhc 27.31 27.31 27.31
Mu kNm 93.2 184.8 243.5 155.2 172.9 3.7.2.10
b m 0.413 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 figs 3.12&3.13
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.132 0.054 0.071 0.045 0.051 3.4.4.4
z mm 176.6 201.2 196.4 203.5 202.2 3.4.4.4
As mm 1214 2112 2852 1754 1967 3.4.4.4
As shear mm 336 2290 1448
As min mm 1214 4132 2852 2914 1967 table 3.25
mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 4 14 10 10 7
@ mm 100 125 150 200 200
& @ mm ~ ~ 300 ~ 400 3.7.3.1
As prov mm 1257 4398 3142 3142 2199
= mm/m 3046 2199 1571 1571 1100
= % 1.417 1.023 0.731 0.731 0.511
fs N/mm 322.0 160.1 378.3 186.1 372.7 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 285 169 343 245 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7
MAIN STEEL - Y DIRECTION
END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR
Total Mu kNm 121.3 454.4 466.3 381.7 327.0
INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS
b m 0.575 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 121.3 249.9 349.7 209.9 245.2 3.7.2.10
d mm 195 195 195 195 195
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.150 0.047 0.066 0.040 0.046 3.4.4.4
z mm 153.8 184.1 179.4 185.3 184.3 3.4.4.4
As mm 1815 3121 4484 2606 3060 3.4.4.4
As shear mm 380 1797 1130
As min mm 1815 6379 4484 4450 3060 table 3.25
mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 6 21 15 15 10
@ mm 75 175 175 250 275
& @ mm ~ ~ 350 ~ 550 3.7.3.1
As prov mm 1885 6597 4712 4712 3142
= mm/m 3278 1759 1257 1257 838
= % 1.681 0.902 0.644 0.644 0.430
fs N/mm 320.9 157.7 396.5 184.4 405.8 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 328 183 393 268 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7
The Concrete Centre
169
170
Project
MAIN STEEL - Y DIRECTION, continued
END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR BS 8110
MIDDLE STRIPS
b m 6.925 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 30.3 204.5 116.6 171.7 81.7 3.7.2.10
d mm 197 195 197 195 197
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.003 0.039 0.022 0.033 0.015 3.4.4.4
z mm 187.2 185.3 187.2 185.3 187.2 3.4.4.4
As mm 373 2539 1433 2132 1005 3.4.4.4
As min mm 2251 5188 1433 3641 1219 table 3.25
mm 16 20 16 20 16
No bars No 12 17 8 12 7
@ mm 575 200 450 300 525
As prov mm 2413 5341 1608 3770 1407
= mm/m 348 1424 429 1005 375
= % 0.177 0.730 0.218 0.516 0.191
fs N/mm 51.5 158.4 371.1 188.5 297.4 Eqn 8
Max S mm 591 403 591 585 591 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (a) (b) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7
PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS
F 510.3 510.3 510.3
0.15Fhc 27.31 27.31 27.31
Mu kNm 93.2 184.8 243.5 155.2 172.9 3.7.2.10
b m 0.450 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 figs 3.12&3.13
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.121 0.054 0.071 0.045 0.051 3.4.4.4
z mm 180.6 201.2 196.4 203.5 202.2 3.4.4.4
As mm 1187 2112 2852 1754 1967 3.4.4.4
As shear mm 359 1811 0
As min mm 1187 4584 2852 3159 1967 table 3.25
mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 4 15 10 11 7
@ mm 100 125 200 175 275
& @ mm ~ ~ 400 ~ 550 3.7.3.1
As prov mm 1257 4712 3142 3456 2199
= mm/m 2793 2356 1571 1728 1100
= % 1.299 1.096 0.731 0.804 0.511
fs N/mm 314.9 149.4 378.3 169.2 372.7 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 285 169 343 245 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7
The Concrete Centre
170
171
Project
DEFLECTION - X DIRECTION
PERIMETER INTERNAL PERIMETER INTERNAL BS 8110
END SPANS END SPANS INTERIOR SPANS INTERIOR SPANS Reference
As req mm 3264 5116 2721 4298
As prov mm 6126 7540 4398 5655
fs N/mm 177.6 226.2 206.2 253.3 Eqn 8
K ave 0.043 0.035 0.036 0.030
As' prov mm 670 1257 670 1257
100As'/bd % 0.080 0.078 0.080 0.078
Comp Mod 1.026 1.025 1.026 1.025 Eqn 9
Tens Mod 1.547 1.495 1.555 1.482 Eqn 7
Perm L/d 37.15 35.88 37.33 35.55 3.4.6.1+3.7.8
Actual L/d 34.88 34.88 34.88 34.88
As enhanced 95.6% 40.5% 66.2% 28.2%
DEFLECTION - Y DIRECTION
PERIMETER INTERNAL PERIMETER INTERNAL
END SPANS END SPANS INTERIOR SPANS INTERIOR SPANS
As req mm 3382 5660 2820 4739
As prov mm 7383 11938 5341 8482
fs N/mm 152.7 158.0 176.0 186.2 Eqn 8
K ave 0.047 0.043 0.039 0.036
As' prov mm 670 1257 670 1257
100As'/bd % 0.080 0.086 0.080 0.086
Comp Mod 1.026 1.028 1.026 1.028 Eqn 9
Tens Mod 1.579 1.616 1.618 1.633 Eqn 7
Perm L/d 37.92 38.87 38.84 39.27 3.4.6.1+3.7.8
Actual L/d 34.88 38.46 34.88 38.46
As enhanced 117.0% 104.4% 80.1% 70.8%
PUNCHING SHEAR DOUBLE SIDE SIDE
INTERNAL PENULT PENULT INTERNAL INTERNAL
None None3B etc B2 etc A3 etc None
Vt kN 0.0 888.5 969.3 478.0 0.0
Veff/Vt kN 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.40 1.40 table 3.13
ave d mm 205.0 205.0 205.0 205.0 215.0 3.7.6.3
ave As % 0.390 0.468 0.575 1.096 1.145
at 1.5d from column face
H mm 1015 1015 1015 633 648
B mm 1015 1015 1015 865 895 3.7.7.6
u 0 mm 1600 1600 1600 900 900 3.7.7.6
v max N/mm 0.000 3.107 3.390 3.616 0.000 Eqn 27
V kN 0.0 1004.8 1097.7 643.1 0.0
u mm 4060 4060 4060 2130 2190 3.7.7.6
v N/mm 0.000 1.207 1.319 1.473 0.000
vc N/mm 0.622 0.661 0.708 0.878 0.880 Eqn 28
Links ? No Yes Yes Yes No table 3.9
Links at 0.5d & 1.25d
Sv mm EW 0 150 150 150 0 3.7.7.6
Asv req mm 0 1762 2059 770 0 3.7.7.5
Total u mm 0 6070 6070 3235 0
mm 0 8 10 8 0
Number 0 41 41 22 0
Asv prov mm 0 2061 3220 1106 0
solve for H&B crit ( v = vc ) 3.7.7.6
H crit mm 0 1788 1825 1670 0
B crit mm 0 1788 1825 885 0
Additional 0.75d perimeters 0 2 2 1 0
The Concrete Centre
171
172
Project
PUNCHING SHEAR, continued SIDE SIDE BS 8110
CORNER PENULT PENULT Reference
A1 etc A2 etc B1 etc
Vt kN 341.1 525.7 525.7
Veff/Vt kN 1.25 1.40 1.40 table 3.13
ave d mm 215.0 205.0 215.0 3.7.6.3
ave As % 1.358 1.206 1.255
at 1.5d from column
H mm 648 633 648
B mm 573 865 895 3.7.7.6
u 0 mm 575 900 900 3.7.7.6
v max N/mm 3.435 3.979 3.793
V kN 400.8 710.0 708.9
u mm 1220 2130 2190 3.7.7.6
v N/mm 1.528 1.626 1.506
vc N/mm 0.931 0.906 0.907 Eqn 28
Links ? Yes Yes Yes table 3.9
Links at 0.5d & 1.25d
Sv mm EW 150 150 150 3.7.7.6
Asv req mm 417 1166 794 3.7.7.5
Total u mm 1902.5 3235 3305
mm 8 10 8
Number 13 22 23
Asv prov mm 653 1728 1156
solve for H&B crit ( v = vc ) 3.7.7.6
H crit mm 996 1782 1704
B crit mm 921 941 902
Additional 0.75d perimeters 2 2 1
The Concrete Centre
172
173
RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls
This spreadsheet designs restrained two-way solid slabs in
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1 using moment and shear factors
from equations 14 to 20 (i.e. Tables 3.14 and 3.15). Input is
required on the rst two sheets.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself it
should prove adequate for the design of restrained two-way slabs.
Self-weight, moment and shear factors are calculated
automatically. The use of the factors is also governed by Clause
3.5.3.5 (similar loads on adjacent spans, similar spans adjacent).
towards Clause 3.5.3.6 or alternative methods of analysis (e.g.
sub-frame analysis). Whilst ultimate reactions to beams are
given, shear per se is not checked as it is very rarely critical.
The dimension l
y
must be greater than l
x
: bays where l
x
> l
y

are invalid. It is recognised that B1 can be parallel to l
y
and
the user should specify in which layers the top and bottom
reinforcement are located (see D33 and H33). In line 32 the user
is asked to specify the diameter of reinforcement to be used.
This reinforcement should be provided at the required centres
in accordance with Clause 3.5.3.5 (1) to (7) (middle strips and
column strips, torsion reinforcement at corners where an edge
or edges is/ are discontinuous). The spreadsheet highlights
whether additional reinforcement for torsion is required or not.
As noted under Deection, the area of steel required, A
sreq
, may
be automatically increased in order to reduce service stress, f
s
,
and increase modication factors to satisfy deection criteria.
An approximate reinforcement density is given. This is
approximate only and excludes supporting beams, trimming to
holes, etc.

WEIGHT!
Clause 3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The gures
rationalisation, the effects of holes, etc, etc. To the right of the
sheet are calculations of length, etc.
Support widths are required as input as they affect curtailments
and lengths.

Notes!
RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls
174
RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!
174
175
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls
beams. It uses design ultimate bending moment and shear force
factors from Table 3.5 of BS 8110: Part 1. As such its use should be
limited, as dened by Clause 3.4.3, to where:
Q
k
> G
k
Substantially uniform loads over three or more spans
Variations in span < 15% l
max
.
The intention is to provide the design of a simple continuous
beam on one sheet of A4.

MAIN!
The input requirements are self-explanatory. Answering Y
to Support in alt layer will incur additional cover to top bars
at supports (of the same size as those being designed at that
location) to allow for beams in the other direction. Users should
ensure effective depths, d, are correct (see DETAIL!D15, etc.).
The choice between rectangular, L or T beam is made via a combo-
box to the right hand side. When considering span reinforcement,
the spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically increase
reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and enhance
allowable span to depth ratios. The diagrams for loading and
for bending moment are indicative only (the moment factors in
Table 3.5 do not give rise to a moment envelope).

DETAIL!
For rst time users and young engineers, further detail of the
calculations undertaken is given on the sheet named DETAIL!,
pages 2 and 3 of the print-out.

Weight!
in BS 8110. The estimate is repeated at the bottom of MAIN! at
O62. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the sheet. The
estimate may be printed out using File/print or the print button
on the normal toolbar.
It should be recognised that different engineers and detailers
interpretations of these clauses, different project circumstances
and requirements will all have a bearing on actual quantities of
reinforcement used.

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and is not
intended for formal printing.
Notes!

176
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ MAIN!
Location D&D: Edge beam Grid 1 from A to J rmw 12-Apr-2006 132
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 Checked Revision Job No
chg R68
LOCATION Supports: from grid A to grid J STATUS
VALID DESIGN
DIMENSIONS MATERIALS m = 1.50
N of spans N 5 Shape L BEAM fcu N/mm 40 m = 1.15
Max Span m 5.00 Top cover mm 40 fyl N/mm 500 steel class A
depth, h mm 350 Bottom cover mm 40 fyv N/mm 500 Density kN/m 23.6
bw mm 300 Side cover mm 40 h agg mm 20 (Normal weight concrete)
hf mm 175 Support steel in alt layer ? Y
bf mm 650
LOADING
Self Wt kN/m 1.2
+ Dead kN/m 10.9
Imposed qk kN/m 5.0 A J A J
Design load, n = kN/m 25.0 Geometry and Loading
BENDING END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS8110
SUPPORTS (A & J) SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
Reference
M kNm 0.0 56.2 68.7 43.7 50.0 Table 3.5
d mm 276 290 270 294 270
bf mm 300 650 300 650 300 3.4.1.5
As mm 0 470 648 360 457 3.4.4.4
As' mm 0 0 0 0 0 3.4.4.4
Deflection
L/d Max 36.46 37.98 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 17.24 OK 17.01 OK 3.4.6.1
Tension reinforcement
16 20 20 12 20
No 2 Top 2 Btm 3 Top 4 Btm 2 Top
As prov mm 402 628 942 452 628
= % 0.49 0.72 1.16 0.51 0.78
Compression reinforcement
16 12 12 12 12
No 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm
As' prov mm 402 226 226 226 226
= % 0.49 0.26 0.28 0.26 0.28
SHEAR OUTER SUPT FIRST INT SUPT INT SUPT NOMINAL
V kN/m 56.2 75.0 68.7 ~ Table 3.5
v N/mm 0.646 0.926 0.849 ~ Eqn 3
vc N/mm 0.570 0.858 0.749 ~ Table 3.8
Link mm 10 10 10 10
Legs No 2 2 2 2
@ mm 200 200 200 200
OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FIRST INT INTERNAL INTERNAL
2 H16 T 2 H12 T 3 H20 T 2 H12 T 2 H20 T
Nominal B 2 H20 B Nominal B 4 H12 B Nominal B
2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200
for 800 for 600 for 600
CHECKS BAR SINGLE BAR SHEAR GLOBAL
< COVER LAYERS SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
OK OK OK OK OK VALID DESIGN
Links
from CL of support
Indicative Bending Moment Diagram
The Concrete Centre
-
PROVIDE
Main reinforcement
-100
-50
0
50
100
176
177
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ DETAILS!
DETAILED CALCULATIONS Gk = 60.70 Qk = 25.00 F = 124.98 kN
MAIN STEEL
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110
Factor 0.00 0.09 0.11 0.07 0.08 Table 3.5
M kNm 0.0 56.2 68.7 43.7 50.0 - = -
d mm 276 290 270 294 270
bf mm 300 650 300 650 300 3.4.1.5
K' 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 Fig 3.3
Web Mres kNm 142.4 157.2 136.3 161.6 136.3 - = -
Flange Mres kNm --- 411.5 --- 419.7 --- - = -
K 0.0000 0.0257 0.0786 0.0195 0.0571 3.4.4.4
z mm 262.2 275.5 243.9 279.3 251.6 - = -
x mm 30.7 32.2 58.0 32.7 40.9 - = -
d' mm 78 56 76 56 68
net fsc N/mm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm 0 0 0 0 0
fst N/mm 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 Fig 3.3
As req mm 0 470 648 360 457
bw/b --- 0.4615 --- 0.4615 ---
Min % 0.20% 0.13% 0.20% 0.13% 0.20% Table 3.25
Min As 210 137 210 137 210
DEFLECTION
fs N/mm 0.0 249.1 229.3 265.4 242.4 Eqn 8
Base ratio 22.00 22.00 3.4.6.3/4
Tens Mod 1.535 1.600 Table 3.10
Comp Mod 1.080 1.079 Table 3.11
Perm L/d 36.455 37.982 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 17.241 ok 17.007 ok 3.4.6.1
TENSION STEEL
As mm 210 470 648 360 457
mm 16 ok 20 ok 20 ok 12 ok 20
No 2 2 3 4 2
As prov mm 402 628 942 452 628
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
Max S ok 300.0 ok 188.7 ok 205.0 ok 177.1 ok 193.9 Table 3.28
3.12.11.2.4
COMPRESSION STEEL
Required mm 314 188 188 188 136 Table 3.25
ok 16 ok 12 ok 12 ok 12 ok 12
No 2 2 2 2 2
As' prov mm 402 226 226 226 226
= % ok 0.486 ok 0.260 ok 0.279 ok 0.256 ok 0.279
The Concrete Centre
177
178
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ DETAILS!
Project
SHEAR
OUTER FIRST INT INTERNAL NOMINAL
SUPPORT SUPPORT SUPPORT
Factor 0.45 0.60 0.55 ~ Table 3.5
V kN 56.2 75.0 68.7 ~ - = -
v N/mm 0.646 0.926 0.849 ~ Eqn 3
vc N/mm 0.570 0.858 0.749 ~ Table 3.8
(v-vc)bv N/mm 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 Table 3.7
Link ok 10 ok 10 ok 10 ok 10 3.12.7.1
Legs ok 2 ok 2 ok 2 ok 2
@ mm 218 203 203 218 3.12.7.1
Adjust to mm 200 200 200 200
for mm 0 0 0 --- from cl of supt
Adjust to mm 800 600 600 ---
As Dist ok 0.0 ok 90.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 3.4.5.5
As' Dist ok 0.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 3.12.7.2
The Concrete Centre
178
179
Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2
180
181
General notes to Eurocode 2 versions
The Spreadsheets and Eurocode 2
The layout and workings of the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 are
in line with those to BS 8110 outlined in the previous section,
Spreadsheets to BS 8110. The Introduction and General notes
are common to the use of all spreadsheets in this publication.
Descriptions of the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 are given in the
following pages.
The spreadsheets are in accordance with Parts 1-1 and 1-2 of
Eurocode 2 and their respective UK National Annexes (NAs).
Parts 1-1 and 1-2 of Eurocode 2 (Eurocode 2: Design of concrete
structures, Part 1-1 General rules and rules for buildings, BS EN
1992-1-1 and Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part
1-2 General rules Structural re design BS EN 1992-1-2) were
published in December 2004.
Each Eurocode has a National Annex. These speciy the values
of Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs : factors relating to
safety and UK conditions, requirements for durability, etc. e.g.
values of cover,
m
,
cc
, k etc.) to be used within the Eurocodes in
each country. The values of the NPDs used are documented on
a separate sheet within each spreadsheet and allow for different
values to be used, for instance when the project is outside the UK.
The equivalents of these values are hidden away in BS 8110 and
indeed in the BS 8110 spreadsheets.
The UK National Annexes (NAs) that conrm or change Nationally
Determined Parameters within Eurocode 2 were published in
December 2005
Eurocode 2 will ultimately supersede all UK codes dealing with
the design of concrete structures. All conicting British Standards
are due to be withdrawn in 2010.
The spreadsheets have called for some interpretation of both
Eurocodes and their NAs.
Implementation of Eurocode 2
BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2 were published by BSI in
December 2004. Their National Annexes were published in
December 2005. BS EN 1992 is expected to be used generally
in conjunction with other Eurocodes (and their UK National
Annexes) for loading etc and other European Standards (ENs)
for materials and execution. During the early stages of the
implementation of BS EN 1992, all the related codes, standards
and their UK National Annexes may not be available in their nal
form. Nonetheless, as PD6687[31] points out, EN 1992 1 1
can still be used to design structures using:
BS EN 1990 Basis of structural design &. UK National Annex
BS EN 1991 series, Actions. Almost all UK National Annexes
should be available in 2006. It should be noted that EN 1992
1 1 was calibrated using the contemporary BS standards
for loading, which might therefore be used satisfactorily in
conjunction with EN 1992 1 1 pending the nal publication
of BS EN 1991 series of standards.
BS EN197, cement and EN 206, concrete and its BS derivative
BS8500. These standards have been in use for some time in
the UK.
BS EN10080 (steel for the reinforcement of concrete), BS
4449 (BS 4449: 2005, reinforcement), BS4482 (BS 4482:
2005, fabric), BS 4483 (BS 4483: 2005, fabric), and BS 8666
(BS 8666: 2005, scheduling). These standards were published
in late 2005 and came into effect on 1 January 2006.
One of the fundamental assumptions in EC2 is that the
requirements of ENV 13670 for execution and workmanship
are complied with. This raises a difculty in the UK, as EN 13670
(Execution of concrete structures) is some way off. However
for the UK, the provisions of the National Structural Concrete
Specication (NSCS) [ref 32] are considered equivalent to those
in ENV 13670 for tolerance class 1.
Other standards are in various states of readiness and in areas
not specically mentioned above, the designers might consider
using current UK practice or current British Standards but they
should satisfy themselves that they are compatible with BS EN
1992 and that the resulting reliability would be acceptable. For
instance the spreadsheets for pad foundations, TCC 81 uses
current UK practice for sizing (allowable under EN 1997) rather
than the full limit state approach.
In the UK, the process of converting from BS8110 to Eurocode
might be perceived as being a large barrier. As with any change,
there will be opportunities and threats. Eurocode 2 will be adopted
only where there is commercial advantage in doing so but from
calibration studies it would appear that there are signicant gains
to be made by adopting it in the design of building structures. The
authors are condent that in the long run Eurocode 2 will be seen
as being a very good standard allowing consistent safety across
materials and opportunity for greater economy and even greater
air in concrete design and construction.
Notes regarding Eurocode2

In his comparison of design requirements in Eurocode 2 and BS
8110, Narayanan
(24)
gave the following outline description of
Eurocode 2.
General layout
BS EN 1992-1-1(1) and BS EN 1992-1-2 are broadly comparable
to BS 8110: Parts 1 and 2. Eurocode 2 comprises principles
and rules of application. Principles are general statements,
182
denitions, other requirements, and analytical models for which
no alternative is permitted. The rules of application are generally
recognised rules that follow the principles and satisfy their
requirements. Eurocode 2 is generally laid out to give advice on
the basis of phenomena (e.g. bending, shear etc) rather than by
member types as in BS 8110 (e.g. beams, slabs, columns etc).
The Code does not provide derived formulae (e.g. for bending),
only the details of the stress block are expressed). This is the
traditional European approach.
The UK Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs) that are used
in the spreadsheets are taken from the relevant National Annex
(NA) and are shown in a separate sheet within the spreadsheets.
Units for stress are mega Pascals, MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm
2
)
Terminology employed will be generally familiar to UK engineers,
although there are some new words. Thus loads are referred
to as actions; bending moments and shear forces are called
internal forces and moments; superimposed loads are variable
actions; and self-weight and dead loads are referred to as
permanent actions.
Concrete strength
Concrete strength in Eurocode 2 refers to the cylinder strength
(f
ck
) and cube strength (f
cu
). This f
ck
/f
cu
notation is used throughout
Eurocode 2. However, design is based on characteristic cylinder
strengths not cube strengths and the spreadsheets refer to f
ck

only. The relationship between cylinder and cube strengths
is shown below in Table 5 along with approximate moduli of
elasticity from Eurocode 2.
Eurocode 2 and the spreadsheets permit much higher strengths of
concrete to be used than currently. The maximum characteristic
cylinder strength f
ck
permitted is 90N/mm
2
. Because the
characteristics of higher strength concrete are different, some
expressions in the Code are adjusted for classes above C50/60.
Supplies of these high strength concretes should be assured
before using them in design.
The spreadsheets are unsuitable for the design of lightweight
concrete.
Reinforcement
Eurocode 2 is applicable for ribbed reinforcement with
characteristic yield strengths of 400 to 600 MPa. Plain bar and
mild steel reinforcement are, strictly, outside the Code. The
characteristic yield strength of reinforcing steel to BS 4449:2005
will be 500 MPa. According to the UK National Annex, the partial
factor for steel reinforcement is 1.15
Cover
Minimum concrete cover, c
min
, is related to bond strength,
durability and re resistance. In addition to the minimum cover
an allowance for deviations due to variations in execution
(construction) should be allowed for in design. Eurocode 2
recommends that, for concrete cast against formwork, this
allowance,- c
dev
, is taken as 10 mm, unless the construction is
subject to a quality assurance system in which case it could be
reduced to 5 mm or even 0 mm where non-conforming members
are rejected (e.g. in a precast yard). c
min
+ c
dev
= nominal cover
It is recommended that the nominal cover is clearly stated on
the drawings.
Cover for durability is governed by BS 8500. Guidance on the use
of BS8500 is given in How to use BS8500 with BS 8110 - copy
available from www.concretecentre.com.
Fire resistance
Eurocode 2, Part 12: Structural re design
[13]
, gives guidance on
design for re resistance of concrete structures. Although much
of the Code is devoted to re engineering methods, the design
for re resistance may still be carried out by referring to tables
for minimum axis distances and dimensions for various elements.
The axis distance is measured from the surface to the centre of the
bar and is treated as a mean to be obtained during execution.
Axis distances and dimensions are given in section 5 of Part 12.
Further advice on using the tabular methods is given in How to
design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started
[34]
.
Property S t r e n g t h c l a s s
C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C35/40 C40/50 C45/50 C50/60
f
ck
(cylinder) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
f
ck
(cube) 25 30 37 40 50 50 60
E
cm
29 30.5 32 33.5 35 36 37
Based on the outline description of Eurocode 2 in Comparison of design requirements in Eurocode 2 and
BS 8110, Narayanan
( 24)
Table 5
Relationship between
cylinder and cube stregths
183
Load combinations
BS EN1990 allows the designer (of UK structures) to use either
Expression (6.10) or the less favourable of Exp (6.10a) or Exp (6.10b).
For members supporting one variable action the combination
1.25G
k
+ 1.5Q
k
may be used. This combination is derived from
Exp (6.10b) and can be used provided that the permanent actions
(G
k
) are not greater than 4.5 times the variable actions (Q
k
) and
the structure is not used for storage.
Less economically designers may choose to use 1.35 G
k
+ 1.5 Q
k

(derived from Exp (6.10)).
EN 1990 requires that actions should be checked using both
G.sup

(=1.25 or 1.35) and
G.inf
(= 1.0).
G.sup
(i.e. 1.25 or 1.35) will always
be the more onerous when designing for peak moments, but
greater hogging moments in spans often occur when
G.inf
is used.
For this reason, a macro is employed in a number of spreadsheets
to change
G
to its lower value (1.0), record the results, then set
it back to the higher value again. The larger value of the tensile
force in the reinforcement, F
td
, from both sets of results is then
used for the design of top steel in spans.
For the serviceability limit states of deection and cracking, the
quasi-permanent load case is used. Generally a quasi-permanent
load of G
k
+
2
Q
k
is used where
2
is a factor dependant on the
use of the structure (see BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 and UK National
Annex).
Load cases
For building structures, the UK NA to Eurocode 2, Part 11 allows
either of the following sets of load arrangements to be used:
1. Alternate or adjacent spans loaded
2. All or alternate spans loaded
The spreadsheets use the all-or-alternate-spans-loaded case by
default. Users may switch to 1, the alternate-or-adjacent-spans-
loaded by changing the setting in Notes!
Simplied arrangements for slabs
According to the UK NA, the load arrangements can be simplied
for slabs where only the all spans loaded needs to be checked (see
Figure 3), provided the following conditions are met:
a) In a one-way spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30
m
2
(a bay means a strip across the full width of a structure
bounded on the other sides by lines of support)
b) The ratio of the variable action (Q
k
) to the permanent action
(G
k
) does not exceed 1.25
c) The magnitude of the variable action excluding partitions
does not exceed 5 kN/m
2
.
Actions
The most notable difference between UK Standards and
Eurocode 1 is the bulk density of reinforced concrete, which has
been increased to 25 kN/m
3
.
Analysis
Eurocode 2 dictates that the type of analysis should be appropriate
to the problem being considered. The following are commonly
used: linear elastic analysis, linear elastic analysis with limited
redistribution and plastic analysis.
Linear analysis may be carried out assuming cross sections are
uncracked and remain plane (i.e. may be based on concrete gross
sections) and linear stress-strain relationships and the use of
mean values of elastic modulus. Linear analysis is the basis of the
analyses used in the spreadsheets.
In the rigorous spreadsheets the spans are checked at 1/20th
points to see whether the section theoretically cracks under load;
if so that section remains cracked and cracked section properties
are applied and used in the serviceability calculations. (Cracked
section properties are used only for the deection calculations
and not for the analysis as the process would become iterative,
non-linear and would take a long time to run.)
For ULS, the moments derived from elastic analysis may
be redistributed to a maximum of 30% where Class B or C
reinforcement is used or 20% if Class A reinforcement is used.
According to BS8666:2000 reinforcement called up as may be
500 grade Class A, B or C.

Section analysis Design assumptions
The simplied rectangular concrete stress block as shown in
Figure 3.5 of BS EN 1992-1-1 has been used throughout the
spreadsheets, in conjunction with option B (the horizontal line)
on the reinforcement stress/ strain curve (Figure 3.8 of BS EN
1992-1-1). In the case of columns and other members with
axial force, these strain distributions have been modied by the
imposition of the hinge point as shown in Figure 6.1. (of BS EN
1991-1-1).
The rectangular stress block option has been chosen because of
its relative simplicity, thereby making it more straightforward for
users to follow the logic used in calculations. The choice of stress
block normally makes little difference in the design of slabs and
beams, but in column design, slightly higher axial loads may be
resisted by employing the recto-parabolic stress block as shown
in Figure 3.3 and option (A) in Figure 3.8.
These options may be adopted for future versions of TCC12 and
TCC51 to TCC54.
Lever arm, z is restricted to a maximum of 0.95 x effective depth.
This limit is derived from BS 8110 and avoids dangers associated
with theoretically over-shallow neutral axis depths.
184
Analysis & design spreadsheets
Top steel checks in spans
Within the spreadsheets for continuous elements, it has been
assumed that at least 50% of support reinforcement in beams
and slabs will normally extend to a point 0.3L from the centrelines
of support. The other 50% is assumed to be curtailed at a point
0.2L from the centrelines of support. However, the element
is checked at 0.25L and 0.75L to determine the whether any
top steel is required to resist hogging moment. If so the larger
amount of top steel required is assumed to be necessary in the
span between these two points.
The adoption of a shear truss model in Eurocode 2 causes the
force in tension reinforcement to be increased above M
Ed
/z. This
can be accommodated by using the shift rule to curtail bars at
a distance al from where they are no longer required to resist
bending moment. The spreadsheets take a slightly different
approach by actually `calculating tensile force to be resisted, F
td
,
at 0.25L and 0.75L, where
F
td
= M
Ed
/Z + F
td

where
F
td
= 0.5V
Ed
( cot cot )
where
= the angle of the compression strut
cot = 0 for vertical reinforcement
The spreadsheets determine the values of M
ED
and V
Ed
at 1/20th
points for all load combinations, then select those producing the
highest value of F
td
. If either M
Ed
or V
Ed
is reversed for a particular
combination, the additional tensile force is taken by bottom
reinforcement, so the value of F
td
is set to zero.
Shear
The variable strut inclination method is used in Eurocode 2 for
the assessment of the shear capacity of a section. The assumed
angle of the concrete compression strut can be altered to give
the most economic design. In most cases the angle of the strut
may be assumed to be 21.8 (ie where cot = 2.5). Angles above
21.8 may prove to be economic where shear loads are high.
Further advice can be found in the guide How to design concrete
structures using Eurocode 2: Beams
[12]
in the How to series.
Applied shear force (V
Ed
) is compared with three values for the
resistance (V
Rd
):-
V
Rdc
= shear capacity of the concrete alone;
V
Rd.max
= shear resistance determined by the capacity of the
notional concrete struts
V
Rds
= capacity of a section with shear reinforcement.
The formula for V
Rds
can be rewritten to give the area of shear
reinforcement required per unit length. A
sw/s

With respect to punching shear, checks are carried at 2d from the
face of the column and for a rectangular column, the perimeter is
rounded at the corners. The formulae are slightly different than
those for beam shear. For instance where shear reinforcement is
required, the contribution of the concrete resistance in punching
shear is recognised (compared to beam shear where it is not).
cc
and shear
cc is a coefcient applied to the compression block that takes
into account long-term effects on the compressive strength
and unfavourable effects resulting from the way in which load
is applied. According to EN 1992-1-1,
cc
= 1.0. However, the UK
National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 makes
cc
= 0.85 for exure
and axial load and 1.0 for other phenomena. Generally, the
spreadsheets adopt
cc
= 1.0 for shear.
Deformation
Generally, serviceability checks for deformation may be carried
out using deemed to satisfy span to effective depth rules that
are similar to those in BS 8110. However, if a more detailed
check is required, Eurocode 2 gives guidance which varies from
the rules in BS 8110 Part 2.
More rigorous approaches may be used if required and are
covered in the R (for Rigorous) series of spreadsheets. The
methods employed are described in more detail in Deections in
concrete slabs and beam
[30]
.
Detailing
The rules for determining the anchorage and lap lengths are more
complex than the simple tables in BS 8110. Eurocode 2 considers
the effects of, amongst other things, the position of bars during
concreting, the shape of the bar and cover. Designers and detailers
are directed to more specialised references for further guidance
eg IStructE/Con Soc Detailing Manual
[28 ]
.

185
TCC11 Element Design.xls
TCC11.xls includes sheets for designing
Solid slabs
Rectangular beams and
T beams (and ribbed slabs) for bending
Beam shear
Columns with axial load and bending about one axis.
TCC11.xls designs elements to Eurocode 2: Part 1: 1992
(3)
. It is
assumed that loads, moments, shears, etc, are available for input
from hand calculations or from analysis from elsewhere. Span-
to-depth ratios and other NDP values are taken from the UK
National Annex (part of reference 3).
SLAB!
This sheet designs a section of solid slab in a single simply
supported span, in a continuous end or internal span, at supports
or as a cantilever. Workings and references to clause numbers are
given to the right hand side of the sheet.
Input should be self-explanatory. Terminology may differ from
the BS 8110 version: for instance the term is the redistribution
factor (i.e. 1 redistribution percentage/100). Concrete cylinder
strength, f
ck
, is changed using the combo-box to the right hand
side.
In spans, the location of the section being designed has a bearing
on deection limitations, and the appropriate location should
be chosen from the combo-box to the right hand side. Similarly,
the user should choose from the list of usage (dwelling, ofce/
store, parking etc.), which governs the proportion of imposed
load affecting long-term deection. Eurocode 2 requires the
input of the relationship between dead and imposed loading.
This is done at cells G9 and G10. When appropriate the sheet
will automatically increase amounts of reinforcement in order
to lower service stresses and enhance allowable span-to-depth
ratios.
The cover specied at D12 should be the normal cover including
the allowance in design for deviation
cdev
. This allowance is
spccied in cell D13 and is used in the checking of allowable
maximum bar size.
RECT~BEAM!
This sheet designs a rectangular beam in a single simply
supported span, in a continuous end or internal span, at supports
or as a cantilever. These choices have a bearing on deection
limitations and the user should choose the appropriate location
from the combo-box to the right hand side. The user should
similarly choose from the list of usage (dwelling, ofce/ store,
parking, etc.), which governs the proportion of imposed load
affecting long-term deection. This sheet will, where necessary,
automatically increase reinforcement in order to lower service
stresses and enhance allowable span to depth ratios. Again, input
of the relationship between dead and imposed loading is required
in cells D12 and D13.

2
is the quasi-permanent load factor applied to imposed loads
in calculations of deection. The factors are 0.2 for dwellings, 0.3
for ofces, 0.6 for parking areas and 0.0 for snow and wind.
TEE~BEAM!
TEE~BEAM! designs T beams and L beams in single simply-
supported span, end span, internal span or cantilever locations.
Again, these choices have a bearing on deection limitations
and the user should choose the appropriate location from the
combo-box to the right hand side.
With respect to the effective width of the ange, the user may
also choose that the section is considered as a tee- or an inverted
L beam. Again usage and whether brittle partitions are present
must also be selected.
A default value for the width of the ange b
f
must be input. Tips
for values of b
f
,max are given in cells J18 and:J19.
In the determination of compression steel, where the neutral axis
lies below ange, the concrete in web, b
w
, below the ange has
been ignored.
In order to calculate the appropriate deection factor for
compression reinforcement, there is a facility to specify the
diameter of compression reinforcement. When considering
deection, the spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically
increase span reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and
enhance allowable span-to-depth ratios.
SHEAR!
This sheet designs beams for shear. Input is (we hope) self-
explanatory. Providing the applied load is fundamentally a UDL, or
where the principal load is located further than 2d from the face
of the support, Eurocode 2 allows shear to be checked at d from
the face of support (as does BS 8110).The value of shear force,
V
Ed
, input at G11 can, provided there is diagonal compression
and continuity of tension reinforcement for at least 2.5 d from
the face of support, be evaluated at d from the face of support
(see Clause 6.2.2(6)). Cell H11, requires the relevant ultimate
uniformly distributed load to be specied.
The sheet designs the links required at the section considered. If
the beam loading is considered to be uniformly distributed, the
ultimate UDL, n, can be entered to give the distance for which
this arrangement is required before reverting to nominal link
arrangement.
186
COLUMN!
This spreadsheet designs symmetrically reinforced rectangular
columns bent about one axis where both axial load, N
Ed
, and
maximum design moment, M
Ed
, are known. It is based on
Eurocode 2 Figure 6.1 and 3.5. The spreadsheet iterates x/h to
determine where the neutral axis lies. Assuming a value of x
allows strains and therefore stresses to be determined using the
principles shown in Figure 6.1. From these stresses the area of
steel required for the design moment M
Ed
and design axial load
can be determined seperately. The neutral axis depth x is adjusted
until the areas of steel considering M
Ed
and N
Ed
match. The sheet
includes stress and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the
nal design. Workings and references are shown to the right hand
side of the sheet.
Please note that for stocky columns i.e. when
lim
M
Ed
= M
02
= M + e
i
N
Ed
where
M = numerically higher moment from rst order analysis
e
i
= l
o
/400 (h/30) 20mm for columns in braced
systems
N
Ed
= design axial action at ULS.
When >l
lim
, i.e when slender, the design bending moment
in a column in a braced structure is:
M
Ed
= Maximum of {M
0Ed
+ M
2
; M
02
; M
01
+ 0.5 M
2
} (see gure)
where
M
0Ed
= equivalent rst order moment including the effect of
imperfections (at about mid height) and may be taken
as = M
0e
where
M
0e
= (0.6M
02
+ 0.4M
01
) 0.4 M
02
Note: M
01
and M
02
should have the same sign
if they give tension on the same side. Attention
should be paid to the sign of the bending moments.
M
2
= nominal second order moment in slender columns = N
Ed
e
2
where
N
Ed
= design axial action at ULS
e
2
= deection = (1/r)l
0
2
/10
where
1/r = curvature = K
r
K
(f
yd
/(E
s
0.45d))
where
K
r
= (n
u
n)/(n
u
n
bal
) 1.0
where
n
u
= 1 +
where
= mechanical reinforcement ratio =
(A
s
/A
c
)(f
yd
/f
cd
) as in 5.6.1 above
n = N
Ed
/A
c
f
cd
as dened in 5.6.1 above;
n
bal
= value of n corresponding to the
maximum moment of resistance and may be
taken as 0.4
Note: K
r
may be derived fom column charts.
K
= 1 +
ef

where
= 0.35 + (f
ck
/200) (/150)
where
= slenderness ratio l
0
/i
where
i = radius of gyration of the uncracked concrete
section = h/3.46 for rectangular sections,
where h is the depth in the direction under
consideration and i = d/4 for circular sections
where d is the diameter.

ef
= effective creep coefcient as dened in 5.6.1.
l
o
= effective length of column
In columns in an unbraced structures M
Ed
= M
02
+ M
2

and bottom of the section, it is assumed that a symmetrical
arrangement will be required for the side faces (see the argument
included within the commentary for the BS 8110 version).
COLUMN! assumes that the moment entered has already been
adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
For many side and all corner columns, there is no other choice
than to design for bi-axial bending, and the method given in
Clause 5.8.9 must be adhered to, i.e.,TCC53.xls or sheets 2 and 3
of TCC51.xls should be used.
Theoretical shortfalls in area of up to 2% are considerer to be
acceptable. In theory, negative amounts of reinforcement required
can be obtained but these are superseded by requirements for
minimum amounts of reinforcement in columns. No adjustment
M
02
First order
moments for
stocky
columns
M
02
M
01
M
02
0.5M
2
M M
01 2
+ 0.5
M N
2 Ed 2
= e
M M
0e 2
+ M M
0e 2
+
Additional
second order
moments
for slender
columns
Total
moment
diagram
for slender
columns
+ =
M
e N
i Ed
Moments in slender columns
187
is made in the area of concrete occupied by reinforcement.
Maximum link centres are given in Clause 9.5.2
[4]
. Column shear
should be checked separately, in the event that this is likely to
be critical.
INDIRECT!
This spreadsheet considers indirect supports, e.g. where one
beam is supported by another, to calculate additional legs of links
required in the supporting beam.
Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1990, BS EN 1992 -1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2 Designers should
ensure that these data are current when the spreadsheet is used.
When using TCC11 for permanent design, designers are
strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with any design
calculations.
Notes!
188
TCC11 Element Design/ SLAB!
189
Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)
RECTANGULAR BEAMS
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD 2003-2005 TCC
INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 1
Beam type END SPAN
M kNm 370.0 fck 30 N/mm c = 1.50
0.85 fyk 500 N/mm s = 1.15
span mm 8000 Steel class A
c,dev
10
h mm 500 REBAR COVER to main bars
b mm 300 Tension 32 42
gk kN/m 25.80 Comp'n 20 35
qk kN/m 20.00 Side -- 42
2 =
0.6 Shopping brittle partitions? YES
OUTPUT 1st Floor, Span 1 .
Effective depth, d = 500 - 42 - 32/2 = 442.0 mm
Neutral axis, x = [442-(442 -2E6x370x1.5/0.85/300/30)]/0.8 = 272.2 mm
(x/d) limit = 0.450 x/d actual = 0.616 > 0.450, x = 198.9 mm
Lever arm, z = 442 - 0.4 x 198.9 = 362.4 mm
d2 = 35 + 20/2 = 45 mm
Gross fsc = 434.8 N/mm from strain diagram
Net fsc = 434.8 - 0.85 x 30 /1.5 = 417.8 N/mm
Excess M = 370 - 294.1 = 75.9 kNm
Compession steel, As2 = 75.9E6 /417.8 /(442 - 45) = 457 mm
PROVIDE 2H20 COMPRESSION STEEL = 628 mm
Steel stress, fyd = 434.8 N/mm from strain diagram = 280 N/mm
Tension steel, As = 294.1E6/362.4/434.8 + 457.5 x 417.8/434.8 = 2306 mm
9.2.1.1 (1) As min = 1.3 x 300 x 500 = 200 mm
7.3.2 (1) As crack = 400 x 0.86 x 2.896 x 68.1/500 = 136 mm .
7.4.2 As def = 2341 mm
PROVIDE 3H32 TENSION STEEL = 2413 mm
DEFLECTION QP M =370 x 37.8 /64.8 = 253.8 kNm s = 280 N/mm
7.4.2 (2) Modification factor = 310 /280.0 = 1.107
Permissible L/d = 1.107 x 0.875 x 18.967 = 18.37
Actual L/d = 8000 /442 = 18.10 ok .
TCC11 Element Design/ RECT~BEAM
190
SIMPLE TEE & L BEAMS
INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 3 to 4
M kNm 275.0
Beam type END SPAN
1.00 fck 30 N/mm c = 1.50
span mm 9000 fyk 500 N/mm s = 1.15
h mm 500 teel class A
c,dev
10
bw mm 300 REBAR COVER
bf mm 840 Tension 25 35
hf mm 150 Comp'n 12 30
gk kN/m 25.80 Side -- 35
qk kN/m 20.00 2 = 0.6 Shopping
brittle partitions? YES
OUTPUT 1st Floor, Span 3 to 4
Effective depth, d = 500 - 35 - 25/2 = 452.5 mm
Neutral axis, x = [452.5-(452.5 -2E6x275x1.5/0.85/300/30)]/0.8 = 56.0 mm
(x/d) limit = 0.414 x/d actual = 0.124 ok
Lever arm, z = 452.5 - 0.4 x 56.0 = 430.1 > 0.95d = 429.9 mm
Tension steel, As = 275.0E6 /429.9 /434.8 = 1471 mm
9.1.1.1 (1) As min = 1.3 x 300 x 452.5 = 204 mm
7.3.2 (1) As crack = 400.0 x 0.86 x 2.896 x 87.6 /500 = 175 mm
for deflection, As def = 1893 mm
PROVIDE 4H25 TENSION STEEL = 1963 mm
.
Service stress, QP M =275 x 45.8 /64.83 = 160.3 kNm s = 202 N/mm
7.4.2 (2) Modification factor = 310 /201.7 = 1.537
Permissible L/d = 1.537 x 0.638 x 21.005 = 20.59
Actual L/d = 9000 /452.5 = 19.89 ok .
.
.
. s = 202 N/mm
.
.
. .
TCC11 Element Design/ TEE~BEAM!
191
BEAM SHEAR
INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 2 at 2E
fck N/mm 30 c = 1.50 d bw
fywk N/mm 500 s = 1.15 440 300
Main Steel Link Legs Side cover VEd n
25 10 2 30 258.0 64.8
No 2 mm No mm
kN at face
kN/m
OUTPUT 1st Floor, Span 2 at 2E
6.2.2 (1) A
sL
= 982 mm = 0.744% f
cd
= 20.0 N/mm
equation (6.6) = 0.6(1 - 30/250) = 0.528 . cot = 2.50
equation (6.9) V
Rd,max
= 1 x 300 x 396.0 x 0.528 x 20.0 /2.90 /1000 = 432.6 kN ok
6.2.1 (8) V
Ed
@ d = 258 - 64.8 x 0.44 = 229.5 kN
6.2.2 (1) k = 1 + (200 /440) = 1.674 .
equation (6.2) V
Rd,c
= 0.12 x 1.674 cube root(0.744 x 30) = 74.7 kN .
9.2.2 (5) A
sw
/s (min)= 0.08 x 300 /500 x 30 = 0.263 mm
equation (6.9) A
sw
/s (max)= 0.5 x 300 /500 x 1.15 x 0.528 x 20.0 = 3.643 mm ok
equation (6.7) A
sw
/s = 229.5E3 /(396.0 x 434.8 x 2.50) = 0.533 > 0.263
9.2.2 (6) s
max,L
= 330 mm s
max,T
= 330 mm 9.2.2 (8) ok
PROVIDE 2 legs T10 @ 275
Provide for distance of 825 mm from support face
then nominal links = 2 legs T10 @ 325
TCC11 Element Design/ SHEAR!
192
COLUMN DESIGN
INPUT Location Column 2E f
ck 35 N/mm
Axial load, N
Ed 2507 kN f
yk 500 N/mm
Moment, M
Ed 27.0 kNm Main bar 20 mm
height, h 300 mm Link 8 mm
breadth, b 325 mm
c
= 1.50 concrete
cover (to link )
25 mm
s
= 1.15 steel
CALCULATIONS
from M
ED
As = [M - fck.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)] / [(h/2-d2).(sc+st).c]
from N
Ed
A
s
= (N - f
ck
.b.d
c
) / [(
sc
-
st
).
c
] A
sc
= A
st
= A
s
d
c
= min(h, x)
d
2
= 43 mm f
ck
/
c
= 19.8 N/mm
d = 257 mm f
yk
/
s
= 434.8 N/mm
from iteration, neutral axis depth, x = 374.7 mm dc = 299.7 mm
f
cu
.b.d
c
/
c
= 1932.1 kN
Steel comp strain = 0.00258
Steel tens strain = -0.00092
sc
= 434.8 N/mm (Comp. stress in reinf.) 415 net
st
= -183.3 N/mm (Tensile stress in reinf.) -163 net
from M, As = 994 mm from N, As = 994 mm
OUTPUT
OK
Column 2E
Requires 994mm T&B:- PROVIDE 12T20
(ie 4T20 T&B - 1257mm T&B - 3.87% o/a, @80 c/c.)
Links : - PROVIDE T8 @ 300 see clause 9.5.2 (4)
19.8 N/mm
Notes
Stresses in N/mm
2
Compression +ve
- - - Neutral axis
SYMMETRICAL RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN
MOMENTS ABOUT X AXIS ONLY
Stress diagram
183
435
Strain diagram
0.00092
0.00258
0.00058
0.00292
TCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!
193
Indirect Supports
INPUT Location 1st Floor, Beam 7D-E
fywk
500 N/mm
s =
1.15
h1
300 mm
h2
450 mm
bw1 225 mm Link = 10
bw2
300 mm
VEd
127.0 kN from secondary
OUTPUT 1st Floor, Beam 7D-E
a = Min(300/2 + 300/3, 300/2) = 150 mm
d = Min(450/3 + 225/2, 450/2) = 225 mm
fyd = 500 /1.15 = 434.78 N/mm
Extra Asw = 1000 x 127 /434.78 = 292 mm
PROVIDE 4 additional T10 legs within 2a (and within d,if needed)
Asw,prov = 314 mm
TCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!
194
This spreadsheet gives an interaction chart for moment
against axial load for rectangular sections with asymmetrical
reinforcement arrangements. Primarily intended for beams
with axial load, it is also applicable to asymmetrically reinforced
columns.

MAIN!
Moments are considered to be about the x-x axis. All applied
loads and moments should be ultimate, with compressive axial
loads positive and with positive moments inducing tension in the
bottom reinforcement.
With asymmetrical arrangements of reinforcement the diagram
indicates that negative moments are theoretically possible. After
much consideration, the diagram is considered to be correct
but strictly is valid only for load cases where M is greater than
M
min
as shown on the graph. A reciprocal diagram is generated
automatically when top and bottom steels are reversed in the
input.

Calcs!
Calcs! shows the derivation of the chart where moment capacity
bal
, then in intervals from n.a. depth
for N = N
bal
uz
. This sheet shows workings
checking purposes.

REFS!
1992-1-1. Designers should ensure that these data are current
when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC12 for permanent
design, designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this
sheet with any design calculations.

Notes!

TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
195
TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2
Location Beam C1-2, Level 3 RMW 30-Jun-06 205
BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE to EN 1992-1 : 2003 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC12.xls v 3.0 on CD 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625
MATERIALS
fck 35 N/mm
s
1.15
fyk 500 N/mm
c
1.50
SECTION COVERS (to main steel)
h 450 mm TOP 35 mm
b 300 mm BOTTOM 35 mm
SIDES 35 mm
REINFORCEMENT
Bar No Area % Space
TOP 25 2 982 0.727 180.0 .
BOTTOM 32 3 2413 1.787 67.0 .
LOADCASES (ULS) CASE N
Ed
M
Ed CASE N
Ed
M
Ed
1 3100 -210 2 -600 180
3 1600 280 4 1200 -240
The Concrete Centre
M:N interaction chart for 450 x 300 section, Grade 35 concrete
3100
-600
1600
1200
0.1Acfck
Mmin
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
-500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT, M
Ed
xx kNm
A
X
I
A
L

C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
I
O
N
,

N
E
d

k
N
TCC12 Bending and Axial Force/ MAIN!
195
196
This spreadsheet designs punching shear links. Essentially it is
intended to be used with simple rectangular at slabs to BS EN
1992-1-1, i.e. with TCC33.xls. Equally it can be used to check wide
beams in, say, troughed slabs.
The spreadsheet is presented as four pairs of sheets dealing
with internal, edge, (external) corner and re-entrant corners. It
should be remembered that in slabs, traditional links are time-
consuming to x on site proprietary systems are generally
much quicker to x on site and this far outweighs rst cost. This
spreadsheet may be used for some proprietary systems as well as
for traditional links.

INTERNAL! (Similarly EDGE!,
CORNER and REENTRANT!)
These sheets constitute the input and main output. Input is
fairly self-evident but, as ever, care must be exercised in ensuring
correct values are used. The top diagram acts as a legend and the
chart at the bottom of the sheet shows the column, any holes
and link perimeters, and should act both as a check for input and
help explain output. The x-x axis is across the page.
To the right is a combo-box that allows either:
Input of both V
Ed
(design shear transferred to column) and
V
Ed
(design effective shear including allowance for moment
transfer) is required. These gures should be available from sub-
frame analysis e.g. output from TCC33.xls under Reactions. A
value of V
Ed
, computed from V
Ed
and the factor according
to location of the column (BS EN 1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3) is
suggested under Operating Instructions: in general this gure
may be regarded as a maximum: calculating effective shear
from moment transfer generally results in lower gures.

or
Input of V
t
alone. V
eff
defaults to the values given in BS EN
1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3

or
Input of V
Ed
alone. V
Ed
defaults to the values given in BS EN
1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3
The spreadsheet asks for the areas of steel in the two directions.
These should be averages in each direction, i.e., ensure that it
reects the actual reinforcement in the sides of the perimeter; an
average of column strips and middle strips may be appropriate.
Holes more than 6d from the column face are ignored as in BS EN
1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.2
(3)
. Multiple holes should be aggregated
pro-rata as if they were one hole at one location.
The shear at 2.0d and at the column face are shown under Results,
together with the perimeter (u
out
) at which shear reinforcement is
no longer required. The given solution then indicates the number
of link spurs required, with the number, spacing and diameter of
the links in each spur.
Detailed design calculations are shown to the right of each sheet
(off screen). These sheets derive three alternative radial link
congurations then check the validity of each before selecting
the optimum solution.
The amounts of reinforcement per perimeter may be converted
to a traditional arrangement of links.
Deductions for holes in the calculation of shear perimeters
are calculated by nding the angle dened by the extremities
of the hole. The projection of this angle is deducted from the
appropriate perimeter.

GEOMETRY!
This sheet shows the geometrical arrangements of link spurs
assumed in the design calculations, which should also be used
for detailing purposes.
Gra!
This sheet contains charting data

Refs!
This sheet contains values for nationally determined parameters
used in the spreadsheets.

Notes!
TCC13 Slab Punching.xls
197
TCC13 Slab Punching/ INTERNAL!
Project Spreadsheets to EC2
Location ECBP Typical Floor Column B3 rmw 30-Jun-2006 207
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625
MATERIALS fck
N/mm
2
35 STATUS LEGEND
fyk
N/mm
2
500
Steel class A .
B mm 400 F mm 50
G mm 150 H mm 150
LOADING V
Ed
kN 965.5 VEd = kN 1060.7
ult UDL
kN/m
2
16.10
mm
2
/m
1608 in B + 6d
dy mm 195 Asy
mm
2
/m
1608 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100
L
% 0.786
RESULTS V
Ed
= 1060.7 kN vRd,c = 0.7199
N/mm
2
Equation (6.47)
At hole face, vEd = 3.612
N/mm
2
At 2d perimeter, vED,red = 1.3793
N/mm
2
Uout required = 6542 mm Equation (6.54)
SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)
12 link spurs of 5H10 @ 135 84 links
plus 12 spurs of 2H10 @ 135
St = 175.7 mm Sr = 135 mm
Asw/Sr req = 6.949 (6.52) & (9.11)
Asw/Sr prov = 6.981 mm
First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 7389 mm > 6,542 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.
INTERNAL
VALID DESIGN
The Concrete Centre
197
198
TCC13 Slab Punching/ EDGE!
Location Column B2 rmw 30-Jun-2006 208
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 EDGE Checked Revision Job No
MATERIALS fck
N/mm
2
35 STATUS LEGEND
fyk
N/mm
2
500
Steel class A .
B mm 250 F mm -275
G mm 150
D mm 0 H mm 150
LOADING V
Ed kN 500.9 VEd = kN 627.7
ult UDL
kN/m
2
16.10
mm
2
/m
2010 in B + 3d+D
dy mm 195 Asy
mm
2
/m
1340 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100
L % 0.802
RESULTS V
Ed
= 627.7 kN vRd,c = 0.7248
N/mm
2
Equation (6.47)
At col. face, vEd = 4.069
N/mm
2
At 2d perimeter, vED,red = 1.9656
N/mm
2
.
St = 157.6 mm Sr = 110 mm
Asw/Sr req = 4.886 (6.52) & (9.11)
Uout = 3528 mm > 3,371 mm
SPUR
VALID DESIGN
The Concrete Centre
198
199
TCC13 Slab Punching/ CORNER!
Location Columns A1, D1, A5 & D5 rmw 30-Jun-2006 209
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 CORNER Checked Revision Job No
MATERIALS fck
N/mm
2
35 STATUS LEGEND
fyk
N/mm
2
500
Steel class A .
B mm 250 F mm -275
C mm 0 G mm 150
D mm 0 H mm 150
LOADING V
Ed kN 272.0 0 350
ult UDL
kN/m
2
16.10
mm
2
/m
2010 in B + 3d+D
dy mm 195 Asy
mm
2
/m
2010 in A + 3d+C
d mm 205 100
L % 0.982
RESULTS V
Ed
= 408.0 kN vRd,c = 0.7754
N/mm
2
Equation (6.47)
At hole face, vEd = 4.185
N/mm
2
At 2d perimeter, v = 2.5486
N/mm
2
.
St = 157.6 mm Sr = 130 mm
Asw/Sr req = 3.379 (6.52) & (9.11)
Uout = 1886 mm > 1,711 mm
SPUR
The Concrete Centre
VALID DESIGN
199
200
TCC13 Slab Punching/ REENTRANTS!
Location An example rmw 30-Jun-2006 210
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 RE-ENTRANT Revision Job No
Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD 2003-2006 TCCCOLUMN chg - FB625
MATERIALS fck
N/mm
2
35 STATUS LEGEND
fyk
N/mm
2
500
Steel class A .
B mm 400 F mm -50
C mm -100 G mm 100
D mm -100 H mm 100
LOADING V
Ed kN 478.0 VEd = kN 1065
ult UDL
kN/m
2
16.10
mm
2
/m
1340 in B + 6d
dy mm 195 Asy
mm
2
/m
1340 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100
L % 0.654
RESULTS V
Ed
= 1064.9 kN vRd,c = 0.6774
N/mm
2
Equation (6.47)
At col. face, vEd = 3.974
N/mm
2
At 2d perimeter, v = 1.7068
N/mm
2
SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (B)
.
St = 130 mm Sr = 115 mm
Asw/Sr req = 8.030 (6.52) & (9.11)
Uout = 4212 mm > 3,442 mm
SPUR
The Concrete Centre
VALID DESIGN
200
201
Crack Width!
In the design of reinforced concrete structures, it is assumed
that the tensile capacity of concrete does not contribute to the
strength of the structure, and steel reinforcement is provided
to resist the internal tensile forces that develop. Because steel
reinforcement can develop the resisting tensile force only by
extension (i.e. steel needs to extend to develop stress), and
hence cracks are formed in the surrounding concrete: cracks in
reinforced concrete structures cannot be avoided. In day-to-
day practical design, crack widths are controlled by limiting the
maximum spacing of the tension reinforcement. However there
are times when the engineer will need to carry out more rigorous
analysis and calculations, e.g. in the design of water-retaining
structures, and design for severe exposure where estimation/
prediction of crack width is important.
This spreadsheet calculates crack widths in accordance with BS
EN 1992-1-1, Section 7.3.
Recommended maximum crack widths for the various exposure
classes are given in Table 7.1N (BS) of the National Annex to BS
EN 1992-1-1. Essentially crack widths for reinforced concrete
members under quasi-permanent loading is restricted to 0.3mm.
For exposure conditions XO and XCI this limit may be relaxed
[to 0.4mm].
The calculations shown are in accordance with Section 7.3.4 of
BS EN 1992-1-1 and should be self-explanatory.
For bridges reference should be made to BS EN 1992-2 Section
7.3 and the appropriate National Annex.
For liquid retaining structures refer to BS EN 1992-3 Section 7
Notes!
This sheet contains disclaimers and revision history.

TCC14 Crack Width.xls
202
TCC14 Crack widths/ RECTANGULAR!
Location Grid line 1 rmw 30-Jun-06 212
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD 2002-2005 BCA for RCC RECTANGULAR chg - FB625
LEGEND
INPUT
f
ck
= 30
N/mm
2
Area of tension steel, A
s
= 565 mm
2
f
yk
= 500 N/mm
2
d = 129 mm
b = 1000 mm Area of compression steel, A
s2 = 314 mm
2
h = 160 mm d2 = 31 mm
QP moment, M = 24.9 KNm Maxmum tension bar spacing, S = 200 mm
Age at cracking = 14 days Max tension bar dia,
eq
= 12 mm
Cement type = N (S, N, R or RS) Short term or long term ? L (S or L)
Creep factor, = 2.0 Cover to A
s
, c = 25 mm
CALCULATIONS
modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(fck+8)/10]
0.3
E
cm
= 32.8 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel E
s
= 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio
e
= 18.27
' = 0.0024 = 0.0044
mean concrete strength at cracking f
cm,t
= 34.26 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength f
ct,eff
= 2.61 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bh/2+(
e
-1)(A
s
d+A
s2
d
2
)]/[bh+(
e
-1)(A
s
+A
s2
)] x
u
= 81.21 mm
uncracked 2
nd
moment of area
bh/12+bh(h/2-x)+(
e
-1)[A
s
(d-x)+A
s2
(x-d
2
)] I
u
= 378 mm
4
10
6
cracking moment = f
ct
I/(h-x) M
cr
= 12.51 kNm
< 24.9 kNm section is CRACKED
fully cracked x = d[-
e
(-') + {
e
(-')+2
e
(+'d
2
/d)}
] x
c
= 41.19 mm
concrete stress = M/[bx(d-x/3)/2+(
e
-1)A
s2
(x-d
2
)/x(d-d
2
)]
c
= 9.939 Mpa
stress in tension steel = ce(d-x)/x
s
= 387.2 Mpa
effective tension area = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2]b A
c,eff
= 39605 mm
2
A
s
/A
c,eff
p,eff
= 0.0143
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17/
p,eff
)] s
r,max
= 154.5 mm
average strain for crack width calculation
sm
-
cm
= 1474.6 strain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH
W
k
=
0.228 mm
The Concrete Centre
202
203
TCC14 Crack widths/ SPANTEE!
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 TEE IN Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD 2002-2005 BCA for RCC COMPRESSION chg - FB625
LEGEND
INPUT
f
ck
= 35
N/mm
2
s
= 1473
mm
2
f
yk
= 500
N/mm
2
d =
399.5 mm
b
w
= 300 mm Area of compression steel, A
s2
= 236
mm
2
h = 450 mm d
2
= 33 mm
b
f
= 2170 mm
Maxmum tension bar spacing, S =
87 mm
h
f
= 125 mm Max tension bar dia,
eq
= 25 mm
QP moment, M = 114.2 KNm Short term or long term ? L (S or L)
Age at cracking = 14 days Cover to A
s
, c = 38 mm
Cement type = N (S, N, R or RS)
Creep factor, = 2.0
CALCULATIONS
0.3
E
cm
= 34.1 Gpa
s
= 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio
e
= 17.61
cm,t
= 38.77 Mpa
ct,eff
= 2.89 Mpa
[b
w
h/2+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
/2+(
e
-1)(A
s
d+A
s2
d
2
)]/[b
w
h+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
+(
e
-1)(A
s
+A
s2
)] x
u
= 138.21 mm
uncracked 2
nd
moment of area
b
w
h/12+b
w
h(h/2-x)+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
/12+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
(x-h
f
/2)+(
e
-1)[A
s
(d-x)+A
s2
(x-d
2
)] I
u
= 6653
mm
4
10
6
cracking moment = f
ct
I/(h-x) M
cr
= 61.75 kNm
< 114.2 kNm section is CRACKED
fully cracked x (within flange) x
c
= 85.53 mm
concrete stress (x within flange)
c
= 3.234 Mpa
s
= 209.0 Mpa
effective tension area = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2]b
w
A
c,eff
= 36447 mm
2
A
s
/A
c,eff
p,eff
= 0.0404
p,eff
)] s
r,max
= 234.4 mm
sm
-
cm
= 800.1 strain
W
k
=
0.188 mm
The Concrete Centre
203
204
TCC14 Crack widths/ SUPPORTTEE!
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 TEE IN Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD 2002-2005 BCA for RCC TENSION chg - FB625
LEGEND
INPUT
f
ck
= 35
N/mm
2
s
= 1000
mm
2
f
yk
= 500
N/mm
2
d =
417 mm
b
w
= 300 mm Area of compression steel, A
s2
= 236
mm
2
h = 450 mm d
2
= 34 mm
b
f
= 1222 mm
Maxmum tension bar spacing, S =
87.4 mm
h
f
= 125 mm Max tension bar dia,
eq
= 10 mm
QP moment, M = 147 KNm Short term or long term ? L (S or L)
Age at cracking = 14 days Cover to A
s
, c = 28 mm
Cement type = N (S, N, R or RS)
Creep factor, = 2.0
CALCULATIONS
0.3
E
cm
= 34.1 Gpa
s
= 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio
e
= 17.61
' = 0.0019
=
0.0080
cm,t
= 38.77 Mpa
ct,eff
= 2.89 Mpa
[b
w
h/2+(b
f
-b
w
)hf(h-h
f
/2)+(
e
-1)(A
s
d+A
s2
d
2
)]/[b
w
h+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
+(
e
-1)(A
s
+A
s2
)] x
u
= 303.18 mm
uncracked 2
nd
moment of area
b
w
h/12+b
w
h(h/2-x)+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
/12+(b
f
-b
w
)h
f
(h-x-h
f
/2)+(
e
-1)[A
s
(d-x)+A
s2
(x-d
2
)] I
u
= 4572
mm
4
10
6
cracking moment = f
ct
I/(h-x) M
cr
= 90.12 kNm
< 147 kNm section is CRACKED
fully cracked x = d[-
e
(-') + {
e
(-')+2
e
(+'d
2
/d)}
] x
c
= 162.30 mm
concrete stress = M/[bx(d-x/3)/2+(
e
-1)A
s2
(x-d
2
)/x(d-d
2
)]
c
= 14.668 Mpa
s
= 405.3 Mpa
height of tension zone = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2] h
c,eff
= 82.50 mm
effective tension area A
c,eff
= 100815 mm
2
A
s
/A
c,eff
p,eff
= 0.0099
p,eff
)] s
r,max
= 266.6 mm
sm
-
cm
= 1341.0 strain
W
k
=
0.357 mm
The Concrete Centre
204
205
TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls
TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls analyses sub-frames one bay wide
in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1 using moment distribution.
Inputs are required on two sheets.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which should
be self-explanatory. As in other spreadsheets, avoid pasting input
from one cell to another as this may cause formatting and other
errors.
The dimensions of the ange widths, b
eff,
are entered manually,
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17.
It is important that the correct usage of the members under
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS
moments.
Unwanted data cells are greyed-out.
Supports may be specied by giving dimensions, etc. in C20: J26.
The use of C, K or E in column C can alter the characteristics of a
support from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre.
Where supports are dimensioned, their remote ends (i.e the
top of a column above or the bottom of a supporting column
below) may be specied as being F for xed or P for pinned in
spreadsheet columns F and J. Extraneous data is highlighted in
red or by messages in red.
Under Operating Instructions a number of checks, mainly
for missing entries, are carried out and any problems are
highlighted.

At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic but to-scale arrangement
and loading diagram is shown. This is given to aid data checking.
It may prove prudent to write down expected values for
ACTIONS!.
UDLs are input as line loads per unit area e.g. 4kN/m2.
Ultimate and characteristic support reactions are given at the
bottom of the sheet.

ACTIONS!
This sheet includes charts showing the elastic bending moment
diagram, redistributed moment envelope, elastic shear forces
and envelope of redistributed shear forces. These diagrams are
based on data from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! at 1/20
span points. Maximum span and support moments are given.
The user is required to input desired amounts of redistribution
distribution according to the users preference for calculating
span moments (see Table 1). Redistribution input is included
close to the bending moment diagrams in order to give the user
control rather than relying on blanket redistribution.
The sheet also tabulates elastic and redistributed ultimate shears
and column moments according to the various load cases.

Uls! and Sls!
These sheets detail the moment distribution analyses carried
out for the ultimate and serviceability limit states respectively,
but are not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.
All load cases to BS EN 1992-1-1 are calculated (but see Refs!)

Graf!

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC21 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing b
to a in cell D4. BS EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
Annex only the all spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.

Notes!
This sheet contains disclaimers and revision history.
206
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 216
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC21.xls v3.0 on CD 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625
LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E Usage: Office
Bay width 5000 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPANS
L (m) h (mm) b
w
(mm) h
f
(mm) Type b
eff
(mm)
SPAN 1 6.000 450 300 125 T 2140 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1680 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1680 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 4 6.000 450 300 125 T 2140
SPAN 5
SPAN 6 STATUS OK
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7
LOADING DIAGRAM
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 178.7 454.7 407.4 454.7 178.7
MAX ULTIMATE 179.3 454.7 407.4 454.7 179.3
Maximum Imposed 41.1 100.0 86.0 100.0 41.1
Minimum Imposed -4.1 49.8 43.0 49.8 -4.1
The Concrete Centre
BS EN 1990: (6.10b)
TCC21 Subframe Analysis MAIN!
206
207
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
BENDING MOMENTS (kNm)
B Elastic Moments E ULS B Redistributed Envelope E
Full SLS M 33.2 203.2 158.2 203.2 33.2 ~ kNm/m
Quasi-permanent M 25.4 161.2 119.9 161.2 25.4 ~ kNm/m
Elastic ULS M 44.3 263.9 190.8 263.9 44.3 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed ULS M 44.3 224.3 190.8 224.3 44.3 ~ kNm/m
1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Full SLS M 137.1 88.2 88.2 137.1 ~ ~
Quasi-permanent M 106.2 62.7 62.7 106.2 ~ ~
Elastic ULS M 183.2 119.8 119.8 183.2 ~ ~
Redistributed ULS M 188.1 116.9 116.9 188.1 ~ ~
1.027 0.976 0.976 1.027 ~ ~
ULS SHEARS (kN)
B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 178.2 246.5 218.5 201.4 201.4 218.5
Redistributed V 179.3 239.9 218.2 203.7 203.7 218.2
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 246.5 178.2 ~ ~ ~ ~
COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5 ultimate
ALL SPANS Above 20.3 -8.8 8.8 -20.3
LOADED Below 20.3 -8.8 8.8 -20.3
MAXIMUM Above 22.2 18.1 10.8 18.1 22.2
MOMENT Below 22.2 18.1 10.8 18.1 22.2
.
The Concrete Centre
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
TCC21 Subframe Analysis ACTIONS!
207
208
TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way
solid slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1 using continuous beam analysis.
There is user input on each of the rst four sheets and the choice
of reinforcement for each span is implicit.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which
should be self-explanatory.
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data under
L (m) in cells C16:C21. Unwanted data cells are greyed-out. The
use of C, K or E in J17:J18 can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge or encastre. Erroneous
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems are
highlighted.
diagram is given to aid data checking. It may prove prudent to
write down expected values of bending moments at each support
down before progressing to ACTIONS!
The top and bottom covers specied at J10:J11 should be
nominal covers including
cdev
.
cdev
is required in the checking
of maximum bar size allowed.

ACTIONS!
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis!
The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of
distribution according to the users preferences. Requesting
redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning message in the
remarks column.

SPANS!
SPANS! designs sections taken at the left, centre and right of
each span. The user is required to choose the diameters for top,
bottom and if necessary, link reinforcement for each span. The
amounts of bending and shear reinforcement required and checks
are derived from detailed calculations in Bar! The designer and
detailer should agree as to how these minimum reinforcement
arrangements are to be rationalised in the nal detailed drawings.
Current interpretation of EC2 requires that all spans should be
loaded with both G
k,sup
and G
k,inf
, Gk,
sup
is used initially, and
for Gk,
inf
the Run
Gk
,
inf
Loadcase button must be activated. A
red warning message will appear if this has not been done, or if
any relevant input data are subsequently changed. Using Gk,
inf

(=1.0) leads to higher hogging moments in spans.
Maximum moments at supports are taken at centre of supports
rather than side of supports as in the beam spreadsheets. Unless
overwritten, reinforcement diameter specied for a support
carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter
specied for the right hand support of a span carries over to
the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible to
obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
differences in depth or to comply with minimum percentage of
span steel; issues of practicality and buildability should dictate
that the largest number of bars is used throughout for each
support.
With regard to deection, the area of steel required, A
s
mm
2
/m,
shown under Design for the Centre part of the span, may have
been automatically increased in order to reduce service stress,
s
, and increase modication factors to satisfy deection criteria.
The percentage increase, if any, is shown under Deection.
With respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel
enhancement nor consideration of rotation at supports is
included.
determination of top steel in the centre of spans.
Careful examination of the Bending Moment Diagram and
Graf! should help to determine whether any curtailment of this
reinforcement is warranted (but see shift rule in Eurocode 2
Clause 9.2.1.3).
To avoid undue sensitivity, especially with regard to deection,
reinforcement may be theoretically over-stressed by up to 2.5%
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
together the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the
appropriate additional tensile force due to shear F
td
(see CI
9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50% at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.

WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement for
both design and distribution steel required in the slab per bay and
per cubic metre. Bay and support widths are required as input.
209
Simplied curtailment rules, as explained above and similar to
those used with BS 8110, are used to determine lengths of bars.
The gures should be treated as estimates only as they cannot
rationalisation, etc, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in

Uls!
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
loading are considered to nd a worse case.
All spans loaded
Odd spans loaded
Even spans loaded
Adjacent spans loaded*
Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
Spans 4 & 5 loaded*
* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to
consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.
Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and nds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20 th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other

Bar!
to BS EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking or educational purposes. In many
instances, service stress, s, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm
2

to avoid problems with division by zero.
Graf!
Refs!
and EN 1992.
to a in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load cases. However to the UK NA only the cell
spans and alternate load cases need to be considered.

Notes!
210
Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 220
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625
LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G W
k
0.4 mm top
W
k
0.3 mm btm
MATERIALS COVERS
fck 30 N/mm dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fywk 500 N/mm
c
1.50 concrete
c,dev
10 mm
Steel class B
SPAN 1 5.000 160 Supt No Type
SPAN 3 5.000 160 5 K
SPAN 4 5.000 160 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.50
UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~ UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 7.34 3.00 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
LOADING DIAGRAM
A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Max Imposed 6.70 17.14 13.93 17.14 6.70
Min Imposed -0.80 8.57 6.97 8.57 -0.80
MAX ULTIMATE 27.94 75.89 65.65 75.89 27.94
BS EN 1990: (6.10b)
The Concrete Centre
Usage: Shopping With brittle partitions
TCC31 One-way Slabs/ MAIN!
210
211
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 221
A Elastic Moments G A Redistributed Envelope G
Elastic M 36.6 24.4 36.6 ~ ~
Redistributed M 31.1 24.4 31.1 ~ ~
b 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 28.8 17.4 17.4 28.8 ~ ~
Redistributed M 28.6 17.1 17.1 28.6 ~ ~
b 0.992 0.986 0.986 0.992 ~ ~
A Elastic Shears G A Redistributed Shears G
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 28.1 41.5 36.6 32.1 32.1 36.6
Redistributed V 27.9 40.4 36.3 32.8 32.8 36.3
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 41.5 28.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
The Concrete Centre
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
TCC31 One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!
211
212
Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre
.
Av mm 0 5000
1.00 0.99 0.85
VEd kN/m 27.94 40.38
DESIGN d mm 131.0 129.0 129.0
As mm/m 187 538 589
TOP STEEL B 8 @ 250 B 8 @ 250 B 12 @ 175
BTM STEEL B 10 @ 350 B 12 @ 175 B 10 @ 350
SHEAR vEd N/mm2 0.203 . 0.299
vRdct N/mm2 0.542 0.592
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 31.1 17.1 24.4
0.85 0.99 1.00
VEd 36.31 32.83
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 129.0
As 589 321 458
As' 0 As top 194 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 @ 175 Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 225
BTM STEEL Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 350 Y 10 @ 400
SHEAR vEd 0.271 . 0.241
vRdct 0.592 0.545
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
.
TCC31 One-way Slabs/ SPANS!
212
213
Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 24.4 17.1 31.1
1.00 0.99 0.85
VEd 32.83 36.31
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 129.0
As 458 321 589
TOP STEEL Y 12 @ 225 Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 175
BTM STEEL Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 350 Y 10 @ 400
SHEAR vEd 0.244 . 0.268
vRdct 0.545 0.592
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 31.1 28.6 4.3
0.85 0.99 1.00
VEd 40.38 27.94
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 131.0
As 589 538 187
TOP STEEL Y 12 @ 175 Y 8 @ 250 Y 8 @ 250
BTM STEEL Y 10 @ 350 Y 12 @ 175 Y 10 @ 350
SHEAR vEd 0.302 . 0.200
vRdct 0.592 0.542
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
TCC31 One-way Slabs/ SPANS!
213
214
TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deections in one-way
solid slabs according to BS EN 1992-1-1.
Eurocode 2 recognises that members in bending exist in a state
partway between uncracked and fully cracked. The spreadsheet
considers both construction and design pattern loading in
assessing whether a section is cracked or not (i.e. whether the
exural tensile strength of the concrete is exceeded during these
stages of the slabs life). Once cracked, it is assumed that a
section remains cracked.
The spreadsheet is based on TCC31 but has an initial sheet
criteria required. Deections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS!
They are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In
SPANS!, the worst case is compared with the
specied serviceability criteria.
process render deection calculations carried out in this manner
can be inaccurate (and usually conservative) compared to actual
measured deections. For instance, a slabs deection is very
dependent upon whether the slab has cracked in bending during
construction or not. The calculated deections might be regarded
as being akin to a 95% condence limit that they will not be
exceeded in service.
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way
solid slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1 using continuous slab analysis.
There is user input on each of the rst four sheets and choice
of reinforcement for each span must be done/ assumed to have
been done by the user. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN!,
User input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS!
JOBDATA!
calculation of deection to BS EN 1992-1-1. Users are expected to
this sheet. For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2. Reference
may be made to the Concrete Centre publication How to design
concrete structures to Eurocode 2: Deection
(27)
for guidance on
values to be used. The default values given in this sheet are not
unusual.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs of span and loads,
most of which should be self-explanatory.
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data under
L (m). Unwanted data cells are greyed-out. The use of C, K or E
can alter the characteristics of the end supports from cantilever
to knife-edge to encastre. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or
by messages in red. Under Operating Instructions a number of
checks are carried out and problems are highlighted.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS!
to the initial moments in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of
distribution according to the users preferences (see Table 1).
Requesting redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning
message in the remarks column.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and where
necessary link reinforcement for each span.
The amounts of bending and shear reinforcement required and
checks are derived from detailed calculations in Bar! Unwanted
cells are greyed-out.
Eurocode 2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both
Gk,sup
and
Gk,inf
(=1.0)
Gk,sup
is used initially, and for
Gk,inf
the Run
-
Gk,inf
(=1.35 or 1.25) Loadcase button must be activated. A red
warning message will appear if this has not been done, or if any
relevant input data are subsequently changed. Using
Gk,inf
(=1.0)
leads to higher hogging moments in spans.
215
TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
differences in depth or to comply with the minimum percentage
of span steel; practicality may dictate that the maximum number
of bars at each support should be used.
WEIGHT!
Bay and support widths and distribution steel diameters are
required as input.
Simplied curtailment rules, similar to those dened in BS 8110,
are used to determine lengths of bars.
The gures should be treated as estimates only as they cannot
rationalisation, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
Uls!
printing out other than for checking purposes. All load cases to
BS EN 1992-1-1 are calculated.
Sls!
limit state at 1/20th points along each span.
The results are used in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended
for printing out other than for checking purposes.
Bar!
to prEN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. In many instances, service
stress,
s
, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm
2
to avoid problems
with division by zero.
Def!
and for each load condition. For each point and loading stage it
considers moment, A
s
, A
s
, d, d
2
, uncracked neutral axis depth
- x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia I, uncracked moment capacity Mcr, distribution factor
- c, z, nal x, concrete stresses
c
, curvature -1/r, slope and
curvature to calculate deection. The sheet is rather large and is
purposes.
Graf!
Refs!
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet.
These data reect the values given in draft UK National Annexes
for EN 1990 and EN 1992.
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
Annex only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.
Notes!
216
Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 226
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD 2002-2006 TCC
chg - FB625
LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G COVERS
Top cover 25 mm
MATERIALS Btm cover 25 mm
fck 35 N/mm dg 20 mm
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Concrete density 25 kN/m
fywk 500 N/mm c 1.50 concrete Curing time 3 days
Steel class B
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent = L / 250 7.4.1(5)
Degree of restraint 60% Max affecting partitions = L / 350 7.4.1(6)
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent 7.4.1(5)
k
= 0.4 mm top or 0.3 mm btm Table 7.1
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to Annex A)
cm
= 43 N/mm Table 3.1
Cement N Type (S, N, or R) E
cm
= 35.781 kN/mm & Annex B
Self weight 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 60
Composite 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
COMPOSITE E and VALUES - Span 1 (other spans omitted for clarity )
E
t
E
t (t,t
0
) E
t
kN/mm kN/mm kN/mm
Self weight 2.63 9.85 2.63 9.85 1.07 17.33
Partitions 1.75 13.00 1.75 13.00
Other dead loads 1.62 13.65 1.62 13.65
Variable load 0 37.77 from day 14
Composite 2.33 10.75 2.09 11.60 0.70 21.09
(50% = nominal, 100% = severe)
Construction load
SW + partitions
Quasi-permanent Total load
0
To 70 years To 60 days To 70 years
The Concrete Centre
from 90 days on from 7 to 90 days from 0 to 7 days
20 20 20
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ JOBDATA!
216
217
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625
SPAN 1 7.600 250 Supt No Type
SPAN 3 7.600 250 min max 5 K
SPAN 4 7.600 250 DEAD 1.25 1.25 K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 6 Office Useage
UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~ UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction ~~~~ ~~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 7.75 2.50 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction ~~~~ ~~~~
LOADING DIAGRAM
A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Max Imposed 8.48 21.71 17.65 21.71 8.48
Min Imposed -1.02 10.86 8.82 10.86 -1.02
MAX ULTIMATE 41.74 113.34 98.06 113.34 41.74
The Concrete Centre
BS EN 1990: (6.10b)
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ MAIN!
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs.xls
217
218
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G, rmw 03-Jul-06 228
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m) Elastic
A G A G
Elastic M 0.0 83.1 55.4 83.1 0.0 ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.0 70.6 55.4 70.6 0.0 ~ ~
b 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 64.5 37.7 37.7 64.5 ~ ~
Redistributed M 64.9 38.1 38.1 64.9 ~ ~
b 1.005 1.011 1.011 1.005 ~ ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m) Elastic
A G A G
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 41.6 62.0 54.7 47.9 47.9 54.7
Redistributed V 41.7 60.3 54.0 49.0 49.0 54.0
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 62.0 41.6 ~ ~ ~ ~
DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
SW + parts (inst) 15.8 1.8 1.8 15.8 mm
Quasi permanent 25.5 4.6 4.6 25.5 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
The Concrete Centre
Redistributed
Redistributed
-100
-50
0
50
100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-100
-50
0
50
100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-100
-50
0
50
100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!
218
219
Av mm 0 7600
1.00 1.01 0.85
VEd kN/m 41.74 60.32
DESIGN d mm 220.0 219.0 219.0
As mm/m 210 717 781
TOP STEEL B 10 @ 350 B 8 @ 225 B 12 @ 125
BTM STEEL B 10 @ 250 B 12 @ 125 B 10 @ 250
SHEAR vEd N/mm2 0.184 0.262
vRdct N/mm2 0.565 0.572
Links not required
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 70.6 38.1 55.4
0.85 1.01 1.00
VEd 54.04 49.03
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 781 422 613
As' 0 As top 219 0
TOP STEEL T 12 @ 125 T 8 @ 225 T 12 @ 175
BTM STEEL T 10 @ 350 T 12 @ 250 T 10 @ 350
SHEAR vEd 0.241 0.210
vRdct 0.572 0.566
Links not required
mm
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
.
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs.xls
219
220
Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 55.4 38.1 70.6
1.00 1.01 0.85
VEd 49.03 54.04
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 613 422 781
TOP STEEL T 12 @ 175 T 8 @ 225 T 12 @ 125
BTM STEEL T 10 @ 350 T 12 @ 250 T 10 @ 350
SHEAR vEd 0.218 0.233
vRdct 0.566 0.572
Links not required
mm
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 70.6 64.9 9.7
0.85 1.01 1.00
VEd 60.32 41.74
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 220.0
As 781 717 210
TOP STEEL T 12 @ 125 T 8 @ 225 T 10 @ 350
BTM STEEL T 10 @ 250 T 12 @ 125 T 10 @ 250
SHEAR vEd 0.269 0.176
vRdct 0.572 0.565
Links not required
mm
d'/x ok ok ok
s ok ok ok
TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!
220
221
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls
Using continuous beam analysis, this spreadsheet analyses and
designs up to six spans of ribbed slab to EN 1992-1-1
[3]
. There
is user input on each of the rst three sheets and choice of
reinforcement for each span is implicit.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering
or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted data cells are greyed-
out. The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end
are highlighted.
is assumed to be 1.00 m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc. are based on
moments and shears per rib. Great care should be taken to ensure
this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand.
Combo-boxes to the right under Operating Instructions dene
minimum bar sizes to be used (e.g. at supports between ribs), the
type of usage of the slab (this affects the magnitude of quasi-
permanent SLS moments) and whether the user wants to use
links or not. If links are required these may be either designed or
nominal links; the centres of nominal links can be changed.
Towards the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is
given to aid data checking. At the bottom of the sheet, support
reactions are given.
ACTIONS!
distribution according to the users preferences. See Table 1.
SPANS!
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specied for
the right hand support of a span carries over to the left hand
support of the next span.
It should be noted that hogging moment is checked both at the
centre of support (solid section) and the solid/ rib intersection
(ribbed section). As the moments at the solid/ rib intersection
each side of the support may differ, it may be possible to obtain a
design giving different numbers of bars each side of the support.
Practicality should dictate that the maximum number of bars at
each support is used for detailing.
together the steel required for hogging at 0.25L ( span) and
the appropriate additional tensile force due to shear = F
td
(see
BS EN 1992-1-1 9.2.1.3). Similarly at 3/4 span. The higher gure
is used to determine for top steel in the span. It is assumed
that 100% hogging steel at supports is curtailed at 0.25L or a
maximum of 50% is curtailed at 0.2L span and the remainder
at 0.3L.
With regard to deection, the area of steel required, As mm
2
/m,
shown under Design for the Centre part of the span, may be
automatically increased in order to reduce service stress, s,
and therefore increase modication factors to satisfy deection
criteria. The percentage increase, if any, is shown under
Deection.
With respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel
enhancement nor consideration of rotation at supports is
included.
WEIGHT!
are used to determine lengths of bars. The gures should be
treated as estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of
designers and detailers preferences, rationalisation, etc. They do
not allow for reinforcement in supporting beams or for mesh.
Uls!
All spans loaded
Odd spans loaded
Even spans loaded
Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
Spans 4 & 5 loaded*
222
checking purposes.
Sls!
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Bar!
to prEN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. In many instances, service
stress, ss, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm
2
to avoid problems
with division by zero.
Graf!
Refs!
and EN 1992.
Annex only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.
Notes!
223
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ MAIN!
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 233
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
COVERS (to links, or if no links, to reinf)
MATERIALS dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fck 35 N/mm
s
1.15 steel Btm cover 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm
c
1.50 concrete Side cover 30 mm
fywk 500 N/mm W
k
0.40 mm top
c,dev
10 mm
Steel class A (Normal weight concrete) 0.30 mm btm RIBS
Density 25 kN/m slab depth, hf 100 mm
SPANS Solid (mm) Rib width 150 mm
L (m) H (mm) Left Right Centres 900 mm
SPAN 1 8.000 275 300 450 1 in 10 taper
SPAN 2 9.000 275 450 450 SUPPORTS
SPAN 3 8.000 275 450 300 Support No Type
SPAN 4 1 K
SPAN 5 4 K
SPAN 6 K(nife), C(anti(antilever) or E(ncastre)
UDL 3.65 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 3.67 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 3.65 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~
LOADING PATTERN min max
DEAD 1.25 1.25
IMPOSED 1.50
LOADING DIAGRAM
1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 18.5 65.9 59.3 18.8 ~ ~ ~
Max Imposed 14.5 38.5 37.8 14.5 ~ ~ ~
Min Imposed -2.2 2.2 2.1 -2.1 ~ ~ ~
MAX ULTIMATE 43.5 138.1 128.8 43.9 ~ ~ ~
Usage: Vehicle<= 30kN With brittle partitions
The Concrete Centre
223
224
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ ACTIONS!
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 234
1 Elastic Moments 5a 1 Redistributed Envelope 5a
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 105.2 101.6 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
1.000 0.850 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 73.49 62.07 74.78 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 69.27 59.73 70.49 ~ ~ ~
0.943 0.962 0.943 #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
1 Elastic Shears 5a 1 Redistributed Shears 5a
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 44.8 67.9 72.2 63.2 67.4 45.2
Redistributed V 43.5 65.9 72.2 63.3 65.5 43.9
SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
The Concrete Centre
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
224
225
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!
1.00 0.94 0.85
DESIGN d mm 236.0 232.0
As mm 0 672 (755 for defln) 840
As
2
mm 0 As T 203 As
2
245
TOP STEEL 3H 12 /rib 4H 10 /rib 2H 20 /rib
+ 2H8 between + 2H12 between
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As
2
prov mm 402 As prov 982 As
2
prov 402
SHEAR V
Ed
kN 43.53 V
Ed
65.89
V
Ed
per rib kN 35.24 V
Ed
per rib 53.39
V
Rd,c
kN 29.96 Link 8 V
Rd,c
35.42
LINKS 2H8 @ 175 for 350 2H8 @ 1,200 2H8 @ 150 for 300
Max A
sw
/s ok ok
0.85 0.96 0.85
DESIGN d mm 232.0 232.0
As mm 840 580 (631 for defln) 811
As
2
mm 233 As T 242 As
2
240
As
2
2
prov 402
SHEAR V
Ed
kN 72.18 V
Ed
63.29
V
Ed
per rib kN 59.05 V
Ed
per rib 51.05
V
Rd,c
kN 35.42 Link 8 V
Rd,c
35.42
LINKS 2H8 @ 150 for 300 2H8 @ 1,200 2H8 @ 150 for 300
Max A
sw
/s ok ok
The Concrete Centre
.
224.5 (x=28.1<hf/)
224.5 (x=28.1<hf/)
225
226
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 /236
0.85 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 232.0 236.0
As mm 811 684 (792 for defln) 0
As
2
mm 208 As T 179 As
2
0
As
2
2
prov 402
SHEAR V
Ed
kN 65.51 V
Ed
43.91
V
Ed
per rib kN 53.05 V
Ed
per rib 35.58
V
Rd,c
kN 35.42 Link 8 V
Rd,c
29.96
LINKS 2H8 @ 150 for 300 2H8 @ 1,200 2H8 @ 175 for 350
Max A
sw
/s ok ok
The Concrete Centre
224.5 (x=28.1<hf/)
226
227
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ WEIGHT!
TOP STEEL Location No Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight
Support 1 3 T 12 2375 0.888 6.3
2 T 8 2375 0.395 1.9
Span 1 4 T 10 4775 0.617 11.8
Support 2 2 T 20 4250 2.466 21.0
2 T 12 4250 0.888 7.5
Span 2 4 T 10 5275 0.617 13.0
Support 3 2 T 20 4250 2.466 21.0
2 T 12 4250 0.888 7.5
Span 3 4 T 10 4775 0.617 11.8
Support 4 3 T 12 2375 0.888 6.3
2 T 8 2375 0.395 1.9
BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 2 T 16 1000 1.578 3.2
Span 1 2 T 25 7200 3.853 55.5
Support 2 2 T 16 2175 1.578 6.9
Span 2 2 T 25 8050 3.853 62.0
Support 3 2 T 16 2175 1.578 6.9
Span 3 2 T 25 7200 3.853 55.5
Support 4 2 T 16 1575 1.578 5.0
LINKS Span 1 11 H 8 825 0.395 3.6
Span 2 12 H 8 825 0.395 3.9
Span 3 11 H 8 825 0.395 3.6
SUMMARY
All figures approximate - see User Guide
The Concrete Centre
227
228
TCC33.xls analyses and automatically designs bays of simple
rectangular at slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1.
The spreadsheet uses sub-frame analysis with pattern loading
(as TCC21.xls) to calculate a bending moment envelope. This
envelope may be subjected to redistribution.
For a complete rectangular at slab the user is expected to use
the spreadsheet at least four times (internal bay(s) x - x, internal
bay(s) y - y, edge bay(s) x - x and edge bay(s) y - y). Punching
shear should be checked using TCC13.xls, or by hand. See also
Eurocode 2 Clause 6.4., Punching.
Beyond panel aspect ratios of 1.5 consideration might be given to
the appropriateness of using other forms of analysis (e.g. grillage
or nite element).
MAIN!
This sheet provides the main inputs to the spreadsheet (although
other inputs occur in other sheets).
Most inputs are self-explanatory. LEGEND! should help with
denition of dimensions, e.g. end distance in MAIN! F18: F19 is
actually from centreline of column to the end/edge of the slab.
Cover is dened as being to the layer under design.
The layering is set at T1 - B1 (& T2 - B2) although T1 - B2 might be
deemed more appropriate (e.g. with prefabricated mats)., Some
cells have comments attached to them where terms might be
unfamiliar to UK users.
To the right hand side, by using the various combo boxes, the user
should choose the type of usage, whether internal or edge bay,
the preferred maximum size of bar, and whether brittle partitions
need to be considered in the design. These all have effects on
the detailed design. Covers requested at J9:J10 should be nominal
covers (including c
dev
).
The number of spans is altered by entering data in the appropriate
cells. Unwanted data cells are greyed-out.

As with TCC 21, where support dimentions are not used the use
of C, K, F or P can alter the characteristics of a support from
Cantilever to Knife-edge to Fixed to Pinned. Extraneous data
Instructions in column L, a number of checks are carried out and
problems found are highlighted. At the bottom of the sheet a
simplistic loading diagram is given to aid data checking. Great
care should be taken to ensure that this sheet is completed
correctly for the case in hand. It may prove prudent to estimate
values for bay width bending moments at each support by hand
before progressing to ACTIONS!
Cantilevers less than 1.00 m should be described as end distances
rather than cantilevers; otherwise certain logic regarding breadth
of effective moment transfer strip, b
e
(see BSEN1992-1-1 Clause
9.4.2), goes wrong. On edge columns, b
e
restricts the transfer
moment, M, which in itself restricts the amount of moment
transferred into columns above and below. End distances
equivalent to the half width of the column should be used to
dene slabs whose edge is ush with the outside of the column.
Load input should dene the loads on the slab only. A combo-
box is used to switch between the internal or edge bays. If EDGE
is chosen, cells F17 I15:J15 and E17:G17 become operative and
information about the perimeter load along the edge and the
distance of the edge from the centreline is required as input.
Perimeter loading is assumed to be dead load.
Cell L52 gives an estimate of reinforcement requirements for
the element considered in the direction considered (not both
directions).
The spreadsheet takes automatic measures to ensure deection
criteria are met.
To the right under Operating instructions a number of checks are
carried out. Box markers indicate where checks have been carried
out and proved satisfactory.
ACTIONS!
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required
to input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial
moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution
according to the users preference. The sheet also provides output
reactions and column moments. For punching shear calculations,
the values of e
x
/b
y
and u
1
/u
1
* given in D60:I61 may be used for
determination of the shear enhancement factor,
SPANS!
SPANS! details the amounts of reinforcement required derived
from detailed calculations in Bar!
The warning message Results Invalid - Run with G
k,inf
may appear.
This occurs when a check of the left hand side of support 2 reveals
that the G
k,inf
load case has not been calculated. The button to
the right should be depressed to run the G
k,inf
load case.
EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both G
k,sup

and G
k,inf
. G
k,sup
is used initially, and for G
k,inf
the Run-G
k,inf

Loadcase button must be activated. A red warning message will
appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data
are subsequently changed. Using G
k,inf
(=1.0) leads to higher
hogging moments in spans.
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls
229
together the steel required for the greater hogging at 1/4 span
and the appropriate additional tensile force due to shear F
ed
(see
CI 9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports
will be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50%
at 0.3 span.
LEGEND!
LEGEND! gives an explanation of the dimensions used in MAIN!
and for the analysis and design.
WEIGHT!
required in one direction of the slab for the internal or end bays
considered. Simplied curtailment rules, similar to those used
with BS 8110, are used to determine lengths of bars. The gures
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. They do not allow for
punching shear links or link carrier bars.
Uls!
All spans loaded
Odd spans loaded
Even spans loaded
Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
Spans 4 & 5 loaded*
checking purposes.
Sls!
Bar!
to BS EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. The selection of bar sizes is
automated.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a span are
checked and are used in the determination of top steel in spans.
Graf!
particularly in ACTIONS!
Refs!
This sheet comprises Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs)
contained within in the UKs (draft) National Annexes to EN1990
(basis of design) and BS EN 1992-1-1. This page should be
reviewed each time the spreadsheet is used to ensure the values
remain valid for the UK or are valid for the country where the
works are to be carried out or changed to suit. It is suggested that
this page is printed out to accompany submissions of calculations
that include this spreadsheet. It should be noted that it is possible
to switch on the adjacent spans loaded by changing b to a in
cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and
alternate load arrangement. However to the UK National Annex
only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need to be
considered.
Notes!
230
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ MAIN!
Location from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 240
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625
MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm dg 20 mm COVERS mm TO LAYER
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Top cover 25 1
fywk 500 N/mm c 1.50 concrete Btm cover 25 1
Steel class A Wk 0.4 mm top
c,dev
10 mm
0.3 mm btm
SPANS L (m) GEOMETRY
SPAN 1 7.500 Bay type INTERNAL 4.00 kN/m outside supports 1 & 6
SPAN 2 7.500 Slab depth, h 230 mm
SPAN 3 7.500 Int Panel width, b 7500 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 7.500 min max
SPAN 5 7.500 End distance 325 from supt 1 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 6 End distance 325 from supt 6 IMPOSED 1.50
.
Support 1 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 2 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 3 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 4 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 5 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 6 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 7
Usage: Office With brittle partitions
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
LOADING DIAGRAM
A D
PERIMETER LOADS characteristic
The Concrete Centre
ECBP Typical Floor 230
231
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ ACTIONS!
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 241
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
1 2 3 4 5 6
Elastic M 400.8 632.5 558.0 558.0 632.5 400.8 ~
Redistributed M 249.4 506.0 530.1 530.1 506.0 249.4 ~
0.622 0.800 0.950 0.950 0.800 0.622 ~
Redistribution 20.0% 5.0% 5.0% 20.0%
End support reinf. mm 16 16
* *
1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 363.0 320.2 328.4 320.2 363.0 ~
Redistributed M 468.8 322.2 309.9 322.2 468.8 ~
1.291 1.006 0.944 1.006 1.291 ~
1 2 3
Elastic V 427.2 482.3 452.5 443.9 448.0 448.0
Redistributed V 413.8 482.6 444.9 451.2 448.0 448.0
4 5
Elastic V 443.9 452.5 482.3 427.2 ~ ~
Redistributed V 451.2 444.9 482.6 413.8 ~ ~
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5 6
ALL SPANS LOADED 490.1 927.0 899.2 899.2 927.0 490.1
MAXIMUM 490.1 927.0 899.2 899.2 927.0 490.1
Characteristic Dead 222.0 395.8 377.8 377.8 395.8 222.0
Characteristic Imposed 141.9 288.5 285.0 285.0 288.5 141.9
For punching ex /by 0.2225 0.2107 0.2107 0.2225 (6.43)
u
1
/u
1
*
1.3114 1.3114 (6.44)
COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5 6
ALL SPANS Above 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
LOADED Below 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
WITH MAX Above 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
REACTION Below 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
SUPPORT No
SPAN No
The Concrete Centre
SPAN No
SPAN No
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40
231
232
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!
.
ACTIONS 1.000 1.291 0.800
Be 1000 3750
Total M kNm 165.0 468.8 430.4
Mt max kNm 230.9 883.6
M kNm 16.0 211.0 107.6
d mm 199.0 199.0 201.0
As mm/m 30 684 346
As deflection mm/m 321
As prov mm/m 302 754 402
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 45.40 x 1.00 x 0.830 = 84.74 OK
M kNm 165.0 257.8 322.8
d mm 197.0 199.0 199.0
As mm/m 2195 837 1056
Provide H16 @ 75 T1 Provide H12 @ 125 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm/m 2681 905 1131
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
ACTIONS 0.800 1.006 0.950
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 430.4 322.2 432.3
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6
M kNm 107.6 145.0 108.1
d mm 201.0 200.0 200.0
As mm/m 346 468 349
As prov mm/m 402 524 349
M kNm 322.8 177.2 324.2
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm/m 1056 575 1061
As prov mm/m 1131 646 1131
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
The Concrete Centre
.
232
233
ACTIONS 0.950 0.944 0.950
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 432.3 309.9 432.3
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6
M kNm 108.1 139.5 108.1
d mm 200.0 200.0 200.0
As mm/m 349 450 349
As prov mm/m 349 524 349
M kNm 324.2 170.5 324.2
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm/m 1061 553 1061
As prov mm/m 1131 565 1131
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
ACTIONS 0.950 1.006 0.800
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 432.3 322.2 430.4
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6
M kNm 108.1 145.0 107.6
d mm 200.0 200.0 201.0
As mm/m 349 468 346
As prov mm/m 349 524 402
M kNm 324.2 177.2 322.8
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm/m 1061 575 1056
As prov mm/m 1131 646 1131
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
The Concrete Centre
233
234
ACTIONS 0.800 1.291 1.000
Be 3750 1000
Total M kNm 430.4 468.8 165.0
Mt max kNm 883.6 230.9
M kNm 107.6 211.0 2.1
d mm 201.0 199.0 199.0
As mm/m 346 684 4
As prov mm/m 402 754 302
M kNm 322.8 257.8 165.0
d mm 199.0 199.0 197.0
As mm/m 1056 837 2195
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 125 B1 Provide H16 @ 75 T1
As prov mm/m 1131 905 2681
s ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
The Concrete Centre
234
235
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ LEGEND!
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD 2003 - 2005 TCC chg
Legend for input data on MAIN sheet
Diagram shows legend for frames centred on EW gridlines - rotate 90 for frames centred on NS
gridlines.
The Concrete Centre
03-Jul-06
-
245
FB625
235
236
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ WEIGHT!
WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT Mid Strip Col Strip Type Dia Length Unit wt Weight
TOP STEEL Support 1 18 T 12 2725 0.888 43.5
15 T 16 2725 1.578 64.5
Span 1 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 2 30 T 8 3750 0.395 44.4
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 2 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 3 17 T 10 3750 0.617 39.3
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 3 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
Support 4 17 T 10 3750 0.617 39.3
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 4 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 5 30 T 8 3750 0.395 44.4
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 5 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 6 18 T 12 2725 0.888 43.5
15 T 16 2725 1.578 64.5
BTM STEEL Span 1 25 T 12 6975 0.888 154.8
30 T 12 7950 0.888 211.7
Span 2 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
22 T 12 7650 0.888 149.4
Span 3 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
19 T 12 7650 0.888 129.0
Span 4 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
22 T 12 7650 0.888 149.4
Span 5 25 T 12 6975 0.888 154.8
30 T 12 7950 0.888 211.7
SUMMARY Rebar for single direction only. All figures approximate - see User Guide.
TOTAL REINFORCEMENT IN BAY (kg)
2850
REINFORCEMENT DENSITY (kg/m
3
)
43.3
No
The Concrete Centre
236
237
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls
TCC33X designs at slabs in both orthogonal directions by running
TCC33 for each grid line and collecting the data generated. It
uses macros heavily and takes some time to run, once the Run
Results button is pressed. It is intended to be used for the design
of at slabs in braced structures only, where all columns are on
grid and where there are no major openings.
This spreadsheet also checks basic punching shear stresses around
each column and gives an indication of the degree of shear
reinforcing required. As it is impractical within this spreadsheet
to model a variety of holes adjacent to columns, the user should
check the effects of holes separately by using TCC13.
Sheets ACTIONS!, SPANS!, LEGEND!, Weight!, Uls!, Sls!, Bar!,
Gra!, Refs! and Notes!, work in the same way as TCC33.
INPUT!
All relevant materials, geometric and loading data is input on this
sheet.
As spans are entered into cells C13:E18, the key diagram below
will change in order to serve as a visual check on the correct input
of geometry. Although the plan is to scale, the columns on this
key diagram are indicative only and do not reect the column
sizes entered.
Correct gridlines must be entered at cells G13 to H19. These
are used to name the various runs on individual grids, so it is
important that there are no duplicates and that the correct
number of grids are entered.
The edge distances (centre line of column to edge of slab) in cells
O12 to O15 are equally important, as both analysis and punching
shear calculations are very sensitive to these values.
When all input is complete, the RUN RESULTS button should
be clicked. This then designs the frame on each gridline in turn,
and summarizes data on the RESULTS sheet. If any data changes
are subsequently made, the RESULTS VALID message at cell P17
will change to PRESS RUN BUTTON.
RESULTS!
This sheet has eight printable pages:
Summary 1 repeats the key and legend diagrams, displays
validity checks for the sub-frames on all gridlines, gives a guide
to the levels of shear stress and gives the reinforcement density
as designed.
Summary 2 to Summary 4 display reinforcement call-ups for
each of the four layers, T1, T2, B1 and B2. The top steel in some
column strips will have a call-up such as 20 H16 @ 125:250. This
indicates that the central half of the column strip has bars at
125 mm centres, with 250 mm centres being required over the
remainder of the strip width.
Summary 5 gives principal design bending moments throughout
each gridline.
Summary 6 gives both characteristic and maximum ultimate
column reactions.
Summary 7 similarly displays column design moments and
values of V
Ed
for punching shear.
Summary 8 indicates the levels of punching shear stress by
summarizing actual stress divided by allowable stress at both the
basic control perimeter, u
1
and at the column face. Where values
are greater than unity, shear links or studs are required and may
be designed using TCC13. Alternatively or additionally, greater
punching resistance may be provided at a column by either a)
increasing levels of top reinforcement, or b) adding shear heads
at columns (see INPUT! cell K34).
MAIN! ACTIONS! SPANS! LEGEND!
WEIGHT! Uls! Sls! Bar! Graf! Refs!

These sheets are identical to the sheet of the same name in
TCC33, except that input values are controlled from INPUT!
and may not be amended. In MAIN! if it is required to print out
detailed calculations for a particular gridline, the gridline should
be selected via the combo-boxes in L16. First select direction
(either EW or NS), then the required gridline.
In ACTIONS!, the redistribution is controlled by INPUT! L22.
In SPANS! the G
k,inf
case is run automatically when the Run
Results Button is used.
Punch!
This sheet gives details of the various values used in punching
shear calculations at all columns. These being, d
ave
,
pl
, v
Rdc
, u
1
, u
1
*,
u
0
, and v
Ed
.
Notes!
238
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ INPUT!
Spreadsheets to EC2
Advisory Group Made by Date Job No
Third floor slab FB625
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004
Checked Revision Page
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD 2004-6 The Concrete Centre -
MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm dg 20 mm SLAB DEPTH (mm)
fyk 500 N/mm
c,dev
5 mm Top cover 25 h = 250
Steel class A Wk 0.4 mm top Btm cover 25
0.3 mm btm EDGE DISTANCES (mm)
SPANS (m) N - S E - W N/S E/W COLUMN SIZES (mm) North 125
Span A - B 7.500 Span 1 - 2 7.500 1 A South 125
Span B - C 7.500 Span 2 - 3 7.500 2 B Internal 400 400 East 125
Span C - D 7.500 Span 3 - 4 7.500 3 C North edge 250 400 West 125
Span D - E 7.500 4 D South edge 250 400
E East edge 400 250 LOADING (kN/m)
West edge 400 250 Applied dead 0.50
Corners 250 250 Partitions 1.00
1 4 Imposed 2.50
Perimeter cladding
A Redistribution 15% % kN/m 8.50
Preferred max bar 20 mm
End support reinf. 20 mm
14
Brittle partitions ? Yes days (3 - 28)
Usage
Columns below Yes Columns above ? Yes
Length 3.750 m Length 3.750 m
End condition F F or P End condition F F or P
E Columns heads ? No mm
chg
03-Jul-06
248
COVERS (mm)
Project
Client
Location
The Concrete Centre
Rod
G
R
I
D
L
I
N
E
S
Projection from
column face
AGE at 1
st
CRACKING
Office
238
239
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!
Summary 1 and Summary 2
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 249
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 1
1 4
A Rebar
Layering
B1 & T1
B2 & T2
E
Legend for frames on EW gridlines
VALIDITY Deflection %age As End bar Deflection %age As End bar
Grid 1 Grid A
Grid 2 Grid B
Grid 3 Grid C
Grid 4 Grid D
Grid E
PUNCHING SHEAR VERY HIGH at SOME COLUMNS Heads with a 400 projection should give few or no links at internal columns.
See page Summary 8 Alternatively, increases in top steel over columns will reduce link requirements.
REINFORCEMENT Estimated quantities (excluding any shear links)
Quantities allow for laps, but not for wastage, rationalisation or steel increases for shear. Concrete volume, m 172.0
Total weight, Tonnes 12.84 Rebar density, kg/m 74.7 Rebar density, kg/m 18.7
Summary 2
RESULTS - DESIGN
TOP REINFORCEMENT Layer T2
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Support A Column strip 4 H20 @ 150 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 150
Middle strip 13 H10 @ 275 25 H10 @ 275 25 H10 @ 275 13 H10 @ 275
Span A - B Column strip 8 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 8 H10 @ 275
Support B Column strip 15 H16 @ 100:200 23 H16 @ 125:250 23 H16 @ 125:250 15 H16 @ 100:200
Span B - C Column strip 10 H10 @ 200 10 H12 @ 375 10 H12 @ 375 10 H10 @ 200
Support C Column strip 10 H16 @ 150:300 17 H16 @ 175:350 17 H16 @ 175:350 10 H16 @ 150:300
Span C - D Column strip 10 H10 @ 200 10 H12 @ 375 10 H12 @ 375 10 H10 @ 200
Support D Column strip 15 H16 @ 100:200 23 H16 @ 125:250 23 H16 @ 125:250 15 H16 @ 100:200
Span D - E Column strip 8 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 8 H10 @ 275
Support E Column strip 4 H20 @ 150 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 150
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
TO SCALE PLAN
R
o
t
a
t
e

9
0

f
o
r

f
r
a
m
e
s

c
e
n
t
r
e
d

o
n

N
S

g
r
i
d
l
i
n
e
s
.
The Concrete Centre
The Concrete Centre
239
239
240
Summary 3
TOP REINFORCEMENT Layer T1
Grid A Grid B Grid C Grid D Grid E
Support 1 Column strip 4 H20 @ 175 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 175
Middle strip 9 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 9 H12 @ 400
Span 1 - 2 Column strip 5 H12 @ 400 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 5 H12 @ 400
Support 2 Column strip 12 H16 @ 125:250 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 12 H16 @ 125:250
Support 3 Column strip 12 H16 @ 125:250 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 12 H16 @ 125:250
Support 4 Column strip 4 H20 @ 175 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 175
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Summary 4
BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT Layer B2
Span A - B Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 125 H12 @ 125 H16 @ 225
Middle strip H16 @ 250 H12 @ 175 H12 @ 175 H16 @ 250
Span B - C Column strip H16 @ 325 H10 @ 150 H10 @ 150 H16 @ 325
Span C - D Column strip H16 @ 325 H10 @ 150 H10 @ 150 H16 @ 325
Span D - E Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 125 H12 @ 125 H16 @ 225
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Layer B1 Grid A Grid B Grid C Grid D Grid E
Span 1 - 2 Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 150 H12 @ 150 H12 @ 150 H16 @ 225
Middle strip H16 @ 275 H10 @ 125 H10 @ 125 H10 @ 125 H16 @ 275
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
The Concrete Centre
The Concrete Centre
240
240
241
Summary 5
RESULTS FROM ANALYSIS - BENDING MOMENTS at support centrelines and maxima in spans kNm
Support A 76.86 107.26 107.26 76.86
Span A - B 261.97 424.88 424.88 261.97
Support B 316.53 524.40 524.40 316.53
Span B - C 174.50 272.06 272.06 174.50
Support C 231.18 377.92 377.92 231.18
Span C - D 174.50 272.06 272.06 174.50
Support D 316.53 524.40 524.40 316.53
Span D - E 261.97 424.88 424.88 261.97
Support E 76.86 107.26 107.26 76.86
Grid A Grid B Grid C Grid D Grid E
Support 1 78.11 108.45 108.45 108.45 78.11
Span 1 - 2 265.64 428.91 428.91 428.91 265.64
Support 2 306.08 513.05 513.05 513.05 306.08
Span 2 - 3 141.25 208.30 208.30 208.30 141.25
Support 3 306.08 513.05 513.05 513.05 306.08
Span 3 - 4 265.64 428.91 428.91 428.91 265.64
Support 4 78.11 108.45 108.45 108.45 78.11
Summary 6
COLUMN REACTIONS
Characteristic dead load, kN
Grid A 146.52 280.63 280.63 146.52
Grid B 287.30 420.33 420.33 287.30
Grid C 248.58 412.30 412.30 248.58
Grid D 287.30 420.33 420.33 287.30
Grid E 146.52 280.63 280.63 146.52
Characteristic imposed load, kN
Grid A 49.04 105.23 105.23 49.04
Grid B 108.33 213.80 213.80 108.33
Grid C 95.99 206.33 206.33 95.99
Grid D 108.33 213.80 213.80 108.33
Grid E 49.04 105.23 105.23 49.04
Maximum ultimate load VEd, kN without enhancement factor,
Grid A 256.52 508.29 508.29 256.52
Grid B 521.27 845.59 845.59 521.27
Grid C 454.40 824.36 824.36 454.40
Grid D 521.27 845.59 845.59 521.27
Grid E 256.52 508.29 508.29 256.52
The Concrete Centre
The Concrete Centre
241
241
242
Summary 7
COLUMN MOMENTS
Ultimate, kNm

Grid A Above 32.70 / 33.46 44.52 / -13.95 44.52 / 13.95 32.70 / -33.46
Below 32.70 / 33.46 44.52 / -13.95 44.52 / 13.95 32.70 / -33.46
Grid B Above -10.84 / 45.24 -31.72 / -38.97 -31.72 / 38.97 -10.84 / -45.24
Below -10.84 / 45.24 -31.72 / -38.97 -31.72 / 38.97 -10.84 / -45.24
Grid C Above 0.00 / 45.24 0.00 / -38.97 0.00 / 38.97 0.00 / -45.24
Below 0.00 / 45.24 0.00 / -38.97 0.00 / 38.97 0.00 / -45.24
Grid D Above 10.84 / 45.24 31.72 / -38.97 31.72 / 38.97 10.84 / -45.24
Below 10.84 / 45.24 31.72 / -38.97 31.72 / 38.97 10.84 / -45.24
Grid E Above -32.70 / 33.46 -44.52 / -13.95 -44.52 / 13.95 -32.70 / -33.46
Below -32.70 / 33.46 -44.52 / -13.95 -44.52 / 13.95 -32.70 / -33.46
Above
Below
Above
Below
Punching shear load VEd, kN
Grid A 327.4 601.5 601.5 327.4
Grid B 609.6 990.7 990.7 609.6
Grid C 511.5 936.4 936.4 511.5
Grid D 609.6 990.7 990.7 609.6
Grid E 327.4 601.5 601.5 327.4
Summary 8
PUNCHING, v
Ed
/ v
Rdc Adjacent holes will increase values Without column heads
Grid A 2.270 2.107 2.107 2.270 No links
Grid B 2.101 1.640 1.640 2.101
Grid C 1.886 1.640 1.640 1.886 Some links
Grid D 2.101 1.640 1.640 2.101
Grid E 2.270 2.107 2.107 2.270 Many links
Very many
PUNCHING, v
Ed
/ v
Rd.max Adjacent holes will increase values v
Rd.max
(Mpa) = 6.020
Grid A 0.531 0.539 0.539 0.531 < 50%
Grid B 0.546 0.497 0.497 0.546
Grid C 0.458 0.470 0.470 0.458 50 to 75%
Grid D 0.546 0.497 0.497 0.546
Grid E 0.531 0.539 0.539 0.531 75 to 100%
FAILS
The Concrete Centre
The Concrete Centre
242
243
TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls
beams to BS EN 1991-1-1 using sub-frame analysis to derive
moments and shears. The intention is to provide the design and
analysis of up to six spans of continuous beams with columns
above and below. Spans may incorporate cantilevers, xed ends
or knife-edge supports. There are three main sheets: MAIN!,
ACTIONS! and SPANS!
MAIN!
load data.
cells. Entering a value of 5.0 in cell C18 will clear a line of data
in both the span and support data ready for input. Guidance on
input for the type of section and type of end condition of the
support is given under Operating instructions.
eff
, are entered manually,
moments.
The sheet has been set up with as many carry throughs as
possible, i.e. input cells are made equal to preceding input
cells to make the inputting of regular beams easier. Inputting
C18 as = C17 will insert 6.00 in the remaining spans: it will also
remove the grey conditional background to the remaining spans,
supports and loads and allow data entry. Deleting C18, indeed
C19, will blank out remaining spans, etc. Generally, values in red
or red backgrounds indicate either incorrect or excess data. For
instance, if knife-edge supports are required, entering K in cell
C24 will elicit red data to the right, which needs to be cleared
manually. Point loads should be at least 0.001m from a support.
(copy and paste values only is OK).
bars in the other direction have to be avoided - and allowed for
in the design.
situations the width of support can be input as being very small
to avoid under-design in bending.
eff
, are entered manually,
moments.
ACTIONS!
redistribution are always considered and selected in line 26 as
there are no default values.
SPANS!
supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
reinforcement sizes some intuition may be required to obtain
sensible arrangements of reinforcement. Non-existent spans are
blanked out. Support moments (including cantilever moments)
are considered at the face of the support. This may lead to
unequal amounts of reinforcement being designed for each side
of the support. See Bar!
EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both
Gk,sup

and
Gk,inf
.
Gk,sup
Gk,inf
the Run
Gk,inf

appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
subsequently changed. Using
Gk,inf
(=1.0) leads to higher hogging
moments in spans.
With regard to deection, the area of steel required, A
s
mm
2
/m,
shown under Design for the Centre part of the span, may have
been automatically increased in order to reduce service stress,
s
, and increase modication factors to satisfy deection criteria.
The percentage increase, if any, is shown under Deection.
An additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel to comply
with deection criteria, A
s

def
, = 1.5 x A
s

reqd
has been imposed in
line with UK Nation Annex, Note 5 to Table 7.4.N (BS). With
respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel enhancement
nor consideration of rotation at supports is included.
ed
(see CI
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.
244
WEIGHT!
when designed according to normal curtailment rules similar to
those dened in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand
side of the sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print
or the print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
Uls!
All spans loaded
Odd spans loaded
Even spans loaded
Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
Spans 4 & 5 loaded*
checking purposes.
Sls!
Bar!
Graf!
Refs!
and EN 1992.
any design calculations.
It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent
spans loaded arrangement by changing b to a in cell D7. BS
EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate
load arrangements. However to the UK National Annex, only
the alt spans and alternate spans load arrangements need to be
considered.
Notes!

245
TCC41 Continuous Beams/ MAIN!
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD 2000-2006 TCC
chg - FB625
fck 30 N/mm dg (mm) 20 W
k
(mm)Top 0.4 Top cover 20 mm
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 W
k
(mm)Btm 0.3 Btm cover 30 mm
fywk 500 N/mm c 1.50
c,dev
10 Side cover 30 mm
Steel class A Bay width 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN (6.10b)
SPAN 1 6.000 450 300 125 T 2170 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1715 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1715 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 5 Support steel in alt layer ?
SPAN 6 N
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7
Usage: Shopping With brittle partitions
LOADING DIAGRAM
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 169.2 421.3 385.2 421.3 169.2
MAX ULTIMATE 169.7 421.3 385.2 421.3 169.7
Max Imposed 32.8 80.0 68.8 80.0 32.8
Min Imposed -3.3 39.9 34.4 39.9 -3.3
The Concrete Centre
STATUS OK
245
246
TCC41 Continuous Beams/ ACTIONS!
1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 40.9 246.9 178.5 246.9 40.9 ~ kNm/m
1.000 0.800 1.000 0.800 1.000 ~ ~
1 2 3 4
Elastic M 169.8 108.9 108.9 169.8 ~ ~
Redistributed M 181.3 113.9 113.9 181.3 ~ ~
1.068 1.046 1.046 1.068 ~ ~
1 2 3
Elastic V 165.8 230.6 204.4 188.2 188.2 204.4
Redistributed V 169.7 222.4 201.6 192.6 192.6 201.6
4
Elastic V 230.6 165.8 ~ ~ ~ ~
ALL SPANS Above 19.0 -8.3 8.3 -19.0
LOADED Below 19.0 -8.3 8.3 -19.0
ALT SPANS Above 20.4 -15.6 8.6 15.6 -20.4
LOADED Below 20.4 -15.6 8.6 15.6 -20.4
SPAN No
SPAN No
SPAN No
The Concrete Centre
SUPPORT No
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
200
250
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
200
250
246
247
TCC41 Continuous Beams/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 45.3 181.3 172.4
1.00 1.07 0.80
DESIGN d mm 416.0 399.5 417.0
As mm 264 1099 1068
As
2
mm
As prov mm 339 As
2
prov 339 As prov 1100
As
2
2
prov 236
DEFLECTION L/d 15.02 Allowed 24.52 . .
SHEAR VEd kN 161.5 LINK 212.6
VRd,ct kN 52.7 8 75.6
VEd,max kN 409.0 NOMINAL 410.0
s req mm 305 382 221
LINKS H8 @ 300 for 600 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 200 for 1200
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 175.5 113.9 150.3
0.86 1.05 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 404.0 416.0
As mm 1089 683 917
As
2
mm
As prov mm 1100 As
2
As
2
2
prov 236
VRd,ct kN 75.6 8 73.6
s req mm 249 382 263
LINKS H8 @ 225 for 900 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 250 for 750
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
The Concrete Centre
.
.
.
ok ok ok
ok ok ok
247
248
TCC41 Continuous Beams/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 150.3 113.9 175.5
1.00 1.05 0.86
DESIGN d mm 416.0 404.0 417.0
As mm 917 683 1089
As
2
mm
As prov mm 1018 As
2
As
2
2
prov 236
SHEAR VEd kN 182.8 LINK V 191.8
VRd,ct kN 73.6 8 v 75.6
VEd,max kN 409.0 NOMINAL vc 410.0
s req mm 263 382 249
LINKS H8 @ 250 for 750 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 225 for 900
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 172.4 181.3 45.3
0.80 1.07 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 402.0 417.0
As mm 1068 1092 263
As
2
mm
As prov mm 1100 As
2
As
2
2
prov 314
VRd,ct kN 75.6 8 52.8
s req mm 221 382 305
LINKS H8 @ 200 for 1200 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 300 for 600
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
.
The Concrete Centre
ok ok ok
ok ok ok
.
248
249
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deections in
continuous beams according to BS EN 1992-1-1 and generally in
accordance with Concrete Society TR58, Deections in concrete
beams and slabs
[30]
.
Deection is very dependant on whether and how much of an
element cracks under service loads. Eurocode 2 recognises that
members in bending exist in a state partway between uncracked
and fully cracked. This spreadsheet considers construction and
design pattern loading in assessing whether a section is cracked
or not (i.e. whether the exural tensile strength of the concrete is
exceeded during these stages of the beams life). Once cracked,
it is assumed that a section remains cracked.
The spreadsheet is based on TCC41 but has an initial sheet
criteria required. Deections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS!
They are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading.
In SPANS!, the worst case is compared with the specied
serviceability criteria.
process mean that deection calculations carried out in this
manner can be inaccurate (and usually conservative) compared
with actual measured deections. For instance, a slabs deection
is very dependent upon whether the slab has cracked in bending
during construction or not. The calculated deections might be
regarded as being akin to a 95% condence limit that they will
not be exceeded in service.
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of
continuous beams using sub-frame analysis. There is user input
on each of the rst four sheets and choice of reinforcement for
each span is implicit. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN!. User
input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS!
JOBDATA!
calculation of deection to EN 1992-1-1. Users are expected to
this sheet. For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2. Reference
may be made to the How to Design leaet (due to be published
by the Concrete Centre during 2006) on calculating deections
for guidance on values to be used. The default values given in this
sheet are not unusual.
MAIN!
Input is identical to TCC41.
ACTIONS!
in line 21. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according
to the users preferences (see Table 1, page 14) in General Notes.
Requesting redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning
message in the remarks column.
SPANS!
calculations in Bar!
Gk,sup

and
Gk,inf
,
Gk,sup
Gk,inf
the Run -
Gk,inf
-
Gk,inf
moments in spans.
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
differences in depth or to comply with the minimum percentage
of span steel; practicality may dictate that the maximum number
of bars at each support should be used.
Ed
(see CI
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the total amount of reinforcement
required in the beam and per cubic metre.
250
treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with
the effects of designers and detailers preferences, rationalisation
etc.
Uls!
Sls!
Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references to
EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instances, service stress,
s
,
division by zero.
Def!
and for each load condition. For each point and loading stage it
considers moment, A
s
, A
s
, d, d
2
, uncracked neutral axis depth
- x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia I, uncracked moment capacity Mcr, distribution factor
- , z, nal x, concrete stresses
c
, curvature -1/r, slope and
curvature to calculate deection. The sheet is rather large and is
purposes.
Graf!
Refs!
parameters that have been used in the spread-sheet. These data
and EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data are current
when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent
design, designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this
sheet with any design calculations.
spans loaded arrangement by changing b to a in cell D6. BSEN
1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate load
arrangements. However to the UK National Annex only the all
spans and alternate load arrangements need to be considered.
Notes!
251
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ JOBDATA!
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD 2002-2006 BCA for RCC
chg - FB625
fck 35 N/mm dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 Btm cover 25 mm
fywk 500 N/mm c 1.50 Side cover 25 mm
Steel class B
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent = L / 250 7.4.1(5)
Degree of restraint 60% Max affecting partitions = L / 500 * 7.4.1(6)
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent 7.4.1(5)
Design Crack width, Wk = 0.4 mm top or 0.3 mm btm Table 7.1
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to Annex A) Curing time 3 days
cm
= 43 N/mm Table 3.1
cm
Self weight 17.34 17.34 17.34 17.34 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions/walls 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 28
Total 48.00 49.20 49.20 48.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Construction loading 14
E
t
E
t
E
t
kN/mm kN/mm kN/mm
Self weight 2.11 11.49 2.11 11.49 0.61 22.22
Partitions/walls 1.63 13.62 1.63 13.62
Other dead loads 1.41 14.87 1.41 14.87
Composite 1.75 13.02 1.49 14.35 0.53 23.42
(50% = nominal, 100% = severe)
To 70 years To 70 years To 28 days
The Concrete Centre
18 18 18
0
Quasi-permanent Total load Construction load
0
(t,t
0
)
SW + partitions
from 14 to 28 days
251
252
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ MAIN!
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625
Bay width 5000 mm Office Useage
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 6.000 450 300 125 T 2150 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1700 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1700 IMPOSED 1.50
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 3 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 4 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7
LOADING DIAGRAM
UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ Constr'n 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 165.4 417.7 380.7 417.7 165.4
ODD SPANS LOADED 166.1 350.3 312.5 353.1 95.0
MAX ULTIMATE 166.1 417.7 380.7 417.7 166.1
42.9 92.3 90.4 92.3 42.9
-4.5 47.4 44.9 47.4 -4.5
Max characteristic Imposed
Min characteristic Imposed
The Concrete Centre
STATUS OK
252
253
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ ACTIONS!
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm) Elastic Redistributed
1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 41.5 239.4 177.8 239.4 41.5
Redistributed M 41.5 191.5 160.0 191.5 41.5
1.000 0.800 0.900 0.800 1.000 ~ ~
1 2 3 4
Elastic M 171.0 117.4 117.4 171.0
Redistributed M 177.5 117.9 117.9 177.5
1.038 1.003 1.003 1.038 HOGS HOGS
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN) Elastic Redistributed
1 2 3
Elastic V 164.6 224.8 204.5 188.0 188.0 204.5
Redistributed V 166.1 216.8 200.9 190.4 190.4 200.9
4
Elastic V 224.8 164.6
Redistributed V 216.8 166.1
ALL SPANS Above 18.6 -4.1 4.1 -18.6
LOADED Below 18.6 -4.1 4.1 -18.6
ODD SPANS Above 20.8 -9.3 6.2 -2.6 -9.9
LOADED Below 20.8 -9.3 6.2 -2.6 -9.9
EVEN SPANS Above 9.9 2.6 -6.2 9.3 -20.8
LOADED Below 9.9 2.6 -6.2 9.3 -20.8
DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included
SPAN No 1 2 3 4
At striking 3.1 0.7 0.7 3.1 mm
Quasi permanent 8.0 3.4 3.4 8.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
SPAN No
SPAN No
The Concrete Centre
SUPPORT No
SPAN No
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
-15.0
-10.0
-5.0
0.0
5.0
253
254
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 44.4 177.5 172.8
d 1.00 1.04 0.80
DESIGN d mm 411.0 407.0 407.0
As mm 261 1056 1082
As
2
mm
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 B 12 3 B 12 4 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm 339 As
2
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 4 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As
2
2
prov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent = 8.04 < 24.00 Imposed = 2.18 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) =
mm
Affecting partitions/walls = 4.91 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
VRd,ct kN 56.5 8 82.3
s req mm 306 354 219
LINKS B8 @ 300 for 600 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 200 for 1200
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.09 ok 0.29 ok 0.30
ACTIONS M kNm 175.1 117.9 140.4
d 0.83 1.00 0.90
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 407.0
As mm 1098 701 860
As
2
mm
Layer 2
As prov mm 1257 As
2
Layer 2
As
2
2
prov 236
mm
VRd,ct kN 82.3 8 74.8
s req mm 241 354 257
LINKS B8 @ 225 for 900 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 250 for 750
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
ok
.
ok ok ok
.
ok ok
.
The Concrete Centre
254
255
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 140.4 117.9 175.1
d 0.90 1.00 0.83
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 407.0
As mm 860 701 1098
As
2
mm
Layer 2
As prov mm 942 As
2
Layer 2
As
2
2
prov 236
mm
VRd,ct kN 74.8 8 82.3
s req mm 257 354 241
LINKS B8 @ 250 for 750 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 225 for 900
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
ACTIONS M kNm 172.8 177.5 44.4
d 0.80 1.04 1.00
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 411.0
As mm 1082 1056 261
As
2
mm
Layer 2
As prov mm 1257 As
2
Layer 2
As
2
2
prov 236
mm
VRd,ct kN 82.3 8 56.5
s req mm 219 354 306
LINKS B8 @ 200 for 1200 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 300 for 600
legs No 2 2 2
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
.
ok ok
The Concrete Centre
.
ok
ok ok ok
255
256
This spreadsheet designs post-tensioned beam and one-way
spanning slab elements in accordance with BS EN 1992-1:2004.
In essence the spreadsheet checks a number of parameters:-
stresses at transfer,
stresses in service,
moments of resistance at ULS,
shear,
vibration,
deection,
neutral axis depth, and
reinforcement service stress
The spreadsheet is set out in several sheets.
JOBDATA! Denes load cases, various options and material
properties.
LOADS! Is where loadings, spans and section data are
entered.
CONTROL! Is where tendons and bonded reinforcement are
adjusted to nd a solution.
RESULTS! Summarises the design, analysis, checks and
outputs from the rest of the spreadsheet.
TYPICALC! Shows a typical longhand calculation for the rst
span.
DETAILS! Shows the workings for the moment distribution
for the various load cases, proles, prestress losses and checks
in some detail.
Def! Shows workings for deection at 1/20 points along each
span.
Gra! Provides the data for the graphs, and values generated
are used for checking.
Refs! Is where nationally determined parameters are set.
Users are referred to Concrete Society TR43 Post-tensioned
concrete oors Design Handbook
[33]
for further details of
methods and values used.
A maximum of three spans may be considered. Cantilevers are
not available. Shortening is calculated in the losses section, but is
not used to modify column moments. The effects of restraint to
both columns and prestress in the member must be considered.
The spreadsheet considers one direction at a time only.
The nub of this spreadsheet is CONTROL! page. The source
of any failures or missing information (e.g. no tendons or no
tendon height specied) will become apparent on CONTROL!
Users may wish to create a split window in this part of the
spreadsheet (Window/ Split) to obtain a more comprehensive
view. CONTROL! Also shows the results of the parameter checks
from RESULTS!
JOBDATA!
The rst sheet includes all the general and material input data
used in the subsequent sheets. Load combinations and load
factors are dened. The input under Options should be self-
explanatory. Some of the input is controlled via the combi-boxes
in the right margin. The choices have implications on the design
as shown below.
Stressing ends determines where prestressing losses occur.
Prestressing system Specifying unbonded or bonded
changes the prestress loss calculations. Prestress losses tend
to be higher with bonded tendons as wobble factors and
coefcients of friction are higher but using several strands in
a single duct can lead to overall economy, especially in more
heavily loaded beams. Bonded systems may require less
conventional reinforcement.
The exposure class to Eurocode 2 determines both the
permissible crack width and the allowable exural tensile
stresses in prestressed beams (and slabs).
The Slab or Beam pull-down varies shear requirements and
determines whether nominal top bonded reinforcement is
included in the spans or not. Nominal top steel is included
in mid-span of beams. If slabs are specied, the user may
choose to use nominal top steel to overcome hogging
moments or reduce deection in the spans. Invoking the
nominal bonded reinforcement in mid-span should overcome
most problems with hogging in say, dissimilar spans of slabs.
Beams requires a second input; slab type (type of slab
supported by the beam) alters parameters used in checking
vibration.
Normal curtailment rules for conventional reinforcement
are not necessarily satisfactory for post-tensioned slabs and
beams. Nonetheless the spreadsheet assumes that curtailment
occurs at 0.3 x span.
With regard to concrete, the usual minimum cylinder strength
used in prestressing is 32 MPa, although 40 MPa would be more
usual. Ambient temperatures during curing may be taken as 15C
for a UK summer, but otherwise may be dependent upon curing/
insulation regimes. Typically, long-term Relative Humidity may
be taken as 55% indoors, or 80% outdoors.
Under loading sequence, the ages of transfer and additional
loading are entered. These values are used to determine relevant
creep and shrinkage factors. These factors are case specic and
have been derived from Annex B of EC2.
Details of strand used in the UK are given at the bottom of the
sheet. Users should ensure that their chosen strand is readily
available. TR43 Post-tensioned concrete oors design handbook
gives typical values for (coefcient of friction), K (wobble
factors), Rel% (relaxation) and draw-in (mm).
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)
257
LOADS!
The top part of this page is for input of data for the sub-frame
analysis, i.e. dimensions and loads.
Input should be fairly self explanatory. It should be noted that
H is in the plane of the screen and b, bw etc. are at right angles
to the plane of the screen. Several warnings are given under
Operating Instructions and with conditional formatting should
data be incorrect.
Supports may be specied as being knife-edge by inputting K in
column D: remote ends of supporting columns may be either F
for xed, or P for pinned. The line can be left blank. A support
width (h below) can be used in conjunction with a K support so
that design moments at the face of support are used.
Data under Normal Direction are used for the vibration checks. The
number of bays affects possible modes of vibration, which is checked in
accordance with the original Concrete Society TR43
[14]
. The vibration
response factors calculated are accordance with Concrete Society
guidelines. Vibration should not be a problem in post-tensioned
slabs and beams. Normally, vibration response factors of 12 are
used for very busy ofces, 8 for normal ofces, or 4 for high
specication ofces or laboratories where vibration is critical.
Designers should be aware that the 2005 version of Concrete
Society TR43 Appendix G gives revised recommendations on
vibration. (At the time of releasing the Beta 3 version, it was
considered that these recommendations were unsuited to
spreadsheet Further guidance is being prepared by The Concrete
Centre). If vibration is considered to be critical more specialist
software and experience should be sought and used.
Loads specied should be characteristic and for the whole bay
width (not expressed as kN/m
2
unless a 1 m bay width is being
analysed). Under dead at transfer, the self-weight should be
input together with any other loads present at transfer. However,
designers should consider the load history of the slab to ensure
worst cases are checked, e.g. temporary loads while casting
oors above. Bay widths in the normal direction do not affect the
loading unless, of course, the user chooses to introduce a suitable
relationship (in the loads input).
The current conguration being designed is shown in a chart. This
gives a scale representation of the spans, supports, loads and an
idealised cross section of each member.
At the bottom of the page, charts also show representations of
the tendon proles and equivalent loads used in the analysis.
For the tendons, a reversed parabolic prole is used but
minimum lengths of straight tendon are used at the supports as
recommended by Khan(16). Service equivalent loads are shown:
those at transfer may be viewed at Gra! C368: N369.
CONTROL!
This page is the nub of the spreadsheet: it has a number of key
inputs and outputs. These include inputs of
P
i
/ P
j
(initial force/ jacking force),
P
f
/ P
j
(nal force/ jacking force),
number and height of tendons, and
amounts of conventional reinforcement.
There are also two charts. The efciency chart gives the user
an idea of how hard the section is working or how far it is out
or what is critical to the design. The second chart, ultimate limit
state moment envelope and moments of resistance (capacity),
should be used in conjunction with choosing amounts of bonded
reinforcement.
With regard to Tendons, the spreadsheet automatically
calculates a recommended number of tendons for each span
using an algorithm. The algorithm uses either the maximum
of the median stress levels, or the maximum permitted. The
spreadsheet calculates the minimum number of strands required
so that permissible concrete tensions or compressions are not
exceeded at either the initial or nal stages. The numbers of
tendons are then shown as recommended values, and the user
should override them as required. Once the number of tendons
for each span has been xed, the program attempts to nd an
optimum single level of initial prestress for all strands (this often
appears to be the maximum permissible). If the minimum force
required generates excessive stresses, the section is deemed to
have failed.
Tendons are assumed to be level through supports and follow a
parabolic prole between. The points of inection are taken to be
at 1/10 of the clear span points.
Besides number of tendons, the main user control is to adjust the
tendon heights. The recommended tendon heights given in row
16 should normally be used. Short and long-term prestress losses
are initially assumed by the spreadsheet and then actual losses
are calculated, based on the remaining data. This process results
in calculated and assumed losses being different. To equalise (or
balance) these, the Balance Losses button needs to be clicked
(in some cases more than once).
Details of bonded rebar should then be entered under
REINFORCEMENT (this may then require the Balance Losses
button to be clicked again). If the message in cell N46 reads
no links required, links may be omitted by entering zero in cell
D46.
The checks carried out are listed below.
Tendons (a)
Stresses at transfer (b)
Stresses in service (c)
ULS MOR (d)
Shear (e)
Vibration (f)
Deection (g)
Neutral axis depth
Rebar stress
258
In the spreadsheet, those that are unsatisfactory are highlighted
and directions are given for further information. These checks are
visualised in the efciency chart.
A second chart shows the ultimate limit state moment envelope
and the moments of resistance of the section (capacity). It is
intended that it is used in conjunction with choosing amounts of
bonded reinforcement.
RESULTS!
This page shows stresses at transfer and in service in both tabular
and chart form. It should be noted that, in keeping with current
practice, moments are considered at the face of columns. Thus
peak moments are not necessarily at column centrelines and
moments might be different each side of an internal column.
The convention used in the stress charts is:
Red squares tension, blue circles compression
Solid markers bottom, hollow markers top
Dotted lines permissible stresses
Below the stress diagrams, there are details of shear envelopes,
vibration and deection together with support reactions and
column moments.
TYPICALC!
This sheet is intended to illustrate typical calculations for a
particular point in a span in order to show how all the criteria
are satised. The sheet illustrates the transfer and service stress
checks and the calculation of Moment of Resistance carried out
in tabular form in Gra! The point chosen is at 0.3L in the rst span
and is highlighted in Gra!
DETAILS!
Over nine pages, DETAILS! shows detailed calculations regarding
section properties, distribution factors, moment distribution
used for the sub-frame analysis, proling constants, pre-stressing
losses, balanced loads, ULS moment and shear checks, and nally
vibration.
Def!
The deection sheet gives details of calculations dealing with
defections.
Gra!
Graf! provides the data for the charts within CONTROL! and
RESULTS! That show:
the conguration and loads,
tendon prole,
equivalent loads,
ULS moments and capacities,
shear envelopes,
deections,
stresses at transfer and
stresses in service
Each chart is plotted at 1/20 points along each span. Many values
within Gra! are used and checked for being minima or maxima
for the various criteria. For instance it may be here that problems
with hogging moments are found.
Refs!
This sheet comprises Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs)
contained within in the UKs National Annexes to EN1990 (basis
of design) and to BS EN 1992-1-1. This page should be reviewed
each time the spreadsheet is used to ensure the values remain
valid for the UK or are valid for the country where the works are
to be carried out or changed to suit. It is suggested that this page
is printed out to accompany submissions of calculations that
include this spreadsheet. It should be noted that it is possible
to switch on the adjacent spans loaded by changing b to a in
cell D11. BS EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and
alternate load arrangement. However to the UK National Annex,
only the all spans and alternate load arrangements need to be
considered.
Notes!
259
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 269
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD 2005 TCC chg - FB625
LOAD COMBINATIONS
TRANSFER Transfer prestress + dead load at transfer
Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on all spans NOTES
RARE Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on odd spans INPUT IS UNDERLINED.
Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on even spans
Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on all spans
FREQUENT Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on odd spans
Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on even spans USAGE
Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on all spans
Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on odd spans
Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on even spans
Final prestress + factored dead and imposed load on all spans VIBRATION
ULTIMATE Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on odd spans Limiting reponse factor
Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on even spans R = 8
ULS LOADING PATTERN min max DEFLECTION
Dead 1.25 1.25 Limit QP deflection to L/ 250
Imposed 0 1.50 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) Limit after construction to L/ 500
OPTIONS Exposure class is Prestress system is unbonded and stressed from left end
Beam supporting solid slab W
max
, mm = 0.3
Jacking force /f
pk
= 0.8 Top bonded rebar in spans? Yes (Helps to reduce deflections - recommended)
Slab type S (S)olid, (R)ibbed or (W)affle, supported by beam Damping, (1% to 4%) 1.5%
MATERIALS CONCRETE f
ck
= 40 E
cm
= 35.22
c,max
= 18.00
t,max
= 5.09
At transfer, 4 days, f
ck
(i) = 26.54 E
cm
(i) = 31.91
c,max
(i) = 11.94
t,max
(i) = 3.66
Cement type R Curing time (days) = 3
c
= 1.50
Ave ambient during curing = 18C Longterm R/H % 55 .
STRAND f
pk
= 1860 A
ps
, mm = 100 = 0.060 K = 0.0050
E
ps
= 195 Rel % = 2.5
, draw in =
6 Depth to strand centre = 41
REBAR f
yk
= 500 Grade A COVERS Top Bottom Sides
m
= 1.15 to links 25 25 25
LOADING SEQUENCE Loading sequence for assessment
2
= 0.3 Rare combination
Load @ Age f
ctm
f
ctm,fl E
cm
(t) Load E
cm
(t)
kN/m days MPa MPa Creep GPa kN/m Creep GPa
Dead at transfer 14.63 4 2.52 2.71 2.12 11.31 14.63 2.12 11.31
Applied dead 42.00 30 3.51 3.77 1.65 13.30 42.00 1.65 13.30
Quasi-permanent imposed 7.50 - = - 25.00
COMBINED 64.13 - 1.76 12.78 81.63 1.73 12.89
NOTES on MATERIALS
BRITISH LOW RELAXATION STRAND
Type Dia Area f
pk Weight RELAXATION at 0.7f
pk
Standard 15.2 139 1670 1.090 20 40 60 80 100
12.5 93 1770 0.730 1.8 3.5 5.1 7.5 10.7
Super 15.7 150 1770 1.180
12.9 100 1860 0.785
Compact 15.2 165 1820 1.295
12.7 112 1860 0.890
FRAMES ARE ASSUMED TO BE
BRACED
XC2, XC3, XC4
Design hypothetical
tensile stresses to limit
cracking
Ambient C
SLS 7
QUASI-
PERMANENT
Relaxation
SLS 4
SLS 10
SLS 9
SLS 8
ULS 1
ULS 3
ULS 2
The Concrete Centre
SLS 5
SLS 6
SLS 3
SLS 1
SLS 2
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 - GENERAL DATA
Office
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ JOBDATA!
259
260
Dimensions and Loads
SPANS
L m H mm b
w
mm h
f
mm Section b
eff
mm No Bays
Span 1 12.000 525 1800 200 T 3000 5
Span 2 12.500 525 1800 200 T 3000 5
Span 3
SUPPORTS Above m H mm b mm End cond Below m H mm b mm End cond
Support 1 4.000 300 600 F
Support 2 4.000 300 600 F
Support 3 K
Support 4
CONFIGURATION
LOADING UDLs~kN/m (char), PLs~kN (char), Position~m
Dead at Applied Imposed Position Loaded Dead at Applied Imposed Position Loaded
SPAN 1 transfer Dead Load from left Length SPAN 3 transfer Dead Load from left Length
UDL 14.63 42.00 25.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
SPAN 2
UDL 14.63 42.00 25.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL
TENDON PROFILE (heights to strand centre: see heights specified under TENDONS below)
EQUIVALENT LOADS in service
VALID DESIGN
GLOBAL STATUS
The Concrete Centre
NORMAL DIRECTION
SLAB supporting Solid Slab, Exposure class XC2, XC3, XC4, Wk = 0.3 mm, fck = 40, Stressed from Both Ends
Bay width m
6.000
6.000
295
43 41
295
484
169 kN/m
0 kN/m
266 kN/m
301 kN/m
222 kN/m
0 kN/m
-57 kN/m -50 kN/m
0 kN/m
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ LOADS!
260
261
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls
Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS P
j
= 149 kN P
i
/A = 2.18 MPa max
93.3% 90.4% 100.0%
90.9% 89.1% 100.0%
87.7% 84.9% 100.0%
No of strands
Recommended 10 10 10 13 13 13 0 0 0
Use 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 0
Height mm 295 41 484 484 41 295 295 0
P
i
kN 2581 2545 2498 2498 2453 2421 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 252.5 342.8 315.2 228.5 0.0 0.0
P
f
kN 2431 2377 2349 2350 2282 2274 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Balance Load kN 233.0 316.4 292.2 211.9 0.0 0.0
CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY'
Tendons (a) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK
Shear (e) OK
Vibration (f) OK - see note
Deflection (g) OK
Rebar stress OK
GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT Input bonded rebar arrangement (Support bars cutailed at 0.3L)
Supt 1 btm top Supt 2 btm top Supt 3 btm top Supt 4
Required at SLS 2638 1590 1898 2638 2723 1898 2638 0 0 0
Main bar 20 16 20 20 25 20 20 16 16 12
No 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 8 10 15
A
s
provided 2827 1810 2827 2827 3927 2827 2827 1608 2011 1696
% 0.299% 0.191% 0.299% 0.299% 0.416% 0.299% 0.299% 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Link = 8
No of legs 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8
(d) ULS MOMENTS With bonded reinforcement
Mu 60.9 633.8 948.7 945.9 872.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1128.8 1418.5 1543.6 1544.1 1773.0 1099.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
The Concrete Centre
P
i
/P
j
P30/Pj
P
f
/P
j
484 295
Span 1 Span 2 0
ULS MOMENT ENVELOPE/MOR
-2000
-1500
-1000
-500
0
500
1000
1500
2000
96%
9%
20%
61%
63%
37%
81%
51%
44%
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120%
g
e
c(T)
b(T)
a
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ CONTROL!
261
262
Results (2)
(e) SHEAR Link = 8
V
Ed
- V
td 444.4 566.1 610.3 512.4 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
cracked ? N Y Y N N N
(V
Ed
- V
td
)/V
Rdc 0.661 0.854 0.921 0.783 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
No of legs 4 4 4 4 8 8
Link spacing 0 0 0 0 0 0
(f) VIBRATION Span 1 Span 2 Span 3
Response factor 0.62 0.73 0.00
OK OK OK
(g) DEFLECTION
At transfer Span 1 = -4.2mm Span 2 = -4.2mm .
Quasi-permanent Span 1 = 12mm < 48 OK Span 2 = 26.3mm < 50 OK . .
After construction Span 1 = 11.7mm < 24 OK Span 2 = 23.9mm < 25 OK . .
SUPPORT REACTIONS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4
ULS 1 534.3 1557.3 559.6 0.0 kN
ULS 2 534.3 1322.9 325.2 0.0 kN
ULS 3 303.0 1338.6 559.6 0.0 kN
Dead 274.0 823.7 289.6 0.0 kN
Imposed 114.8 378.5 119.2 0.0 kN
COLUMN MOMENTS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 54.82 15.81 0.00 0.00 kNm
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 105.14 -100.24 0.00 0.00 kNm
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below -92.58 118.22 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 1
ULS 2
ULS 3
The Concrete Centre
Span 1 Span 2 0
ULS SHEAR ENVELOPE (V
Ed
)
0.0 0.0
-727.3
571.3
-594.0
758.6
-1000
-500
0
500
1000
MAX DEFLECTIONS (mm)
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ RESULTS!
262
263
TYPICAL CALCULATION
for Span 1 at 3.60 m from C/L of LH support EC2 Ref
Class XC2, XC3, XC4 Tee section, h = 525 mm, bw = 1800 mm hf = 200 mm, bf =3000 mm. Table 4.1
Ac = 1185000mm, Z top = 120.0E6 mm, and Z bottom = 93.3E6 mm
Tendons are unbonded, Ap = 100mm, fpk = 1,860 N/mm2 and 75.0 mm from soffite
There are 18 tendons, jacked to 1,488 N/mm or 80% fpk
Prestress losses at this section are 121.4 kN at transfer and 283.3 kN longterm 5.10.5 & 6
(b) STRESSES at TRANSFER
M = 311.4 kNm hogging, and prestressing force = 2,557.0 kN
< 11.94 N/mm allowed 5.10.2.2(5)
< 3.66 N/mm allowed TR43
(c) STRESSES in SERVICE
Frequent M = 314.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,395.1 kN
< 18.00 N/mm allowed 5.10.2.2(5)
Quasi-permanent M = 260.4 kNm sagging
< 5.09 N/mm allowed TR43
(d) MOR at ultimate limit state
M = 611.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,395.1 kN
5.10.8(2)
3.1.7(3)
Fig 3.5
MOR = (2,317.6 ( 525 - 75.0 - 45.65 / 2) + 786.8 x (484 - 45.65 / 2)) / 1000
Max compression (top) = 314.7E6 / 120.0E6 + 2,395.1E3 / 1185E3 = 4.19 N/mm
Max tension (bottom) = 260.4 / 93.3 - 2,395.1 / 1185 = 1.35 N/mm
Max compression (bottom) = M/Z + P/A = -311.4E3 / 120.0 + 2,557.0 / 1185 = 5.50 N/mm
Max tension (bottom) = M/Z - P/A = 311.4E3 / 120.0 - 2,557.0 / 1185 = 0.44 N/mm
The Concrete Centre
Total tensile force = 2,317.6 + 786.8 = 3,104.4 kN
Compression block depth, x = 1000 x 3,104.4 / 22.67 / 3000 = 45.65 mm
= 1,352.8 kNm > 611.7 ok
fcd = 1 x 0.85 x 40/1.5 = 22.67 N/mm
Rebar force = 500 / 1.15 x 1,810 / 1000 = 786.8 kN
pe = 1000 x 2,395.1 / 18 / 100 = 1,330.6 N/mm
Reinforcement d = 484 mm
Tendon force = 0.9 (2,395.1 + 100 /1000 x 18 x 100) = 2,317.6 kN
As = /4 x 16 x 9 = 1,810 mm
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ TYPICALC!
263
264
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or anged
beams, to prEN 1992-1, using sub-frame analysis to derive
moments and shears. The intention is to provide the design
and analysis of up to six spans of continuous wide beams with
columns above and below. Spans may incorporate cantilevers,
xed ends or knife-edge supports. There are three main sheets:
MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!
This spreadsheet is very similar to TCC41.xls, but caters for wide
beams by allowing two sizes of bar in one layer and by allowing
top steel in the span to be augmented to help satisfy span:depth
criteria.
area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar,
spacing rules or
number of legs of links required in shear.
Where the latter two may govern, two diameters of bending steel
are allowed in the same layer to avoid excessive over-specication
of reinforcement.
Input to the right of SPANS! allows top steel to be increased to
satisfy span:depth criteria. The designer and detailer are expected
to rationalise this output (but always remembering that bar
spacings should not be increased).
The size of link to be used remains as manual input.
MAIN!
load data.

cells. Entering a value of 5.0 in cell C20 will clear a line of data
in both the span and support data ready for input. It will also
initiate red data that will clear as the appropriate missing data is
added. Guidance on input for the type of section and type of end
condition of the support is given under Operating instructions.
The dimensions of the ange widths, beff, are entered manually,
moments.
The brittle partitions switch affects the span:depth modier for
spans greater than 7 m.
The sheet has not been set up with many carry-throughs
(making the value of one cell equal another).
Users may choose to emulate cell D17 in other cells in their saved
version to speed input. Generally, values in red or red backgrounds
indicate either incorrect or excess data. For instance, if knife-edge
supports are required, entering K in cell C25 will elicit red data to
the right, which needs to be cleared manually.
bars in the other direction have to be avoided - and allowed for
in the design.
situations (where the beam softs are the same depth), the width
of support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
ACTIONS!
redistribution are always considered as at line 26 there are no
default values.
SPANS!
supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for link
sizes (e.g. at cell I22) and the amount by which span top steel
should be increased (e.g. at cell N21). Non-existent spans are
blanked out. Support moments (including cantilever moments)
are considered at the face of the support. This may lead to
unequal amounts of reinforcement being designed for each side
of the support. See Bar!
Beneath Operating instructions, both maximum and minimum
main bar diameters may be selected. Also, for each span, the
percentage of span top steel may be increased in order to improve
the permissible span:depth ratio.
= 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel
to comply with deection criteria, As def, = 1.5 x As reqd, i.e. an
allowable increase of 1.5 As req ie.50% bottom span steel, has
been imposed in line with Note 5 to Table 7.4 N(BS) in the UK
National Annex.
265
Gk,sup

and
Gk,inf
.
Gk,sup
Gk,inf
the Run
Gk,inf

Gk,inf
moments in spans.
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding together
the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the appropriate
additional tensile forces due to shear F
Ed
(see CI 9.2.1.3). It is
assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will be curtailed at
0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at 0.3 span.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the total amount of reinforcement
required in the beam and per cubic metre.
treated as estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of
designers and detailers preferences, rationalisation etc.
Uls!
All spans loaded
Odd spans loaded
Even spans loaded
Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
Spans 4 & 5 loaded*
checking purposes.
Sls!
Bar!
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required at
either of these points is provided throughout the span.
Graf!
Refs!
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet.
These data reect the values given in draft UK National Annexes
for EN 1990 and EN 1992.
spans loaded arrangement by changing b to a in cell D6. BS
EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate load
arrangements. However to the UK National Annex only the cell
spans and alternate load arrangements need to be considered.
Notes!
266
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD 2003-2006 TCC
chg - FB625
MATERIALS . COVERS (to links)
fck 35 N/mm dg (mm) 20 W
k
(mm)Top 0.4 Top cover 27 mm
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 W
k
(mm)Btm 0.3 Btm cover 27 mm
fywk 500 N/mm c 1.50
c,dev
10 Side cover 27 mm
Steel class A Bay width 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 5.500 390 1200 125 T 2600 min max
SPAN 2 8.000 390 1200 125 T 2900 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 8.500 390 1200 125 T 3000 IMPOSED 1.50
Support 1 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 5 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 6
Support 7
LOADING DIAGRAM
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m) Office usage
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 25.0 4.00 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 245.2 952.5 1078.4 889.1 117.4
MAX ULTIMATE 278.6 952.5 1078.4 889.1 169.4
Max Imposed 80.8 232.9 273.5 211.3 63.5
Min Imposed -22.3 75.8 131.2 44.4 -34.7
Usage: Office With brittle partitions
The Concrete Centre
STATUS OK
266
267
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!
BENDING MOMENTS (kNm)
1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 63.7 602.9 812.5 601.2 15.4 ~ kNm/m
1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 1.000 ~ ~
1 2 3 4
Elastic M 250.3 488.5 475.2 100.7 ~ ~
Redistributed M 250.3 487.7 482.8 100.7 ~ ~
1.000 0.998 1.016 1.000 ~ ~
1 2 3
Elastic V 278.6 434.6 516.0 554.2 552.9 515.8
Redistributed V 278.6 434.6 517.8 541.8 538.6 514.8
4
Elastic V 377.1 169.4 ~ ~ ~ ~
ALL SPANS Above 22.1 18.9 3.3 -30.3 1.0
LOADED Below 22.1 18.9 3.3 -30.3 1.0
ALT SPANS Above 31.9 35.1 30.6 -39.9 9.4
LOADED Below 31.9 35.1 30.6 -39.9 9.4
SPAN No
The Concrete Centre
SUPPORT No
SPAN No
SPAN No
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
267
268
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS
ACTIONS M kNm 62.6 250.3 501.3
1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 348.0 345.0 340.5
As mm 435 1756 3767
As
2
mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As prov mm 701 As
2
BTM STEEL Layer 1
0 . 0 . 0 .
As
2
2
prov 609
VRd,ct kN 201.6 10 278.6
s req mm 415 415 415
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 526.6 487.7 636.4
d 1.00 1.00 0.86
DESIGN d mm 340.5 343.0 340.5
As mm 3982 3442 4958
As
2
mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As prov mm 4064 As
2
BTM STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As
2
2
prov 609
VRd,ct kN 282.8 10 304.0
s req mm 343 415 326
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
7H10 + 3H8
8H16 + 2H12
6H25 + 3H20 7H16 + 3H12
4H12 + 2H10 4H12 + 2H10
ok ok ok
.
ok ok ok
7H25 + 2H20 9H25 + 2H20
10H20 + 2H16
6H16 + 2H12
4H12 + 2H10 4H12 + 2H10
The Concrete Centre
268
269
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!
ACTIONS M kNm 635.3 482.8 525.3
d 0.85 1.02 1.00
DESIGN d mm 340.5 343.0 340.5
As mm 4949 3408 3972
As
2
mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As prov mm 5046 As
2
BTM STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As
2
2
prov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 24.78 Allowed 26.19 As auto-increased by 6.9 %
SHEAR VEd kN 520.1 LINK V 496.3
VRd,ct kN 304.0 10 v 282.8
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL vc 1526.8
s req mm 328 415 346
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
ACTIONS M kNm 478.5 100.7 25.2
d 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 340.5 348.0 348.0
As mm 3575 700 175
As
2
mm 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As prov mm 3927 As
2
BTM STEEL Layer 1
. . .
As
2
2
prov 609
VRd,ct kN 279.6 10 201.6
s req mm 415 415 415
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars
max V ok ok
Deflection ok
9H25 + 2H20 7H12 + 5H10
4H12 + 2H10 11H20 + 2H16
7H25 + 2H20
The Concrete Centre
ok ok ok
ok ok ok
4H12 + 2H10
8H25
4H12 + 2H10
7H20 + 2H16
8H10 + 2H8
7H10 + 3H8
4H12 + 2H10
269
270
Conventional column load take-downs by hand can be time-
consuming. This spreadsheet emulates conventional column
design to Eurocode 2 by providing load take down from inputs of
location, dimensions, levels and loads to give design axial loads
and moments per oor, and to foundations. TCC51.xls is intended
as a stand-alone column design spreadsheet for use when a sub-
frame analysis is not available or is unwarranted. This spreadsheet
also determines the area and arrangement of steel required (A
s
)
for all lifts in RESULTS! or individual lifts in CALC!.
This spreadsheet is intended for use with braced columns only.
Moments and vertical loads for unbraced structures should be
derived from a frame analysis, and then should be designed via
TCC53 or TCC54.
Load distribution is according to shear force factors from Tables in
the ISE/ ICE Manual for the design of reinforced concrete building
structures to EC2
(28)
. Column moments are assessed via a limited
moment distribution routine making conservative assumptions
regarding remote spans etc.
There is no double counting of oor slabs due to allowances for
oor slabs in design of, therefore reactions from, edge beams
spanning parallel to oor slab span.
As a default the level with maximum axial load with concurrent
maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen for
consideration in CALC! (long-hand design). The user may
investigate other levels by choosing the appropriate level via the
arrows on the right hand side of CALC!.
INPUT!
All relevant materials, geometric and loading data is input on this
sheet.
After materials data, number of storeys, column location and
base condition should be selected. If the number of storeys is
reduced below 12, rows at the foot of this page will be browned
out so that the correct number of storeys is displayed.
The base condition refers to whether or not the column should
be xed or pinned at foundation level.
Under column location, the selection from a list of ve differing
locations should be self-explanatory. Double penultimate
means a column that is penultimate in both directions. As this
selection is made, the key diagram changes to indicate relevant
plan dimensions with the column to be designed highlighted in
red.
The X and Y spans should then be input together with edge
distances. Next, level references should be entered in cells B28 to
B39, and the general, geometric and loading data for each oor
in the remainder of rows 28 to 39. Slab spans may be parallel to
x or y, or two-way spanning.
If there are more than twelve storeys in a structure, upper storeys
(>12) may be calculated rst with No entered in the column
above cell, D22. For the remaining lower storeys, cell D22 may
then be set to Yes, with data related to the upper storeys being
entered on row 22 and cells M27 to P27.
The check box to the top right hand side of this page allows the
user to select whether or not EN 1990 loading equations 6.10a
and 610b should be used to determine ULS loads and moments.
This may make a considerable difference to results, and it is
recommended that this box should be un-checked unless the
user is fully familiar with these equations.
When all input on this page has been completed, go to the next
page called:
RESULTS!
This page displays the following results:
Characteristic dead and imposed loads applied to the column
at each level, including imposed load reduction factors to
EN1991 and its UK National annex.
Cumulative loads at each level, both characteristic and
ultimate (N
Ed
).
The summation of ultimate initial moments and additional
moments due to slenderness on each axis.
The reinforcement arrangement required at each level, based
on a user specied number of bars.
The number of main bars is entered at each level or the Set all
lifts to button may be used to insert the specied number of
bars in each lift of the column. Initially and after changing the
number of bars at any level, CHECK buttons to the right will be
highlighted in red to indicate that the arrangement has yet to be
determined. Then clicking either an individual CHECK button or
the Check all levels button will calculate bar arrangements.
The recommended procedure is to initially set all lifts to a standard
number of bars, click the Check all levels button, then change
and check any lifts that appear unsuitable or where NO FIT
appears under the number of bars. It should also be remembered
that the concrete grade for each lift may be amended in cells
O27 to O39 of INPUT!
CALC!
This sheet shows detailed calculations for a single lift of the
column. As a default, the level with maximum axial load with
TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls
271
concurrent maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen
for consideration here. The user may investigate other levels by
choosing the appropriate level via the arrows on the right hand
side of the page.
After summarising the actions on the chosen lift of column, a
check is made to determine whether or not the column is slender,
then the section is analysed to nd the moments of resistance
about both axes for the given axial load. On the second page of
CALC!, rstly moments due to imperfections are calculated and
it is decided about which axis these will be critical. Design rst
order moments (M
0Ed
) are then derived by adding imperfection
(M
i)
moments to the basic rst order design moment (m
0E
).
Finally, single axis and biaxial checks are carried out to ensure
that applied moments are less than the sections moments of
resistance.
Select!
On this page, checks for the chosen number of bars at each level
are carried out for six different bar diameters. The smallest bar
diameter that passes all checks is then selected for display on
RESULTS!
Col~M
On this page, exural stiffnesses are calculated for all beams and
columns and limited moment distributions are carried out to
determine column moments.
Slen!
Here the effective heights of columns and slenderness ratios
are determined from relative rotational stiffnesses, as well as
nominal moments due to imperfections.
M2!
This is where second order moments are calculated, for each lift
and for each possible bar diameter.
Secs!
Here the section moments of resistance are determined for the
given axial load at each level, for each possible bar diameter and
on both axes.
Gra!
This page contains data for generation of the diagrams.
Refs!
Relevant National Annex values are tabulated here, both for BS
EN 1990 and BS EN 1992. These values are editable for use in
other countries.
Notes!
This page contains details of spreadsheet status, revision history
and program assumptions, as well as a standard disclaimer
clause.
272
TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ INPUT!
BigBucks PLC BRACED FRAMES ONLY Date Page
Column G14 03-Jul-06 282
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN for RECTANGULAR COLUMNS to EN 1992: 2004 Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD 2004 - 2005 TCC - FB625
Beam fck (N/mm) 30 No of storeys (this sheet) Column Location EN 1990
Concrete density (kN/m ) 25 Allow 610a & 6.10b ?
fyk (N/mm ) 500 Span X2 (,t0) = 2.00
Steel class A No
Base condition
Edge distances (mm) COLUMN SECTION
Span Y1 3.750 Span X1 West Min column cover (mm) 30
Span Y2 4.000 Span X2 North
c,dev
(mm) 10
Column above? No Storeys Gk Qk 0 M0EX M0EY
DIMENSIONS LOADS
SLAB Span
Solid hf Direction || to mm mm fck Height (m) gk qk Cat N-S E-W
Level mm X, Y or B h bw h bw h bw h bw H B N/mm floor to floor kN/m kN/m A to K kN/m kN/m
.
Roof 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 1.50 I 0.00 0.00
9 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
8 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
7 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
6 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
5 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
4 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
3 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
2 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
1 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
Span Y1 Span X2
KEY PLAN
6.000
5.500
Beam spans (m)
Span Y2 Span X1
SLAB BEAM SIZES (mm) COLUMN BELOW
10
Span X1
S
p
a
n

Y
1
S
p
a
n

Y
2
0
0
Checked
CHG
Project
Client
Location
The Concrete Centre
Made by
Rod
Yes
BEAM LINE LOADS
Double penultimate
Pinned
272
273
TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ RESULTS!
Location Column G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 283
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625
Braced frames only
Below G
k
Q
k No Bar
Level from above 0.0 0.0 NEd X-X Y-Y and Layout
Loaded area Category 164.8 41.3
M0Ed
5.15 2.54
27.536 I reduction 0.0 267.7 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 164.8 41.3 5.15 2.54 H12
M0Ed
5.12 1.42
27.536 B reduction 15.1 616.1 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
5.12 1.42
27.536 B reduction 15.1 964.5 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
5.11 0.88
27.536 B reduction 43.6 1270.1 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
5.55 1.33
27.536 B reduction 43.6 1582.1 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
5.52 2.16
27.536 B reduction 43.6 1894.1 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
6.20 1.74
27.536 D reduction 52.1 2275.6 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
6.17 1.45
27.536 D reduction 52.8 2656.0 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
6.18 0.96
27.536 D reduction 53.2 3035.9 M2 0.00 0.00
M0Ed
7.80 0.20
27.536 D reduction 53.5 3415.3 M2 45.29 30.20
M0Ed
#N/A #N/A
27.536 0.00 reduction #N/A #N/A M2 #N/A #N/A
Clear height 0.000 Cumulative 1809.8 #N/A #N/A #N/A #N/A
M0Ed
#N/A #N/A
27.536 0.00 reduction #N/A #N/A M2 #N/A #N/A
Clear height 0.000 Cumulative 1809.8 #N/A #N/A #N/A #N/A
The Concrete Centre
Characteristic Design Reinforcement
Roof
6
4
4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 6
6
4
4
Moments about
6
4
4
4
4
273
274
TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ CALC!
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Section calculation for column below level 2 300 x 450 with 6 H25 bars
fcd = cc x fck /c = 0.85 x 35 /1.5 = 19.83 N/mm
fyd = fyk /s = 500 /1.15 = 434.78 N/mm
STATUS
ACTIONS
from load take-down, NEd = 3,035.9 kN n = 1000 x 3,035.9 /19.83 /300 /450 = 1.134 5.8.8.3 (3)
from bending analysis, M0xx top = 0.10 kNm M0yy top = 1.42 kNm
M0 are applied moments
M0xx btm = 0.12 kNm M0yy btm = 0.27 kNm
combining top and bottom moments, m0Exx = 0.11 kNm and m0Eyy = 0.96 kNm (5.32)
SLENDERNESS
from flexural stiffness analysis, L0x = 2.576 m and L0y = 3.084 m (5.15)
rxx = (300 /12) = 86.60 mm ryy = (450 /12) = 129.90 mm gross section
therefore, x = 2,576 /86.60 = 29.74 and y = 3,084 /129.90 = 23.74
efx = 2 x 0.741 = 1.481 efy = 2 x 0.611 = 1.222 (5.19)
limx = 22x2.538/(1+0.2 x 1.481)/1.134 = 40.46 limy = 22x1.893/(1+0.2 x 1.222)/1.134 = 31.42 (5.13N)
29.74 40.46 therefore column is short 23.74 31.42 therefore column is short
SECTION ANALYSIS
cu3 = 0.0035 and c3 = 0.00175 from Table 3.1 = 0.80 = 1.00 3.19) to (3.22)
.fcd = 19.83 x 1.00 = 19.83 N/mm net fyd = 434.78 - 19.83 = 414.95 N/mm
d
2
= 30 + 8 + 25/2 = 50.5 mm As = x 25 /4 x 6 = 2,945 mm
About xx axis About yy axis
d = 300 - 50.5 = 249.5 mm d = 450 - 50.5 = 399.5 mm
(1-c3/c3u)h = 300(1 - 175 /350) = 150 mm (1-c3/c3u)h = 450(1 - 175 /350) = 225 mm hinge point
there are 2 bars in xx faces and 3 bars in yy faces (total of 6 bars)
Neutral axis depth x = 305.33 mm x = 476.29 mm by iteration
Conc comp force, Fc = MIN(0.8 x 305.33 ; 300)450 x 19.83 /1000 Fc = MIN(0.8 x 476.29 ; 450)300 x 19.83 /1000
= 2,180.1 kN = 2,267.1 kN
Limiting strain, c max = c3 /[x-(1-c3/c3u)h]x 0.00344 c max = c3 /[x-(1-c3/c3u)h]x 0.00332 Figure 6.1
Intermediate bars are at 150, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 & 0 and at No intermediate bars from column face
-strain at main compression steel = 3,440(305.3- 50.5)/305.3 = 2,871 sc = 3,317(476.3- 50.5)/476.3 = 2,965
-strains at intermediate bars = 1,750, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 si = No intermediate bars
-strain at main tension steel = 3,440(305.3- 249.5)/305.3 = 629 st = 3,317(476.3- 399.5)/476.3 = 535
Net stress at main compression steel = Min(200000s, fyd) - .fcd = 414.95 sc = Min(200000s, fyd) - .fcd = 414.95 N/mm
Net stresses at intermediate bars = 330.2, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 si = No intermediate bars N/mm
Net stress at main tension steel = Min(200000s, fyd) = 125.80 st = Min(200000s, fyd) = 106.95 N/mm
Force at main compression steel = 414.95 x 982 /1000 = 407.4 kN Fsc = 414.95 x 1,473 /1000 = 611.1 kN
Forces at intermediate bars = Ass = 324.1 kN Fsi = Ass = 0.0 kN
Force at main tension steel = 125.80 x 982 /1000 = 123.5 kN Fst = 106.95 x 1,473 /1000 = 157.5 kN
NRd = Fc + Fs = 2,180.1 + 407.4 + 324.1 + 123.5 NRd = 2,267.1 + 611.1 + 0.0 + 157.5
= 3,035.1 kN NEd = 3,035.7 kN NEd value of x selected to
Conc lever arm, z = Max(d - x /2, d - h/2) = 127.37 mm z = 208.98 mm
match NEd & NRd
MRd = fcz + Fsa - NRd(d - h/2) = 277.67 + 113.32 - 301.99 MRd = 473.80 + 213.26 - 529.73
Moment of resistance, MRd =
89.00 kNm
MRd =
157.33 kNm
The Concrete Centre
Valid design
274
275
TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ CALC!
Client BigBucks PLC
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004
Section calculation for column below level 2 continued
IMPERFECTIONS n = MIN(1, MAX(, 2 /4.5) = 0.943 5.2 (5)
Mi x = 0.943 x 0.005 x 2.576 x 500 = 6.07 kNm Mi y = 0.943 x 0.005 x 3.084 x 500 = 7.27 kNm (5.1) & (5.2)
Inperfections critical about xx axis, therefore set Miy = 0 5.8.9 (2)
SECOND ORDER MOMENTS
x = 0.35 + 35 /200 - 29.74 /250 = 0.406 y = 5.8.8.3 (4)
isx = 81.24 mm isy = 174.50 mm radius of gyration of steel
dx = 231.2 mm dy = 399.5 mm 5.8.8.3 (2)
Kx = Max(1, 1 + 0.406 x 1.481) = 1.602 Ky = Max(1, 1 + 0.430 x 1.222) = 1.526 5.8.8.3 (1)
nu = Asfyd /(Acfcd) = 1.478
Kr = (nu - n) /(nu - nbal) =
0.319 5.8.8.3 (1)
1/r0 = yd /(0.45d) = 2.08910E-5 1/r0 = 1.20910E-5 5.8.8.3 (1)
1/r = KrK1/ro = 1.068710E-5 1/r = 0.589310E-5 (5.34)
M0Edx = m0E + Mi = 6.18 Knm M0Edy = 0.96 Knm 5.8.2 (5)P
M2 x = NEd(1/r)L0 / = 21.81 kNm M2 y = 17.24 kNm (5.32)
Column is short IGNORE Column is short IGNORE 5.8.2 (6)
SINGLE AXIS CHECKS
M0Ed + M2 = 6.18 kNm M0Ed + M2 = 0.96 kNm (5.31)
Minimum moment, MEd,min x = 20 x 3,035.9 /1000 = 60.72 kNm MEd,min y = 20 x 3,035.9 /1000 = 60.72 kNm 6.1 (4)
Therefore design moment, MEdx = 60.72 kNm < 89.00 OK and MEdy = 60.72 kNm < 157.33 OK
BIAXIAL CHECK
Max of
x
/
y
and
y
/
x
= 1.253 < 2 e
x
be
y
h = 0.103 (5.38a & b)
BIAXIAL CHECK NOT REQUIRED 5.8.9 (3)
. 3,958.0 kN . 3,035.9 /3,958.0 = 0.767 5.8.9 (4)
a = 1.612 from table
. 0.7555 <1 OK
0.35 + 35 /200 - 23.74 /250 = 0.430
The Concrete Centre
275
276
TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
This spreadsheet generates axial load:design moment interaction
charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns. It
checks the capacity of the columns with various arrangements
of reinforcement against input load cases of axial load and uni-
axial bending.
Within TCC11.xls, COLUMN! allows the user to determine the area
of steel required from inputs of axial load and moment about the
x - x axis. The approach of TCC52 is to give an interaction chart.
This shows axial load against moment for symmetrical sections
of specied size, strength and reinforcement. It works on the
premise of calculating the moment and axial load capacities of
a section with assumed amounts of reinforcement and assumed
neutral axis depth. Iterations of neutral axis depth give data
for the Axial load:Moment interaction chart for the specied
section. The spreadsheet also checks the reinforcement required
for input load cases. The user may try different arrangements of
reinforcement.
RCC52.xls assumes that the moments input in the load cases
have already been adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
For many side and all corner columns, there is no choice but to
design for bi-axial bending, and TCC53.xls should then be used.
Moments due to imperfections and second order moments in
slender columns are added automatically.
MAIN!
Main! contains all input and output data, including details of
members connected to the top and bottom of the column. These
are used to assess slenderness criteria and additional moments.
Bending is assumed to be about the x - x, i.e. horizontal axis,
and the input moment is assumed to be the maximum design
moment as dened in EC2. Any additional moments due to
slenderness are added by the program.
The dotted line within the chart indicates minimum design
moment.
Calcs!
Calcs! shows the derivation of the charts where moment capacity
bal
, then at intervals from n.a. depth
for N = N
bal
uz
.
Cases!
the load cases.
Refs!
1990 and BS EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data
are current when the spreadsheet is used.
When using TCC31R for permanent design, designers are
strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with any design
calculations.
Notes!
277
TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
TCC52 Column Chart generation/ MAIN!
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 03-Jul-06 287
MATERIALS
fck 32 N/mm s 1.15 steel Cover 35 mm
fyk 500 N/mm c 1.5 concrete dg 20 mm
2 ef 1.15
c,dev
10 mm Remote
Steel class A CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
DESIGN SECTION Clear height, L = 3600 mm b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
h 400 mm RESTRAINTS Top left 350 500 7.5 F
b 250 mm Top F Fixed Top right 350 500 6 F
Bars per face 2 No Btm F Fixed Bottom left 350 500 7.5 F
All bars in 250 wide faces Braced Y Bottom right 350 500 6 F
Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Column above? Y Col below? Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS Data on connecting beams only affects loadcases, not charting.
Type Bar A
sc
% Link Bar c/c N
bal
(kN) N
uz
(kN) Checks
H 40 5.03 10 120.0 0.0 0.0
H 32 3.22 8 132.0 733.7 2880.9
H 25 1.96 8 139.0 752.9 2465.0
H 20 1.26 8 144.0 764.9 2230.4
H 16 0.80 8 148.0 773.5 2080.2
H 12 0.45 8 152.0 781.1 1963.5
MOMENT M
Ed
(kNm)
LOADCASES Load case N
Ed
(kN) m
0e
(kNm) M
Ed
(kNm) Load case N
Ed
(kN) m
0e
(kNm) M
Ed
(kNm)
Double 1 500 165 167.7 4 H25 4 610 80 83.2 4 H12
curvature ? 2 1750 120 129.3 4 H32 5 1350 185 192.2 4 H32
Yes 3 2600 35 52.0 4 H32 6 2500 150 163.3 No Fit
.
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO
EN 1992-1 : 2004
ok
The Concrete Centre
A
X
I
A
L

C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
I
O
N
,

N
E
d

(
k
N
)
N:M INTERACTION CHART for 400 x 250 column, grade C32, 35 mm cover and 2 bars on 250 mm faces
Asc > 4 %
ok
ok
ok
ok
500
1750
2600
610
1350
2500
H32
H25
H20
H16
H12
Min M
Nbal
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
277
278
TCC53 Column Design.xls
TCC53.xls generates column design charts for symmetrically
reinforced rectangular columns bent about two axes and checks
input load cases.
TCC53.xls also gives interaction charts, showing axial load against
moment for the critical axis for symmetrical rectangular sections
of specied size, strength and reinforcement arrangement. The
user may try different arrangements of reinforcement. It also
provides designs for input load cases, which are plotted on the
relevant x- or y- axis chart.
TCC53.xls takes account of any side-bars specied.
MAIN!
cases.
should be familiar with BS EN 1992-1-1 Section 5.8 The input
moments are the initial end moments due to ultimate design
loads as dened in BS EN 1990 about the appropriate axes. Madd,
the critical direction for bi-axial bending and design moments are
calculated.
CHARTS!
CHARTS! shows two charts, one chart for when M
Edx
is critical and
one for when M
Edy
is critical. These Axial load:Moment interaction
charts for the specied section also show relevant input load
cases. The load cases are identied by axial load only (a quirk of
Excel!).
Xcal! and Ycal!
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N
= N
bal
, then in intervals from n.a. depth for N = N
bal
to n.a. depth
for N = N
uz
).
Slen!
The calculations on this sheet determine slenderness criteria and
effective column lengths about both axes.
Cases!
the load cases. Calculations are made for both directions and the
spreadsheet decides which axis is dominant. Bi-axial bending is
considered and the critical axis identied. M
Ed
is calculated by
adding N
Ed
e
1
for imperfections and where necessary M
2
(=N
Ed
e
2
)
for second order moments in slender columns. M
Ed
is used in the
design and plot (in CHARTS!).
Refs!
and EN 1992.
Notes!
279
TCC53 Column Design.xls
Project EC2 Comparative Design
Client BRE Made by Date Page
Location Column D2 RMW 03-Jul-06 289
Originated from TCC53.xls v 3.0 on CD 2002-2005 TCC - FB625
MATERIALS
fck 35 N/mm s 1.15 Cover to link 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm c 1.5 dg 20 mm
2.9 ef 1.6
c,dev
10 mm
SECTION Steel class A
h 325 mm .
b 275 mm
with 2 bars per 275 face X X
and 2 bars per 325 face
ie. 325 x 275 columns with 4 bars
Remote
RESTRAINTS Storey Top Btm CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
height (mm) Condition Condition Braced ? b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
X-AXIS 5000 F P Y Top West 300 500 8 F
Y-AXIS 5000 F P Y Top East 300 500 6 F
Top North 7000 175 5 F
Top South 7000 175 5 F
L (mm) L
0
(mm) h
0
(mm) Bottom West
X-AXIS 4500 3459 149 Bottom East
Y-AXIS 4825 3709 Bottom North
Bottom South
BAR ARRANGEMENTS BAR CENTRES (mm)
Bar Asc % Link 275 Face 325 Face Nuz (kN) Checks
H 32 3.60 8 167 217 2835 ok
H 25 2.20 8 174 224 2421 ok
H 20 1.41 8 179 229 2188 ok
H 16 0.90 8 183 233 2038 ok
H 12 0.51 8 187 237 1922 ok
H 10 8 189 239 As or < minimum
LOADCASES AXIAL TOP MOMENTS (kNm) BTM MOMENTS (kNm)
N (kN) m
0x
m
0y
m
0x
m
0y
1 2126.1 19.5 2.5
2 2030.5 29.9 2.5
3 1025 50.0 2.5
4 783 80.0 2.5
5 600 120.0 2.5
6 1570 130.0 2.5
DESIGN X AXIS Y AXIS Critical Biaxial Check
MOMENTS M
Ed
x M
Rd
x M
Ed
y M
Rd
y axis REBAR
1 42.5 57.6 38.4 100.1 X 4 H25
2 48.4 69.3 41.0 107.2 X 4 H25
3 58.8 87.3 40.3 98.2 X 4 H12
4 80.0 92.7 6.3 96.2 X 4 H12
5 120.0 126.3 5.2 117.5 X 4 H20
6 130.0 157.7 11.2 164.7 X 4 H32
SEE CHARTS ON NEXT SHEET
Equation (5.39)
The Concrete Centre
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT TWO AXES
TO EN 1992-1 : 2004
0.691
Moments m
0
at top and bottom of column (from
analysis) are combined to find m
0e
. The moment
due to imperfections (e
1
N) and the second
order moment (M
2
) are then added to obtain
M
Ed
In the table below.
0.634
0.878
0.863
0.807
0.965
TCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!
279
280
TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls
TCC54.xls generates a column design chart for symmetrically
reinforced circular columns of an inputted size with an inputted
number of bars. It checks input load cases of ultimate axial load
and resolved moment.
MAIN!
cases.
should be familiar with BS EN 1992-1-1 especially Section 5.8.
The input moments are the ultimate design moments from
analysis resolved around an appropriate axis. Allowances for
imperfections (N
Ed
e
1
) and where appropriate for second order
effects (M
2
=N
Ed
e
2
) in slender columns are added automatically
to the rst order moment input at E57 to give M
Ed
in cells F57etc.
The input moment at E57 should have been resolved for bending
in two directions by the user.
The axial load:moment interaction chart for the specied section
also show relevant input load cases.
The load cases are identied.
Calcs!
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N
= N
bal
, then at intervals from n.a. depth for N = N
bal
to n.a. depth
for N = N
uz
.
Circle!
The calculations on this sheet determine slenderness criteria and
effective column lengths about both axes.
Cases!
the load cases. Calculations are made for both directions and the
spreadsheet decides which axis is dominant.
Refs!
1990 and BS EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data
are current when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC54 for
permanent design, designers are strongly advised too include a
copy of this sheet with any design calculations.
Notes!
281
TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 03-Jul-06 291
CIRCULAR COLUMN DESIGN TO EN 1992-1 : 2004
MATERIALS
fck 30 N/mm s 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm c 1.5 concrete dg 20 mm
2.41 ef 1.45
c,dev
5 mm Remote
Steel class A CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
DESIGN SECTION RESTRAINTS b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
h 475 mm L = 3600 mm Top left 350 500 7.5 F
with 8 bars Top F Fixed Top right 350 500 6 F
Btm F Fixed Bottom left 350 500 7.5 F
Braced Y . Bottom right 350 500 6 F
BAR ARRANGEMENTS Data on connecting beams only affects loadcases, not charting.
Type Bar Asc % Link Bar c/c N
bal
(kN) N
uz
(kN) Checks
H 40 5.67 10 163.0 0.0 0.0
H 32 3.63 8 165.3 899.0 5264.4
H 25 2.22 8 166.7 963.0 4386.9
H 20 1.42 8 167.7 1185.1 3892.1
H 16 0.91 8 168.5 1355.4 3575.5
H 12 0.51 8 169.3 1363.9 3329.2
N:M interaction chart for 475 diameter column, grade C30/37 concrete and 30 mm cover
MOMENT M
Ed
X (kNm)
LOADCASES Loadcase N
Ed
(kN) m
0e
(kNm) M
Ed
(kNm) Loadcase N
Ed
(kN) m
0e
(kNm) M
Ed
(kNm)
Double 1 2600 40 57.6 8 H12 4 610 170 174.1 8 H16
curvature ? 2 3500 110 133.7 8 H25 5 2750 315 333.6 8 H32
Yes 3 2850 120 139.3 8 H20 6 1500 240 250.1 8 H20
A
X
I
A
L

L
O
A
D

N
E
d

(
k
N
)
Asc > max %
ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
The Concrete Centre
8H32
8H25
8H20
8H16
8H12
LC1
LC4
LC5
LC2
LC6
LC3
Min M
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
TCC54 Circular Column Design/ MAIN!
281
282
This spreadsheet works out column shortenings in accordance
with BS EN 1992-1-1 Clauses 3.1.3(1), 3.1.3(3)and Annex B, creep
and shrinkage strain. It works from the roof down and assumes
that time 0 equates to construction of the lowest column.
When shortenings between oors need to be considered, this
spreadsheet calculates the longterm oor displacements due to
columns being loaded incrementally.
A detailed construction history is input so that time-dependent
creep and shrinkage factors may be computed. A maximum of 12
lifts of columns are currently catered for. It would not be practical
to superimpose further storeys by running this spreadsheet more
than once, but an extended version could be produced at a later
date if demand exists.
To investigate particular situations it is suggested that the
spreadsheet is run more than once. For instance, to investigate
column shortenings that affect partitions, it is suggested that
the spreadsheet is run twice once at partition installation and
secondly at say 30 years.
MAIN!
MAIN is used to input materials, dimensional and load data. Enter
general data rst, before geometry and loading sequence.
Eurocode 2 permits RH (relative humidity) values between 10%
and 100%. Values of 50% (internal exposure) and 80% (external
exposure) are considered typical in the UK. Exposure will be
external during the construction period, followed by a reduced
RH in use, so when in doubt, a value of 65% could be appropriate.
The formulae in BS EN 1992-1-1 are used for concrete strength
gain (3.1.2(6)) with age and for Youngs modulus, E (Table 3.1).
At present, specic values of gain of strength and E (determined
from tests) cannot be accommodated by this spreadsheet, but
may be accommodated at a later date.
`Shortenings between oors are the amounts by which individual
column lifts may shorten in length following construction of
the oor immediately above. This value will directly affect any
cladding or brittle partitions between oors.
Floor Displacements are the long-term net displacements of
oors from the level at which they were constructed. The oor
at an individual column may therefore be cast at say 50% of
this value above the nominal oor level, in order to minimise
racking effects. The particular shape of the curve is dened by
effects of incremental loading and the effects of drying shrinkage.
It is assumed that any shortenings between oors have been
compensated for and therefore dealt with prior to a oors
construction. The difference between oor displacements of
adjacent columns will create a racking effect on any attached
cladding or brittle partitions.
Any differential shortening between connected vertical members
will generate a transfer of vertical load. If connecting slabs or
beams are stiff and/ or short, such load transfer can be substantial
and, in tall buildings, may even be critical at ULS. If such effects
are considered to be critical between a group of vertical members,
the following procedure is recommended:
Run each column or wall and save it under an individual le
name.
Write a routine within one of these worksheets to assess the
amount of load transfer at each level, using long-term cracked
section properties for connecting horizontal members. This
will link the results between worksheets. Remember to adjust
estimated displacements by any elastic shortening that may
have been included in a global frame analysis.
Add a routine in each linked worksheet to modify the long-
term oor loads at each level, by adding transfer loads into
cells MAIN!Q15:Q26, which are already set up for this purpose.
NOTE: transfer of loads should be damped by a constant
factor, to reduce the number of iterations required.
Write a VBA macro to iterate this transfer process until a
balance is reached (ie. residual transfer is close to zero).
Differential foundation displacements may also need to be
considered within this process.
Creep1!
In a series of cascading calculations, Creep1 calculates the
total creep and elastic shortenings based on applied dead and
permanent imposed loads. Concrete E values are based on the
mean 28 day strength f
cm
, adjusted by creep factors that allow
for both age at loading and load duration.
Creep2!
Again, in a series of cascading calculations, Creep2 similarly
calculates elastic shortenings that occur before each oor is
constructed.
Shrink!
Shrink! calculates the amount of drying shrinkage; for both total
long-term and before construction of each oor.
Notes!
TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls
283
TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls
TCC55 Axial Column Shortening/ MAIN!
Location rmw
AXIAL COLUMN SHORTENING to EN 1992-1 : 2004
Originated from TCC55.xls v3.0 on CD 2002-2005 TCC chg
General Data Aggregate
No of Storeys 12 Cement type Occupancy at 250 days from level 0
Curing time 3 days
Ambient temp, C 20 Relative humidity % 50
2
.
Time Col Floor At age Balance Age Perm Age
gap days
f
ck
Length H B
A
SL SW SW days of Gk days Imposed days
Roof 14 40 3750 300 300 452 2.2 354.4 7 118.1 28 44.3 82
11 14 40 3750 300 300 1257 2.2 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 96
10 14 40 3750 400 400 1257 3.8 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 110
9 14 40 3750 450 450 1257 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 124
8 14 40 3750 450 450 1963 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 138
7 14 60 3750 450 450 1257 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 152
6 14 60 3750 450 450 2592 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 166
5 14 60 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 180
4 14 60 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 194
3 14 80 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 208
2 14 80 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 222
1 14 80 3750 500 500 4825 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 236
Shortenings Between Floors (mm)
Creep & Shrin-
Elastic kage
11 - R 1.87 2.15 4.02 0.11%
10 - 11 3.16 1.89 5.05 0.13%
9 - 10 2.59 1.95 4.54 0.12%
8 - 9 2.90 1.94 4.84 0.13%
7 - 8 3.40 1.85 5.25 0.14%
6 - 7 3.18 1.83 5.01 0.13%
5 - 6 3.45 1.71 5.16 0.14%
4 - 5 3.15 1.67 4.82 0.13%
3 - 4 3.51 1.67 5.18 0.14%
2 - 3 3.26 1.63 4.88 0.13%
1 - 2 3.56 1.63 5.19 0.14%
0 - 1 3.69 1.55 5.24 0.14%
Floor Displacements (mm)
Creep & Shrin-
Elastic kage
Roof 45.00 20.0 12.7 32.7
11 41.25 22.0 11.6 33.7
10 37.50 22.0 10.8 32.7
9 33.75 21.9 9.7 31.7
8 30.00 21.2 8.6 29.8
7 26.25 19.5 7.6 27.1
6 22.50 17.7 6.6 24.3
5 18.75 15.3 5.6 20.9
4 15.00 13.0 4.6 17.6
3 11.25 10.0 3.5 13.5
2 7.50 7.1 2.5 9.6
1 3.75 3.7 1.3 5.0
The Concrete Centre
03-Jul-06
-
293
FB625
Permanent Load
Column K2
Geometry & Loading Sequence
Vertical Displacement (mm)
Lift Total
Floor
LEVEL
Column below
Total Level
L
e
v
e
l
(
m
)
20.0
22.0
22.0
21.9
21.2
19.5
17.7
15.3
13.0
10.0
7.1
3.7
0
12.7
11.6
10.8
9.7
8.6
7.6
6.6
5.6
4.6
3.5
2.5
1.3
0
32.7
33.7
32.7
31.7
29.8
27.1
24.3
20.9
17.6
13.5
9.6
5.0
0.0
26.25
3.75
7.50
11.25
15.00
18.75
22.50
30.00
33.75
37.50
41.25
45.00
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Floors
C and E
Shrinkage
Total
R
R
0.3
0.3
Quartzite
Quartzite
283
284
TCC71.xls designs simply supported ights and landings to BS EN
1992. Input is required on two sheets.
FLIGHT!
Only simply supported spans are catered for. If ights are
continuous with oors, the user should specify continuity steel
over supports as appropriate. Calculations are done per metre
width of ight. Input loads are assumed to be characteristic and
acting vertically. They should account for any undercuts. Self-
The area of steel required, A
sreq
, may be automatically increased
to increase modication factors and satisfy deection criteria.
Nominal top reinforcement may be specied in order to help
overcome deection problems. Dimensions are not checked for
compliance with Building Regulations.
Ultimate, characteristic dead and characteristic imposed
reactions are given below the indicative diagram.
LANDING!
Again, this single sheet consists of the input and main output.
Input defaults in magenta have been derived from FLIGHT! but
may be overwritten. Calculations are done per metre width of
landing.
As defaults, which can be overwritten, the material data and
characteristic ight reactions carry over from FLIGHT! Self-
The maximum width of landing over which ight loads can be
dispersed has been restricted to 1.8 m as with BS 8110.
Reactions are ultimate, both total and per metre run. The area
of steel required, As, can be automatically increased to satisfy
deection criteria.
Dias!
percentages for deection modication factors used in FLIGHT!
and LANDING!
Notes!
TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls
285
TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls
TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing -single/ LANDING!
Location South Staircase rmw 03-Jul-06 295
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to EN 1992-1: 2004
Originated from TCC71.xls v3.0 on CD 2005 TCC - FB625
MATERIALS
fck 30 Mpa c 1.5 concrete Min bar = 10
fyk 500 Mpa s 1.15 steel Max bar = 16
dg 20 mm Density 25 kN/m Steel class = A
DIMENSIONS
a = 600 mm landing A, h = 200
b = 2500 mm flight waist = 175
c = 1200 mm landing C, h = 200
d = -600 mm
e = -100 mm
Going = 250 mm L = 4300
Rise = 1900 mm total 10 treads
Rise = 173 mm each step Rake = 34.64
LOADING
Imposed 4.00 kN/m 43.64 kN/m ult 34.37 kN/m ult
Flight finishes 1.60 kN/m (21.54 + 11.16) (16.91 + 8.84)
DESIGN
LANDING A, gk = 5.00 + 1.30 = 6.30 kN/m n = 1.25 x 6.30 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 13.87 kN/m
FLIGHT, gk = 7.48 + 1.60 = 9.08 kN/m n = 1.25 x 9.08 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 17.33 kN/m
LANDING C, gk = 5.00 + 1.30 = 6.30 kN/m n = 1.25 x 6.30 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 13.87 kN/m
Zero shear is at 0.6 + (43.64 - 16.64) /17.33 = 2.157 m from left
M = 43.64 x 2.157 - 16.64 x 2.157 - 17.33 x 1.557/2 = 37.22 kNm/m
d = 175 - 25 - 8 = 142 mm K = 0.0615 As = 640 mm/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 270 B = 745 mm/m
s
= 232.8 Mpa Enhanced by 16.0 % for deflection H10 @ 350 T in span
L/d = 4,300 /142 = 30.28 > 22.7 x 1.331 x 1.000 = 30.28 allowed OK
chg
The Concrete Centre
FLIGHT
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
285
286
TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - single/ LANDING!
Location South Staircase rmw 03-Jul-06 296
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC71.xls v3.0 on CD 2005 TCC FB625
MATERIALS
fck 30 N/mm c 1.5 concrete Min bar = 10
fyk 500 N/mm s 1.15 steel Max bar = 16
dg 20 mm Density 25 kN/m
DIMENSIONS
a = 1200 mm depth, h = 175 mm
b = 1200 mm width, w = 1200 mm
c = 250 mm
d = 175 mm L = 3000 mm
LOADING
LANDING Imposed 4.00 kN/m 73.50 kN ult 68.12 kN ult
Finishes 1.50 kN/m 61.25 kN/m ult 56.77 kN/m ult
Slab 4.38 kN/m
n = 1.25 x 5.88 + 1.5 x 4.0 = 13.34 kN/m
gk qk n1 = (1.25 x 21.54 + 1.5 x 11.16)/1.20 = 36.37 kN/m
Flight a reaction 21.54 11.16 kN/m n2 = (1.25 x 16.91 + 1.5 x 8.84)/1.20 = 28.64 kN/m
Flight b reaction 16.91 8.84 kN/m
DESIGN
Zero shear is at (61.25 - 2.33) /(13.34 + 36.37) + 0.175 = 1.360 m from left
M = 61.25 x 1.360 - 13.34 x 1.360/2 - 36.37 x 1.185/2 = 45.43 kNm/m
d = 175 - 25 - 8 = 142 mm K = 0.0751 As = 792 mm/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 160 B = 1257 mm/m
s
= 310.1 Mpa Enhanced by 50.0 % for deflection H10 @ 350 T in span
L/d = 3,000 /142 = 21.12 > 19.1 x 1.000 x 1.000 = 19.05 allowed FAILS
LANDING
The Concrete Centre
chg
286
287
TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls
(Subject to further interpretation)
This spreadsheet designs simple pad foundations from input of
material properties, dimensions and characteristic loads and
moments. Single column bases and combined double bases
are catered for on separate sheets. This version is subject to
interpretation as the full implications of Eurocode 7 and its
National Annex have yet to be incorporated. For example, ground
bearing pressure distribution at ULS will in due course be changed
from trapezoidal to rectangular.
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29]
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e.
comparable experience) and therefore in line with traditional
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload
for wind load and trapezoidal or triangular ground pressure
distributions at ULS rather than rectangular).
A diagram is provided to illustrate the dimensions: a chart
showing scale plan views is provided to help ensure gross errors
are avoided. The efciency diagrams are provided so that the user
may gauge how hard the base is working in respect to allowable
increase in ground bearing pressure, bending and shear in the two
axes together with a measure on punching shear capacity. If the
design is invalid, this chart should help identify the problem.
The spreadsheet does not allow for punching shear links bending
reinforcement is increased to ensure allowable shear, v
Rd

c,
is
adequate. The user should note that punching shear perimeters
can jump from being four-sided to being two- or three-sided,
leading to unexpectedly large increases in reinforcement for
increases in base thickness.
TCC81.xls allows the user to specify whether or not equations
6.10a and 6.10b of EN 1990 may be employed.
Warnings are given if columns overlap base edges.
SINGLE!
Suggestions are made, under the Operating instructions column,
for the optimum plan size of the base. It is important that the
principal usage of the structure is selected from the combo-box
in column L.
This is used in the determination of partial load factors, if EN 1990
equations 6.10a and 6.10b are permitted. The usage selected here
is also utilised on the DOUBLE! sheet.
Where two centres are given, e.g. 14 T16 @ 200 & 325 B2, bars
need to be grouped more closely in the central part of the base.
DOUBLE!
In addition to graphs showing plan layout and efciency,
this sheet gives moment diagrams for the two principal axes.
Design moments are taken at the edge of both column sections
Suggestions are made, under the Operating instructions column,
for the optimum plan size of the base and eccentricities given the
column offsets from one another.
The users attention is drawn to the fact that the analysis is done
in two orthogonal directions. When column eccentricities are
large in both directions the analysis may not account adequately
for local effects (e.g. bottom cantilever moments on two sides of
each column loads in opposite corners gives bottom moments of
0 kNm). In such cases, it may be better to change the orientation
of the base in such a way that eccentricity in one direction is
minimal. Warnings about double eccentricities are given when
the distances between column centrelines exceed 15% of the
relevant base dimension in each orthogonal direction.
Comparison with FE analysis suggests this is reasonable so long
as the base is thick and rigid.
Legends!
This sheet shows dimensions, axes, corners and notation used.
SingleDet!
Allowable bearing pressure is taken as an allowable increase in
bearing pressure and density of concrete density of excavated
material (i.e. soil) is used in the calculations. The program
assumes that pads are embedded to depth H in the soil.
Design moments are generally those at the face of the column.
Both sides of the column are checked for moment in each
direction to ensure maxima are identied. Shear enhancement is
allowed for both beam and punching shear.
Neither crack widths, factors of safety against sliding, nor water
tables are catered for. Where resultant eccentricities are outside
the base a warning message is given; the general status message
is updated as well.
Factors of safety against overturning are checked (The equilibrium
limit state EQU to EN 1990). Warnings are also given at the onset
of an uplift situation.
288
DoubleDet!
The notes for SingleDet! above also apply.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs for both SINGLE! and
DOUBLE!
Refs!
and EN 1992.
Notes!
289
TCC81 Foundation Pads/ SINGLE!
Location Level -1 Base B1 RMW 03-Jul-06 299
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Single column base Checked Revision Job No
Usage: Office
MATERIALS fck 30 N/mm d
g
20 mm
c
1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm cover 50 mm
s
1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 25 kN/m Soil 18 kN/m W
k
0.3 mm
Bearing pressure 200 kN/m (net allowable increase)
Steel class A
DIMENSIONS mm
COLUMN
L = 3000 h = 500
B = 3000 b = 500
depth H = 500
ex = 0 ey = 0
COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic Plot (to scale)
Key
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 1500.0 128.0
Mx (kNm) -20.0
My (kNm)
Hx (kN)
Hy (kN)
0 =
0.7 0.5
see EN 1990 - Table A1.1
STATUS VALID DESIGN
CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 188.8 179.9 188.8 179.9
with wind 188.8 179.9 188.8 179.9 Efficiency
REINFORCEMENT of As within 1,820 mm of As within 1,760 mm
Mxx = 572.5 kNm Myy = 562.3 kNm
b = 3000 mm b = 3000 mm
d = 440 mm d = 420 mm
As = 3150 mm As = 3242 mm
Provide 17H20 @ 160 & 205 B1 Provide 17H20 @ 155 & 215 B2
As prov = 5341 mm As prov = 5341 mm
Asx increased 67% for shear Asy increased 60% for shear
BEAM SHEAR
VEdxx = 593.7 kN at d from col face VEDyy = 597.4 kN at d from col face
vEd = 0.450 N/mm vEd = 0.474 N/mm
or VEdxx = 272.2 kN at 2d from col face or VEDyy = 295.1 kN at 2d from col face
vEd = 0.206 N/mm vEd = 0.234 N/mm
vRd,c = 0.462 N/mm vRd,c = 0.473 N/mm
PUNCHING SHEAR
As prov = 0.414 % vEd max = 2.750 N/mm at col face
vEd = 0.464 N/mm vRd,c = 0.467 N/mm
BASE
The Concrete Centre
. .
. .
99%
50%
49%
59%
61%
94%
0% 25% 50% 75% 100% 125%
Punching
vEd yy
Shear vEd xx
sy
As/Asprov sx
Grnd Brg Pressure
289
290
TCC81 Foundation Pads/ DOUBLE!
Location Base B3/B4 RMW 03-Jul-06 300
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Combined base Checked Revision Job No
Usage: Office
MATERIALS fck 30 N/mm dg 20 mm c 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm cover 50 mm s 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 25 kN/m Soil 18 kN/m Steel class A
Bearing pressure 125 kN/m (net allowable)
COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
Column 1 (rhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND Column 2 (lhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial 225.0 225.0 112.5 Axial 225.0 225.0 112.5
Mx Mx
My My 50.0
Hx Hx
Hy Hy 25.0
DIMENSIONS mm
L = 3000 h1 = 300 h2 = 300
B = 3000 b1 = 300 b2 = 300
depth H = 475
ex = 300 ex1 = 150 ex2 = 150
ey = 1000 ey1 = 500 ey2 = 500
STATUS
CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 103.3 103.3 103.3 103.3
with wind 142.1 142.1 114.6 114.6
REINFORCEMENT
Btm Mxx - 421.7 kNm Myy - 235.6
b = 3000 mm b = 3000
d = 419 mm d = 407
As = 2437 mm As = 1401
PROVIDE 23H12 @ 150 B1 & 17H12 @ 150 & 200 B2
Detail to clause 3.11.3.2
Top Mxx + 0.0 kNm Myy + 0.0
d = 421 mm d = 413
As = 0 mm As = 0
PROVIDE 19H8 @ 175 T1 & 19H8 @ 125 & 175 T2
. .
BEAM SHEAR
. Mx Diagram (1.35G+1.05Q)
Vxx = 365.9 kN at d Vyy = 219.3
v = 0.291 N/mm v = 0.180
or Vxx = 169.6 kN at 2d or Vyy = 18.0
v = 0.135 N/mm v = 0.015
vc = 0.324 N/mm vc = 0.326
PUNCHING SHEAR
Efficiency
. .
.
PLOT (to scale)
The Concrete Centre
COLUMN 1 (rhs) COLUMN 2 (lhs)
VALID DESIGN
BASE
-350
-300
-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Moment Columns Zero axis
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
84%
28%
45%
97%
85%
91%
0% 133%
Punching
vEd yy
Shear vEd xx
sy
As/Asprov sx
Grnd Brg Pressure
290
291
TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls
(Subject to further interpretation)
This spreadsheet designs pilecaps with between two and six piles,
and then prepares a sketch drawing of each type of cap together
with a bar schedule. Bending theory is employed throughout to
design the caps. This version is subject to interpretation as the
full implications of Eurocode 7 and its National Annex have yet
to be incorporated.
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload for
wind load).
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload for
wind load).
Depending upon the pilecaps dimensions, the alternative strut-
and-tie method of design may be possible, but is not covered by
this spreadsheet. There are seven main sheets: DOUBLE!, 3CAP!,
4CAP!, 5CAP!, 6CAP!, SCHEDULE! and DRAWING!
Each of the rst ve sheets contains two pages that may be
printed out. The rst (or upper) page contains input data and
a summary of results, while the second (or lower) page shows
more detailed calculations.
area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (taken to
be 32 mm diameter),
spacing rules or
number of legs of links required in shear.
The size of link to be used has also been automated.
The designer and detailer may wish to rationalise the output
given on the DRAWING! sheet. But doing so will obviously affect
the bar data on SCHEDULE!
DOUBLE!
The DOUBLE! sheet is where all material properties are entered,
together with covers, pile diameter and pile tolerance. All
subsequent sheets use these same properties. Pile tolerance is the
amount by which a pile may deviate from its intended position.
This value is used in calculation to increase bending moments to
allow for this possible deviation. Pile reactions are not similarly
increased.
Dimensional data for a double pile cap and the supported
column are then entered, then column axial loads, moments and
horizontal shears for dead load, imposed load and wind load. The
results of calculations for all Eurocode 2 loading combinations
are then displayed below (on page 1), together with the required
arrangement of reinforcement. More detailed calculations may
be found by scrolling down to page 2.
3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP! and 6CAP!
These sheets are identical in function to DOUBLE!, but deal with
caps having 3, 4, 5 and 6 piles respectively. Material properties,
pile diameter and tolerance are picked up from DOUBLE!.
Page numbers for printing do not follow on from previous sheets,
so must be entered by the user. This allows for intermediate
calculation pages (perhaps for loading) to be inserted.
SCHEDULE!
This sheet is a bar schedule complying with BS 8666, for the
pilecap drawing on the DRAWING! sheet.
Beneath the Operating instructions, the number of each type
of cap must be entered. These numbers are then used on the
schedule and the drawing.
DRAWING!
This sheet draws approximately to scale plans and elevations
with reinforcement and bar marks for each of the cap types. It
is intended for printout to an A3 sheet. If the user wishes to add
additional notes, these may be added in cell U27.
Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in all sheets. It is not
intended for formal printing
Notes!
292
Location Pilecap G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 302
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Double Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC82.xls v 3.0 on CD 2003-2006 TCC - - FB625
Usage: Traffic, 30 to 160kN
MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm d
g
20 mm
c
1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm T&S cover 50 mm
s
1.15 steel
Steel class A Btm cover 75 mm Conc density 25 kN/m
Pile capacity 525 kN
DIMENSIONS mm
= 350 A = 400
= 350 B = 1500
Pile = 450 C = 400
Tolerance = 0 E = 750
depth H = 400
COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 218 104.2 27.5 PLOT (to scale)
M (kNm) 23.2 10.4 2.7
H (kN) 0 0 0
0 = 0.7 0.5
REINFORCEMENT PILE REACTIONS kN
BOTTOM M = 164.2 kNm PILE 1 PILE 2
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,296 mm Gk + Qk 147.9 192.7
7H16 B = 1,407 mm Gk + Qk +Wk 159.9 208.3
TOP M = 0.0 kNm
d = 338.0 mm, As = 0 mm
4H8 T = 201 mm 4H8 02 T
LINKS
VEd = 293 kN, vEd = 1.185 N/mm
vRd 2d/av = 0.825 N/mm
Asw/S = 0.9691 mm Links 11H8 03.200 + 2x11H8 04.200
4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS = 1.0053 mm
The Concrete Centre
KEY
COLUMN PILECAP
STATUS
ELEVATION
7H16 01 B
VALID DESIGN
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!
292
293
Location Pilecap G14 - Detailed Calculations Rod 03-Jul-06 303
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Double Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Cap load (kN) = 18.4 Piles @ (m) 1.500 PILE REACTIONS kN
or (kN/m) = 8.00 PILE 1 PILE 2
Gk + Qk 147.9 192.7
OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic Gk + Qk +Wk 159.9 208.3
DEAD IMPOSED WIND 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 206.4 269.0
23.2 10.4 2.7 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 120.7 157.0
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk 229.2 294.4
(including tolerance)
BOTTOM STEEL TOP STEEL
Bottom M = 164.2 16 Top M = 0.0 8 K' = 0.2067
d = 309.0 d = 338.0 min As = 0.167%
K = 0.0614 K = 0.0000
z = 291.2 z = 321.1
As = 1296 As = 0
No = 7 No = 4
s = 286 s = 0
Max S = 193.1 Max S = 300.0
Min S = 41.0 Min S = 33.0
S = 111.3 7H16 B S = 225.3 4H8 T
SHEAR Crit section is 135.0 from pile centres 0.569%
PILE 1
VEd
a
v
= 440.0 v
Ed
= 0.9211 cot = 2.50 v
Rd
2d/a
v
= 0.8246
PILE 2
VEd
a
v
= 440.0 v
Ed
= 1.1851 cot = 2.50 v
Rd
2d/a
v
= 0.8246
v
Rd,max
= 4.152
Asw/S required= 0.9691 mm 8 links
No of legs = 4 Link spacing = 200 4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS
267.5 155.9 293.0
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
205.0 119.6
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
113.6
149.5
65.6 126.6
86.5 164.2
227.7
The Concrete Centre
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!
293
294
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 03-Jul-06 14
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Triple Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
DIMENSIONS mm Usage: Office
= 300 A = 350
= 300 B = 1300
C = 1126
Pile = 450 E = 375.33
Min spacing = 1300 depth H = 400
Tolerance = 0
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 355.5 118.2 10.0 STATUS
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONS kN characteristic
Hx (kN) PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3
Hy (kN) Gk + Qk 141.0 169.4 192.5
0 = 0.7 0.5 Gk + Qk +Wk 139.9 173.4 199.6
REINFORCEMENT
EW (2-3) M = 178.2 kNm, b = 1,050 mm
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,396 mm
4H8 06 T1
7H16 B = 1,407 mm
VEd = 274.1 kN, bw = 1,050 mm 7H16 05 B1
vEd = 0.845 N/mm, Asw/S = 0.994 mm
Links 8H8 07 200 + 2x8H8 08 200
4 LegsH8 @ 200 LINKS = 1.005 mm
NS (1-2/3) M = 117.1 kNm, b = 1,798 mm
d = 293.0 mm, As = 967 mm
4H8 10 T2
5H16 B = 1,005 mm
VEd = 194.9 kN, bv = 1,260 mm 5H16 09 B2
vEd = 0.528 N/mm, Asw/S = 1.193 mm
Links 8H8 11 150 + 2x8H8 12 150
4 LegsH8 @ 150 LINKS = 1.340 mm
The Concrete Centre
ELEVATION
PILECAP COLUMN
KEY
VALID DESIGN
ELEVATION
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!
294
295
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 03-Jul-06 15
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Triple Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Cap load = 29.2 kN Group centre @ 751 m from pile 1
PILE REACTIONS kN
PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic
Gk + Qk 141.0 169.4 192.5 . DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Gk + Qk +Wk 139.9 173.4 199.6 Mx 10.0 5.0 2.0
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 194.9 234.7 267.0 My 20.0 10.0 5.0
1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 108.8 135.4 155.4 .
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk 193.8 238.7 274.1 .
My v of col
Mx
E-W STEEL N-S STEEL
M = 178.2 16 M = 117.1 16 K' = 0.2067
b = 1050 b = 1798 min As = 0.167%
d = 309.0 d = 293.0
K = 0.0508 K = 0.0217
z = 293.6 z = 278.4
As = 1396 As = 967
No = 7 No = 5
s = 307 s = 298
Max S = 165.6 Max S = 177.1
Min S = 41.0 Min S = 41.0
S = 94.7 7H16 B S = 142.0 5H16 B
SHEAR Crit section is 135.0 from pile centres
PILES 2 & 3 8 links
V
Ed
= 274.1 b = 1050 l = 0.434% cot = 2.50
a
v
= 515.0 v
Ed
= 0.8448 v
Rd
2d/a
v
= 0.6434 v
Rd,max
= 4.152
Asw/S = 0.9939 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 200 4 LegsH8 @ 200 LINKS
PILE 1 8 links
V
Ed
= 194.9 b = 1260 l = 0.272% cot = 2.50
a
v
= 615.7 v
Ed
= 0.5280 v
Rd
2d/a
v
= 0.5110 v
Rd,max
= 4.152
Asw/S = 1.1926 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 150 4 LegsH8 @ 150 LINKS
PUNCHING At column Face At 465.7 from column face (1.55d perimeter)
V
Ed
= 664.7 u
1
= 4126 = 1.112
v
Ed
= 1.840 d ave = 301.0 vEd = 0.5353
v
Rd,max
= 4.152 ok l = 0.231% v
Rd
2d/a
v
= 0.6546 ok
113.1 65.5 115.6
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
The Concrete Centre
117.1 65.4 116.4
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk
173.6 101.0 178.2
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!
295
296
Bar schedule ref : 202 01 Rev: -
Site ref : Date prepared :
Job no : FB625 Prepared by : Rod Checked by : -
A * B * C * D * E/R *
mm mm mm mm mm
01 H 16 4 7 28 2375 21 130 2175
02 H 8 4 4 16 2175 00
03 H 8 4 11 44 2075 51 270 695 115
04 H 8 4 22 88 500 31 115 50 270 115
3-Pile Caps 05 H 16 3 7 21 2475 21 320 1890
06 H 12 3 4 12 1875 00
07 H 8 3 8 24 1975 51 270 650 115
08 H 8 3 16 48 500 31 115 50 270 115
09 H 16 3 5 15 1975 21 155 1715
10 H 12 3 4 12 1700 00
11 H 8 3 8 24 1825 51 240 600 115
12 H 8 3 16 48 475 31 115 50 240 115
4-Pile Caps 13 H 16 5 18 90 2225 21 145 1975
14 H 8 5 10 50 1975 00
15 H 16 5 18 90 2225 21 145 1975
16 H 8 5 10 50 1975 00
17 H 10 5 100 500 600 31 120 60 345 120
5-Pile Caps 18 H 12 2 19 38 2625 21 125 2410
19 H 8 2 10 20 2400 00
21 H 12 2 20 40 2625 21 125 2410
22 H 8 2 11 22 2400 00
20 H 10 2 80 160 700 31 120 60 450 120
6-Pile Caps 23 H 12 1 28 28 2100 21 125 1890
24 H 12 1 14 14 1875 00
26 H 12 1 17 17 3400 21 125 3175
27 H 12 1 9 9 3175 00
28 H 10 1 84 84 750 31 120 60 495 120
This schedule complies with BS 8666. PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004
* Specified in multiples of 5mm. 2003-2006 TCC
Double
Pilecaps
Member Bar mark
Specified in multiples of 25mm.
No. of
bars
in
each
Total No.
Length of
each bar
mm
Shape
code
1,770 kg on this schedule
Type and
size
No.
of mbrs
Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 03-Jul-06
The Concrete Centre
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ SCHEDULE!
297
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DRAWING!
N
O
T
E
S
C
o
n
c
r
e
t
e

g
r
a
d
e

C
3
5
.
C
o
v
e
r

7
5

m
m

b
o
t
t
o
m
.
C
o
v
e
r

5
0

m
m

t
o
p

&

s
i
d
e
s
.
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

F
1
3
)

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

C
1
0
)

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
1
1
H
8

2
2

T
1
2
0
H
1
2

2
1

B
1
2
8
H
1
2

2
3

B
2

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
R
e
f
e
r

t
o

G
A

d
r
a
w
i
n
g
s

f
o
r

o
r
i
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

a
n
d

d
i
m
e
n
s
i
o
n
s
.

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
4 P i l e C a p - 5 N o
T
h
i
s

d
r
a
w
i
n
g

i
s

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
a
t
i
c
.

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g

s
l
a
b
s

&

b
e
a
m
s

n
o
t

s
h
o
w
n
.
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
L
i
n
k
s

8
H
8

0
7

2
0
0

+

2
x
8
H
8

0
8

2
0
0
L
i
n
k
s

8
H
8

1
1

1
5
0

+

2
x
8
H
8

1
2

1
5
0
4
H
8

0
6

T
1
7
H
1
6

0
1

B

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

G
1
4
)
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

E
1
2
)
P
L
A
N

(
P
i
l
e
c
a
p

D
1
1
)
5 P i l e C a p - 2 N o 2 P i l e C a p - 4 N o
3 P i l e C a p - 3 N o6 P i l e C a p - 1 N o
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
L
i
n
k
s

1
1
H
8

0
3
.
2
0
0

+

2
x
1
1
H
8

0
4
.
2
0
0
L
i
n
k
s

1
0
x
1
0
H
1
0

1
7

2
0
0
4
H
8

1
0

T
2
5
H
1
6

0
9

B
2
1
0
H
8

1
4

T
1
1
8
H
1
6

1
3

B
1
1
0

L
i
n
k

L
e
g
s
1
8
H
1
6

1
5

B
2
7
H
1
6

0
5

B
1
4
H
8

0
2

T
C h e c k e d
D a t e
R e v i s i o n
F B 6 2 5
1
4

L
i
n
k

L
e
g
s
J o b N o
T h e C o n c r e t e C e n t r e
M a d e b y
1
0
H
8

1
6

T
2
2 0 2
0 3 - J u l - 0 6R o d
--
D w g N o
B i g B u c k s P L C
S p r e a d s h e e t s t o E u r o c o d e 2
P r o j e c t
C l i e n t
L
i
n
k
s

1
4
x
6
H
1
0

2
5

3
5
0
1
0

L
i
n
k

L
e
g
s
1
9
H
1
2

1
8

B
2
1
7
H
1
2

2
6

B
1
1
4
H
1
2

2
4

T
2
L
i
n
k
s

1
0
x
8
H
1
0

2
0

3
2
5
1
0
H
8

1
9

T
2
9
H
1
2

2
7

T
1

E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
298
Admin folder
Under the Admin folder will be found several les associated with
the use of the spreadsheets.
Readme.doc
Essential for rst time users of the spreadsheets in Word format.
Spreadsheet Issue sheet.xls
This le shows the version history of the spreadsheets.
UserGuid Version 3.doc:
Word le of User Guide
This le formed the basis of the printed User Guide. It may be
loaded, read and printed out by using Word 97 or subsequent
releases. The le is included to provide help and to allow printing
of parts of the document. It may also be used as a basis for
comment.
User Guide Version 3.pdf:
Adobe Acrobat le of the User Guide
This User Guide will be made available as an Acrobat le on
future editions of the accompanying CD-ROM. It will present the
full User Guide in colour. Adobe Acrobat Reader v 4.0 or later will
be required to read and interrogate the .pdf le.
The Fonts
This folder contains the font les:
Tekton~i.ttf
Tekton~n.ttf
Marker.ttf
These fonts have been included in order to give users access to
the fonts intended for the spreadsheets.
These upright fonts were used in the spreadsheets in order to
emulate a designers handwriting and to allow an adequate
amount of information to be shown across the page and in each
cell. As described under Loading a spreadsheet for the rst time
see (FAQ), unless the appropriate fonts and default font size have
been installed, the appearance on screen will be different from
the publication and from that intended.
Column width and cell overlap problems may occur unless the
correct fonts and default font size are installed.
To the best of our knowledge these fonts are copyright-free.
By Others

The TCC disclaim any responsibility for programs by others. These
programs and les are provided to help dissemination. They are
subject to the authors conditions of use.
Bar Schedule

This folder contains Barshed8666.xlt, a spreadsheet template
for the scheduling of steel for the reinforcement of concrete to
BS 8666:2005. The aim of the spreadsheet is to reduce the time
taken to produce a bar schedule, eliminate arithmetical errors,
reduce scheduling errors, increase compliance with the BSI
specied format for bar scheduling and to facilitate electronic
data interchange. The spreadsheet has the additional ability
to produces weight schedules without the need for additional
input.

The spreadsheet presents a familiar interface to the user who has
produced schedules by hand and it is simple to use. It will guide
the user through the scheduling process while checking the input
is in accordance with British Standard requirements.

This template is made available as shareware by its author, Chris
Buczkowski. For further information, including registration details
and support, etc. go to www.structural-engineering.fsnet.co.uk or
email: chris@buczkowski.freeserve.co.uk

299
References and further reading
References and further reading
1 Goodchild, C.H. Economic concrete frame elements. British
Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1997. 128 pp.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110: 1997.
Structural use of concrete. Part 1. Code of practice for design
and construction. British Standards Institution, London, 1997 up to
and including Amendment 3.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992-1-1: 2004.
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structure (part 1-1) General rules and
rules for buildings, including UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1:
Design of Concrete Structures Part 1-1 BSI London 2005.
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8002: 1994. Code of
practice for earth retaining structures. British Standards Institution,
London, 1994.
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8007: 1987. Code of practice
for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. British
Standards Institution, London, 1987.
6 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS ET AL. Earth retaining
structures. (Civil Engineering Code of Practice No. 2.) Institution of
Structural Engineers, London, 1975. 224 pp.
7 MACLEOD, I.A. ET AL. Information technology for the structural
engineer. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 77, No. 3, 2 February 1999. pp.
23 - 25.
8 STANDING COMMITTEE ON STRUCTURAL SAFETY. Standing
Committee on Structural Safety, 10th report, July 1992 June 1994.
SETO Ltd, London, 1994. 32 pp.
9 ANSLEY, M. Liability concerns require adaptable software. Concrete
International, Vol. 19, No. 12, December 1997. pp. 37, 38.
10 KHAN, S. Techno Consultants Ltd, Manchester. Correspondence with
authors, May 1999.
11 MOSLEY, W.H. & BUNGEY, J.H. Reinforced concrete design (4th
edition). Macmillan, Basingstoke, 1990. 392 pp.
12 REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Reinforced concrete designers
handbook (10th edition). E&FN Spon, London, 1998. 448 pp.
13 ALLEN, A.H. Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110 - simply explained.
E&FN Spon, London, 1988. 256 pp.
14 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Post-tensioned concrete oors Design
Handbook, Technical Report No 43. The Concrete Society,
Slough (now Crowthorne), 1994. 162 pp.
15 HIGGINS, J.B. & ROGERS, B.R. Designed and detailed (BS 8110:1997).
British Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1998. 28 pp.
16 KHAN, S. & WILLIAMS, M. Post -tensioned concrete oors.
Butterworth Heinnemann, Oxford, 1995. 312 pp.
17 CEMENT AND CONCRETE ASSOCIATION. Basic data for the
prediction of shrinkage and creep. Training note TDH 2391. Cement
and Concrete Association (now British Cement Association), Slough
(now Crowthorne), 11 pp.
18 WYATT, T A. Design guide on the vibration of oors. Pub. No. 076,
Steel Construction Institute, Ascot, 1989. 43 pp.
19 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 6399: Part 1: 1996. Loading
for buildings. Code of practice for dead and imposed loads. British
Standards Institution, London, 1996.
20 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. CP 110: 1972. Code of practice
for the structural use of concrete. British Standards Institution,
London, 1972.
21 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 5400: 1988. Steel, concrete
and composite bridges. British Standards Institution, London, 1988.
22 RAFIQ, M.Y. AND SOUTHCOMBE, C. Genetic algorithms in optimal
design and detailing of reinforced concrete biaxial columns supported
by a declarative approach for capacity checking. International Journal
of Computers and Structures, 69 (1998), pp 443 - 457.
23 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8004: 1986. Code of
practice for foundations. British Standards Institution, London, 1986.
24 NARAYANAN, R S. Comparison of design requirements in EC2 and BS
8110. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 67, No 11, 6 June 1989, pp. 218 -
227.
25 BEEBY, A.W. ET AL. Worked examples for the design of concrete
buildings. British Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1994. 256 pp.
26 BEEBY, A.W. & NARAYANAN, R.S. Designers handbook to Eurocode 2
Part 1.1: Design of concrete structures. Thomas Telford Ltd, London,
1994. 242 pp.
27 WEBSTER, R. & Brooker, O. How to design concrete structures using
Eurocode 2: Deections. The Concrete Centre, Camberley, Draft in
preparation 2005, 6pp.
28 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of
reinforced concrete building structures to EC2. I Struct E, Draft in
preparation 2005.
29 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION BS EN 1997-1: 2004, Eurocode
7: Geotechnical design. Part 1. General rules, BSI, London
30 CONCRETE SOCIETY. Deections in concrete slabs and beams,
Technical Report 58, The Concrete Society, Camberley. 2005
31 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, PD 6687, Background paper
to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2, BSI,
London. 2006
32 CONSTRUCT, National Structural Concrete Specication for building
construction (NSCS) Third Edition, 2004, Concrete Society,
Camberley
33 CONCRETE SOCIETY, Technical Report 43 Post-tensioned concrete
oors Design Handbook, Second Edition, Concrete Society,
Camberley 2005
34 Brooker, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2:-
Getting Started. The Concrete Centre, 2005
35 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION BS EN 1991-1: 2002 Eurocode1:
Actions on structures - Part 1-1 General Actions - Densities, Self
weight, imposed loads for Buildings, BSI, 2002, including UK national
Annex to BS EN 1991-1: 2002 Actions on Structures Part 1-1, BSI,
2005
References
300
Further reading
1 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS; INSTITUTION OF CIVIL
ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of reinforced concrete building
structures. London, ISE, London, 1985. 88 pp.
2 REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Examples of the design of
reinforced concrete buildings to BS 8110 (4th edition). E&FN Spon,
London, 1992. 320 pp.
3 MOSLEY, W.H. Et Al. Reinforced concrete design to Eurocode 2 (EC2).
Macmillan, London, 1996. 426 pp.
4 THE CONCRETE CENTRE - How to design concrete structures
using Eurocode 2 . Guides including Introduction to Eurocodes,
Getting started, Slabs, Beams, Columns, Foundation, Fleet Slabs and
Deection calculations. The Concrete Centre, Camberley, 2005-2006.
See also www.eurocode2.info
5 THE CONCRETE CENTRE - Concise Eurocode 2 for the design
of concrete structures to BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 and the UK National
Annex:2005. The Concrete Centre Camberley, due 2006.
6 THE INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/CONCRETE
SOCIETY Standard Method of Detailing Structural Concrete a
manual for best practice. IStructE London 2006.
Foreword
This publication was originally produced by the Reinforced Concrete Council (RCC) as part of its
project Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2. Since their release in 2000 the
spreadsheets have proved enormously popular and have been maintained by the RCC and its
successor The Concrete Centre.
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2)
plus its UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
The requirements within these standards have necessitated the revision of all the published
spreadsheets. This user guide gives guidance on the use of all design spreadsheets to BS 8110 and
Eurocode 2 contained on the CD ROM RC Spreadsheets: v3, published by The Concrete Centre
(order ref. CCIP-008CD).

Acknowledgements
The ideas and illustrations come from many sources. The help and guidance received from many
individuals are gratefully acknowledged.
Thanks are due to members of the original projects Advisory Group for their time and effort in
helping to make the project feasible and in bringing it to fruition. The members of the Advisory
Group are listed on the inside back cover.
Special appreciation is extended to: Richard Cheng, BSc, CEng, Eur Ing, FIStructE, author of the
retaining wall and basement wall spreadsheets, Peter Noble for conversions and checking, and to
Andy Pullen for initial studies into compatibility of spreadsheet software. Also the late Sami Khan
for help with post-tensioning spreadsheets.
Published by The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
The Concrete Centre
User Guide v1 published by the British Cement Association on behalf of the Reinforced Concrete Council.
User Guide v2 published electronically by The Concrete Centre.
CCIP publications are produced by The Concrete Society on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry
Publications Forum an industry initiative to publish technical guidance in support of concrete design
and construction.
CCIP publications are available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concretebookshop.com
Tel: +44 (0)7004 607777
All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate the signicance and limitations of
its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting
from such advice or information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers should
note that The Concrete Centre publications are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in
possession of the latest version.
Cover artwork: D J Killoran - The Concrete Society.
Printed by Cromwell Press, Trowbridge, UK.
S Alexander
S Alhayderi
Dr H Al-Quarra
I Baldwin
C Barker
M Beamish
A Beasley
T Bedford
G Belton
R Bhatt
R Bickerton
P Blackmore
D Blackwood
M Brady
C Buczkowski
A Campbell
Dr P Chana
G Charlesworth
L Cheng
Mr Chichger
R Collison
A Craddock
M Morton
J Curry
J Dale
H Dikme
C P Edmondson
J Elliott
I Feltham
G Fernando
M Fernando
I Francis
A Fung
P Gardner
J Gay
P Green
A Hall
N Harris
G Hill
D W Hobbs
R Hulse
M Hutcheson
A Idrus
N Imms
P Jennings
D Kennedy
G Kennedy
R Jothiraj
Dr S Khan
A King
G King
S King
K Kus
I Lockhart
M Lord
B Lorimer
M Lovell
Dr Luker
J Lupton
M Lytrides
Prof I Macleod
F Malekpour
A McAtear
A McFarlane
F Mohammad
A Mole
M Morton
R Moss
B Munton
C OBoyle
Dr A Okorie
T ONeill
B Osafa-Kwaako
D Patel
D Penman
M Perera
B Quick
Y Raq
A Rathbone
M Rawlinson
P Reynolds
H Riley
N Russell
U P Sarki
T Schollar
A Stalker
A Starr
M Stevenson
B Stoker
B Treadwell
A Truby
R Turner
T Viney
Dr P Walker
B Watson
J Whitworth
C Wilby
S Wilde
A Wong
E Yarimer
The Advisory Group Members
Cover files.indd 2 17/07/2006 11:52:24
U
s
e
r

G
u
i
d
e

t
o

R
C

S
p
r
e
a
d
s
h
e
e
t
s
:

v
3
C

H

G
o
o
d
c
h
i
l
d

B
S
c

C
E
n
g

M
C
I
O
B

M
I
S
t
r
u
c
t
E

R

M

W
e
b
s
t
e
r

C
E
n
g

F
I
S
t
r
u
c
t
E
C
C
I
P
-
0
0
8
CI/Sfb
UDC
624.04
User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3
This user guide provides guidance on the use of
RC Spreadsheets v3 for the design of reinforced
concrete elements.
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets and user guide
follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and its
UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to
BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
For more information on the spreadsheets visit
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets
Charles Goodchild is Principal Structural Engineer for
The Concrete Centre where he promotes efcient concrete
design and construction. He was responsible for the concept,
content and management of this publication and of the
RC Spreadsheets.
Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation & Design is
principal author of the spreadsheets. He has been writing
spreadsheets since 1984 and is expert in the design of tall
concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods.
CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,
Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey, GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com
C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE
R M Webster CEng FIStructE
User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
A cement and concrete industry publication
User guide to Excel spreadsheets for design to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 (Amd. 3)
and BS EN 1992: 2004 Part 1-1 and its UK National Annex
Cover files.indd 1 17/07/2006 11:51:53

BCA - RC Spreadsheet User Guide Version 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BCA - RC Spreadsheet User Guide Version 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

U

was originally adopted as being de

You might also like